I 
 
 V 
 
 Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2015 
 
 https://archive.org/details/anatomicaldialog01gent 
 
ANATOMICAL DIALOGUES; 
 
 0 R, A 
 
 BREVIARY OF ANATOMY- 
 
 WHEREIN 
 
 ALL THE PARTS OF THE HUMAN BODY 
 
 ARE t 
 
 CONCISELY AND ACCURATELY DESCRIBED, 
 AND 
 
 THEIR USES EXPLAINED; 
 
 BY WHICH 
 
 THE YOUNG PRACTITIONER 
 
 MAY ATTAIN A RIGHT METHOD OF 
 
 TREATING DISEASES, 
 
 AS FAR AS IT DEPENDS ON ANATOMY. 
 
 CHIEFLY COMPILED 
 
 FOR THE USE OF THE YOUNG GENTLEMEN 
 
 1 N 
 
 THE NAVY AND ARMY. 
 
 BY A GENTLEMAN OF THE FACULTY. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 printed for G, Robinson, No. 15, Paternoster-Row. 
 MDCCLXXVm. 
 

 . o . <■ 
 
 «:;•»£ j 
 
 ..• j .' i: i . 
 
 
 -■-!■ :’PI ^ .;._-A.. 
 
 ' ■ M ■ 
 
 
 ■y 
 
 * r 
 
 ’■f IT ‘ Jt' .r 3 
 
 , ^ ' 
 
 
 '1 :> ■' :[ 
 ■■"'■: ;•• j i Ji’ 
 
 ■: H i:, O ’;.;; "zjiT- 
 
 ■-. '■■ ;■ it 
 
 
 . .y : : ii ' 
 
 
 :u.’: ::^. : 
 
 ";■ ' /■: Y?^'/ 
 
 *r ' , 
 
 : i fi. } ■>■:■-*; 
 
TO WILLIAM HUNTER, M. D 
 
 PHYSICIAN TO HER MAJESTY, 
 
 FELLOW OF THE ROYAL COLLEGES 
 
 OF PHYSICIANS IN LONDON AND EDINBURGH, 
 
 O F 
 
 THE ROYAL SOCIETY, 
 
 AND OF 
 
 THE SOCIETY OF ANTIQJU ARIAN S, 
 
 THE FOLLOWING' 
 
 ANATOMICAL DIALOGUES 
 
 ARE, 
 
 WITH THE HIGHEST ADMIRATION OF HIS 
 ABILITIES, 
 
 AND WITH THE GREATEST RESPECT FOR 
 HIS VIRTUES, 
 
 MOST humbly INSCRIBED, 
 
 BY HIS MOST OBEDIENT 
 AND OBLIGED PUPIL, 
 
 THE EDITOR. 
 

PREFACE 
 
 S the Public will undoubtedly expcfb 
 
 fome Reafon to be given for intruding 
 on them another Work of this Kind, (when 
 fo many learned and judicious Authors have 
 profefTedly written on the Snbje<5l) I think it 
 neceflary to inform them, “ That it is neither 
 from Vanity nor Profpedl of Gain, that tiie fol- 
 lowing Sheets were compiled, but merely to 
 render the Study of Anatomy more agreeable, 
 and to be obtained at a lefs Price than any Syf- 
 tem of Anatomy yet extant.” W as Ambition 
 the Motive, I fhould not conceal my Name; 
 and was Profit the Inducement, 1 fhould then 
 have made it more voluminous and fydemati- 
 cal : However, I hope I have omitted no effen- 
 tial Part of the Science neceffary to be known 
 by the young Praditioner, in order to attain 
 a right Method of treating Difeafes, as far as 
 it depends on Anatomy •, but how I have 
 fucceeded, 1 muft leave to the impartial and 
 judicious Reader to determine. 
 
 This Book was compiled wirh a view to fa- 
 ci'itite the Knowledge ot Anatomy to fuch 
 young Gentlemen as are intended for the Ser- 
 
 vice 
 
( vi ) 
 
 vice of the j^rmy and Navy, as well as domef- 
 tic Fradlice. 
 
 A Compendium, containing all the Difco„ 
 veries of the modern Anatomifts, it is pre- 
 fumed has long been wanted, as a Pocket- 
 Companion for the young Student, previous 
 to his Examination at Surgeon’s Hall, in 
 v/hich he may fee at one View, a concife De- 
 fcription of the Farts which compofe the 
 human Body, without diftrading his Memory 
 by the Ferulal of a Number of Bocks, which 
 often contain phyfological Explanations very 
 contradid'ory to each other. 
 
 I have thrown the v/hole into the Form of 
 Dialogue, which I flatter myfelf will not only 
 be more pleafing to the younger Part of the 
 Frofenion, (lor whom this Work is princi- 
 pally Oefigned) but m.ake a t reater ImprelTion 
 on their Mlemory — Inftrudion being rnoft im- 
 preffive when leaft incumbered. 
 
 Should this Compendium be cenfured or 
 condemned, by the lelf-iuflicient and ill-na.- 
 tured Part of the Faculty, I doubt not but 
 thofe of Learning and liberality of Sentiment, 
 who are an Eionour to the Frofefllon, will 
 overlook with Candour any trifling Defeds 
 5 which 
 
( vii ) 
 
 which may be found in it. Though this 
 Performance is not by any means intended for 
 the Ufe of the elder and more experienced Ar- 
 tifts; yet even to them, it may fupply the 
 Place of a Remembrancer, of what they were 
 before more fully informed. I am not fo vain 
 as to think it will improve their Knowledge, 
 fince nothing new can reafonably beexpedled in 
 a Work of this Kind, which is chiefly collefl- 
 ed from other Authors: But if it anfwers the 
 End defigned, of aflifting the young Student, 
 I Ihall not think my Labour and Attention in 
 compiling it, though it has coil me much 
 Trouble, ill bellowed. 
 
 To render the Book more ufeful, I have 
 added a copious Index, by which the Reader 
 may readily advert to any particular Subjed 
 he may want to be informed of, 
 
 Londorii July^ 1778; 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Dialogue I. Of Anatomy in General i 
 
 II. Of the Head and Its Parts 50 
 
 III. Of the Neck and its Parts no 
 
 IV. Of the Thorax and its Parts 132 
 
 V. Of the Abdomen and its Parts 177 
 
 VI. Of the Aim and its Parts 242 
 
 VII. Of the Leg and its Parts 285 
 
 VIII. Of the Parts of Genera- 
 tion in both Sexes 325 
 
 IX. Of the Embryo, and the 
 
 Foetus in Utero 346 
 
 X. Of the Eye 354 
 
 363 
 
 XL Of the Ear 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 D I A L O CUES. 
 
 d'ialogue I. 
 
 flruilure and ufes ; in which every ph.yficiaii 
 and furgeon ought to be well lldlled, exactly 
 to know, and fully to underftand every parr, 
 and Its proper ufe. 
 
 Q. What is the ufe of anatomy ? 
 
 A. It gives you the perfedt knowledge of 
 the caufe and cure of difeafes ; v/ithout 
 which, neither the phyfician nor the furgeon 
 can do juftice in their profelTions, but would 
 rather be detrimental, than beneficial to man- 
 kind. 
 
 How is the body diftinguiflied by ana- 
 tomies ? 
 
 Of Anatomy in general. 
 
 B 
 
 A. Into 
 
2 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. Into venters and limbs. The venters 
 are the more remarkable cavities of the body, 
 in which fome principal part or bov/el is con- 
 tained, viz. the belly, breafb, and head : the 
 limbs are, the arms and legs •, the cavity of 
 the breafb is called thorax, and that of the 
 belly, abdomen ; their fub-contained parts are 
 named as follows, viz, the hollow on the mid- 
 dle of the thorax, under the breafbs, is called 
 fcrobiculus cordis-, the middle of the abdo- 
 men, for about three fingers breadth above 
 and below the navel, is called regio umbilica- 
 lis ; the middle part above this, epigafbrium ; 
 under the cartilages of the lower ribs, hypo- 
 chondrium -, and from below the regio umbi- 
 licalis to the ofTa ilia and offa pubis, hypogaf- 
 trium. 
 
 What are the external parts, and com- 
 mon integuments ? 
 
 A. Thefe are, the cuticula, epidermis, or 
 fcarf-fkin ; the corpus reticulare, vel reticulum 
 mucofumi the cutis, or true fkinj the glan- 
 dule fubacee, vel miliares -, the membrana 
 adipofa; and the pinguedo, or fat. 
 
 What is the cuticula, epidermis, or 
 fcarf-fi<in ? 
 
 A. It is a very fine, thin, fmooth, infenfible 
 membrane, clofely lying upon the cutis, or 
 true fkin, of which it feems a part, and is what 
 rifes into a bladder in burns, or when a blifier 
 is applied: the colour of it in Europeans is 
 white, but black in many other nations ; hav- 
 
 5 
 
ing no blood-veffels or nerves, it is void of 
 fenfation. 
 
 Q: What is the ufe of the cuticle ? 
 
 A. To defend the true fkin from injury, 
 drynefs, and pain •, and to afiift, and, at the 
 fame time, to moderate the fenfe of feeling. 
 This membrane appears fcaly and porous 
 (through a good microfcope) •, and Levven- 
 hoeck and others fay, every fcale has about 
 500 pores ; fo that a grain of fand (according 
 to this account) vv^ill cover 125,000 pores 
 through which we perlpire. 
 
 What is the corpus reticulate, vel reti- 
 culum mucolum ? 
 
 A. A fine net-like membrane, lying imme- 
 diately under the cuticle, and adhering firmly 
 to it : from its colour, and the colour of the 
 mucus it -contains, the Ikin appears to be either 
 black or white : in Europeans, white j in Afri- 
 cans, black ; in the tawny, yellowifh. 
 
 What are the ufes of the corpus reticu- 
 late ? 
 
 A. To preferve the ftrufture of the other 
 parts of the integuments, to give pafiage to 
 the hairs, papillte, and excretory duds, and re- 
 tain them in their places; and it has fome 
 fhare in preferving the foftnefs of the papilla?, 
 which renders them fit for the fenfe of feelino:. 
 
 What is the cutis, or true fkin? 
 
 A. The true fl<in is a very compad, thick, 
 flrong, and fenfible membrane covering the 
 whole body, and fo plentifully fupplied with 
 nerves for the fenfe of touching, that the very 
 B 2 finelt 
 
4 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 fineft pointed inftrument can prick no where, 
 without touching fome of them. Immediately 
 above this membrane, is the corpus reticulare 
 and cuticula; and under it, the membrana 
 adipofa, and fat. Its thicknefs is very different 
 in feveral parts of the body. It is compofed of 
 a multitude of tendinous fibres, a vaft number 
 of blood- veffcls and nerves, which conftitute 
 rhe pyramidal papillee that raife themfelves 
 through the pores of the corpus reticulare, and 
 confcitute tlie organs of feeling. The true 
 fkin is white in all mankind. Its appearing 
 white, black, or tawny (according to the cli- 
 mate) is owing to the colour of the cuticula 
 and corpus reticulare, and not to the colour 
 of the fkin, which is always white in all na- 
 tions, T he red colour of the lips is owing to 
 the blood'Veffels in the mufcular flefh •, and 
 that of the cheeks in white people, to the blood 
 in the minute veffels of the fkin. 
 
 What are the ufes of the fkin ? 
 
 A. To defend the parts underneath from 
 external accidents, to be the organ of feeling, 
 to wrap the parts more firmly together, and 
 to be an univerfal emundlory to the body, 
 cleanfing the blood of its redundancies by 
 fweat and perfpiration, which, at the fame time, 
 prevents its flaccidity or drynefs, 
 
 O- What are the glandulse febaces ? 
 aT The glandulae febaceas, vel miliares, are 
 fmall bodied like millet-feeds, feated immedi- 
 ately under the fl<in in the axillas; and are 
 faid to have been found under all other parts 
 
 of 
 
DIALOGUES. 5 
 
 of the fkin when looked for with good mi- 
 crofcopes. 
 
 What are the ufes of the glandulse fe- 
 baces, vel miliares ? 
 
 A. Thefe glands are fuppofed to fcparate 
 fweat; v/hich fluid was thought to be only the 
 materia perfpirabilis, flowing in a greater quan- 
 tity, and condenfed, till Sandorius aflTured us 
 that it is not fo j and that more of the mate- 
 ria perfpirabilis is feparated in equal times, 
 than of fweat ; of the former he fays, there are 
 ufually fifty-two ounces a-day feparated (in 
 Italy, where his experiments were made), but 
 of the latter, not near fo much in the mofl; 
 profufe fweats. But whoever reads Mr, Hales’s 
 experiments, will find what Sandorius account- 
 ed for by an imaginary, infenfible perfpiration, 
 different from that which in the greatell degree 
 produces fweat, is really made by the lungs in 
 refpiration, in ten times a greater quantity 
 than all the ordinary perfpiration through the 
 cutis, and feems to be but the fame kind of 
 fluid difeharged both ways; for whenever it is 
 interrupted through the fkin in cold weather, 
 then the lungs are overcharged, and a cough 
 is produced, 
 
 Q. What is the membrana adipofa ? 
 
 A. All that membrane immediately under 
 the fkin, containing the fat, in numerous cells, 
 by fome named cellulte, and the fubflance 
 made up of them, termed the cellular fub- 
 Ifance ; this membrane adheres very clofely to 
 the fltin, and runs between the mulcles in ge- 
 B 2 neral, 
 
6 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 neral, and between their feveral fibres in par- 
 ticular-, and communicates with the membrane 
 which lines tlie infide of the thorax and abdo- 
 men ; and all its cells communicate through- 
 out the whole body, fo that from any one 
 part the whole may be filled with air, as is 
 evident in beafts, by the butcher’s blowing up 
 their meat when newly killed ; and in an em- 
 phyl'ema of the human body, fometimes occa-? 
 iiontd by a broken rib, &c. And in thefe 
 cells the water is contained in an anafarca, 
 which, from its weight, firfi; fills the depend- 
 ing parts; and wf.en thefe cells are very full, 
 the w'ater frequently pafles from them into the 
 abdomen, and, after tapping, though the limbs 
 were ever fo full, they will almoft empty rhem- 
 felves in one night’s time. This membrane is 
 alfo the ufual leat of impofthumations, car- 
 buncles, and boils,- 
 
 Q. What are the ufes of the membrana 
 adipola ? 
 
 A. It contributes to keep the inner parts 
 warm and pliant; and by filling the interllices 
 of the mufcles, renders the furface of the body 
 fmooth. 
 
 What is the pinguedo, or fat ? 
 
 A. It is an oleaginous or butyraceous mat- 
 ter fecreted from the blood (in the little arte- 
 ries or the adipofe membrane) and filling up 
 the cavity of the cells of the membrana adi- 
 pofa : and that this oleaginous matter has a 
 circulatory motion, or an egrefs into the veins, 
 is very evident, from the ludden confumption 
 
 of 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 7 
 
 of it in many difeafes, and from its vail dimi- 
 nution by exercife and labour. 
 
 Q. What are the ui'es of the fat ? 
 
 A. To ferve as a kind of covering to the 
 body, in order to defend it from cold, and 
 other injuries; to defend the more tender and 
 fenfible parts from being too ftrongly vellicated 
 by the falts; to preferve, in good order, the 
 flexion of the mufcles and cutis, and of the 
 other parts between, and about which it is 
 placed ; to facilitate the motions of fome parts, 
 as the eyes, ja'ws, &c. to fill up the interfti- 
 cial fpaces, and by that means to add to the 
 beauty of the parts, as is evident in the face, 
 neck, &c. and to facilitate the diftenfion of 
 the parts, the fpaces between v/hich it thus 
 fills up. There is a manifeft ufe of the fat 
 about the vagina, anus, offa ifchia, and pu- 
 denda; in the exclufion of the foetus, and the 
 harder ex'crements; and in the foies of the feet, 
 the nates, and other the like parts, in all 
 which the fat is very copioufly difpofed, and 
 ferves in the place of a culhion for the mufcu- 
 lar flefh to reft on, and to prevent the painful 
 preffure and attrition of the parts : and finally, 
 there is great reafon to fuppofe, that when the 
 body does not receive nourifliment in the ufual 
 way, the regrefs of the fat into the veins fup- 
 plies that defedf. 
 
 What are the conftituent parts of the 
 
 body } 
 
 A. The body confifts of bones, cartilages, 
 ligaments, mufcles, tendons, arteries, veins, 
 B 4 nerves, 
 
8 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 nerves, lymphaedu6ls, glands, excretory veflels, 
 membranes, fibres, hair and nails, befides the 
 integuments before mentioned. 
 
 What are the bones? 
 
 A, The bones are hard, brittle, infenfible parts 
 (but covered both on their infide and outfide 
 with an exquifitely fenfible, nervous, vafcular 
 membrane, called periofteum, except on the 
 flcull, where it is called pericranium) containing 
 more or Ids marrow : and on the furface of the 
 bones, at the ends, are two kinds of promi- 
 nences •, the one termed apophyfis, or proceffus, 
 and the other epiphyfis, or appendage. Be* 
 Tides the common large cavity, moll bones 
 have fuperficial cavities or Tnufes, wdth fur- 
 rows and holes through which the nutritious 
 and medullary vdfels enter (as all the memt 
 branes of the bones, both withiil and without, 
 are fupplied with blood-veflels and nerves, as 
 is the marrow). The moll confiderable of the 
 nutritious veflels enter at the ends of the bones, 
 viz. the artery at one end, and the veins at 
 the other. If the bones had no cavities, they 
 would, if they were llrait, fuftain the fame 
 weight •, but being made hollow, their ftrength 
 to lefill breaking tranfverfely is increafed in 
 jmoportion to their diameters, without in- 
 creafing their weight, which is very evident 
 in the wings and quills of birds: but the bones 
 in the legs of all animals are more folid, being 
 formed to fupport weight. 
 
 Cb Wliat is the apophyfis of a bone, and 
 its ule ? 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 9 
 
 A. The apophyfis is a continued part, or 
 excrelcence of the bone (as a branch Is of a 
 tree) jutting out from it, to make the better 
 articulations, and for the more commodious 
 infertion of the mufcles. 
 
 What is the epiphyfis of a bone, and 
 its life ? 
 
 A. The epiphyfis is an additional bone 
 growing to another by mere contiguity, being 
 generally more foft and porous than the other, 
 though it moftly degenerates into an apophyfis 
 in adults, and therefore of the fame ule. 
 
 What is the medulla, or marrow, con- 
 tained in the bones? 
 
 A. It confifts (befides the blood- velTels) of 
 an invefting membrane, in which are included 
 membranaceous lobules and bags that fill up 
 the cells of the bones ; and in fhefe bags are 
 veficulte, or glandulous bladders, very like 
 the veficular fubftance of the lungs. The large 
 middle cavity of all cylindrical bones, contains 
 an oily marrow but the great number of lelTer 
 cells, towards their extremities, contain a 
 bloody marrow, or rather a kind of red, fatty, 
 medullary juice; which laft is found in all 
 fpongy heads and cells of bones. The mar- 
 row in young bones is more red and bloody 
 than in old ones, as the oily marrow would 
 otherwife render their fibres too foft. The 
 medullary vefTels, found running here and 
 there, through their proper canals, penetrate 
 into the inner cavity of the bones, and fecrete 
 
 the 
 
to ANATOMICAL 
 
 the medullary part from the blood, the blood 
 being afterwards returned by the veins ; the 
 nerves are diftributed to the fame places, for 
 the fake of fenfe and motion : thefe veffels en- 
 ter the bones obliquely, that they may not 
 weaken them by dividing too many fibres in 
 the fame place. 
 
 Q. What is the ufe of the marrow ? 
 
 A. The marrow being more or lefs difiri- 
 buted all over the bones, and tranfuding 
 through their plates and fibres, makes them 
 tougher and lefs brittle; but does not nourifli 
 them, as was originally believed. 
 
 What is the periofteum ? 
 
 A. An exquifite, fenfible, nervous, vafcular 
 membrane, which lines and covers all the bones 
 in the body, internally and externally, ex- 
 cept a part of the teeth, and the places in 
 bones where the mufcles arc inferted. Thepe- 
 riofteum on the outfide of the bones, is derived 
 from the membranes of the mufcles that lie 
 upon it ; that on the infide, from the dura ma- 
 ter. The inner fuperficies of the periofteum 
 ftick as clofe to the bone, as if it were glued 
 to it; and befides, the periofteum has little 
 fibrillae or threads continued from it, that en- 
 ter into the fubftance of the bone, which give 
 them, probably, fome internal fenfe. The pe- 
 riofteum conftitutes the firft rudiments of the 
 bones in a foetus in utero. It is every where 
 full of fmall blood-veftels, which enter the 
 bones for their nourifhment; but the internal 
 fubftance of the larger bones is nourilhed by 
 
dialogues. II 
 
 die vefiels which enter obliquely through their 
 middles. The periofteum is of different thick- 
 nefs in different parts •, but, in general, the in^ 
 ternal is vaflly thinner than the external ; and 
 though fome have fuppofed it to arife from the 
 dura mater, yet it is evidently formed, at the 
 fame time, with the dura mater in the foetus. 
 
 What are the ufes of the periofteum ? 
 
 A. It gives fenfibility to the bones, which 
 otherwife might be fawed, cut, or burnt, with- 
 out pain, as their whole tenfibility is owing to 
 this membrane ; and it alfo gives the determi- 
 nation and figure to bones ; as is evident fi-om 
 this, that when it is wounded, exofeofes, to- 
 phi, and caries, arife in the part : it is iikev/ife 
 the organ of fecretion for the bony matter, ss 
 the membrana adipofa is far the fat: atid it 
 ferves alfo for the mufcles to Aide eafy upon, 
 and to hinder them from being lacerated by 
 the roughnefs and hardnefs of the bones. 
 
 What is the fubftance of the bones? 
 
 A. The fubftance of the bones confifts of 
 lamellte or plates, lying one upon the other 
 joined together by tranfverfe fibres, and, as it 
 were, archwife : thefe fibres, when firft formed 
 are very foft, but grow by degrees to the hard- 
 nefs of a cartilage, and afterwards to that of a 
 perfed bone. But the change is neither made 
 in a very fhort time, nor begun in all the parts 
 of the fame bone at once. 
 
 What are the ufes of the bones ? 
 
 A. They give ftrength and fhape to the 
 whole body, fuftain all its organs, and keep 
 
 the 
 
'ii ANATOMICAL 
 
 the machine in proper order to perform its va- 
 rious fun( 51 :ions ; therefore the exa£t know- 
 ledge of the bones is the foundation of all ana- 
 tomy. The bones are connedled together va- 
 rious ways, according to the various purpofes 
 they are to ferve ; fome being intended for 
 motion, others for reft, and the fupport of the 
 incumbent parts only. 
 
 Q. How many bones are there in the hu- 
 man body ? 
 
 A. Two hundred and forty-feven (exclufive 
 of the fefamoidal bones, whofe number is un- 
 certain) j but the number is various in various 
 fubjedsj fome fay 300, or 307 ; others, 318, 
 but late writers fix it at moft to 250, and 
 commonly but 247, as follows. 
 
 A Table 
 
The bones of the trunk The bones of the head are 
 
 are , — — A> 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 *3 
 
 A Table of OSTEOLOGY. 
 
 The bones of the crani- 
 um, or fkull 
 
 The bones of the fauces 
 and face 
 
 " Os Parletalia 
 Aithmoides 
 Frontis 
 Occipitis 
 Sphenoides 
 Temporum 
 'Os Malarum 
 Maxiliaria 
 Nafi 
 Plana 
 Palati 
 Vomer 
 Ungues 
 
 The bone of the lower i ^ t r • 
 
 • I Os Maxilla Inferior 
 
 jaw I 
 
 f Dent. Canini 
 
 Dentes, the teeth < Incifores 
 
 C Molares 
 
 The bones of the os hy- f • , 
 
 oides of the tongue } Hyoides 
 r- Os Incus 
 
 The bones of the interna! ) Malleus 
 
 N® 
 
 2 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 1 
 t 
 
 2 
 2 
 Z 
 2 
 Z 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 ear 
 
 I 
 
 Orbiculare 
 
 Stapes 
 
 4 
 8 
 
 20 
 
 5 
 2 
 Z 
 z 
 2 
 
 67 
 
 The fpine 
 ■{ The thorax 
 I The pubes 
 
 L 
 
 f Neck 
 Vertebise < Back 
 t Loins 
 
 Os Sicruin and Coccyx 
 Sternum 
 Ribs 
 
 Os IHium 
 Ifchium I 
 Pubis I 
 
 O/Ta 
 
 fnominata 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 I 
 
 The 
 
The bones of the lower extremities. The b'tnes of the upper extremities. 
 
 14 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 TABLE continued. 
 
 
 r The Ihoulder 
 j The arm 
 The fore arm 
 
 The hand 
 
 C Clavicula 
 \ Scapula 
 Os Humeri 
 ( Uina 
 j Radius, 
 
 Os Naviculare 
 f Lunare 
 
 I Cuneiforms 
 Magnum 
 
 Carpus*^ Orbiculare 
 Trapezium 
 Trapezoides 
 Unciforme 
 Metacarpus 
 
 I 
 
 Phalange 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 30 
 
 "he thigh — Os Femoris 
 Os Patella 
 Tibia 
 Fibula 
 
 ‘ Os Calcis 
 
 "he leg 
 
 r 
 
 The foot 
 
 ^ Tarfus 
 
 I Metatarfus 
 (^Phalanges 
 
 Aftragalus 
 
 Cuboides 
 
 Cuneiformia 
 
 Naviculare 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 10 
 
 28 
 
 In all 247 
 
 What 
 
 ON 
 
dialogues. 
 
 15 
 
 CK What are cartilages ? 
 
 A. Cartilages approach much to the nature 
 of bones, but are Imooth, lubricous, flexible, 
 and elaftic. There is no fenfible cavity, cell, 
 or pore, in any part of the fubftance of thofe 
 v/hich cover the ends of bones, except very 
 fmall pafiages for the blood-vefiels, &c. They 
 are whitifh, or pearl-coloured ; and with age, 
 fometimes grow fo hard, as to become perfect 
 bone. 
 
 What are the ufes of the cartilages ? 
 
 A. Their ufe is to cover the ends of the 
 bones that have motion, to prevent them from 
 being damaged by a continual fri<5tion ; and 
 to contribute, in a great meafure, to the for- 
 mation of feveral parts, as the larynx, nofe, 
 ears, &c. 
 
 Q. Vf hat are ligaments ? 
 
 A. Ligaments are white, fibrous, clofe, 
 compafi; fubftances, more flexible than carti- 
 lages, not eafily ruptured or corn, and do not 
 yield, or at leaft but very little, when pulled. 
 They form either narrov/ cords, broad bands, 
 or thin webs. In all the moveable joints there 
 are capfular ligaments ; fo called, from a very 
 fluid, mucilaginous liquor (termed fynovia) 
 being contained in capfuls, or bags-, which li- 
 quor continually moiflens the articulations. It 
 is generally agreed, that the ligaments are in- 
 fenfible-, but experience (hews, that they are 
 capable of very acute pains, nothing being 
 more painful than colkflions of matter v/ithin 
 
 thefe 
 
i6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 thefe parts, or fliarp medicines applied to them 
 when laid bare. 
 
 What are the ufes of the ligaments ? 
 
 A. Their ufe is either to bind down the ten- 
 dons, or to tie together fuch bones as have mo- 
 tion, to prevent them from parting from each 
 other, as happens in luxations. 
 
 What are mufcles ? 
 
 A. Mufcles are diftinft portions of flefh, 
 foft and red ; compounded of fibres, tendons, 
 nerves, veins, and arteries, all enclofed in a 
 peculiar membrane : every mufcle has one or 
 more tendons at its beginning and end, though 
 fometimes fo very fmall, as not to be feen with- 
 out a microfeope. Where the nerve is inferred, 
 is the head or beginning of the mufcle ; the 
 middle, or flefhy part, is its belly ; and where 
 the tendons are greatefl, and moil in number, 
 is called the tail or end ; and if the end be 
 broad and membranous, it is called aponeu- 
 rofis ; but in many of the mufcles both the ex- 
 tremities are moveable : in thofe that part, 
 which of the two is leaf: moveable, is generally 
 called the origin, or head •, though in the fer- 
 rati antici, and fome of the mufcles of the ab- 
 domen, it is the reverfe. All the mufcles are 
 either redtilinear or penniform, and formed for 
 flexion or extenfion, and fometimes both To 
 every flexor is oppofed an extenfor ; to every 
 addudlor, an abdudtor-, to every elevator, a 
 depreflbr, excepting only in the fphindlers, 
 cremafters, and oefophagus. Some mufcles 
 are moltly carnous, as all the fphindlers and 
 
 mufcles 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 17 
 
 mufcles of the tongue; others, moftly ner- 
 vous and membranous, as the tafcia lata tibia 
 adducens, quadratus vel diftortor oris ; by 
 Galen named platyfma myoides, being firft 
 contradled involuntarily in the fpafmus cyni- 
 ciis. 
 
 What are the ufes of the mufcles? 
 
 A. To promote voluntary motion, as by 
 the contrablion of the mufcles the feveral mo- 
 tions of the body are performed. Thus, the 
 foul effebts motion in the mufcle at pleafure, 
 by tranfmitting from the brain by the nerves, 
 animal fpirits, by whofe copious influx, the 
 mufcles to be moved are in an inftant inflated, 
 and fo contraded, that they pull and move 
 the member to which the tail is faftened : to 
 this end, nature hath inferred a nerve or more 
 into each mufcle ; fo that flefli and nerves are 
 the principal conflituents of a mufcle ; and 
 indeed, fome mufcles feem to have their bodies 
 made up of nothing elfe than an intertexture 
 of nervous and flefhy fibres •, as the mufcles of 
 the forehead, temples, bladder, anus, and all 
 fphinders. The motions of the far greater 
 part of the mufcles are voluntary, or depend- 
 ent on our will ; thole of a few others invo- 
 luntary : thofe which perform the voluntary 
 motions, receive nerves from the brain or Ipi- 
 nal marrow ; thole which perform their mo- 
 tions involuntarily, have their nerves from the 
 cerebellum ; and thofe whofe motion is partly 
 voluntary, and partly involuntary, have theirs 
 in part from the brain, and in part from the 
 C , cere- 
 
 V 
 
i8 ANATOMICAL 
 
 cerebellum. And as a mufcle can no longer 
 aft when its nerve is either cut al'under, or tied 
 up, fo nearly the fame ablolute dependance it 
 has on its artery ; for oh cutting, or tying up 
 the artery, the mufcle in the fame manner, 
 feme hours after, lofcs its whole power of ac- 
 tion, as if the nerve had been cut or tied up. 
 
 What are tendons ? 
 
 A Tendons are white, firm, tenacious parts, 
 compoled of the fame fibres with the mufcles 
 (which fee). When the fibres of a tendon ex- 
 pand themfelves into a membrane, it is called 
 aponeurofis. 
 
 What are the ufes of tendons.^ 
 
 A. The lame as that of the mufcles. 
 
 Q. What are arteries ? 
 
 A. Arteries are conical tubes, which arife 
 from the ventricles of the heart ; and thence 
 dividing into branches, are diftributed to all 
 parts or the body. They are compofed of 
 three membranes, or coats. The external and 
 internal are membranous, but the middle coat 
 is rather mufcular •, confifting of circular or 
 fpiral fibres, which being very elaftic, contraft 
 themfelves with fome force, when the power 
 ceafes by which they have been llretched out. 
 They have two reciprocal motions, or pulfa- 
 tions, like the pulfes of the heart ; being a 
 fyftole and a diaftole, keeping oppofite times ; 
 the fyftole of the one, anfwering to the diaftole 
 of the other. 
 
 Q. What is the ufe of the arteries ? 
 
 A. To 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 19 
 
 A. To convey the blood from the heart to 
 all parts of the body. 
 
 What are the principal arteries of the 
 human body ? 
 
 A. The aorta vel arteria magna, and the 
 arteria pulmonalis : all the other arteries of 
 the body, though diftinguifhed by particular 
 names, are only branches of thefe two. 
 
 What is the aorta, and how diftributed.^ 
 
 A. The aorta vel arteria magna is a large 
 artery which comes out from the left ventricle 
 of the heart in a fingle trunk, above its valves, 
 called fernilunares vel figmoides ; from this 
 all the otncr arteries proceed, and by which 
 the whole mafs of blood is conveyed to all 
 parts of the body. T he aorta is by anatomifts 
 generally divided into the aorta afcendens and 
 aorta defcendens, though both are but one and 
 the fame trunk. It is termed afcendens, from 
 where it leaves the heart to the extremity of 
 the great curvature, or arch. The defcendens 
 is that part of the trunk which, after the arch- 
 like infiedtion defcends through th<“ thorax and 
 abdomen, down to the^os facrum; and is ufu- 
 ally larger in women than in men. 
 
 How is the aorta afcendens diftributed ? 
 
 A. The aorta, before it perforates the pe- 
 ricardium, affords to the heart itfelf the arte- 
 rite coronarias ; and then paffmg the pericar- 
 dium, it is termed aorta afcendens; when, after 
 afcending two or three inches upwards, its 
 trunk is bent in manner of an arch, from 
 which arifes three afcending branches that form 
 C 2 the 
 
20 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the carotid and fubclavian arteries. The right 
 carotid and rubclavian proceed fiidt in one 
 trunk, but the left carotid and iubclavian irn- 
 iriediately fingle-, the left carotid forming the 
 middle branch. From the two fubclavian 
 branches (while yet within the breaft) near the 
 uppermon: rib, proceeds, i. arteria intercofta- 
 lis fuperior, proper to the four upper ribs ; 2. 
 arteria mammaria, proper to the breads*, 3. 
 cervicalis, proper to the mufcles of the neck 
 and head, and by communication, partly to 
 the brain •, 4. carotis, the external, proper to 
 the larynx, tongue, neck, head, and brain •, 
 the internal, chiefly to the brain. When the 
 iubclavian branches have left the cavity of the 
 thorax, they are termed axillares, which are 
 didributed to the outer parts of the bread and 
 arms by thoracica fuperior & inferior; 5. fca- 
 pularis ; 6. humeralis ; then they approach the 
 arm, where they lie under the branches of the 
 axillary vein, and pafs to all parts of the arm, 
 bearing the fame names with the veins that ac- 
 company them. 
 
 Q. How is the aorta defcendeiis didri- 
 buted ? 
 
 A. The aorta being refleffed under the left 
 lobe of the lungs, it commences aorta defeen- 
 dens ; which name it keeps through the thorax 
 and abdomen, where it paflfes on the left fide 
 of the fpine, till its divifion into iliac arteries, 
 between the third and fourth vertebrae of the 
 loins. This defeendent trunk, which is the 
 greated, being yet within the capacity of the 
 
 thorax, 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 2 I 
 
 thorax, fends, i. intercoftalis inferior, to the 
 eight lower ribs-, 2. bronchiales, to the lungs j 
 3. phrenic^, to the diaphragm j 4. c^eliaca, 
 whofe branches are bellowed upon the liver, 
 pancreas, fpleen, ftomach, omentum, and 
 duodenum ; which are named from the parts 
 they are bellowed on, except two upon the 
 llomach, which are called coronaria ventriculi, 
 fuperior et inferior; and one upon the duode- 
 num, named intellinalis ; 5. mefenterica fupe- 
 rior, whofe branches are bellowed upon all the 
 inteilinum jejunum, and ileum, part of the 
 colon, and fometimes one branch upon the li- 
 ver; 6. emmlgentes, to the kidnies; 7. fper- 
 maticte, to the peritonaeum, ureters, tellicles, 
 and epidydimes ; 8. lumbares, to the loins; 
 9. mefenterica inferior, to the lower part of 
 the colon, and the reftum; 10. mufcula fupe- 
 rior, to the mufcles of the belly. As foon as 
 the aorta divides upon the loins, it fends off 
 an artery into the pelvis, upon the os facrum, 
 called arteria facra; and the branches the aorta 
 divides into, are called iliacje, which, in about 
 tv/o inches fpace, divide into external and in- 
 ternal. The i\hc 3 £ internee, fend, i . arteria 
 inferior, to the mufcles ; 2. umbilicalis, which 
 are collapfed in adult bodies, except at their 
 beginnings, which are kept open for the colla- 
 teral branches on each fide, one to the blad- 
 der, and one to the penis or uterus ; 3. hypo- 
 gallrica ; the reft of the branches of the inter- 
 nal iliac are beftowed upon the buttocks, and 
 upper parts of the thighs. The iliacce exter- 
 C 3 nte 
 
22 ANATOMICAL 
 
 DJE run over the oITa pubis into the thighs, 
 fending off, i . epigaftricse, to the fore part of 
 the integuments of the abdomen under the 
 refli mufcles into ;he pelvis, and alfo through 
 the foramina of the ofla innominata, to the 
 mulcles of thole parrs ; 2, inguinalis, to parts 
 of the groin ; 3. cruralis, to the thigh ; 4. 
 poplitea, to the ham ; 5. tibialis antica medi- 
 ca, et poftica, which fupply the leg, foot, and 
 toes. Thus you have a e’efeription of all the 
 large and fmall capital branches of the aorta, 
 which are for the mofb part difpofed in pairs, 
 and are uniform in moft bodies ; but the lefler 
 branches are diftributed, like the branches of 
 trees, in fo different a manner in one body 
 from another, that it is highly probable no 
 two bodies are exadlly alike, nor the two fides 
 in any one body. 
 
 CX How is the arteria pulmonaris diftri- 
 buted ? 
 
 A. Only through the lungs, but with a vaft 
 number of ramifications. It arifes from the 
 right ventricle of the heart, and loon divides 
 into two branches, one to each lobe of the 
 lungs ^ then they are fubdivided into fmaller 
 and fmaller branches, until they are diftributed 
 through every part of the lungs. The extreme 
 branches, both of the arteries and veins, have 
 very numerous communications, like thole in 
 the ftamina of the leaves of plants ; by which 
 communications, the blood that is obftrudfed 
 in any particular veflel, may pafs off by other 
 veflels that are not obftrufted, &rc. and as 
 
 many 
 
DIALOGUES 
 
 23 
 
 many of the lefler veflels are more expofed to 
 preflure than any of the large ones, thofe com- 
 munications in the lefler vefiels are therefore 
 made more numerous. By fuch communica- 
 tions, the blood circulates in a limb that has 
 had part amputated, and the fluids contained 
 in a large inflammation, fuppurates into one 
 cavity. It is computed, that each ventricle of 
 the heart holds five ounces of blood (and they 
 are filled and emptied every fyflole and di- 
 aftole) and that there are commonly eighty pulfes 
 in a minute: if fo, there then fiovvs twenty- 
 five pounds of blood through each ventricle of 
 the heart in a minute. Ur. Keil has fliewn, 
 that the fum of all the fluids in a man exceed 
 the fum of all the folids and yet the quantity 
 of blood which all the vifible arteries of a man 
 will contain, is lefs than four pounds •, and if 
 we may fuppofe all the vifible veins, including 
 the vena ports, hold four times as much, 
 the whole, then, that the vifible veflels con- 
 tain, is not twenty pounds •, but the whole 
 that they do contain, is but very little more 
 than the veins can contain, feeing die arteries 
 are always found almofl: empty in dead bodies. 
 How much the invifible arteries and veins 
 contain, however (I mean thofe which contain 
 fuch a compound fluid as is found in the larger 
 velTels) there is no way to judge, unlefs we 
 knew what proportion thefe veffels bear to 
 thofe that carry the nutritious juices and ferum 
 (if there are fuch) without the globuli of the 
 blood. It is probable, that in all animals the 
 C 4 velocity 
 
24 ANATOMICAL 
 
 velocity of the blood, as well as the neceffity 
 of food, is, carteris paribus, in proportion to 
 their quantity of action : if fo, it appears how 
 thofe animals which ufe no exercife, and whofc 
 blood moves extremely flow in the winter, can 
 fubfifl: without any frefh fupply of food ; while 
 others that ufe a little more exercife, require a 
 little more food ; and thofe who ufe equal ex- 
 ercife winter and fummer, require equal quan- 
 tities of food at all times ; the end of eating 
 and drinking being to repair, what exercife 
 and the motion of the blood have dellroyed, 
 or made ufelefs : and is not the lefs velocity 
 of the blood in feme animals than in others, 
 the reafon why wounds and bruifes in thofe 
 animals do not fo ioon deftroy life, as they do 
 in animals whofe blood moves fwifter? 
 
 What occafions the pulfe? 
 
 A When the left ventricle of the heart 
 contradts, and throws its blood into the aorta, 
 or great artery, the blood in the artery is not 
 only thruft forward tovv'ards the extremities, 
 but the channel of the artery is likewife di- 
 lated ; becauie fluids, when they are prefled, 
 prefs again to all Tides, and their prelTure is 
 always perpendicular to the fide of the con- 
 taining veflels : but the coats of the artery by 
 any fmall impetus may be diftended j there- 
 fore upon the contradlion of the heart, the 
 blood from the left ventricle will not only 
 prefs the blood in the artery forwards, but 
 both together will diftend the fides of the ar- 
 tery. When the impetus of the blood againfl: 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 25 
 
 the Tides of the artery ceafes, that is, when 
 the left ventricle ceafes to contrafl, the fpiral 
 fibres of the artery, by their natural elafiicity, 
 return again to their former ftate, and con- 
 trad the channel of the artery till it is again 
 dilated by the fyftole of the heart. This diaf- 
 tole of the artery is its pulfe, and the time the 
 fpiral fibres are returning to their natural ftate, 
 is the diftance between two pulfes. The pulfe 
 is in all the arteries of the body at the fame 
 time ; for whilft the blood is thruft out of the 
 heart into the artery, the artery being full, the 
 blood muft move in all the arteries at the 
 fame time : and becaufe the arteries are coni- 
 cal, and the blood moves from the bafis of 
 the cone to the apex, therefore the blood muft 
 ftrike againft the Tides of the veffels, and con- 
 fequently every part of the artery muft be di- 
 lated at the fame time that the blood is thrown 
 out of the left ventricle of the heart ; and as 
 foon as the elafticity of the fpiral fibres can 
 overcome the impetus of the blood, the arte- 
 ries are again contracted. Thus thele are two 
 caufes, which operate alternately, and keep 
 the blood in a continual motion, viz. the heart, 
 and fibres of the arteries •, but becaufe the one 
 is ftronger than the other, therefore, though 
 the blood runs continually, yet when the ar- 
 tery is opened, it is feen to move per laltum. 
 
 What are veins ? 
 
 A. Veins are tubes or veffels v/hich carry 
 the blood from all parts of the body to the 
 heart. They are compofed principally of a 
 
 membra- 
 
26 ANATOMICAL 
 
 membranous, a vafcular, and a mufcular tu- 
 nic, the fame with thofe of the arteries, only 
 the mufcular coat is much thinner-, as thin in 
 all the veins as it is in the capillary arteries ; 
 the preffure of the blood againlb the fides of 
 the veins being lefs than that againft the Tides 
 of the arteries, d he veins are only a continu- 
 ation of the extreme capillary arteries, refledl;- 
 ed back again towards the heart, which, unit- 
 ing their channels as they approach it, at laft 
 form three large primary veins, viz. the vena 
 cava, vena portae, and the vena pulmonaris. 
 In the veins there is no pulfe, becaufe the 
 blood is thrown into them with a continued 
 ftream, and becaufe it moves from a narrow 
 channel to a wider. The capillary veins unite 
 with one another, as I have faid of the capil- 
 lary arteries. The veins accompany the arte- 
 ries in almofi; every part of the body, and 
 have the fame names in the feveral parts with 
 the arteries which they accompany. The veins 
 of the limbs are more than double the number 
 of the arteries, there being one on each fide 
 each artery, even to the fmalleft branches that 
 we can trace, befides the veins which lie im- 
 mediately under the fl<in. The external veins 
 have frequent communications with the inter- 
 nal, and are always fulleft when we ufe the 
 moft exercife j becaufe the blood being ex- 
 panded by the heat which exercife produces, 
 it requires the veffels to be diftended ; and the 
 inner velTels being comprefled by the adlions 
 of the mufcles, they cannot dilate enough j 
 3 but 
 
dialogues. 27 
 
 but thefe veflels being feated on the outhdes 
 of the mufcles, are capable of being much di- 
 lated. In all the veins which are perpendicu- 
 lar to the horizon, excepting thofe of the ute- 
 rus, and the vena portae, rhere are Iniall mem- 
 branes or valves ; fometimes there is only one, 
 fometimes there are two, and fometimes three, 
 placed together, like fo many half thimbles 
 lluck to the hdes of the veins, with their 
 mouths towards the heart. In the motion of 
 the blood towards the heart, they are prefled 
 clofely to the fides of the veins ; but if the 
 blood Ihould fall back, it muft repel the 
 valves, fo that no blood can repafs them, or 
 return towards the extreme parts from whence 
 it came. The blood diftributed to all parts 
 of the body by the two arteries, the aorta and 
 pulmonary, is returned by the three veins called 
 vena cava, vena ports, and pulmonary vein. 
 The vena cava carries back to the right auri- 
 cle of the heart the blood conveyed by the 
 aorta to all the parts of the body, except what 
 goes by the coronary arteries of the heart. It 
 receives all this blood from the arterial rami- 
 fications in part diredlly, and in part indirect- 
 ly. The vena ports receives the blood car- 
 ried to the floating vifcera of the abdomen 
 (by the csliac artery, and the two mefenteric 
 arteries) and conveys it to the hepatic vein, 
 and from thence to the vena cava. The pul- 
 monary vein conveys to the pulmonary finus^ 
 or left auricle of the heart, the blood carried 
 to the lungs by the pulmonary artery. 
 
 How 
 
2S A N A T O M I C A L 
 
 C\ How is the vena cava cliftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena cava ariles with a larger finus 
 from the right auricle of the heart, where it 
 hrtl lends out a vein to the heart itfelf, called 
 the coronary vein, and is then divided into 
 two trunks one running upward, called ve- 
 na cava deicendens- vel fuperior (becaufe the 
 blood defcends through it to the heart) and 
 the other running downward, called vena ca- 
 va aicendcns vel inferior (becaufe the blood 
 afcends through it to the heart) but the an- 
 tients, refpedting the diredlion of the tubes or 
 vefleis only, called them the reverie, viz. the 
 I'nperior afcendens, and the inferior deicendens. 
 The moderns name them as here mientioned, 
 according to tlie flowing of the blood through 
 them. The defcending, or luperior trunk, is 
 diflributed chiefly to tire thorax, head, and 
 tipper extremities, and but very little to the 
 parts below the diaphragm. The afcending, 
 or inferior trunk, is diifnbuted chiefly to the 
 abdomen and lower extremities, and but very 
 little to the parts above the diaphragm. 
 
 How is the vena cava fuperior (called 
 alfo vena cava defcendens) diflributed ? 
 
 A. The vena cava luperior (called alfo ve- 
 na cava defcendens) a little higher than the 
 aorta, as high as the cartilage of the firft true 
 rib, terminates by a bifurcation or divifion 
 into the right and left I'ubclavian branches, 
 v.'hich are of unequal lengths, becaufe the 
 trunk of the vena cava lies more towards the 
 rioht Tide, where the ielc fubclavian ariles as 
 ^ well 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 V/ell as the right, and is confequently longeft. 
 From the heart to the bifurcation of the trunk 
 of the fuperior cava, arife the following veins, 
 viz. vena (azygos) fine pari, which fend 
 branches to the eight lower ribs, and another 
 to the left emulgent vein ; 2. intercoftaib fu- 
 perior, one on each fide, which afford branches 
 to the four upper ribs (if the azygos doth not 
 bellow branches on all the interflices of the 
 colls) the remarkable veins and arteries as 
 well as nerves relating to the colls, are couch- 
 ed in a furrow on the under edge of each rib, 
 where they fafely pafs •, 3. bronchialis, which 
 accompanies the bronchial artery to return 
 the blood to the cava. This vein in fome fub- 
 je6ls indeed, does not rife feparate, but comes 
 from the azygos, and fometimes from the in- 
 tercollals, and in fome is altogether w'anting. 
 After fending off fome finall branches, the 
 cava palfeth to the clavicle, where it divides 
 itfelf (as before mentioned) into a right and 
 left fubclavian branch, then fends off fome 
 fmall branches to the mulcles of the neck and 
 upper part of the breall ; and thefe four ca- 
 pital branches, viz. jugularis externa et inter- 
 na, vertebralis, and axillaris ; but this lafl. is 
 rather a continuation than a branch of the fub- 
 clavian i i. jugularis externa, chiefly to the 
 external parts of the throat, neck, and head ; 
 and its branches receives names from the parts 
 they are dillributed to, as frontalis, tempora- 
 lis, occipitalis, &c. 2. jugularis interna, to 
 the internal parts of the head and neck, which 
 
 gives 
 
30 ANATOMICAL 
 
 gives ramifications to the larynx, pharynx, 
 mufcles of the os hyoides and tongue; and 
 befides thefe, its truk terminates in a lack, 
 and brings back the blood from the brain and 
 finufes of the dura mater ; 3. vertebralis, which 
 afcends to the cranium through the tranfverfe 
 apophyfes of the vertebrae of the neck ; and 
 with the cervicalis ( which is generally a branch 
 of this vein) fupplies the mufcles of the neck, 
 accompanying the vertebral artery through all 
 the tranfverfe apophyfes of the vertebra colli, 
 all the way to the great foramen occipitale, 
 communicating with the occipital veins, and 
 fmall occipital finufes of the dura mater. The 
 fubclavian branch going our of the thorax on 
 each fide, is termed, 4. axillaris, which is ra- 
 ther a continuation of the fubclavian, than a 
 diftindl branch : before it leaves the thorax, it 
 fends off venae thoracicae, which are fpent on 
 the mufcles of the thorax. From the axilla- 
 ris (after it leaves the capacity of the thorax) 
 branches are fent off to the external and inter- 
 nal mufcles of the fcapula, &c. and to the 
 axillary glands ; and having reached the fide 
 of the head of the os humeri, it fends forth 
 cephalica to the arm (which creeps along be- 
 tween the fkin and tiie mufcles) : the axillaris 
 then runs along the arni by the name of vena 
 bafilica; but botli this, and the cephalica, 
 may be looked upon as two principal branches 
 of the axillaris ; both are diftributed, by nu- 
 merous ramifications, to all parts of the arm, 
 fore-arm, and hand. At the bend of the el- 
 bow 
 
DIALOGUES; 31 
 
 bow (or flexure of the cubit) they form three 
 capital branches *, the uppermoft is called ce- 
 phalicaj the middle, mediana, and the next, 
 bafilica. The vein which runs over the back 
 of the hand, towards the little finger, is called 
 the falvatella. 
 
 Q. Hov/ is the vena cava inferior (called 
 alfo vena cava afcendens) diftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena cava inferior vel afcendens, 
 is remarkable for its valves, which ferve to 
 prevent the blood from returning towards the 
 extremities : it is diftributed thus, i. imme- 
 diately after it palTes out of the pericardium, 
 it perforates the diaphragm, to which it gives 
 the vens diaphragmaticte inferiores, or phre- 
 nicse; a. hepatic^, to the liver j 3. renales 
 vel emulgentes, to the kidneys ; 4. fpermati- 
 cte, to the tefticles ; 5. lumbares, to the loins 
 and their vertebra : after this, the trunk hav- 
 ing reached the os facrum, it there lofes the 
 name of cava •, and terminating by a bifurca- 
 tion like that of the defcending aorta, it fends 
 off the vena facra to accompany the artery of 
 the fame name, and then divides into the two 
 vente iliacse, each of which is divided into 
 two large trunks, or fecondary iliac veins : 
 this fecond bifurcation is about a finger’s 
 breadth below that of the iliac arteries. The 
 original iliacs are diftinguifhed into the right 
 and left •, and the fecondary iliacs (which are 
 four trunks) are named external and internal, 
 or anterior and pofterior. The two external 
 trunks are alfo named fimply iliaca, and the 
 
 two 
 
ANAT<OMICAL 
 
 two internal, hypogaftric^e ; the former feem? 
 to be a true continuation of the original iliac 
 trunk, but the latter only a branch, I mean 
 in adult bodies, for in a foetus there is a ma- 
 nifeft difference. From the hypogaftrica arife 
 the mufculares, hiemorrhoidales externa, and 
 other branches to the parts of generation, 
 bladder, anus, &c. From the external branch- 
 es goes the epigaftrica to the mulcles of the 
 belly and hips •, after this, the iliac branches 
 pafling out of the abdomen, are termed crura- 
 iis, and from thence arife, i. faphena, paffing 
 between the mufcles and integuments (only 
 covered with the ficin and fat) from the inguen 
 to the knee, ankle, upper part of the foot and 
 great toe; 2. faphena minor, to the back part 
 of the thigh and leg, and to the heel; 3. popli- 
 tea, formed of a double crural branch, runs 
 through the ham, on the back of the gaflroc- 
 nemii to the tendo achillis ; 4. tibialis anterior, 
 runs down the fore part of the leg, between 
 the mufculus tibialis anticus, and the extenfor 
 digitorum communis, to the upper part of the 
 foot; 5. tibialis pofterior vel furalis, is diftri- 
 buted through the calf and back-part of tFe 
 leg (as the anterior is on the fore-part) down 
 to the heel and foot ; 6. peron^a, runs down 
 on the infide of the fibula as low as the outer 
 ankle, fometimes double, fometimes triple, 
 fending ramifications to the neighbouring por- 
 tions of the mufeuii perontei, and long flexors 
 of the toes. 
 
 Q. Flow is the vena portte diftributed ? 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES 33 
 
 A. The vena ports, in its ftruflure, has 
 fome refemblance to a tree, being divided in- 
 to innumerable branches, which are difperfed 
 throughout the whole fublbance of the liver. 
 Where the trunk begins to divide, it confti- 
 tutes the finus ports in the liver, and from 
 this proceeds the numberlefs ramifications as 
 before mentioned. The roots, or inferior 
 branches of this vein, are divided into right 
 and left-, but firfl; the trunk fends off, i. cyf- 
 tics gemells, to the vefica fellis ; 2. gaftrica 
 dextra, to the ftomach •, 3. duodenalis vel in- 
 teflinalis, to the inteffinunl duodenum ; and 
 from this lafl often proceeds the pancreatics. 
 From the right branch (before-mentioned) 
 arife, i . mefenterics, to the mefentery and in- 
 teftines •, 2. hsmorrhoidalis interna, to the 
 reftum ; 3. epiploics dextrs, to the caul, the 
 right fide of the csliac artery. From the left 
 branch, which paffeth to the fpleen, and is 
 called fplenica, arife, i. galfrics (which are 
 various); 2. coronaria ventriculi, proceeding 
 from the former, and diflributed on the fto- 
 mach •, 3. vafa brevia, which are formed by 
 iome of the branches of the coronaria ventri- 
 culi and fplenica ; 4. epiploica finiftra, and 5. 
 gaftro-epipioics, to the caul and ftomach, the 
 left fide of the csliac artery ; 6. pancreatics, 
 to the pancreas; and fometimes alfo the hs- 
 morrhoidalis interna. All venal branches may 
 be accounted the roots, in regard that their 
 leffer branches firft reforb the reftduous blood 
 depofited in any part by the arteries, and carry 
 D the 
 
34 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the fame into their greater branches, and fo 
 into the trunk : thus the blood is carried by 
 the veins and their branches to the liver ; arid 
 from all parts of the body by the branches of 
 the cava into its aicending and defcending 
 trunk, which convey it to the heart. The 
 diflribution of the veins is fo various, that it 
 is rare to fee fubcutaneous veins in any two 
 perfons alike. 
 
 Q^How is the vena pulmonaris diftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena pulmonaris arifes from the 
 left ventricle of the heart, where it firit forms 
 a finus, then is divided into four branches, and 
 afterwards into innumerable ramifications, 
 which are diftributed through the whole fub- 
 ftance of the lungs, and accompany the pul- 
 monary artery, to return the blood into the 
 heart. 
 
 What are nerves ? 
 
 A. Nerves are bundles of whitifh, cylindri- 
 cal fibres, arifing from the medulla oblongata 
 of the brain, and the medulla fpinalis, from 
 which they go out in pairs like fo many di- 
 ftinft trunks, and are afterwards divided into 
 branches, ramifications, and filaments, and 
 terminate in all the fenfitive parts of the body, 
 being the immediate organs of fenfation. They 
 are all wrapt up in the dura and pia mater, 
 which laft covers all the nerves in common, 
 and alfo inclofes every fibre (of which they are 
 compofed) in particular. To thefe membra- 
 nous coats, an infinite number of veftels, both 
 arteries and veins, are diftributed. Though 
 
 the 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 35 
 
 the nerves do not appear through the beft mi- 
 crol'cope to have any cavity or fiuid contained 
 in them, vet it is poflible (and indeed it is the 
 general opinion) that there may be luch cavi- 
 ties, and alfo highly probable (from the expe- 
 riments of Bellini and otaersy that there is fuch 
 a fluid, though too fubtile to be perceived by 
 us. This fluid named animal fpirits) is fup- 
 pofed to be conveyed by the nerves to all parts 
 of the body, being an extreme fubtile fluid, 
 fecreted in the brain and fpinal marrow, and 
 is thought to be deftined for no lefs noble a 
 purpofe tlian the fenfation, morion, and nu- 
 trition of the feveral parts of the human ftruc- 
 ture Bur the exiftence of this fluid and the 
 cavity of the nerves, are ftill the fubjects of 
 difpute, though I am inclined to favour both. 
 I'hofe who deny animal fpirits in the nerves, 
 fuppofe that the fenfation is conveyed by a vi- 
 bration, which, though it feems to me impro- 
 bable, yet it is poflible it may be conveyed 
 either or both ways (though at prefent unde- 
 termined) and probably lorne nerves may be 
 fo fmall, as to efcape even microfcopical ob- 
 fervation likewife. The harmony and fympa-v 
 thy of the nervous parts is of great ufe in phy- 
 fic ; for without an accurate knowledge of 
 this, many fymptoms of difeafes can fcarcely 
 be explained. There is a wonderful connec- 
 tion, fympathy, and communication of mo- 
 tion as well as fenfation, when they are aflbded 
 by any violent caufe: all which is owing to 
 tiic nerves ; for when any violence is offered 
 D 2 them. 
 
36 ANATOMICAL 
 
 them, fo as to tlireaten a folution of union, it 
 creates a pain and firid'ture of the adjacent, 
 and even of the remote parts, efpecially of the 
 vefiels. The nerves generally run as llrait as 
 the parts of the body and their own fafety from 
 external injuries will admit, fending off their 
 branches at very acute angles, and confe- 
 quently running more parallel than the blood- 
 veffels •, and I am inclined to think that every 
 the minuteft nerve, terminating in any parr, 
 is a diflindl cord from its origin, or elle 1 do 
 not fee how they could produce dillindt fenfa- 
 tions in every part of the body; and the di- 
 llindt points of fenfation throughout the body 
 are fo very numerous, that the whole body of 
 nerves (which, taken together, would not 
 make a cord of an inch diameter) muff be di- 
 vided into fuch a number, to afford one for 
 every part that has a diftindt fenfation, that 
 furely fuch a nerve would be too frnall to be 
 feen by the belt microfcope. 
 
 How are the nerves divided ? 
 
 A, The nerves are divided into thofe which 
 come immediately out of the cranium from 
 the brain ; and thofe whicli come out between 
 the vertebrse from the medulla ipinalis. 
 
 Q. How are the nerves from the brain di- 
 ftributed ? 
 
 A. The nerves from the brain, or medulla 
 oblongata, are ten pair, and are thus diftri- 
 buted, viz. i. the olfadlory pair, which paffing 
 through the os cribrofum, vel ethmoides, vei 
 cribriforme, are fpread over the membrane of 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 37 
 
 the noflrils ; 2. the optic pair, which, by 
 their expanfion, form the retina of the eye ; 
 3. the motory pair of the eyes,, each of which 
 is divided near the orbit into fix parts or 
 branches ; the fil'd branch goes to the elevator 
 palpebrs ; the fecond, to the elevator occiili ; 
 the third, to the deprefifor ; the fourth, to the 
 adducens-, the fifth, to the obliquus inferior; 
 and the fixth, into the tunics of the eye ; 4. 
 the pathetic pair, are very imall, and run to 
 the obliquus fuperior, or trochlear mufcle of 
 the eye ; 5. the guftatory pair, which are very 
 large, and divided within the cranium into 
 three branches, immediately under the dura 
 mater; of thefe, the firfl: branch, called the 
 opthalmic, runs to various parts of and about 
 the eye, the eye-lids, the mufcles of the fore- 
 head and nofe, and the integuments of the 
 face ; the fecond branch may be called the fu- 
 perior maxillary one, as being finally diftri- 
 buted through all parts of the upper jaw, the 
 lips, nofe, palate, uvula, gums and teeth ; a 
 branch of it alfo runs to the ear, and, joinino- 
 with a branch of the fevench pair, forms the 
 chorda tympani ; the third branch may be 
 called the maxillaris inferior, as being diftri- 
 buted over the feveral parts of the lower jaw, 
 the tongue, and other parts of the mouth ; 
 whence the whole pair of nerves has obtainecl 
 the name of par guftatorium; though a great 
 part of them lerves to very different purpofes, 
 and is carried to parts that have nothing to do 
 with tailing ; 6. the abducent pair (except a 
 3 branch 
 
38 ANATOMICAL 
 
 branch for the formation of the intercoftal 
 nerve) is wholly carried to the abducens oc- 
 culi i whence its name. The interc9llal nerve 
 is formed either of ramifications of the two 
 preceding nerves, or only of thofe of the fixth 
 pair. It makes its way out of the cranium 
 by the pafTage of the internal carotid, and de- 
 feends near the eighth pair through the neck, 
 and thence through the breaft and abdomen, 
 even to the pelvis, making in its way various 
 plexufes and ganglia, and fending branches to 
 almofl all the parts contained in the breaft and 
 abdomen; 7. the auditory pair arife with two 
 trunks, one of which is called the portio dura, 
 and the other portio mollis : this laft enters 
 the foramen of the os petrofum ; and thence, 
 through various little apertures, gets into the 
 labyrinth of the ear, where it is expanded over 
 all its parts, and conftitutes the primary organ 
 of hearing. 1 he harder portion, paffing 
 through, the aquasdudtus Fallopii, fends back 
 one bi'anch into the cavity of the cranium ; it 
 alfo fends off another branch, which helps to 
 form tire chorda tympani, and others, to the 
 mufdes of the tympanum; the reft of this 
 pair goes to the external ear, the pericranium, 
 the mufcles of the os hyoides, the lips, the 
 eye-lids, and tire parotids; 8. the par vagum, 
 •with the acceftbrius Willifii, pafs out near the 
 lateral finufes of the dura mater; and defeend- 
 ing through the neck and thorax to the abdo- 
 men, fend out branches by the way to the la- 
 rynx, the pharynx, heart, lungs, and efpecially 
 
 to 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 39 
 
 to the ftomach : it alfo fends off, from the up- 
 per part of the thorax, large branches, which 
 are varioufly implicated in the neck, thorax, 
 and abdomen i with the linguals, the cervi- 
 cals, and the intercoftals; 9 the lingual pair 
 go immediately to the tongue, and are called 
 by fome, the motory nerves of the tongue*, but 
 by others, with more j office, the guffatory 
 nerves; 10. this pair comes out from the be- 
 ginning of the medulla fpinalis, betwixt the os 
 occipitis and firft vertebra colli, and is all (ex- 
 cept what goes to the ganglion of the inter- 
 coffal) fpent on the miufculi obliqui, and ex- 
 tenfores capitis. But we are to obferve, fays 
 Heiffer, that the pair of nerves which the ge- 
 nerality of writers have called the tenth pair of 
 the head, are, for many unanfwerable reafons, 
 to be properly called the firff pair of nerves of 
 the neck. 
 
 How are the nerves from the medulla 
 fpinalis diffiibuted? 
 
 A. The nerves which come out between 
 the vertebrte from the medulla fpinalis, are 
 generally reckoned thirty pair, viz. the nerves 
 of the neck are eight pair ; the nerves of the 
 back, twelve pair*, the nerves of the loins, 
 five pair; and thofe of the facrum form five ©r 
 fix pair, though not always determinately and 
 regularly fo. From the nerves of the neck 
 are innumerable branches diffributed through 
 the mufcles of the head, neck, fcapula, and 
 humerus *, from the third, fourth, and fifth 
 pair, are formed the nerves of the diaphragm ; 
 
 D 4 and 
 
40 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 2.nd the fixth, feventh, and eighth pair, toge- 
 ther with the fird; pair of the back, form the 
 fix robuft nerves of the arms and hands : to 
 this divifion arc the acceffory fpinal nerves of 
 Willis to be referred, v/hich arife about the 
 origin of the third or fourth pair. Tiie nerves 
 of the back, befides the branch they give to 
 the brachial nerv'es, run entirely in the lame 
 furrow along the courfe of the ribs, and are 
 difperfed over the pleura, the intercoftal, pec- 
 toral, and abdominal mufcles, the breatl, and 
 other parts of the thorax. The nerves of the 
 loins are generally difperfed over the loins, the 
 peritoneum, integuments and mufcles of the 
 abdomen ; and btfides this, their firft pair of- 
 ten gives, on each fide, a branch to the dia- 
 phragm the fccond pair, after inofculatirig 
 with the branches of the firft, third, and fourth 
 pairs, forms the crural nerves, which are diftri- 
 buted over the anterior part of the thigh •, and 
 in the fame manner a branch is formed of the 
 conjundions of the fecond, third, and fourth 
 pairs, which paffes through the great foramen 
 of the os pubis, to the ferotum, tefticles, and 
 the adjoining parts i the fourth and fifth pair 
 of the nerves of the loins, joining with the firft, 
 fecond, third, and fourth pair of the os facrum, 
 compofe the nerve called ifchiatic, which is the 
 largeft in the body •, it defeends along the hin- 
 der part of the thigh, and its branches are dif- 
 tributed over the whole leg, the foot, and toes. 
 The nerves of the facrum form five or fix pair, 
 and pafs through the foramina of this bone : 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 41 
 
 the fuperior of them, as I have already ob- 
 ferved, compoie tlie ifchiatic nerve ; and what 
 remains, is dirperl'eti in a multitude of ramifi- 
 cations over the parts contained in the pelvis, 
 the inteftinum rectum, the bladder, the parts 
 of generation, and the parts adjacent. 
 
 See the Table cf the Arteries^ Veins, and 
 Nerves 
 
 Q. What are lymphaeducls, or lymphatic 
 veins ? 
 
 A Lymphsedudls, or lymphatic veins, are 
 fine tranfparent tubes or vefTels, which carry 
 lymph from all parts, efpecially the glands, 
 which they difcharge into the larger veins, 
 and into the vafa ladlea. They are not conti- 
 nuations of arteries, but have their origin in 
 all the cavities and cellular fubftance of the 
 body : they are more numerous in glands than 
 other parts, efpecially in thole glands which 
 feparate the viicideft fluids, as may be obferv- 
 ed in the liver and tefles. The lymphatics 
 have but one difcernible coat, which is very 
 thin, having valves at fmall and uncertain dis- 
 tances, to prevent the regrefs of their fluid ; 
 and they have frequent communications, like 
 the veins. The larger trunks are in many 
 places attended with fmall glands, through 
 which they run, and at the fame time fend 
 communicant branches over them, as a fecu- 
 rity againft obftrudlions from difcafes in thofe 
 glands : they all ultimately terminate in the 
 receptaculum chyli. 
 
 Q. What are the ufes of the lymphatics? 
 
 A. The 
 
42 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The life of the lymphatics is to dilute 
 the chyle and abforb the fluids which are 
 thrown into the feveral irterflices of the body, 
 tliertby preventing any morbid accumulation. 
 When a lymphatic veffel burfls, it occafions a 
 dropfy in the cavity into which it opens. The 
 lymphatics are perfcdlly flmilar to the iadeals. 
 i'he ladeais are the abforbents of the intedines, 
 as the lymphatics are of the otlter parts ; there 
 is no difference but the nante. The fame vef- 
 fels are called Iadeals in the inteftines, and 
 lymphatics in the other parts of the body. 
 
 Q. What are glands ? 
 
 A. Glands are fmall bodies formed by the 
 interweaving of veffels of every kind, covered 
 with a membrane ; generally compoled of an 
 artery, vein, lymphatic, excretory dud and 
 nerve. The glands are of two kinds, viz. 
 the firnple, called conglobate glands ; and the 
 compound, named conglomerate glands. Some 
 glands are confidcrably hard and firm •, others 
 very foft and tender : of the latter kind in 
 particular are the glands in the articulations 
 of the bones. The glands differ very confi- 
 derably in colour, figure, and fize : fome take 
 their names from their peculiar figure ; as the 
 glandula pinealis, the miliares, and others ; 
 ibme, from their ufe and contents, as falival 
 glands, mucofe and lymphatic, &c. and others 
 take their names from their fituation; fuch are 
 the parotid glands, axillary, inguinal, mefen- 
 teric, lingual, &c. 
 
 Q. What are the ufes of the glands? 
 
 A. To 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 43 
 
 A. To fecrete fluids from the mafs of blood 
 for divers purpofes, fuch as perfefling the 
 lymph, &c. Their ufes are as different as 
 their colours o’* figures , fome of them are fa- 
 lival, mucofe, ancf lymphatic •, others are mu- 
 cilaginous, febaceoLis, ■ and waxy, others la- 
 chrymal, pituitary, &c. and from thefe their 
 feveral contents or lecretions, they are termed 
 lachrymal, &c. 
 
 Q, What is a conglobate gland ? 
 
 A, A conglobate gland is a little fmooth 
 body, wrapt up in a fine fldn or membrane, 
 by which it is feparated from all other parts, 
 only admitting an artery and a nerve to pafs 
 in, and giving way to a vein and excretory 
 canal or du6t, to come out; of which fort are 
 the glands of the brain and teftes. Window 
 includes, under the name of conglobate glands, 
 the lymphatic glands alone, and calls all the 
 other glands of the body by the name of con- 
 glomerate. 
 
 Q. What is a conglomerate gland ? 
 
 A. A conglomerate gland is that which is 
 compofed of feveral little conglobate glands, 
 all tied up together in one common tunicle or 
 membrane. Sometimes all their excretory drifts 
 unite, and make one common pipe, through 
 which the liquor of them all runs, as the pan- 
 creas and parotides do. Sometimes the du6ts 
 uniting, form feveral pipes, which only com- 
 municate with one another by crofs canals ; 
 and fuch are the mammte : others again have 
 feveral pipes without any communication with 
 
 3 one 
 
44 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 one another •, of which forts are the glandul^e 
 iachrymales, and proftata; •, and a fourth fort 
 is, w'hen each little gland has its own excretory 
 du6l, through which it tranlmits its liquor to 
 a common bafon •, as the kidneys. 
 
 Q. What are excretory velTels ? 
 
 A. Excretory veflels are either tubes from 
 glands to convey the fecieted fluids to their re- 
 Ipedlive places •, or veflTels from the fmall guts 
 to carry the chyle to the blood veflTels ; thefe 
 lafl: are called vafa ladlea, or ladleal veflTels. 
 
 Q What are the lafteal vefiels.^ 
 
 A. The vafa ladtea, or ladeal veflels, are 
 the vente lads, receptaculum chyli, and duc- 
 tus thoracicLis, filled with a white milky fluid, 
 called chyle. 
 
 Q. What are the vente lafleae 
 A. I'he venee lades, &c. have the name 
 of veins, becaufe their valves are difpofed as 
 the ordinary blood veins, and becaufe the fluid 
 which they contain runs from fmaller into 
 larger tubes or veflels. The ladeal veins are 
 long, flender pipes, whofe coats are fo thin as 
 to become invilible when they are not diftend- 
 cd with chyle. They arife from all the parts 
 of the fmall guts, by a vaft number of fine ca- 
 pillary, pellucid tubes, which, as they run 
 from the fides of the inteflines to the glands in 
 the mefentery, frequently unite, and form 
 fewer and larger branches (called vens lades 
 primi generis) which pafs through the glands 
 of the melentery •, and from thefe arife other 
 ladeals of a larger fize (named ladea fecundi 
 
 generis) 
 
dialogues. 4f 
 
 generis) which carry the chyle immediately in- 
 to the receptaculum chyli. The mouths of 
 thefe la(5leals, which are open into the cavity ' 
 of the guts, from whence they receive the 
 chyle, are fo fmall, as not to be feen by the 
 very beft microfcope : it was neceffary they 
 Ibould be fmaller than the fined arteries in the 
 body, that nothing might enter which could 
 ftop the circulation of the blood, d'he fame 
 extremity of the ladteals has likewife commu- 
 nication with the capillary arteries of the guts, 
 by which they receive a lymph that dilutes and 
 propels the chyle forwards, and wafhes the 
 iadleals and glands, that they may not be ob- 
 ftrudled by the chyle’s flaying in them upon 
 fading. The other extremity of the ladleals 
 difcharges the chyle into the vedcular cells of 
 the melenteric glands, &c. as 1 have before- 
 mentioned, The ladleal veins have valves at 
 certain didances, which hinder the chyle from 
 returning back into the intedines, d'he office 
 of thefe veins is to receive the fluid part of 
 the digeded aliment, which is called chyle, 
 and convey it to the receptaculum chyli, that 
 it may be thence carried through the dudlus 
 thoracicus into the blood veflels. 
 
 Q. What is the receptaculum chyli ? 
 
 A. The receptaculum chyli is a membra- 
 nous fomewhat pyriform bag, two-thirds of an 
 inch long, one third of an inch over in its 
 larged part when collapfed ; fituated on the 
 fird vertebra lumborum to the right of the 
 aorta, a little higher than the arteria emulgens 
 
 dextra. 
 
4^ ANATOMICAL 
 
 dextra, under the right inferior mtifcle of the 
 diaphragm. It is formed by the union of 
 three tubes •, one, from under the aorta ; the 
 fecond, from the interftice of the aorta and 
 cava ; the third, from under the emulgents of 
 the right fide. It lies between the defcending 
 trunk of the aorta and the above verrebrse, 
 and is biggeft between the cgeliac and emul- 
 gent arteries, furrounded by veficular glands, 
 called glandulas lumbares, which difcharge 
 their lymph into it. The receptacle receives 
 all the fecond order of the ladeals, as well as 
 all the lymphatic veins, both of the legs, and 
 of all the parts of the abdomen. This faccus 
 chyliferus will contain about one ounce of 
 water; at its fuperior part becoming gradually 
 fmaller, it is contradled into a (lender, mem- 
 branous pipe, of about a line diameter, called 
 the dudtus thoracicus. 
 
 Q. What is the duflus thoracicus? 
 
 A. The dufirus thoracicus, or thoracic du£l:, 
 is the fuperior part of the receptaculum chyli 
 contradfed into a (lender, membranous pipe, 
 of about a line diameter, which paffes between 
 the appendices mufculofe diaphragmatis, on 
 the right of, and Ibmcwhat behind the aorta, 
 then lodged in the cellular lubftance under the 
 pleura : it mounts between this artery and the 
 vena line pari, or azygos, as far as the fifth 
 vertebra thoracis, where it is hid by the azy- 
 gos, as this vein rifes forward to join the cava 
 defeendens ; after which, the dudt palTes ob- 
 liquely over to the left fide under the cefopha- 
 
 gus, 
 
DIALOGUES. 47 
 
 gus, aorta defcendens, and great curvature of 
 the aorta, until it reaches tlie left carotid, 
 fbretching farther towards the left internal ju- 
 gular, by a circular turn, whofe convex pare 
 is uppermoft : at the top of this arch it fplits 
 into two, for one half line *, the fuperior branch 
 receiving into it a large lymphatic from the 
 cervical gland. This lymphatic appear?, by 
 blowing and injeilions, to have two valves; 
 when the tv.^o branches are united, the duff 
 continues its courfe to the internal jugular, be- 
 hind which it defeends; and immediately at 
 the left fide of the infertion of this vein, enters 
 the fuperior and pofterior part of the left fub- 
 clavian, whofe internal membrane duplicated, 
 forms a femilunar externally convex valve, 
 that covers two thirds of the oriBce of the dud; 
 immediately below this orifice, a cervical vein, 
 from the mufeuli fcaleni, enters the fubclavian. 
 The dudus thoracicus has a thin coat, and 
 valves, at feveral diftances (commonly ten or 
 twelve) which hinder the chyle that has once 
 paffed them, from falling back. The diame- 
 ter of the duif varies in moft bodies-, and in 
 the fame fubjed is uniform ; but frequently 
 fudden enlargements, or facculi of it, are ob- 
 fervable. I'he divifions which authors men- 
 tion of this dud within the thorax, are very 
 uncertain; as is the precife vertebra, where it 
 begins to turn towards the left. Frequently it 
 does not fplit at its fuperior arch ; in which 
 cafe, a large faccus is found near its aperture 
 into the fubclavian vein : generally it has but 
 
 one 
 
48 ANATOMICAL 
 
 one orifice, though I have feen two in one 
 body, and three in another •, nay, iometimes 
 it divides into two, under the curvature of the 
 great artery, one going to the right, another to 
 the left fubclavian : this however, is very rare. 
 The lymphatic which enters the luperior arch, 
 is often fent from the thyroid gland. The tho- 
 racic du6t receives the lymphaedufts from the 
 feveral parts of the thorax, as it paffes along 
 to the fubclavian vein : by its running up to 
 the left fide, the chyle receives a new impetus 
 from the pulfation of the aorta-, whereas, on 
 the right fide, it muft have afeended only by 
 the preflure of the diaphragm, and the mufcles 
 of the lower belly upon the receptacle, which 
 it equally enjoys in its prefent fitliation. I’he 
 receptaculum chyli iseafily found in living bo- 
 dies, but with greater difliculty in thofe that 
 are dead. 
 
 What are membranes ? 
 
 A. Membranes are a pliable texture of fibres 
 interwoven together, and expanded, to cover 
 or line any other part. Every diftincl part of 
 the body is covered, and every cavity is lined 
 with a fingle membrane, whole thicknefs and 
 ftrength is as the bulk of the part it belongs to, 
 and as the friftion to which it is naturally cx- 
 pofed. The membranes of the body are vari- 
 ous, and varioufly denominated ; thofe which 
 ferve as integuments, or covers of veflels, are 
 called tunics or coats thofe that cover the 
 brain, meninges-, the Ikull, pericranium; the 
 bones in general, periofteum ; that which lines 
 
DIALOGUES 
 
 49 
 
 the thorax, pleura; the abdomen, peritonaeum; 
 and that which includes the hearty pericardium. 
 The mufcles too, are each inclofed in a pecu- 
 liar membrane ; as are the bowels, &c. 
 
 Q: What are the ufes of the membranes ? 
 
 A. The ufes of the membranes are to cover 
 and wrap up the parts, ftrengthen them, and 
 fave them from external injuries; thofe that 
 contain diftindl parts, keep the parts they con- 
 tain together, and render their furfaces fmooth, 
 and lefs fubjedl to be lacerated by the adtions 
 of the body ; and thofe which line cavities, 
 ferve to render the cavities fmooth and fit for 
 the parts they contain to move againft. The 
 membranes are not only of ufe to join one part 
 to another, but alfo to preferve the natural heat, 
 to fuftain fmall veflels, and the nerves, which 
 run through their duplicatories ; to flop the re- 
 turning of the humours in their veflels (as the 
 valves ftop the returning of the blood in the 
 veins and heart) of the chyle in the thoracic 
 dudt, and of the lymph in the lymphatic vef- 
 fcls. The membranes of all the cavities that 
 contain folid parts, are ftudded with glands, 
 or are provided with veflfels which feparate a 
 mucus to make the parts contained move 
 fmoothly againft one another, and not grow 
 together; 'and thofe cavities which are expofed 
 to the air, as the nofe, ears, mouth, and the 
 trachea arteria, have their membranes befet 
 v/ith glands which feparate matter to defend 
 them from the outer air. 
 
 What are fibres r 
 
 E A» Fibres 
 
50 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. Fibres appear to be fimple, thread-like 
 bodies, which ferve to form other parts; hence 
 fome are very hard, as the bony ones; and 
 ethers foft, as the flefhy parts. 
 
 Q. What is hair compofed of 
 
 A. Of five or fix oblong, flender, flexible 
 filaments, inclofed in a tube, and tranfparent, 
 growing out of the pores, and is either ftrait or 
 crooked, according to the redlitude or obliquity 
 of the pores. 
 
 What are nails ? 
 
 A. A kind of bony excrefcence growing on 
 the finders and toe.'i; their fubftance confifts of 
 the cutaneous papillte, elongated and indurated 
 m that form. 
 
 DIALOGUE II. 
 
 Of the Head, and its Parts. 
 
 HAT are the parts of the head, and 
 how difi-inguirhed ? 
 
 A. The hair is termed capillus ; that pare 
 which it covers is termed the fcal-p ; the crown 
 of the head, vertex; the hinder part, occiput; 
 the fore-part, finciput ; that part between the 
 hair and the eye-brows, frons, the forehead; 
 the fides of it tempora, the temples ; the eye- 
 brows, fupereilia; the fpace between the eye- 
 brows, glabella; the eye- lids (both upper and 
 lower) palpebrse fuperior et inferior, and the 
 • - . 5 . „ cartb 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 51 
 
 cartilaginous edges of both, with the hairs 
 growing thereon, are termed cilia ; the hollow 
 of the eye, cavum oculi j the inner angle of 
 the eye, canthus major ^ the outer corner of 
 the eye, canthus minor; and the eye, oculus; 
 which confifts of proper tunicles and humours. 
 The ridge of the nofe is termed fpina nafi ; the 
 tip of the nofe, orbiculus, vel globulus nali ; 
 the noftrils, nares ; the partition between them, 
 feptinn nafi ; the Tides of the noftrils, alse ; the 
 Jiairs growing within, vibrife : internally, the 
 maxillary, fphenoidal, and frontal finufes. The 
 outer ear is termed auricula, but more pro- 
 perly auris externa : in this there are a great 
 many eminences and cavities; the upper part 
 is termed pinna ; the lower part, lobus, or 
 fibra; the outer circle, helix; the inner circle 
 (or femimircle) antihelix ; the fpace between 
 the two circles, fcapha ; the lower end of the 
 antihelix, or femicircle, inakes a little promi- 
 nence, which is called antitragus — becaufe 
 there is another prominence juft oppofite to it, 
 called tragus ; the cavity made by the extre- 
 mity of the helix, is called concha ; the hollow 
 in the middle of the ear, is termed ah^earium, 
 and has a hole or paftage into the internal ear, 
 named meatus auditorius. The upper jaw is 
 termed maxilla fuperior ; the prominent part 
 of the cheek, mala; the lower jaw, maxilla in- 
 ferior; the hollow, or the cheeks ftretched out 
 in blowing, bucca; the chin, mentum ; the 
 beard, or place where it grows on the upper- 
 lip, myftax; the gutter in the middle under 
 E z the 
 
52 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the nofe, is philtrum. The external parts o-f 
 the mouth are the lips, one upper, and the 
 other under : the internal parts are the gums, 
 termed gingivte •, the teeth, dentes the tongue, 
 lingua ; the roof of the mouth, palatum-, with 
 tlte uvula there fufpended for modulating the 
 voice, &c. The other internal parts of the 
 fkull, eye, nofe, ear, and mouth fuch as the 
 brain, glands, membranes, mufcles, &c. I fhall 
 fpeak of hereafter in the particular defcriptions 
 of thefe parts. 
 
 What are the bones of the head ? 
 
 A. The bones of the cranium, or fkull, 
 which contains the brain, &c. the bones of the 
 face, jaws, teeth, tongue, and internal ear. 
 
 What are the bones of the cranium? 
 
 A The bones of the cranium are but eight*, 
 though if v/e reckon the ofla petrofa diftindly 
 from the offa temporum, they are ten, viz. os 
 frontis, ofla parietalia, two; offa temporum, 
 two ; os occipitis,. os ethmoides, os fphenoi- 
 des. 
 
 Which is the os frontis ? 
 
 A. The os frontis is fituated in the fore-part 
 of the ikull, and forms that part of the face 
 called the fo'reh.ead ; from whence its name. It 
 is joined by luture to the offa parietalia, un- 
 gues vel lachryma nafi, maxillaria, malarum, 
 03 ethmoides et fphenoides. The os frontis 
 contains the anterior lobes of the brain: in its 
 middle there is generally a ridge, or fpine, to 
 Ifrengthen it, and to which the longitudinal 
 iinus of the dura mater adheres; and from the 
 
 middle 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 53 
 
 middle of this bone externally, goes a procefs 
 to fupport the bones of the nofe-, and the lower 
 parts of the os frontis compofe the upper parts 
 of the orbits of the eyes. Immediately above 
 the os ethmoides is a fmall blind hole, through 
 wliich runs a vein to the longitudinal finus of 
 the dura mater, and through the upper edge 
 of each orbit, nerves, and an artery, pafs to the 
 forehead •, and in each orbit, near the os pla- 
 num, palTes a branch of the fifth pair of nerves. 
 In the fubftance of this bone, near the nole, 
 are feveral finufes more in fome fubje£ls than 
 in others ; in children feldom any. Thefe 
 finufes, and the Ipine in this bone, render it 
 dangerous, if not imprafticable, to apply a 
 trephine on the middle and lower part of tlie 
 forehead. 
 
 Q. What are the ofla parietalia ? 
 
 A. The offa parietalia (by fome named 
 bregmati, or fincipitis) are two bones larger 
 than any other in the flcull, forming the fupe- 
 rior and lateral parts of it, and to which the 
 temporal mufcles are partly fixed. 
 
 Which are the offa temporum ? 
 
 A. The offa temporum, vel fquamofa, are 
 two bones fituated below the parietal bones, at 
 the middle and lower parts of the fides of the 
 fkull, from which proceed the mammillary and 
 zygomatic procefTes •, and it has an exterior 
 finus lined with a cartilage, which receives the 
 procefs of the lower jaw. 
 
 The offa petrofa lie between the former and 
 the occipital bones, or are truly portions of the 
 E 3 tempo- 
 
54 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 temporal bones, being never found feparate in 
 adult bodies. In each of thefe bones there is 
 an external and an internal procefs ; the for- 
 mer is named flyliformis ; near it is the fixth 
 foranren, through which the carotid arteries 
 pafs to the brain •, and that on the infide of the 
 fkull, leading to the organs of hearing, is the 
 feventh foramen ; the latter procefs is called 
 the os petrofum, which contains the Vvrhole 
 meatus auditorius and cavity of the tympa- 
 num. 
 
 Q. Which is tlie os occipitis 
 
 A. The os occipitis makes all the back part 
 of the ilcull : it is bounded by the fphenoidal, 
 temporal, petrofal, and parietal bones. This 
 bone is articulated to the fpine ; and between 
 its apophyfes is the great or tenth foramen, 
 through which the medulla oblongata defcends 
 into the fpine, the cervical arteries and veins 
 pafs: on the infide of this bone is a crucial 
 fpine i and on the outfide a fpine, or an apo- 
 phyfis, to ftrengthen it : the thinner parts of 
 this bone are alfo defended by the mufcles that 
 cover them, as blows here are of vvor.<e confe- 
 quence than on any other part of the ficull •, 
 becaufe wounds in the cerebellum, which is 
 underneath, are mortal. Near the apophyfes 
 of this bone is the ninth foramen of the fluill, 
 through which pafs the ninth pair of nerves ; 
 and b^ehind each apophyfis of the occipital 
 bone there is a foramen, or a finus, through 
 which pafs finufes from the lateral finufes of 
 ?fie external cervical veins, by means of which 
 
 (as 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 {as in all other communications of the finufes) 
 the blood pafles from thofe that happen to be 
 furcharged by any pofture of the head, into 
 thofe that, from the fame pofture, would have 
 been almoft empty. 
 
 Which is the os ethmoides ? 
 
 A. The os ethmoides, vel cribriforme, is a 
 fmall bone, about two inches in circum.ference, 
 lying in the fore-part of the fkull, and almoft 
 furrounded by the os frontis. It is full of 
 holes like a fieve ; it is a principal part of the 
 organ of fmelling, and gives a very great ex- 
 tent to the pituitary membrane in a fmall com- 
 pafs : in the middle of this bone is the crifta 
 galli procefs, and oppofite to it a thin one, 
 which in part divides the nofe. 
 
 Which is the os fphenoides ? 
 
 A. The os fphenoides is fixed like a wedge 
 in the midft of the os frontis, ethmoides, vo- 
 mer, occipitis, maxillae luperioris, ofla parie- 
 talia, palati, malarum, temporum, and petro- 
 fum : on its infide is a cavity, named fella tur- 
 cica, vel equina, and the four clinoid procefies j 
 under the two foremoft of v/hich, pal's the in- 
 ternal carotid arteries : oppofite to the fella tur- 
 cica is a procefs, which makes part of the fep- 
 tum narium : on the outftde of the fltull, ad- 
 joining to the upper jaw, are the pterygoid pro- 
 celTes : under the fella turcica, vel equina, in 
 this bone, is the fphenoidai finus, which is 
 fometimes double, and opens into the noftrilsi 
 but fometimes it is totally wanting, efpecially 
 in children. At the infide of the bafis of tire 
 E 4 two 
 
S6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 two anterior clinoid procefles, are the firft fora-' 
 mina of the fkull through which the optic 
 nerves pafs : near this is the fecond foramina, 
 through which pafs nerves and blood-veflels in- 
 to the the orbits of the eyes ; and towards the 
 occiput are the third foramina, through which 
 pafs nerves to the face; nearer the occiput are 
 the fourth foramina, through which pafs the 
 largeft branches of the fifth pair of nerves ; and 
 a ftraw’s breadth farther are tlie fifth foramina, 
 through which thofe branches of the carotid ar- 
 teries enter, that arc beftowed upon the dura 
 mater. 
 
 How are the bones of the fkull com- 
 pofed ? 
 
 A. They are of unequal thicknefs in the fe- 
 veral parts, and are compofed of two lameljs, 
 or tables, laid over one another ; between which 
 there is a diploe, or meditullium, being a thin, 
 fpongeous fubftance, made of bony fibres de- 
 tached from each lamina, and full of little 
 cells. The tables are hard and folid, the fibres 
 being clofe to one another. The diploe is foft, 
 the bony fibres being here at a greater diftance 
 (a contrivance of the all- wife Creator’s) where- 
 by the fkull is not only made lighter, but lefs 
 liable to fradtures. The external lamina of the 
 cranium is fmooth, and covered with the peri- 
 cranium, which in other bones is called by the 
 general name of periofteum, becaufe of its ad- 
 hering to the bone : it is found connedled to 
 the dura mater by fibres tranfmitted from it to 
 that membrane through the futures. About 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 57 
 
 the origin of the temporal mufcles the coats of 
 the pericranium part ^ the outer pafTing over 
 thole mufcles, and the inner ftill adhering 
 clofe to the cranium. The internal lamina 
 of the cranium, or infide of the flcul], is like- 
 wife fmooth, except the furrows made by the 
 pulfation of the arteries of the dura mater be- 
 fore the cranium was arrived at its confilfence. 
 All the bones of the cranium are found to be 
 imperfedt in new-born infants ; the finus and 
 its meditullium are almoft wholly wantino- 
 Qa Vf hat are futures ? 
 
 A. Sutures are the clofing or joining tof^e- 
 ther the bones of the fKull, like the teeth of 
 faws fet one into another ^ and thefe are either 
 common or proper ; the proper futures are di- 
 Ilinguifhed into the true, and the falfe or fpu- 
 rious. 
 
 Q: Which are called true futures ^ 
 
 A. They are called true futures which are 
 denticulated mutually into each other with a 
 ■multitude of faw-like teeth, and are moll 
 plainly to be feen ; fuch are the coronal, fa- 
 gittal, and lambdoidal futures. 
 
 Which are the falfe, or fpurious futures? 
 A. The falfe, or fpurious futures, are thofe 
 fquamofe ones of the temporal and parietal 
 bones, and of the os frontis and fphenoides in 
 the angle where they unite with the parietals. 
 
 Which are the common futures ? 
 
 A. 1 he common futures are the tranDerfal 
 ones, which join the os frontis with the bones 
 below it; but thefe are of little moment. 
 
 Wh.ich 
 
£8 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 Q. Which are the coronal futures ? 
 
 A. The futura coronalis runs acrofs the 
 flcull from one upper edge of the fphenoidal 
 bone to the other, and joins the parietal bone 
 £0 the frontal. 
 
 Which are the fagittal futures ? 
 
 A. Tlie futura fagittalis joins the parietal 
 bones, beginning at the os occipitis, and is 
 continued to the os fronds •, in children down 
 to the nofe j the os frontis in them being two 
 bones, and fometimes fo in adult bodies. 
 
 Which are the lambdoidal futures ? 
 
 A. The futura lambdoidalis joins the back 
 pait of the ofla bregmatis, or parietal bones, to 
 the upper part of the occipital. 
 
 Whiclr are the fquamofe futures ? 
 
 A. The futura fquamofa is made by the up- 
 per part of the temporal and fphenoidal bones 
 wrapping over the lower edges of the parietal 
 bones. 
 
 Q. Which are the tranfverfal futures ^ 
 
 A. 1 hey run acrofs the face, through the 
 bottoms of the orbits of the eyes ; they join the 
 lower edge of the frontal bone to the os fphe- 
 noide?, maxillae fuperioris, ofia nafi, ungues, 
 palati, and jugalia, or malarum. 
 
 Q. What are the ufes of the futures? 
 
 A. Not only to join the bones of the cra- 
 nium together, but the ficull being thus divided 
 into many bones, renders it lefs apt to be frac- 
 tured, and, when it is fradtured, they prevent 
 its being extended, as it would have been,- were 
 it compofed of one bone only. They are alfo 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 59 
 
 pf life to join the dura mater very firmly to the 
 cranium and pericranium in thole parts, and 
 for the olTification of the bones ; and in in- 
 fants, that the head may be the more eafily ex- 
 tended in its growth, and alfo that they may 
 give way in the birth : and the openneis of the 
 futures in children have another advantage, 
 viz. that medicinal applications to the external 
 part of the head may penetrate and do lervicej 
 and laftly, that the tranipiration from the brain 
 may be the more free and eafy at that time of 
 life in which the bones are open, and in which 
 alfo the habit is tmore humid. 
 
 Q. What life are the foramina, or lioles of 
 the fkull ? 
 
 A. To give paflage to the fpinal marrow, 
 nerves, arteries, and veins. 
 
 Q. How are they diflinguiflied ? 
 
 A. Into external and internal. 
 
 Q. Which are the external ? 
 
 A. The external are meant thofe which are 
 eafily difeovered on the outfide of the fkull. 
 
 CX Which are the internal? 
 
 A. By the internal are meant thofe v/hich 
 are moft obvious in the internal furface of the 
 fkull. 
 
 Of the laro;er internal foramina there are 
 eleven pair, affording paffage to the arteries, 
 veins, and nerves of the brain; befide; thefe, 
 there is one that is fingle, viz tlie great fora- 
 men of the occipital bones, that gives paffage 
 to the medulla fpinalis, acceffory fpinal nerves, 
 and vertebral arteries ; ifi; pair, gives pafiage 
 
 to 
 
So ANATOMICAL 
 
 to the olfaftory nerves ; 2d pair, to the optic 
 nerves; 3d pair, to the third and fourth pair 
 of nerves, to the firft branch of the fifth pair, 
 and to the fixth pair, as alib to the emiffary of 
 the receptacles of the dura mater; 4th pair, 
 give pafTage to the fecond branch of the fifth 
 pair of nerves, which is diflributed to the feve- 
 ral parts of the upper jaw ; 5th pair, to the 
 third branch of the fifth pair of nerves, and to 
 the emiffrry of the dura mater; 6th pair, give 
 pafTage to an artery (which is diflributed over 
 the dura mater, and is that which forms the 
 tree-like impreflions on the infide of the parie- 
 tal bones) ; 7th pair, is between the fella equi- 
 na and the petrofe apophyfis, and is fluit up 
 by the dura mater; 8th pair, give pafTage to 
 the carotid arteries ; and here the intercoflal 
 nerve goes out; 9th pair, to the auditory 
 nerves; loth pair, to the par vagum, the la- 
 teral finufes of the dura mater, and to the fpi- 
 nal nerve; nth pair, give pafTage to the lin- 
 gual nerves ; betides thefe large foramina, 
 there are a number of little ones often very 
 vifible. 
 
 What external foramina are there ? 
 
 Two of the os frontis, a little above the 
 orbits, called lupra orbitalia ; they give pafTage 
 to the opthalmic nerve of Willis ; there are al- 
 io four others, two on each fide the orbit, 
 which tranlmit little nerves and vefTels to the 
 finus of the os ethmoides ; in the parietal 
 bone one, though fometimes none ; in each of 
 the ofTa temporum, three common and three 
 
 proper ; 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 6r 
 
 proper: the ift is the foramen jugale for the 
 paifage of the temporal mufcle ; in the ad is 
 the finus of the jugular vein *, and the 3d is the 
 du6lus Euftachii, fituated between the petro- 
 fum and the fphenoides, and leading from the 
 mouth into the internal ear : befides thefe, 
 there are alfo three proper foramina in the ofia 
 temporumj id the meatus auditorius; ad the 
 aquteducl of Fallopius, fituated between the 
 maftoide and ftyloide procefTes, and tranfmit- 
 ting the hard portion of the auditory nerve ; 
 3d a foramen behind the maftoide procefs. In 
 the occipital bone are generally two foramina 
 behind the condyloide apophyfes for the paiTage 
 of the vertebral veins into the lateral finufes of 
 the dura mater. In the fphenoidal bone, be- 
 fides thofc already mentioned, are the apertures 
 of the finufes into the noflrils, common to them 
 with the bones of the palate, and which are 
 the apertures of the nares and fauces. In the 
 upper part of the pterygoide procefTes, is a 
 palTage for the novum emifTarium of the dura 
 mater. In the os ethmoides, befides thofe 
 common to this bone with the os frontis (al- 
 ready mentioned) there are the apertures of the 
 ethmoidal finufes into the noftrils. 
 
 Qa What are the bones of the face 
 
 A. The bones of the face are the oiTa nan, 
 m alarum, ungues, plana, maxilla fuperior, pa- 
 lad, os vomer, fpongiofum, maxilla inferior; to 
 v/hich may be added, the bones of the ear and 
 tpngue. 
 
 Which are the ofia nafi f 
 
 A. The 
 
62 Anatomical 
 
 A. The ofTa nafi makes the upper part, or 
 ridge of the nofe. 
 
 What are the ojTa malarum ? 
 
 A. Two bones fituated in the lateral and 
 middle parts of the face, called the cheek 
 bones •, the fhort procelTes of which, together 
 with the proceffus jugalis, form arches, called 
 the offa jugalia, vel zygomaticus. 
 
 Wiiich are the offa ungues, vel lachry-* 
 
 malia? 
 
 A. The offa ungues, vel lachrymalia, are 
 two of the leaf! bones of the face, fituated in 
 the orbits of the eyes towards the nofe, very 
 thin and tranfparent •, between each of them 
 and the upper jaw, is a foramen as large as a 
 goofe quill, into which the puncta lachrymalia 
 lead, to carry off any fuperfluous moifture from 
 the eyes into the nofe. 
 
 Which are the offa plana. ^ 
 
 A. Situated alfo in the orbits beyond the 
 offa ungues, and are near thrice as big. 
 
 Q. hich is the maxilla fuperior? 
 
 A. The maxilla fuperior, or upper jaw, 
 though generally dtfcribed Tingle, confifts of 
 two bones, beingmanileftly divided by a fu- 
 ture, which is fcarce ever obliterated. Its two 
 proceffes make part of the nofe. Its upper and 
 outward parts make the lower parts of the or- 
 bits of the eyes •, its lower fide, all that part of 
 the face under the cheeks, eyes, and nofe, to 
 the mouth, and two-thirds of the roof of the 
 nioutli. A little below the orbits of the eyes 
 there are two holes in this bone, and behind 
 
 the 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 6 ^ 
 
 the dentes incifores one more, which divides 
 into two, as it opens into the nofe. Between 
 the pofterior grinding-teeth and the orbits of 
 the eyes, are two great finules, called antra- 
 maxilla fuperioris, which open into the upper 
 part of the nofe ^ and in the lower edge of this 
 j.aw are the alveoli, or fockets for the teeth. 
 Part of the fides of thefe finufcs that lie next 
 the nofe, are only membranes, which make the 
 cavities like drums ^ perhaps to give a grave 
 found to the voice when we let part of it throuo-h 
 the nofe, 
 
 Impofthumatbns fometimes happen in thefe 
 finufes-, the figns of which are, great pain about 
 the part, matter in the nofe on the fide difeafed, 
 ftinking breath, and rotten teeth : the cure is 
 performed by drawing out the laft tooth but 
 one, and drav^ing two or more, if rotten, and 
 through their fockets making a perforation into 
 the antrum. 
 
 Which are the ofla palati ? 
 
 A. The olTa palati are two fmall bones that 
 make the back- part of the arch of the palate,* 
 or roof of the mouth: near this bone are two 
 fmall foramina, through which arteries and 
 nerves pafs to the palate. 
 
 CX Which is the os vomer? 
 
 A. The os vomer is fituated between the 
 bones of the palate and the fphenoidal bone. 
 This bone, together with the two nafal folBe 
 and its cartilage, are the feptum nafi. 
 
 Which is the os fpongiofum ? 
 
 A. The os fpongiofum, though by fome 
 
 treated 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 treated as a dift;in(5l bone, is only the fpongy 
 lamina in the nofe of the os asthmoides and 
 offa plana. 
 
 Which is the maxilla inferior 
 
 A. The maxilla inferior, or lower jav/, is 
 but one bone in adults, but in children two, 
 which unite by a cartilage in the middle of the 
 chin, and, as the child grows, hardens into 
 bone : in children it allb confifts of two tables 
 and a diploe between. This bone forms two 
 condyloid procelTes ; and near thefe are the two 
 coronal procefies •, and at the infide of the chin 
 a Imall rough procefTus innominatus. In the 
 infide of this bone, under each proceflus coro- 
 nalis, is a large foramen, which runs under the 
 teeth, and pafies out near the chin : in this fo- 
 ramen the veflels pafs that belong to the teeth j 
 and in the upper edge of the jaw are the fock- 
 ets for the teeth. 
 
 What number are the teeth, and how 
 are they diftinguiflied ? 
 
 A. The number in adults, if perfedt, is ge- 
 nerally thirty-two (fixteen in each jaw); the 
 four fore- teeth in each jaw are called incifores *, 
 the next (one on each fide the incifores) canini, 
 called by fome the eye-teeth; the reft are the 
 molares, or grinders; the lafi; of which (on 
 each fide) above and below, are termed dentes 
 iapientise, becaule they do not appear till men 
 arrive at the years of difcretion. The incifores 
 and canini have only one fingle root; the two 
 fird of the molares on each fide, have two 
 roots; and the reft, fome three, fome four. 
 
DIALOGUES 
 
 ^5 
 
 efpecially in the upper jaw, where alfo they are 
 fpread wider, becaufe that jaw being more 
 fpongy than the other, the teeth need more 
 fpace to fix them. The cavities of the teeth 
 are covered or lined with a fine vafculo-nervous 
 membrane j and each branch of the roots have 
 a foramen, or hole at their bottom, through 
 which pafs an artery, vein, and nerve, to af- 
 ford them nutrition and fcnfation : thefe veffels 
 and membrane are the feat of the tooth-ach. 
 
 Which is the os hyoides ? 
 
 A. The os hyoides, or bone of the tongue, 
 is fituated in the middle fpace between the an- 
 gles of the lower jaw, and adheres to the bafe 
 of the tongue. The cs hyoides is general) v 
 compofed of five fmall bones ; and the ufe of 
 it is to give a firm bafis to the tongue; and 
 therefore feveral mufcles of the tongue and la- 
 rynx, ferving to the motions of both, are inierted 
 in it. 
 
 Which are the bones of the internal ear ? 
 
 A. The bony cavity of the tympanum con- 
 tains feveral little bones, called the bones of 
 the ear; which take their names from the 
 things they are thought to refemble, viz. mal- 
 leus, incus, ftapes, and orbiculare; but this 
 laft, in dried bones, pafies fometimes unob- 
 fcrved. 
 
 Q. Which is the malleus ? 
 
 A. The malleus is the hammer-like bone 
 adhering to the membrane of the tympanum, 
 and articulated with the incus. 
 
 Which is the incus? 
 
 F 
 
 A. The 
 
66 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The incus, or anvil-like bone, is arti- 
 culated botlr to the malleus and ftapes. 
 
 Whicli is the ftapes? 
 
 A. The ftapes, or ftirrup, is a little bone, 
 fituated in the cavity of the feneftra ovalis •, it 
 is joined to the incus, and its bafts adheres (by 
 means of a membrane) to the feneftra ovalis of 
 the labyrinth of the ear. 
 
 CK Which is the-os orbiculare ? 
 
 A. The orbicular, or lenticular bone, is the 
 fmalleft; bone in the body ; it is articulated with 
 both the ftapes and incus. 
 
 What are the mufcles, cartilages, and 
 ligaments of the head ? I mean thole belong- 
 ing to the cranium. 
 
 A. The mufcles, cartilages, and ligaments 
 of the cranium, are thefe, viz. i. occipito- 
 frontalis, orbicularis palpebrarum, corrugator 
 fupercilii, ciliaris (tarft) cartilages and liga- 
 ments, and elevator palpebrse fuperiorisj 2. 
 the mufcles of the globe of the eye, viz. ele- 
 vator occuli, deprefibr occuli, addueftor occuli, 
 abdudtor oculi, obliquus inferior, obliquus 
 fuperior vel trochlearis •, 3. the mufcles, carti- 
 lages, and ligaments of the external ear, viz. 
 cartilage and ligament, elevator auriculte, an- 
 terior auriculge, retraflor auriculte, helix ma- 
 
 jor, 
 
 helix minor. 
 
 tranf- 
 
 tragicus, antitragicus, 
 verfus auriculte ; 4. the mufcles of the internal 
 ear, viz. laxator tympani, externus mallei, in- 
 ternus mallei, tenfor tympani, ftapedius ; 5. 
 mufcles of the nofe, viz. comprefifor narium, 
 elevator altc naft, deprefibr al£ nafi, cartilages 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 67 
 
 of the nofe; 6. mufcles of the mouth, lips, 
 chin, and cheeks, viz. fphinfler oris, elevator 
 labii fuperioris, deprelTor labii fuperioris vel 
 nafalis, elevator labii inferioris, deprefibr labii 
 inferioris, elevator anguli oris, depreflbr angu- 
 li oris, elevator menti, zygomaticus, buccina- 
 tor, platyfma myoides, biventer, temporalis, 
 maffeter, pterygoideus internus, pterygoideus 
 externus *, 7. mufcles of the palate, viz. ptery- 
 goftaphylinus externus, thyroftaphylinus, glof- 
 Ibftaphylinus i 8. mufcles of the os hyoides, 
 viz. genio hyoideus, fterno-hyoideus, mylo- 
 hyoideus ; 9. the mufcles of the tongue, viz. 
 genio-gloffus, bafio-glolTus, cerato-glolTus, fty- 
 lo-glolTus, chondro-gloffus, lingualis, the tongue 
 itfelf; 10, mufcles which move the head on 
 the trunk, viz. reftus internus major, redlus 
 internus minor, redus major poflicus, redus 
 minor pofticus, redus lateralis, obliquus infe- 
 rior, obliquus fuperior. 
 
 Which is the occipito frontalis ? 
 
 A. I'he occipito-frontalis is a mufcle with 
 four flelhy bellies •, it arifes behind each ear 
 from the os occipitis *, and foon becoming ten- 
 dinous, pafles under the hairy fcalp to the fore- 
 head, where it becomes broad and flefhy, ad- 
 hering to the fkin, and is inferred into the up- 
 per part of the orbicularis palpebrarum, into 
 the os fr^ntis near the nofe, and by two pro- 
 ceffes into the bones of the nofe. When this 
 mufcle ads from the back part, it pulls the 
 fkin of the forehead upward, wrinkling tranf- 
 verfely, and, in fome perfons, the hairy fcalp 
 F z back,- 
 
68 ANATOMICAL 
 
 backwards*, but when the fore-part of it afts,. 
 it draws the flcin with the eye-brows downward, 
 and towards the nofe when we frown. 
 
 Q; Which is the orbicularis palpebrarum ? 
 
 A. The orbicularis palpebrarum furrounds 
 the eye-lids ; it arifes from the upper apophyfis 
 of the maxillary bone; it fhuts the eye-lids, 
 ferves to deprefs and draw forward the eye- 
 brow at the fame time, and elevates the lower 
 eyelids. 
 
 Which is the corrugator fupercilii? 
 
 A. The corrugator fupercilii is fo conjoined 
 with the orbicularis palpebrarum, that it may 
 be reckoned a part of it. 
 
 Which is the ciliaris? 
 
 A. The ciliaris is alfo a very fmall portioa 
 of the orbicularis, next the ciliary cartilages of 
 the eye-lids. 
 
 What are the tarfi ? 
 
 A. The tarfi are thin cartilages, forming the 
 principal part of the edge of each eye-lid ; their 
 ends connedled by a kind of fmall ligaments. 
 
 Q. What are the ligamenta tarforum lata ? 
 
 A. The broad ligaments of the tarfi are 
 fituated along both edges of each orbit, the 
 fuperior broader than the inferior, fixed to the 
 edges of the cartilages, fo that thefe ligaments 
 and the tarfi alone, reprefent the eye-lids. 
 
 Q. Which is the elevator palpebr^.? 
 
 A. The elevator palpebrae fuperioris is a very 
 thin mul’cle, whicii arifes from the periofteum 
 at the bottom of the orbit of the eye, where 
 the optic nerve goes through the cranium, and 
 
 is 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 69 
 
 is infcrted into the whole ciliary cartilage of 
 the upper eye- lid by a very thin, broad ten- 
 don. 
 
 What are the mufcles of the globe of 
 the eye ? 
 
 A. Four ftrait, viz. the elevator, depreflbr, 
 adduftor, and abdudtor ; and two oblique, the 
 fuperior and inferior. 
 
 Which is the elevator oculi ? 
 
 A. The redtus attollens, vel elevator oculi, 
 lies on the upper part of the globe, pulling up 
 the ball of the eye when we look up : it arifes 
 from the bottom of the orbit, between the op- 
 tic nerve and the elevator palpebrse fuperioris, 
 and is inferred in the upper part of the tunica 
 fclerotis, near the cornea. 
 
 Which is the depreflbr oculi ? 
 
 A. The redtus deprimens, vel depreflbr o- 
 culi, pulls down the eye: it arifes, and is in- 
 ferred diredlly oppofite to the elevator oculi. 
 
 Q. Which is the addudtor oculi ? 
 
 A. The redlus adducens, vel addudtor oc- 
 culi, draws the eye towards the nofe : it arifes 
 from the bottom of the orbit, near the optic 
 nerve internally, and is inferred into the tunica 
 fclerotis on the fide next the nofe. 
 
 Which is the abdudtor oculi .f* 
 
 J\. The redtus abducens, vel abdudtor o- 
 culi, draws the eye towards the little canthus, 
 and hath both its origin and infection diredtly 
 oppofite to the addudtor. Thefe four ftrait 
 mufcles terminate about the cornea by four 
 fhort, thin, flat tendons : when they all adt to- 
 . F 3 gether. 
 
70 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 gether, they draw the eye towards the bottom 
 of the orbit. 
 
 Q. Which is the obliquus inferior ? 
 
 A. The obliquus inferior arifes from the 
 lower fide of the orbit, near its external edge, 
 where the bones of the os maxilla fuperioris 
 join together ; it afcends obliquely over the de- 
 prefibr, and is inferred behind the tendon of 
 the abdudlor: it draws the globe of the eye 
 forward, and turns it upward. 
 
 Which is the obliquus fuperior? 
 
 A. The obliquus fuperior, vel trochlearis, 
 arifes from the bottom of the orbit, between 
 the elevator and addudlor oculi, and runs ob- 
 liquely towards the great canthus. In the up- 
 per and inner parts of the orbit, near its edge, 
 there is a cartilaginous ring or pulley, through 
 which this mufcle paflcs in a round tendon, 
 and is inferred near the bottom of the globe of 
 the eye, which it pitlls upward and inward, and 
 thereby directs the pupil outward and down- 
 ward. 
 
 Q. Which are the mufcles of the external 
 car ? 
 
 A. Befides the cartilage and ligament of the 
 ear, there is the elevator, anterior, and retrac- 
 tor auriculae, the helix major and minor, the 
 tragicus antiiragicus, and the tranfverfus auri- 
 culae : but all thefe mufcles are extremely finall, 
 and often fcarce difcernible without the help of 
 a microfcope. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilage and ligament of 
 the external e?r ? 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 71 
 
 A. The cartilage makes the greateft part of 
 the external ear, it being the bafis of all the 
 other parts, of which this portion of the ear is 
 made up. It is fixed to the cranium, not only 
 by the cartilaginous portion of the meatus au- 
 ditorius (which I (ball defcribe hereafter) but 
 alfo by two ligaments, one anterior, and the 
 other pofterior, oppofite to one another. 
 
 Which is the elevator auriculas ? 
 
 A. The attollens vei elevator aurici7lie, has 
 a very thin, tendinous origin from the tendon 
 of the occipito frontalis, and is inferred into 
 the back of the cartilage of the external ear. 
 
 Q. Which is the anterior auricula ? 
 
 A. The anterior auriculas is inferred into the 
 back of that part of the helix which divide* 
 the concha. 
 
 Which is the retracStor vel retrahens au- 
 ricula ? 
 
 A.. The retractor auricuIjE arifes by one, 
 two, or three fmall portions from the temporal 
 bone above the maxillary procefs : the upper 
 and middle portion is inferred into the lower 
 part of the back of the upper cavity of the ex- 
 ternal ear ; and the lower portion is inferred in- 
 to the back of the lower cavity. This mufele 
 pulls the ear backward. 
 
 Which is the helix major ? 
 
 A. The helix major arifes from the upper 
 part of the outer fide of the acute procefs of the 
 helix ; and is either inferred into the helix, or 
 clfe runs along the furface of the elevator. 
 
 Which is the helix minor? 
 
 F 4 
 
 A. The 
 
72 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The helix minor afcends near the helix 
 on the fore-part of the outer ear; one end is 
 fixed below the notch of the concha, the other 
 above it. 
 
 Which is the tragiens 
 
 A. The tragicus ariles from the cartilage of 
 the concha near the tragus, and terminates in 
 the upper part of the tragus, and adjacent part 
 of the concha. 
 
 Q. Which is the antitragicus ? 
 
 A. The antitragicus arifes from the outer 
 part of the cartilage of the antitragus, and is 
 inferred into the edge of the concha behind the 
 antitragus, at the bottom of the helix. 
 
 Q. Which is the tranfverfus auriculae ? 
 
 A. The tranfverfus auriculae is divided into 
 two parts: that belonging to the antihelix is 
 inferred into the back of the antihelix, and a 
 fmall part of it into the back of the fcapha; 
 that belonging to the fcapha is divided into fe- 
 veral parts for a confiderable length : it arifes 
 from the back of the fuperior cavity of the concha, 
 and is inferred into the back of the fcapha. 
 
 CX Wiiich are the mufcles of the internal 
 ear ? 
 
 A- The mufcles of the internal ear are, the 
 laxator tympani, externus mallei, internus mal- 
 lei, tenibr tympani, and llapedius. 
 
 Which is the laxator tympani ? 
 
 A. The laxator tympani arifes from the edge 
 of the tympanum, where the membrane of the 
 tympanum adheres, and is inferred into the 
 malleus. 
 
 Which 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 75 
 
 Q. Which is the externus mallei? 
 
 A. The externus mallei ariles from a pro- 
 cds of the fphenoidal bone, between the os 
 fquamofum and petrofum, and is infcrted into 
 the whole length of the bony channel, which 
 contains the auditory pafiage, 
 
 Q. Which is the incernus mallei ? 
 
 A. 'J'he internus mallei lies along the infide 
 of the Euftachian tube, fixed in the apophyfis 
 petrofa. 
 
 Q. Which is the tenfor tympani ? 
 
 A, 'I he tenfor tympani ariies from the up- 
 per part of the Euftachian tube, where it looks 
 towards the bafts of the fkull, and is of a car- 
 tilaginous nature : its tendon is inferted into 
 the handle of the malleus. 
 
 Q. Which is the ftapedius ? 
 
 A. The ftapedius is fituated within the fmali 
 bony pyramid at the bottom of the tympanum ; 
 its tendon goes through a fmali hole in the apex 
 of the pyramid, and is inferted into the back 
 part of the head of the ftapes. 
 
 Q. What are the mufcles of the nofe ? 
 
 A. 'I'wo comprefibrs, two elevators, and 
 two deprefibrs, befides the cartilages. 
 
 Which are the comprefibr narium ? 
 
 A. The comprefibr narium arifes on each 
 fide from the outer part of the root of the wings 
 of the nofe, goes over the back of the anterior 
 part ot the nofe, and are inferted in the move- 
 able cartilage which forms the ala of the 
 nares. 
 
 Q. Which are the elevator al^ nafi ^ 
 
 A. The 
 
74 
 
 A N A 1’ O M I C A L 
 
 A. The elevator alre nafi et elevator labii 
 iuperioris, has its origin trom the nafal procefs 
 of the upper jaw bone on each fide near the 
 greater cantluis of the eye: the extremities 
 which run through the upper lip, and are in- 
 ferted in the moveable cartilage, infert fibres as 
 they pafs into the upper part of the wings of the 
 nofe near the cheek. 
 
 Q. Which are the deprefibr alee nafi ? 
 
 A. The depreiTor alte nafi arifes on each fide 
 from the upper jaw- bone, where the gums 
 cover the fockets of the dentes incifores and 
 canini : it is inferted round the root of each 
 wing of the nofe, and under, or within each 
 rsoifril from the feptum nafi, w'here that joins 
 with the lip to the wing of the nofe. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the nofe? 
 
 A. The inferior portion of the external nofe 
 is compoi'ed of fevered cartilages, which are 
 commonly five, the la'-geft; the reft are un- 
 certain. I'he middle cartilage is the mofi con- 
 fiderable, and lupports the reft, being connedted 
 imniediattly to the bony parts; the other four 
 are connedted to the middle cartilage, and to 
 each other by means of ligaments. 
 
 Q. What are the mulcles of the mouth, lips, 
 chin, and cheeks ? 
 
 A. T'hefe are, the fphindfer oris, elevator 
 lab;! fuyenoris, deprefibr labii fuperioris vei 
 nafalis, elevator labii inferioris, deprefibr labii 
 ir.tenoris, elevator anguli oris, deprelTor an- 
 f-uli oris, elevator mtnti, zygomaticus, bucci- 
 nator, 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 75 
 
 nator, platyfma myoides, biventer, temporalis, 
 maffeter, pterygoideus internus and cxternus. 
 
 Which is the fphindler oris ? 
 
 A. Orbicularis, but more properly fphindler 
 vel conftridlor oris, lurrounds the whole mouth 
 about three-fourths of an inch broad. This 
 mufcle is very much intermixed with all the 
 mufcles that are inferred into it. 
 
 Which is the elevator labii fuperioris 
 proprius ? 
 
 A, The elevator labii fuperioris proprius, 
 arifes from the bones of the upper jaw under 
 the anterior and inferior part of the orbicularis 
 palpebrarum, and alfo from the os malte, and 
 is inferted into the upper part of the fphinfter 
 oris. This raifes the upper lip, and helps to di- 
 late the noftrils. 
 
 Which is the depreflbr labii fuperioris 
 proprius ? 
 
 A. I he depreflbr labii fuperioris propirus, is 
 a fmall mufcle arifing from the upper jaw, near 
 the dentes incifores, and is inferted into the up- 
 per part of the lip, and root of the cartilages of 
 the nofe •, hence it is alfo a depreflbr of the nofe, 
 which adlion conftnbls the noftrils. 
 
 Q. Which is the elevator labii inferioris pro- 
 prius ? 
 
 A. The elevator labii inferioris proprius, 
 arifes from the lower jaw, near the dentes inci- 
 fores, and is inferted into the lower part of the 
 under lip. 
 
 Which is the depreflfor labii inferioris 
 proprius ? 
 
 A. The 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The depreflbr labii inferioris proprius, 
 ariles broad from the lower jaw at the chin, 
 and is foon infertcd into the fphindler oris. 
 
 Which is the elevator anguli oris ? 
 
 A. The elevator anguli oris vel labiorum 
 communis, arifes from the fuperior maxilla un- 
 der the middle of the orbit, and is inferted into 
 the fphincler mufcle near the corner of the 
 mouth. 
 
 Which is the depreflbr anguli oris ? 
 
 A. 'i he depreflbr anguli oris vel labiorum 
 communis, arifes laterally from the lower jaw 
 near the chin, and is inferted into the fphindfer 
 oppofite to the elevator anguli oris. 
 
 C>. Which is ti'ie elevator menti ? 
 
 A. The elevator menti arifes from the fore- 
 part of the lower jaw, from the focket of the 
 lateral inciflve tooth, extending to the focket 
 of the next tooth on each fide. 
 
 Q. Which is the zygomaticus ? 
 
 The zygomaticus is a mufcle arifing 
 ' from the os zygoma, or mate, and is inferted 
 into the fpiiinffer at the corner of the mouth, 
 which it draws outward and upward. 
 
 Q. Which is the buccinator ? 
 
 A. '1 he buccinator arifeth broad and flefhy 
 from the fore-part of the proceflus coronts of 
 the lower jaw-bone, and adhering to the gums 
 ■ of both jaws, is inferred into the fphinder at 
 the angle of the lips it brings the food be- 
 tv/ecn the teeth in maftication, forces the breath 
 out of the mouth in blowing, &c. and pulls 
 >the lips or corner of the mouth outward, 
 5 Steno’s 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 u 
 
 Steno’s faiival du£t perforates this mufcle in 
 the middle. 
 
 Which is the platyfina myoides ? 
 
 A, The platyfma myoides, vel latiiTimus 
 eolli, is a broad, membranous mufde, exceed- 
 ing thin, and lies immediately under the ddn; 
 it arifes from the pedtoral mufcle below the cla- 
 vicle, and from part of the deltoide mufcle \ 
 it runs obliquely forward, covering all the 
 neck, rendering the unequal furface of the 
 mufcles even, and is inferred into the chin and 
 deprefibr mufcles of the lip. When it a£ls, it 
 pulls dovm the corner of the mouth and the 
 lower jaw : a convulfion herein is called the 
 cynic Ipafm. 
 
 Which is the biventer ? 
 
 A. The biventer, or digaftricus, arifes with 
 a hefhy belly from the upper part of the 
 maltoid procefs ; and defcending, it contrails 
 into a round tendon, which pafies through the 
 ftylo-hyoideus, and an annular ligament, which 
 is faftened to the os hyoides; then growing 
 flefhy again, it afcends towards the middle of 
 the edge of the anterior part of the lower jaw', 
 where it is inferred internally : when it ads, ic 
 pulls the lower jaw down by means of this 
 trochlea, or pulley, and ferves to draw up the 
 os hyoides, and parts annexed to it, in deglu- 
 tition, as well as to prevent the adion of fcve- 
 ral mufcles which are concerned in fwallowing 5- " 
 for which reafon we cannot fwallow at the 
 fame time that we open our mouth. 
 
 Q. Which is the temporalis ? 
 
 A. The 
 
anatomical 
 
 78 
 
 A. The temporalis arifes from part of tlie 
 os frontis, parietale, fphenoides, malae and 
 temporale •, from whence going under the two 
 procefies of the zygoma, it is inferted exter- 
 nally into the procelfus coronalis of the lower 
 jaw, which it pulls upward ; this mufcle is 
 covered with a Itrong tendinous fafcia. 
 
 Which is the malTeter? 
 
 A. The malTcter is a thick, flelhy mufcle, 
 fituated at the back part of the cheek •, it arifes 
 from the interior part of the os mate and the 
 zygomatic procefs, which joins this from the 
 temporal bones: it is inferted into the angle of 
 the lower jaw, which it pulls upward and for- 
 ward ; over this mufcle paffes Steno’s I'alival 
 dudt. 
 
 Which is the pterygoideus internus ? 
 
 A. The pterygoideus internus arifes from 
 the pterygoide procefles, and is inferted inter- 
 nally into the angle of the lower jaw, which it 
 pulls upward. 
 
 Q. Which is the pterygoideus externus? 
 
 A. The pterygoideus externus arifes from 
 the os maxillare and os fphenoides, and is in- 
 ferted internally into the condyloide procefs of 
 the lower jaw, which it pulls to one fide, and 
 forwards, or, adling with its partner, pulls the 
 jaw direcftly forward. 
 
 Q. Which are the mufcles of the palate ? 
 
 A. The mufcles of the palate are the ptery- 
 goftaphylinus internus and externus, thyrofta- 
 phyiinus, and gluffoflaphylinus, 
 
 Q. Which 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 7 ? 
 
 Which is the pterygohaphylinus intcr- 
 
 nus ? 
 
 A. The pterygodaphylinus internus arilcs 
 from the os I'phenoides, near the tuba Euliachi- 
 ana, and is inferted into the uvula, which it 
 pulls up while we breathe through the i)iouth, 
 or Iwallow. 
 
 Which is t!te pterygoltapiiy liiuis e:cter- 
 
 nus ? 
 
 A. The j)tcrygofbaphylinus externus, ariles 
 by the fide of the laft mentioned mufcle, and is 
 alfo inferted near it •, but becomes its antagonift 
 by being relledfed on a pulley over a procefs ac 
 the lower part of the pterygoidal procefies of 
 the fphenoidal bone. 
 
 Which is the thyroftaphylinus ? 
 
 A, 1 he thyroftaphylinus ariles from the la- 
 teral part of the thyroide cartilage ; andalcenti- 
 ing towards the uvula, is inferted in the manner 
 of an arch in the fide of the velum palacinum. 
 
 Q. Which is the glolTo-ftaphylinus ? 
 
 A. The gloftb-ftaphylinui palles from the 
 tongue to the palate, which it pulls down when 
 we breathe through the nofe. 'I'he palate icielf 
 is a fort of double mufcle, whole acfion feerriS 
 only to fupport icielf, and alnft chofe mufcles 
 which pull It upwards. 
 
 Q. What are the mufcles of the os hyoides ? 
 
 A. 'I he os hyoides is rr.oved by five pair of 
 mufcles, viz. the geniohyoidcus, llernohyoideus, 
 mylohyoideus, coracohyoideus, and ftylohyoi- 
 deus. 
 
 What is the geniohyoideus ? 
 
 A. The 
 
8o 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The geniohyoideus arifes from the fore- 
 part of the lower jaw internally, and is inferted 
 into the bafis of the os hyoides, v.^hich it pulls 
 upward and forward. 
 
 Which is the fternohyoideus ? 
 
 A. It is an antagonift to the lafh-mentioiied 
 mufcle, and arifes from the infide of the under 
 part of the clavicle near the fternum ; and 
 alcending above the geniohyoideus, is inferted 
 into the bafis of the os hyoides, which it pulls 
 downward. 
 
 Which is the mylohyoideus ? 
 
 A. The mylohyoideus arii'es from the infide 
 of the bottom of the lower jaw, under the 
 dentes molares, and is inferted into the bafis of 
 the os hyoides. Its common ufe is to move 
 the os hyoides, tongue, and larynx, both up- 
 v/ards, inwards, and fideways ; and when it is 
 at reft, it has a farther ufe, viz. to comprefs 
 the glands under the tongue, and by this means 
 promote the difcharge of the laliva into the 
 mouth from the lower falival dudts j v/hence 
 it is we ufe this mufcle when we want laliva in 
 the mouth. 
 
 Q. Which is the coracohyoideus ? 
 
 A. The coracohyoideus is an antagonift to 
 the laft- mentioned mufcle, and arifes from the 
 upper edge of the fcapula •, and paffing oblique- 
 ly under the maftoideus, is inferted into the ba- 
 fis of the os hyoides, and draws it obliquely 
 downwards. 
 
 Which is the ftyiohyoideus ? 
 
 A. 1 he ftyiohyoideus arifes from the ftyloide 
 
 procefs, 
 
DIALOGUES. 8i 
 
 procefs, and is inferted in die horn and bafe 
 of the os hyoides, which it pulls upv/ard and 
 backward. This mufde is often perforated 
 about the middle, by the tendon of the digal- 
 tric mufcle of the lower jaw. 
 
 What are the mufcles of the tongue, be- 
 fides thofe of the os hyoides, already men- 
 tioned ? 
 
 A. The mufcles of the tongue (befides thofe 
 of the os hyoides already mentioned) are, ge- 
 nioglolTus, bafiogioffus, ceratoglofius, ftyio- 
 gloffus, chondrogloITus, linguahs, and the 
 tongue itfelf. 
 
 Which is the geniogloflus ? 
 
 A. The geniogloirus arifes from the fore- 
 part of the lower jaw internally, and is inferted 
 broad into the under part of the root of the 
 tongue. When this mufcle and its fellow a6f, 
 they pull the tongue forwards, and thruft ic 
 out of the mouth. 
 
 Which is the bafiogioffus ? 
 
 A. The bafiogioffus arifes from the bafis of 
 the os hyoides, and is inferted into the tongue 
 near its apex or tip. Its ufe (with the affilf- 
 ance of the ceratogloffus) is to draw the tongue 
 backward, and make it fhorcer. 
 
 Q, Which is the ceratogloffus.^ 
 
 A. The ceratogloffus arifes from the horn 
 of the os hyoides ; whence ic has its name. It 
 is inferted laterally into the tongue, near its 
 root, and draws the tongue obliquely on one 
 fide; but if both aid at once, the tongue is 
 pulled direflly backwards into the mouth. 
 
 G Which 
 
82 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 Which is the ftylogloflus ? 
 
 A. The ftyloglofius arifes from the apex of 
 the flyloide procefs, and is inferred into the 
 root of the tongue, which it moves upward 
 and backward. 
 
 Which is the chondroglofllis ? 
 
 A. The chondroglofTus arifes from the car* 
 tilaginous procefs of the os hyoides, meeting in 
 the bafis of the tongue, where they are infert- 
 ed i but this pairjis not found in all fubjefts. 
 
 Q: Which is the lingualis ? 
 
 A. The lingualis arifes pretty large and 
 flefliy from the bafis of the tongue laterally, and 
 runs ftrait forwards to its apex or tip. Its ufe 
 is to contract or narrow the fubftance of the 
 tongue, and at the fame time to bring it back- 
 wards and downwards. 
 
 What is the tongue itfelf? 
 
 A. The tongue itfelf is a mufcle made up of 
 fibres longitudinal, circular, and tranfverfe. 
 This is the interior part of the tongue •, thofe 
 I have before mentioned form the exterior part 
 of the tongue, being inferred in it, and form- 
 ing one body. 
 
 What are the mufcles which move the 
 head on the trunk 
 
 A. The mufcles which move the head on the 
 trunk are theredfus internus major and minor, 
 the redlus pofticus major and minor, redlus la- 
 teralis, and the obliquus inferior and fuperior. 
 
 Which is the reclus internus major ? 
 
 A. The redlus capites internus major anti- 
 «us, arifes from the anterior part of the tranf- 
 verfe 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 Verfe apophyfes of the five lower vertebra of 
 the neck, and paffing over the two fuperior ver- 
 tebrae is inferted into the os occipitis. This 
 mufcle bends the head forward on the firft and 
 fecond vertebra of the neck. 
 
 Which is the redlus internus minor ? 
 
 A. The rectus capitis internus minor anti- 
 cus, arifes from the anterior furface of the atlas 
 or firft vertebra of the neck ; it is inferred into 
 the os occipitis. This mufcle alfo moves the 
 head forward on the firft vertebra. 
 
 Which is the redliis major pofticus ? 
 
 A. The rectus capitis major pofticus, is one 
 of the extenfors of the head, which arifes from 
 the fpinal apophyfis of the fecond vertebra of 
 the neck, and is inferted into the lower part of 
 the os occipitis. It pulls the head back on the 
 firft and fecond vertebra. 
 
 Which is the rectus minor pofticus ? 
 
 A. The recftus capitis minor pofticus is alfo 
 an extenfor of the head, having its rife from 
 the pofterior part of the atlas, and is alfo in- 
 ferted in the os occipitis, to pull the head back 
 on the atlas or. firft vertebra. 
 
 Q. Which is the reftus lateralis ? 
 
 A. The redtus lateralis arifes from the an- 
 terior part of the tranfverfe procefs of the atlas ; 
 and is inferted partly into the os occipitis, and 
 partly into the os temporis. This turns the 
 head on one fide. 
 
 Which is the redus capitis obliquus in- 
 ferior ? 
 
 G 2 Cb The 
 
S4 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The obliquus capitis inferior five major, 
 arifes from the fpinal apophyfis of the fecond 
 vertebra of the neck, and is inferted into the 
 tranfverfe apophyfis of the firft vertebra. When 
 this afts, it turns the head with the atlas in a 
 rotatory manner on the fecond vertebra. 
 
 Which is the reftus capitis obliquus fu- 
 perior ? 
 
 A. The obliquus capitis fuperior five minor, 
 arifes from the end of the tranfverfe apophyfis 
 of the atlas, and is inferted into the os occipitis, 
 and back part of the os temporis. When but 
 one of thele a6ts, it afllfts the re6lus lateralis on 
 the fame fide ; but when they adt both toge- 
 ther, they pull the head back. 
 
 Cb What is contained in the head, or what is 
 the vifcera of the head ? 
 
 A. The parts contained in the cranium are 
 the brain. 
 
 What is the brain ? 
 
 A. 1 he brain is a foft white mafs, in which 
 all the organs of fenfe terminate, and the foul 
 is fuppofed to refide. The brain is furrounded 
 by two membranes called meninges and matres : 
 thefe are the dura mater, and the pia mater j 
 fome make the external lamina of the latter to 
 be a diftindt membrane called arachnoides. The 
 general mafs is divided into three particular 
 portions, viz. the cerebrum, or brain, proper- 
 ly fo called ; the cerebellum j and the medulla 
 oblongata. And fome add a fourth, viz. the 
 medulla fpinalisj which is a continuation of 
 
D I L O G U E S. §5 
 
 the medulla oblongata, and fills the great canal 
 of the fpina dorfi. 
 
 What is the cerebrum ? 
 
 A. The cerebrum or brain, properly fo call- 
 ed, is a kind of medullary mafs, of a greyifh 
 colour on its outer furface, filling all the cavity 
 of the upper and fore part of the cranium, which 
 lies above the tranfverfe feptum. The upper 
 part is of an oval figure, like half an egg cut 
 lenthways, or rather like two quarters of an 
 egg, and parted a little from each other : it is 
 flatter on the lower part-, each lateral half of 
 which is divided into three eminences called 
 lobes one anterior, one middle, and one pof- 
 terior. The human brain is three times as 
 much in quantity as the brain of an ox it be- 
 ing in general about four pounds weight. The 
 fubftance of the cerebrum is of two kinds. 
 The exterior or cortical part, and the interior 
 or medullary part. The former is about a 
 fixth of an inch in thicknefs, foftifli, and of a 
 greyifh or afh colour the latter is more folid, 
 and very white, and terminates in the beginning 
 of the nerves. Befides the lobes I have already 
 mentioned, the upper fide of the cerebrum i-s 
 divided into two hemifpheres by the procelTus 
 falciformis of the dura mater ; and its lower 
 fide into four lobes ; two anterior and two pof- 
 terior : the latter much the largeft. At the 
 meeting of the four lobes appears the infundi- 
 bulum, which is a kind of lymphatic running 
 from the ventricles of the brain, piercing the 
 dura mater upon the bafis of the fkull, and 
 G 3 finks 
 
86 
 
 A N A T O rvl ! C A L 
 
 finks into the fubftance of the glandula pituj- 
 taria; which gland is feated in the fella Turcica. 
 Between the two hemifpheres is the corpus cal- 
 lofum, a hard white fubftance. The ventricles 
 of the brain are cavities lined with a fine fmooth 
 membrane, from the pia mater. They are four 
 in number, and all communicate with one ano- 
 ther, The two called anterior, lateral, or fu- 
 perior are very extenfive; the other two, called 
 the third and fourth, are very i'mall in compari- 
 fon with thefe. The lateral ventricles are di- 
 vided by an extreme thin membrane or parti- 
 tion, called feptum lucidum under v/hich is the 
 fornix the hinder part of which divides into two 
 parts called the crura fornicis or pedes hypo- 
 campi. In the bafis of the lateral ventricles 
 are eight prominences ; tw o anterior, called cor- 
 pora ftriata, from their afh colour lines-, and the 
 two thalami nervorum opticorum, fo named 
 becaufe thefe nerves arife chiefiy from them. 
 The other four are fmall i two anterior called 
 nates cerebri, and tw'O pofterior called teftes 
 cerebri. ' Upon the beginning of the thalami 
 nervorum opticorum, are fituated a nuniber of 
 blood veffels, glands, and lymphtedudls, called 
 plexus choroides. Under tlie beginning of the 
 jornix is a foramen called iter ad infundibulum j 
 and under its middle, one called foramen pof- 
 terius,' which is covered with a valve named 
 membrana vel valvula magna cerebri. 
 
 What is the cerebellum ? 
 
 A. The cerebellum lies under the poderior 
 lobes of the cerebrum or brain^ in the lower 
 
 part 
 
DIALOGUES. 87 
 
 part of the cavity of 'the cranium ; its figure is 
 nearly globular, its fuperficies is not fo circum- 
 voluted and winding as that of the cerebrum, 
 but furrowed, deprefied, and largeft in the 
 middle, terminating in the vermiform procefs. 
 The fubftance of the cerebellum is much the 
 fame as that of the cerebrum, only its cortical 
 part is more in quantity than the medullary ; 
 the latter is elegantly branched out like fhrubs 
 or little trees, the trunks of which are the bafis 
 of the cerebellum, and are what are called its 
 peduncles •, the lobules of the cerebellum ad- 
 here in clufters to the arbufeuli medullares, are 
 furrounded by the pia mater, and compofe the 
 far greater part of the cerebellum. 
 
 What is the medulla oblongata ? 
 
 A. The medulla oblongata is a medullary 
 continuation of the medullary part of the cere- 
 brum and cerebellum, formed into a kind of 
 tail, and extended to the great foramen in the 
 os occipitis, where it gives origin to the medul- 
 la fpinalis, and to the nerves of the brain, where 
 it divides, or appears like two bodies, is called 
 crura medullae oblongatse ; its union, iflhmus, 
 and the eminence beyond it procefTus annularis. 
 The medulla oblongata is a third general part 
 of the encephalon or whole mafs of the brain, 
 cerebrum, and cerebellum. 
 
 What is the medulla fpinalis ? 
 
 A, The medulla fpinalis is a continuation of 
 the medulla oblongata, through the great fora- 
 men of the fkull, and through the bony canal 
 of the fpina dorfi, to the extremity of the os 
 G 4 facrum ; 
 
ss 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 iacrum ; its thicknefs in general is nearly equal 
 to that of a finger •, but it is not uniformly of 
 the fame fize tlironghoutf The lower part in 
 the os facrum is called cauda equina from its 
 refemblance. Its fubllance is nearly the fame 
 as that of the medulla oblongata, but fome- 
 what tougher and more firm ; the medullary 
 fubftance is here outwardly, that the nerves may 
 eafily make their way out, and the cortical like 
 part inwardly. To cover the nicdulla fpinalis,. 
 next the bony canal of the fpine internally, is a 
 very ftrong tunica, which connedlsthe vertebrae 
 within ; then the cellular or adipofe coat, (which 
 containing more or lefs fat, feems defined by 
 nature to foften the former) and the dura and 
 pia mater (which I finall by and by defcribe.) 
 The dura mater, in its anterior part, is firmly 
 connecled with the vertebrs, but its pofterior 
 part is loole and fluctuating ; the pia mater 
 furrounds every part of the medulla fpinalis, 
 and all the nerves that arife from it, and enters 
 alio its longitudinal divifion. '1 he arteries and 
 veins of the medulla fpinalis enter at the aper- 
 tures of the vertebrae, which give palTage out 
 to the nerves, and come from the vertebrals of 
 the neck, intercoftals, and the lumbar. The 
 nerves of the fpine are thirty-two pairs, arifing 
 from the medulla, connected by and covered 
 with rr.embranes : the ufe of the fpinal marrow 
 is to give origin to thefe nerves, v^hich are prin- 
 cipally difributed to the limbs and external 
 parts, and to fecrete and prepare a nervous 
 fluid, 
 
 Q,. What 
 
dialogues. 
 
 What are the coverings of the brain, viz, 
 the cerebrum, cerebellum, and medulla oblon- 
 gata ? 
 
 A. Two membranes named dura mater and 
 pia mater, the latter is the innermoft ; the former 
 is the external menibrane, which covers the 
 \vhole. 
 
 Q; What is the pia mater ? 
 
 A. The pia mater is a thin and exceeding 
 fine double membrane, which immediately, and 
 firmly, involves the brain clofely, finks into all 
 its cavities and furro'ws •, its outer membrane is 
 by fome made a diftinct coat, and called arach- 
 noides. The pia mater covers alfo the medul- 
 la i'pinalis, and its membranes adhere very 
 clofely and firmly to one another in the upper 
 part of the head, but much lefs fo with the 
 dura mater. The ufe of this membrane is to 
 contain the brain, and fupport the blood vcf- 
 fels, which run here in great number, with a 
 multiplicity of turnings and windings, that the 
 blood may not enter the brain too impetuoufly, 
 and for the veins to unite on, that they may 
 enter the finufes in fewer and larger branches. 
 In fhort, it feems in a manner wholly compofed 
 of blood veflcls'; whofe difiribution through all 
 its furrows and anfracluofities ferves alfo to 
 fecrete proper fluids in the brain, and to form 
 the animal fpirits. d he arteries are from the 
 internal carotids and vertebrals : fome of the 
 veins difcliarge themfelves into the finufes of 
 the dura mater, and others immediately into the 
 jugular and vertebral veins. 
 
 Q, What 
 
5 © 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 What is the dura mater ? 
 
 A . The dpra mater is a very com pad, kroner, 
 thick membrane, covering the pia mater*, it 
 lines the infide ot the cranium, and fupplies the 
 place of an internal periofteum, firmly adher- 
 ing to its bafis, and but lightly at the upper 
 part, except at the futures *, it is fpread in all 
 the holes and depreffions, and covers all the 
 eminences of the flcull, to prevent their being 
 hurtful to the brain. It has three procefles ; 
 the firft, named falx, begins at the crifta galli, 
 and runs backwards under the futura fagittalis 
 to the cerebellum, dividing the cerebrum into 
 two hemifpheres : its ufe feems to be to divide 
 the brain lb as to render it lefs liable to be 
 moved in the fltull, by any violent motiora 
 of the head and the under fide of the brain 
 is kept fteady by the inequalities of the bafis 
 of the fkull v/hich the brain is exadly 
 fitted to. The fecond procefs runs from the 
 former to the os petrofum, and prevents the 
 cerebrum from prefiing on the cerebellum : 
 from this runs a third procefs, and both ferve 
 alfo to keep tire brain fteady. The dura mater 
 receives arteries from the carotids, beautifully 
 ramified like flirubs. Its veins are of two, 
 kinds ; fome as in other parts of the body, and 
 others of a triangular figure, called finufes, the 
 latter give warmth to the brain, k has ner ves 
 for fenfation from the fifth and eighth pair 
 of the brain. The dura mater has a motion, 
 faid to be peculiar to itfeif, and of a mufcular 
 kind but it is much more natural to fuppofe 
 
 it 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 91 
 
 it owing to the pulfations of the arteries of the 
 brain. There are alfo a number of fmall glands 
 in the finufes and fides of the dura mater, and 
 between it and the pia mater, defcribed by Pa- 
 chonius, and feem deftined for the fecreting of a 
 fluid to mioiften the dura mater, 
 
 Q: What are the arteries of the brain ? 
 
 A. The arteries that fupply the cerebrum, 
 cerebellum, and medulla oblongata come partly 
 from the carotids, which enter the cranium 
 through the canals in the apophyfis petrofe, and 
 partly from the vertebrals which enter by the 
 occipital foramen. I fhall be more particular 
 when I fpeak of the arteries of the head. 
 
 Cb What are the veins of the brain ? 
 
 A. The veins of the brain are branches of 
 the finufes of the dura mater, already mention- 
 ed : their principal ramifications accompany all 
 the cortical circumvolutions of the cerebrum, 
 and diredfions of the flrata of the cerebellum, 
 running always in the duplicature of the pia 
 mater : the veins of the plexus choroides in ge- 
 neral, are of the number of thefe abovemen- 
 tioned, of which I lliall be more particular 
 hereafter. 
 
 What are the nerves of the brain ? 
 
 A. In the lower part of the medulla oblon- 
 gata, are dillinguilbed the nerves of the brain, 
 which are commonly faid to be ten pair, though 
 in reality only nine, as follows in Latin verfes : 
 
 Olfaciens, cernens, oculofque movens, paiien/que, 
 
 Qujlans, abducens, audienjhue, vagaafque, loquenfque. 
 
 I fiiall 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 92 
 
 I fhall alfo be more particular when I come to 
 mention the nerves of the head hereafter. 
 
 What is the glandula pinealis ? 
 
 A. The glandula pinealis is a fmall gland, 
 fituated behind the thalami nervorum optico- 
 rum, in the third ventricle of the brain, adher- 
 ing very clofely to the plexus choroides, by 
 which it is covered, called pinealis, from its 
 refembling a pine apple. 
 
 Vf hat is the glandula pituitaria ? 
 
 A. The glandula pituitaria is a gland' of the 
 brain, about the bignefs of a very large pea, 
 partly greyirh, partly reddifh, and white with- 
 in ; it is feated in the fella of the os fphenoides, 
 between the Iphenoidal folds of the dura mater, 
 and is covered by the pia mater as by a bag, the 
 opening of which is the extremity of the infun- 
 dibulum, from which it receives a lymph or 
 juice, which the infundibulum derives from the 
 plexus choroides and pineal gland ; from this 
 ]) mph, the gland takes its name •, it alio fil- 
 trates a juice itfelf, feparating from the blood a 
 white liquor, very fubtile, and apparently very 
 fpirituous. 
 
 What are the arteries of the head ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the head, both external 
 and internal, proceed from the carotids, cervicals, 
 and vertebrais-, and their branches are called 
 by the names of the parts they are beftowed up- 
 on, as lingualcs, tcmporales, occipitales, &c. 
 The origin of the arteries of the head I lhall 
 fpeak of hereafter, in deferibing thofe of the 
 neck and trunk. 
 
 I, Arteri^, 
 
dialogues. 
 
 T. 'Arteria carotis externa, or external carotid 
 artery is anterior, and fmaller than the internal 
 carotid •, its trunk runs up between the external 
 angle of the lower jaw, and the parotid gland, 
 ■which it fupplies as it paffes afterwards it 
 afcends on the forefide of the ear, and ends in 
 the temple. In this courfe it fends off five 
 principal internal branches, and three principal 
 external branches. The internal branches are, 
 I. Sublingualis vel ranina, to the mufcles of 
 the os hyoides, the tongue and glanduls fub- 
 linguales. 2. Maxillaris inferior, to the maxil- 
 lary, parotid, and fublingual glands, ftyloide, 
 and maftoide mAifcles, mufcles of the pharynx, 
 and to the fmall flexors of the head. 3. Maxil- 
 laris externa, to the maffeter, middle of the 
 lower jaw, angles of the mouth, buccinator, 
 and elevator mend, and a particular one to the 
 Iphinfler oris, which forms a kind of coronaria 
 labiorum, and from thence it goes to all parts- 
 of the nofe, and, laftly, to the great angle of 
 the eye, where it is ramified and loft on the 
 mufculus orbicularis palpebrarum, luperciliaris, 
 and frontalis, and is named arteria angularis. 
 4. Maxillaris interna, to the mufcles of the 
 palate, glandular membrane of the pofterior 
 nares, and to all the parts contained within the 
 orbits of the eyes. A fmall branch then enters 
 the cranium through the fphenoidal filTure, and 
 is fpent upon the dura mater ; another fmall 
 branch goes to the maxillary finus and teeth ; 
 a principal branch runs through the canal of 
 the lower jaw to the alveoli and teeth, and goes 
 4 out 
 
$ {. A N A T O M I C A L 
 
 out at the hole near the chin to the neighbour- 
 ing mufcles ; a third principal branch goes up’ 
 between the external and internal carotid to the 
 dura mater. 5. A principal branch goes to the 
 mafleter mufcle. The external branches are, 
 i. Occipitalis, to the mufcles and integuments 
 of the os occipitis, and a branch to the maf- 
 toide foramen. 2. A principal branch fupplies 
 both the external and internal ear. 3. The 
 trunk of the external carotid runs Up (as I 
 have before obferved) between the external 
 angle of the lower jaw and parotid gland, which 
 having fupplied it, forms the temporal artery, 
 which divides into an interior, middle, and 
 poflerior branch •, the anterior to the mufculus 
 frontalis, and fometimes to the internal apo- 
 phyfis of the os malte all the way to the orbits 5 
 the middle one to the mufculus frontalis and 
 occipitalis ; and the poflerior to the occiput. 
 All thefe branches likewife furnilh the integu- 
 ments ? 
 
 II. Arteria carotis interna, the internal caro- 
 tid artery having paffed the great canal of the 
 apophyfis petrofa of the os temporis, fends off 
 a branch through the fphenoidal fiflure to the 
 orbit and eye, and foon after another through 
 the foramen opticum, by which it communi- 
 cates with the external carotid. It then runs 
 under the bafts of the brain to the fide of the 
 infundibulum, where it commonly divides into 
 two branches ; the anterior branch runs for- 
 v/ard under the brain, and after fending olf 
 fmall arteries to the olfadory nerves, it divides 
 
dialogues. 9| 
 
 into two or three branches ; the firfl of thefe 
 branches goes to the anterior lobe of the brain j 
 the fecond to the corpus callofum, falx of the 
 dura mater, and middle lobe of the brains the 
 third to the pofterior lobe of the brain : the 
 pofterior branch, after communicating with the 
 vertebral artery, is ramified on, and between 
 the fuperficial circumvolutions of the brain all 
 the way to the bottom of the fulci. All thefe 
 ramifications are covered by the pia mater, in 
 the duplicature of which they are diflributed, 
 and form capillary reticular textures in great 
 numbers ; and afterwards they are lofl in the 
 inner fubftance of the brain. From thefe mi- 
 nute divifions of the arteries in the pia mater 
 before they enter the brain, it would feem as 
 if the pulfe of larger arteries would make too 
 violent an impreffion on fo tender and delicate 
 a part : and, perhaps, it may be from an in- 
 creafe of the impulfe of the arteries in the 
 brain, which ftrong liquors produce, that the 
 nerves are fo much interrupted in their func- 
 tions throughout the whole body, when a man 
 is intoxicated with drinking ; and may it not 
 alfo be from a like caufe that men are delirious 
 in fevers. 
 
 III. Arteris cervicales, arife from the fub- 
 clavian arteries (1 fhall hereafter defcribe) and 
 afcend to the head through the foramina, in the 
 tranfverfe proceffes of the cervical vertebrse, 
 and into the fkull through the tenth or great 
 foramen, and pierce the dura mater s thefe two 
 arteries uniting foon after their entrance, giv^e 
 
 off 
 
96 ANATOMICAL 
 
 eff branches to the cerebellum, and then pair- 
 ing forward, divide and communicate with the 
 carotids ; and the carotid arteries communicat- 
 ing with each other, there is an entire commu- 
 nication between them all. Thefe cervical ar- 
 teries Window calls arteriee vertebrales. 
 
 What are the veins of the head ? 
 
 A. The veins of the head are the jugular and 
 the cervical or vertebral veins. Their origin I 
 diall mention hereafter, i. Ven$ jiigulares 
 externa;, or the external jugular veins, are fome- 
 times double from their origins ; and when they^ 
 are fing;le, each of them divides afterwards into 
 two, one anterior, and the other pofcerior, or 
 rather fuperior. The anterior branch is often 
 a branch of the internal jugular, and fome- 
 times arifes from the communication of 
 the two jugulars, and fometimes, but very 
 rarely, from the vena axillaris. It runs up- 
 ward to the lateral parts of the lower jaw, 
 between the angle and the chin, and fends 
 feveral branches forwards, backwards, and in- 
 wards j forwards to the maxillary glands, di- 
 gadic mufcle, mufclcs and integuments of tlie 
 chin and under lip •, backv/ards, it fends a fmall 
 branch a little below the lowerjaw, which com- 
 ''municates with the jugularis externa poderior; 
 inwards to the glandulte fublinguales, to the 
 tongue, called ven^ raninse, to the mufcles of 
 the angles of the lips and neighbouring parts ; 
 alfo to the mufcles of the palate, feptum palati, 
 amygdalae, uvula, and to the membrane which 
 lines the arch of the palate. The trunk of 
 
 the 
 
DIALOGUES. ^9? 
 
 tiie anterior external jugular vein goes from the 
 angle of the lower jaw to the internal angle of 
 the orbit, fending branches on each fide to the 
 mufcles and integuments of the face, and takes 
 the name of vena angularis. This trunk fends 
 off branches to the upper lip^ cartilages, and 
 part of the nofe^ eye-lids, and forehead, v/hich 
 laft is called frontalis ; a branch alfo commu- 
 nicates with the finufes of the dura mater, en- 
 tering the orbit by the orbitary finus of the eye. 
 The pofterior branch or fuperior external jugu- 
 lar vein, runs up toward the parotid gland, and 
 lower anterior part of the eye, giving out feve- 
 ral confiderable branches toward each fide : at 
 its origin a principal branch is fent out pofteri- 
 orly, called vena mufcularis, and a little higher 
 lip the vena cervicalis, (which I Ihall fpeak off 
 hereafter) backward, it detaches the vena occi- 
 pitalis to the occiput, and fends a fmall vein 
 through the pofterior maftoide hole, which ter- 
 minates in one of the lateral finufes of the dura 
 mater. It then communicates with the anterior 
 external jugular, under the angle of the lower 
 jaw, and pafies through the parotid gland, fome= 
 times giving off feveral branches, which very 
 foon unite together, and form areolse or mefliesg 
 through which the nerves pafs. Afterwards it 
 paffes before the ear, taking the name of vena 
 temporalis, which is diftributed to the temples 
 and lateral parts of the head, towards the oc- 
 ciput and forehead, fending branches alfo to 
 the temporal mufcle, to the neighbouring parts 
 of the upper jaw, and to the infide of the lower 
 H iaw. 
 
98 ANATOMICAL 
 
 jaw. The branches of the external jugular all 
 communicate with one another, and with the 
 jugularis interna. 2. Vena jugularis interna, 
 the internal jugular vein, is the largeft of all 
 thofe that go to the head (its origin I fliall men- 
 tion hereafter). This vein detaches a branch 
 np toward the parotid gland, and angle of the 
 lower jaw, where it fends off branches to the 
 mufcies oF the os hyoides, and fometimes a 
 branch called vena m axillaris interna. Ano- 
 ther branch is fent backward to the occiput, 
 communicating with a branch of the vena ver- 
 tebralis, and with the lateral finus of the dura 
 mater. Moll of thefe branches communicate 
 with the external jugulars. 3. Vena vertebra- 
 lis, tlie vertebral vein (whofe origin I lhail 
 mention hereafter) proceeds to the foramen oc- 
 cipitale, and communicates with the occipital 
 veins and occipital finufes of the dura mater. 
 This vein fends branches to the fmall interior 
 mufcies of the head, and fometimes, though 
 not always, a branch communicates with the 
 lateral finus of the dura mater. 
 
 CT, What are the nerves of the head ? 
 
 A. The nerves of the head are ten pair pro- 
 ceeding from the encephalon as 1 have before 
 obferved, page 36. 
 
 What are their names, from whence their 
 origin, and how diftributed ? 
 
 A. I. The firff pair are the nervi olfadforii, 
 or olfadtory nerves, which arife from the cor- 
 pora ftriata of the brain, between the anterior 
 and middle lobes j they go out through the 
 
 foramina 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 99 
 
 foramina of the os cribriforme, and are imme- 
 diately fpread on the membrane which covers 
 the os fpongiofum, and lines all the internal parts 
 of the nofe ; they communicate with the nervi 
 opthalmici and maxillaris fuperior. I'hefe 
 nerves are the immediate inllrum.ents of fmell- 
 ing. 2. The fecond pair are the nervi optici 
 or optic nerves, which arife from the eminences 
 of the cerebrum, called thalami nervorum op- 
 ticorum •, they pafs out through their proper 
 hole in the fphenoide bone, and enter the globe 
 of the eye, to be expanded upon the mem bran a 
 retini. The blood veflels running through the 
 middle of thefe nerves, and the ramifications of 
 the retina, are very ferviceable, whence we may 
 deduce the reafon of Picard’s experiments of 
 fuch obje( 5 ts as fall on the entry of the optic 
 nerve being loft to us ; and hence alfo an ac- 
 count may be given of an amatirofis, or gutta 
 ferena. 3. The third pair are the nervi mo- 
 tores oculorum, which arife at the anterior part 
 of the proceffus annularis, and going out at the 
 foramen lacerum, are diftributed to the globe 
 of the eye and its mufcles. 4. The fourth pair, 
 are the nervi pathetici, and are the fmalleil of 
 any •, they arile from the anterior lateral part of 
 the proceffus annularis of the medulla oblon- 
 gata, go out at the foramina lacera, and are 
 entirely fpent on the mufculi obliqui fuperiores 
 oculorum vel trochleares-, and as thofe mufcles 
 act in ogling, ftaring, &c. their nerves are 
 named pathetici. 5. The fifth pair, arc the 
 nervi gullatorii vd trigemini, and are the big- 
 H 2 geit 
 
100 ANATOMICAL 
 
 gefi: of the brain ; they arife from the Tides of 
 the annular procefs, giving nerves to the dura 
 rnater, then each divides into three branches; the 
 iirft branches helps to form the intercoftal, and 
 then goes to the orbit, (by the name of orbita- 
 rius vel opthalmicus) lachrymal gland, fat, 
 membranes, and palpebras of the eye, mem- 
 brana narium, the mufcles and integuments of 
 the forehead. Hence we eafily difcover what 
 parts is affefted in the megrim (which is a 
 difeafe caufing great pain in the temple and fore 
 part of the head) when the eye- ball and fore- 
 head are racked, and a heat is felt within the 
 nofe. Hence alio we may learn how the mufcles 
 of refpiration come to be fo much affefled on 
 the application of any acrid irritating fubftance 
 to the membrana narium, as to produce that 
 violent convulfive motion fneezing ; the fecond 
 branch, or maxillaris fuperior, pafies out through 
 the round foramen of the 'fphenoide bone, and 
 immediately gives nerves to the fat under the 
 temporal mulcle, palate, finus fphenoidalis, and 
 noftrils •, the remaining trunk fupplies the an- 
 trum Highmorianum (which is a cavity in the 
 maxillary, or jaw bone) and teeth of the up- 
 per jaw, then comes out at the orbiter externus 
 hole, and is fpent on the mufculus orbicularis 
 palpebrarum, nofe, and upper lip. The third 
 branch, or maxillaris inferior, goes out at the 
 fourth hole of the fpherloidal bone, and foon 
 fplitting into a great many branches, is diftri- 
 buted to the mufculus temporalis, mafleter, 
 pterygoides, digaftricus, buccinator, mylo- 
 
 hyoideus. 
 
dialogues, 101 
 
 hyoideus, geno-hyoideus, geaiogloITus, and 
 bafiogloffus, glandula fublingualis, maxillaris 
 inferior, and parotis, to the external ear, where 
 it feems to join the portio dura to the fubftjance 
 of the tongue, in which it is pretty much con- 
 founded with the ninth pair j from the root of 
 this laft branch, the chorda tympani is refledled. 
 The laft ramification of this branch, which I 
 lhall take notice of, is that which furnifhes the 
 teeth of the lower jaw, and cmues out at the 
 chin, and is diftributed on that and the lower 
 lip, and again united to the fcventh pair. From 
 this flaort account of the large fifth pair of nerves, 
 and by obferving feveral phenomena which hap- 
 pen to thofe parts to which they are diftributed, 
 we might have a much farther confirmation of 
 the general doflrine of nerves delivered, and fee, 
 at leaft, the way padied to a rational account of 
 the phenomena, for realbning on which we 
 fhould not otherwife have the leaft ground. 
 We can, for example, from the chorda tympani 
 and the nerves of the teeth being derived from 
 the fame common trunk, underftand how the 
 found of any vibrating body held between cur 
 teeth is fenfible to us, when another perfon can- 
 not pofiibly hear it ; by the like rule we know 
 why, in a violent tooth ach, the mufcles of the 
 face are fomuetimes convulied; nor fhall be fur- 
 prized to hear one plagued with the ach in liis 
 upper teeth, complain of a gnawing pain deep 
 feated in the bones of his face, or to fee his eye- 
 lids much fwelled, or the tears trickling down in 
 great abundance ; v/hereas the lower teeth ach- 
 
 3 ing 
 
102 A N A T O M 1 C A L 
 
 ing, the ear is pained, and the faliva flows in 
 great quantity. We may have a diftant view 
 of fome foundation in reafon for the cure of the 
 tooth-ach by ftrong comprefTion of the chin, or 
 by applying blifters behind the ears, or by burn^ 
 ing behind or in the ear. Among a great many 
 inftances of the good effedl of the adlual cautery 
 in fuch a cafe, 1 fliall give one Vv^hich leems to 
 me remarkable : A man was feized with the 
 too'di-ach, and a convulflon of that whole fide 
 of his face followed whenever the pain became 
 acute, or he attempted to fpeak ; after he had 
 undergone bleeding, purging, ialivation, fetons, 
 &c. without any benefit, he was cured by ap- 
 plying a fmall cauterifing iron to the anti-helix. 
 6. The fixth pair of nerves are the nervi abdu- 
 centes, Vv'hich arife from the fore part of the 
 corpora pyramidalia (which are two protu- 
 berances of the under part of the cerebellum, 
 fo called from their refemblance of a pyramid) 
 and after piercing through the dura mater, they 
 give off a branch, which joining with the re- 
 flected twig of the opthalmic branch, forms the 
 original of the intercoflal, and paffes through 
 the foramen lacerum, to be fpent entirely on the 
 mufculus adductor oculi, Suppofing this 
 nerve to fupply ever fo little lefs than a due pro- 
 portion of liquidum nervofum, an involuntary 
 itrabifmus, or fquinting, wjll be occafioned. 
 Though the fifth and fixth pair of nerves forqi 
 entirely the beginning of the intercoflal before 
 it goes out of the fkull •, yet as feveral other 
 nerves contribute towards the formation of its 
 
 trunkj 
 
dialogues. 103 
 
 trunk, before it fends off any branches, I fhall 
 poftpone the defcription of it till I have {poke 
 of the original nerves. 7. The feventh pair are 
 the nervi auditorii, which arile from the fde of 
 the root of the proceiTus annularis, and entering 
 the meatus auditorius internus, and immedi- 
 ately dividing, one part is expanded on the in- 
 moft camera of the ear, the other goes through 
 the aq 11 ted u (51 us Fallopii, and comes out of the 
 fKiill between the ilyloide and mailoide pro- 
 cefles ; whence the realbn of the one being 
 named portio mollis, and the other dura. This 
 Jaft, after its exit ; iupplies the mufculi obliqui 
 capitis, ftylohyoidei, ftylogloffi, flylopharyngsi, 
 and platyfma myoides, on which and to the fkin 
 of the neck, a great number of its fmall fila- 
 ments run, which are ibmetimes cut in opening 
 the jugular vein, whence follows pain at firft, 
 and a little numbnefs afterwards : the luperior 
 branches of this nerve llipply the parotid 
 gland, external ear, and the whole fide of the 
 face as far forward as the chin. It is faid to 
 communicate thrice with the fifth pair, and 
 twice with the fecond veitebra. May not 
 we hence fee fome reafon why the head is 
 fo foon moved by the impreffion of found on 
 our ear ? 8.- d he eighth pair are the nervi fym- 
 pathetici medii vel par vagum, which arife from 
 the fide of the balls of the corpora olivaria, 
 (which are two protuberances, of the medulla 
 oblongata, lb called from their reprefenting an 
 olive in fhape) runs to the hole common to the 
 pfla tcmporum and occipitis, and are there 
 H 4 joined 
 
104 A N A T O M I C A r; 
 
 joined by the acceflbrius Willifii, (which has its 
 beginning from the two or three fuperior nerves 
 of the medulla fpinalis) mounts up and pafles 
 out with the par vagum at that common fora- 
 men juft now mentioned, then feparating the 
 acceftbrius, goes through the mufculus maftoi- 
 deus, and is loft in the trapezius, and rhom- 
 boides fcapulae •, while the larger trunk, (from 
 the great number of branches it fends off, ob- 
 tains the name of vagus, j runs ftrait down the 
 neck near the carotid artery, and in its courfe 
 gives feveral branches to the larynx •, when en- 
 tered the thorax, it fplits into two, the anterior 
 branch goes to the pericardium, and with thofe 
 of the intercoftal to the heart, then on the right 
 fide turns round the fubclavian, and on the left 
 round the dudtus arteriofus, and goes up again 
 at the fide of the oefophagus to be loft in the 
 larynx. This recurrent branch it is, that we 
 are earneftly cautioned to avoid in bronchotomy, 
 though by its deep fituation we are in no hazard 
 of hurting it : if both thefe nerves were cut, it 
 is probable the voice would not be entirely loft, 
 as long as the fuperior branches ftill fupply the 
 larynx. Thepofterior branch goes along with 
 the oefophagus, and fupplies the lungs, gula, 
 and ftomach very plentifully : and as all the 
 nerves beftowed on the ftomach enter at the fu- 
 perior orifice of it, the fenfations here muft be 
 very acute, what remains of the par vagum is 
 joined to the intercoftal immediately below the 
 diaphragm. 9. Nervi hypogloffi externi vel 
 par linguale, which arife from between the cor- 
 2 ' porg 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 105 
 
 pora pyramidalia and the corpora olivaria, 
 pafling out of the Ikuil through their proper 
 holes of the os occipitis, and after fupplying the 
 glandula thyroidea, and mufculi fternohyoidei, 
 and fternothyroidei, are loft in the fubftance of 
 the tongue. Authors have difputed whether 
 this ninth or the fifth is the guftatory nerve ; the 
 old opinion in favour of the ninth is to me rnoft 
 probable, becaufe the fifth is no where elfe em- 
 ployed as an organ of fenfation, and becaufe the 
 ninth feems to penetrate the fubftance of the 
 tongue more, while the fifth is fpent on the 
 mufcles. 10. The tenth pair are the nervifub- 
 occipitales, which arife from the beginning of 
 the medulla fpinalis, betwixt the os occipitis 
 and firft vertebra colli ; and are all, except what 
 goes to the ganglion of the intercoftal, fpent on 
 the mufculi obliqui and extenfores capitis. But 
 thefe, as be'ore obferv^ed, page 3c, are more 
 properly the firft pair of nerves of the neck. 
 
 The only nerves of the encephalon remain- 
 ing now to be defcribed are the refledted branches 
 of the fifth and fixth pair, which are not eafily 
 traced, being fo fmall and pappy, and hid by 
 the carotid artery as they go out of it j but 
 whenever they have efcaped from the os petro- 
 fumi, they are joined by branches from the 
 eighth, ninth, and tenth pair, and the firft and 
 fecond fpinal, whence the largeft ganglion of the 
 body is formed, from which the nerve named 
 now intercoftal goes out to defcend down the 
 neck with the carotid, fupplying in its courfe 
 the mufculi flexores of the head and neck, and 
 
 com- 
 
ic6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 comnuinicating' with the cirvical nerves; then 
 as it is about to enter the thorax, it again forms 
 a ganglion, from which the nerves to the trachea 
 arteria and heart are fupplied. The intercoHal 
 after this runs down on the fide of the vertebrae 
 thoracis, having additional nerves conftantly 
 fent to it from betv/een thefe vertebrae, till in 
 paffes through its own proper hole of the dia- 
 phragm ; whence it again forms another gang- 
 lion clofe by the glandulae renales, into which 
 the eighth pair enter. From fuch a knot on 
 each fide, the nerves of the guts, liver, fpleen, 
 pancreas, and kidney are derived ; and from it 
 the pelvis and its parts are alfo fupplied. Hence 
 the great fympathy of thefe parts may be eafily 
 deduced ; and a reafon may be given of a vio- 
 lent vomiting that commonly attends a nephri- 
 tis, and of the belching, cholics, and llomach- 
 adis, which often enlue, on the obftrudions of 
 the menftrua, 
 
 CX What are the glands of the head ? 
 
 A. The glands of the head remaining now 
 
 to be deferibed, are in the exterior part that is 
 out of the cavity of the fkull ; thofe of the in- 
 teiior part, viz. the glands of the brain and its 
 membranes, have been already fpoken of. 
 T hole now to mention, are the parotides, maxil- 
 lares, fublinguales, tonfiilae, linguales, labiales, 
 buccales, fauciales palatine, gingivarum, and 
 iivulares ; v^hich rake their names from their 
 Tdpeefive fituations, being fituated in and about 
 the mouth, palate, and tongue, to afford faljva 
 in all parts of the mouth to keep it moift. 
 
 Thofe 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 107 
 
 Thofe mere I'cmote arc chiefly concerned in 
 maftication. In the orbit alfo there is the la- 
 chrymal glands-, under the eye-lids are the cetace- 
 ous or febaceous glands, the mucofe glands of 
 the pituitary membrane of the noftrils, and the 
 ceruminofe glands of the ears. The largefb 
 and mcit remarkable are the lalival glands; the 
 others are fo fmall as to render a particular de- 
 fc.ription unneceffary and of no flgnificance. 
 
 Parotis, vel maxillaris fuperior, is the largeft 
 of the falivary glands ; it is fituate behind the 
 lower jaw, under the ear, on each fide ; from 
 this gland, there runs a very large du6l, about 
 three fingers breadth long, and of the thicknefs 
 of a wheat ftraw, having a great number of 
 roots ; this duct, from Steno the difeoverer, is 
 called after his name, but by others dudus fa- 
 livalis fuperior. It pafles over the tendinous 
 part of the mafleter mufcle, (to prevent its be- 
 ing cornprefifed by that niulcle, which would 
 obfl.rui5f the faliva) through the middle of the 
 cheek, and thefe perforate the buccinator 
 fuul'cle and the membrane of the mouth, near 
 the Iccond or third of the dentes molares, and 
 at this perforation it difeharges a very large 
 quantity of its proper fluid into the mouth. 
 When this dud is divided by an external 
 wound, the faliva will flow out on the cheek, 
 unlefs a convenient perforation be made into 
 the mouth, and then tire external w'ound may 
 be healed. This gland is one of thole that 
 ferve for the fecretion of the faliva ; it has the 
 difeharge of its faliva promoted by the motions 
 
 of 
 
loS ANATOMICAL 
 
 of the lower jaw : when this gland is ulcerated, 
 there is a conftant efFufion of faliva j to cure 
 which Kildanus applied the a6lual cautery, but 
 if you confume the greateft part of the gland 
 with mere, praecip. rubr. it will heal with little 
 trouble. 
 
 Maxillaris inferior is fltuate between the 
 lovverjawandthe tendon of the digaftric mufcle; 
 its dufl; paffes under the mufculus mylohyoi- 
 deus, ancl enters the mouth under the tongue, 
 near the dentes inciforii. 
 
 Sublingualis is a fmall gland fituated under 
 the tongue, one on each fide, betv»?een the jaw 
 and the ceratogloffus mulcle. 
 
 Tonfilla is a globular gland, about the big- 
 nefs of a hazel-nut, fituate upon the ptery- 
 goideus internus mufcle, between the root of 
 the tongue and the uvula, on each fide of the 
 mouth ; they are commonly called almonds 
 of the ears, from their refembling almonds in 
 figure. The tonfilla has no dudl continued 
 from it, but empties all its fmall du61s into a 
 finus of its own j which finus, when the gland 
 is inflamed, may eafily be miflaken for an ulcer. 
 This gland, with its fellow, directs the malti- 
 cated aliment into the pharynx, and alfo ferves 
 for the uvula to fhut down upon when we 
 breathe through the nofe. They are comprelTed 
 by the tongue and the aliment, when the former 
 raifes the latter over its root, and thereby op- 
 portunely emits their faliva to lubricate the food 
 for its eafier defcenc through the pharynx. 
 A fchirrous tumour of either of thefe glands is a 
 
 common 
 
dialogues,, 109 
 
 common difeafe, and it admits of no remedy but 
 extirpation ; the bed: way of doing which is by 
 ligature. Freffure upon the furface of a gland 
 very much promoting the fecretion that is made- 
 in it, thefe glands are fo feated as to be preiTed 
 by the lower jaw, and its mufcles, v/hich will be 
 chiefly at the time when their fluid is wanted ; 
 and the force with which the jaw mufl: be mov- 
 ed, being as the drinefs and hardnefs of the 
 food, which is neceflary ; for all food, being to 
 be reduced to a pulp, by being broke and mix- 
 ed with faliva before it can be fwallov/ed fit for 
 digeftion, the drier and harder foods needing 
 more of this matter, will from this mechanifin 
 be fupplied with more than moifter foods, in 
 about that proportion in which they are drier 
 and harder ; and the drier foods needing more 
 faliva than the moifter, is the reafon why we 
 can eat lefs, and digeft lefs of thefe than thofe. 
 What quantity of faliva thefe glands can ftpa- 
 rate from the blood in a given time will be hard 
 to determine ^ but in eating of dry bread, it 
 cannot be lefs than the weight of the bread 5- 
 and many men, in a little time, can eat more 
 dry bread than tvv^ice the fize of thefe glands ; 
 and fome that are not ufed to fmoaking, can 
 fpit half a pint in fmoaking one pipe of to- 
 bacco. Some men in a falivation have fpit for 
 days, or weeks together, a gallon in four and 
 twenty hours ; and yet all thefe glands put to- 
 gether do not weigh more than four ounces. 
 
 The glandule febaceae are fituated in the in- 
 terior furface of the eye-lids ; they ferve for the 
 
 fecretion 
 
110 ANATOMICAL 
 
 fecreticn of an oleaginous fluid, which prevents 
 the attrition ot the eye-lids from their continual 
 motion. 
 
 The glandula lachrymalis is fituated in the 
 orbit, above the fmaller angle, with its excre* 
 tory ciudts under the upper rye- lids. 
 
 The glandulae ceruminofse are fmall glands 
 of a yellow colour, frcuate in the convex part 
 of the membrane of the meatus auditorius of 
 the ear, about the middle of the pafliige •, they 
 ferve to fecrete the cerumen, which they depoflc 
 lor various purpofe in the paffage. 
 
 Glandulae mucoliE are fituated in the pitui- 
 tary membrane of the noftrils, and feparate 
 that matter which we call mucus. 
 
 DIALOGUE III. 
 
 Of the Neck, and its Parts. 
 
 J hat are the parts of the neck ? 
 y %' A. I'he fore part of the neck is 
 tlie throat and the b.ck part the nape. Ihe 
 neck confifts of feven bones or vertebrae ; a 
 number of mufcles which ferve to move the 
 head, neck, larynx, pharynx, and theos hyoides •, 
 a number of very large arteries, as the internal 
 and external carotids, and the vertebral ones ; 
 large veins, as the internal and external jugu- 
 lars, and the vertebral veins ; large nerves of 
 the par vagum, intercoftals, recurrents, dia- 
 
 phrag- 
 
DIALOGUES, 
 
 I s 5 
 
 phragmatics, and the vertebral ; a part of tlis 
 jpinal marrow •, the afpera arteria or trachea, 
 particularly the larynx ; the pharynx, widi 
 part of the oefophagus and the thyroide, with 
 the other fmaller glands. I’he bones ot the 
 neck are named vertebrs. 
 
 What are the vertebrae ? 
 
 A, The vertebrte or joints of the neck and 
 back frona the os occipitis to the os facrum, 
 are twenty-four in number, thofe of the neck 
 belong alfo to the fpine forming one bony co- 
 lumn for the reception of the fpinal marrow ; 
 each vertebra is diftinguiflaed into two parts, 
 viz. the body and its procefies. The body of 
 each vertebra, except the firft, is fofter and 
 more fpongeous than the proceffes, which are 
 harder and more folid ; the fore part of the 
 body is round and convex •, the hinder pare 
 fomewhat concave, its upper and lower parts 
 are covered with a cartilage pretty thick for- 
 wards, but thin backwards, by which means we 
 bend our body forwards ; for the cartilages 
 yield to the prclTure of the bodies of the verte- 
 brte, which in that motion come clofer to one 
 another. This could not be effected, if the 
 harder bodies of the vertebrs were clofe to one 
 another; Each vertebra has three forts of pro- 
 cefles, towards its hinder part, except the firft : 
 from the hind part of each Hands a procefs 
 named fpinalis, and from every one a procefs 
 on each fide called tranfverfalis, with one iliort 
 one above it, and fo bedow it named obliqui 
 fiiperiores et inferiores. By thefe Ikort oblique 
 
 procefies 
 
112 ANATOMICAL 
 
 procelTes the vertebras are articulated j and in 
 each of the tranfverfe, there is a tendon of the 
 vertebra] mufcles inferred. Thefe prqcelfes, 
 with the hinder or concave part of the body of 
 the verrebrtE, form a large hole in each verte- 
 bra, and all the holes anfwering one another 
 (from the head to the os coccygis) make a 
 channel for the defcent of the fpinal marrow, 
 whicli fends out its nerves to the feveral parts 
 of the body by pairs through two fmall lateral 
 holes in each fpare, between the vertebras 
 formed by the joining of lour notches in the fide 
 of each fuperior and inferior vertebrte. The 
 vertebrae are articulated to one another by a 
 ginglymus ; for the two inferior oblique pro- 
 cefles of all the vertebrae of the neck and back, 
 have a little cavity-like in their extremities, 
 w^herein they receive the extremities of the 
 tv/o fuperior oblique procefles of the inferior 
 vertebra next to it •, ib that the two fuperior 
 procelTes of each vertebra of the neck and 
 bade are received, and the two inferior do 
 receive, (except the firll of the neck and laft 
 of the back ;) bur the fuperior procelTes of each 
 vertebra of the loins receive, and the two in- 
 ferior are received, contrary to thole of the 
 neck and back The vertebrae are all tied to- 
 gether by a hard membrane, made of firong and 
 large fibres •, it covers the body of all the ver- 
 tebrte forwards, reaching from the firll of the 
 neck to the os lacrum. There is another mem- 
 brane which lines the canal, made by the large 
 hole of each vertebra, winch alfo ties them all 
 
 toge- 
 
DIALOGUES. 113 
 
 too'fther •, befides the bodies or the vertebi’ts 
 are tied to one another by the intervening car- 
 tilages, and the tendons of the vertebral mufcks 
 which are inferred in their proceffes, as before 
 mentioned, tie them together behind. From 
 this account of the articulations of the vertebrse, 
 it is evident their center of motion is altered 
 in dl&erent pofitions of the trunk. For when 
 we bow forwards, the fuperior . moved part, 
 bears entirely on the bodies of the vertebrts ; 
 if we bend back, the oblique procefles fupport 
 the weight •, if we recline to one fide, we reft 
 upon the oblique proceftes of that fide, and 
 part of the bodies of the vertebra ; if we 
 ftand erect, all the bodies and oblique proceftes 
 have their fliare in our fupport. From this 
 Itructure, the cxtenfors have about twice the 
 lever to adl with, and confequently, twice the 
 power to raife the trunk into an ercift pofture 
 that they have to carry it beyond that pofture j 
 for then the oblique proceftes begin to be the 
 center of motion, and giv^e a like advantage to 
 the benders ; without this contrivance it would 
 be more difficult to keep the body erect, or to 
 recover an eredl pofture with confiderable 
 ftrength after a' bend of the body. If the 
 fpine had been coir.pofed all of one bone, we 
 could have had no motion in our backs •, or 
 had it been of two or three bones, or fewer 
 bones or joints than it really is, they muft have 
 either not been capable of bending fo much as 
 they do, (and been fo pliable for the feveral pbf- 
 tures we have occafion to put ourfelves in) or 
 have bent more in each joint, which would 
 I have 
 
II4 ANATOMICAL 
 
 have preiTecl or bruifed the fpinal marrow ; the 
 ill ccnfequenccs of which are fufficiently feen^ 
 in peiibns grown crooked, or who have had dif- 
 tortions from external accidents. Again, if the 
 fpine had been made of feveral bones, without 
 intervening cartilages, we fhould have had no^ 
 more ufe of it, than if it had been but one 
 bone ; if each vertebra had had its own diftindl. 
 cartilage, it might have been eafily diflbcated 
 and, laflly, the oblique procefles of each fupe- 
 rior and inferior vertebra keep the middle one, 
 that it can neither be thruft backwards nor for- 
 wards, to comprefs the medulla fpinalis. 
 
 What are the bones of the neck ?‘ 
 
 A. The bones of the neck are the feven fu- 
 perior vertebrte of the fpine, (I have already 
 mentioned) •, thefe vertebrte are fmaller than, 
 thofe of the back, but they are of a firmer, 
 harder confiftence ; their body is more com- 
 prefied than in the others, and isfituated on the 
 other part, and convex below. The breadth 
 on the fore part increafes gradually as they de- 
 fcend ; fo that the vertebras of the neck taken all 
 together reprelent a fort of pyramid. The 
 tranfvcrfe procefies of theic vertebras are perfo- 
 rated for the palTage of the vertebral veilels to- 
 the head ; and the acute or fpinal procefles are 
 forked and flrait ; but befides this, the firft and 
 fecond vertebras have fomething peculiar to 
 themfelves. 'i he firft, or upper vertebra is 
 called Atlas (becaufe it fupports the head, as 
 king Atlas did the globe of the univerfe, accord- 
 ing to amient fable ■,) it has neither body 
 
 nor 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 115 
 
 nor fpinai procefs, for which reafon its fubftance 
 is more folid than that of any other j the fora- 
 men or hole in this, is greater than in any other 
 vertebra, and it looks like an irregular bony 
 ring. The upper fide of this vertebra has two 
 cavities, into which the apophyles of the os 
 occipitis are received-, but thele two cavities 
 together, unlike all other joints, are laterally 
 portions of concentric circles, by which means 
 they are but as one joint, and fo fuffer the head 
 to move eafily fidewaays, which otherwife it 
 could no more do than the knee, which alfo 
 has two heads and two cavities. The under 
 fide of this bone has a very flat articulation with 
 the next, which fits k for a rotatory motion. 
 In the fore part of its great hole it has a pretty 
 large finus, in vyhich lies the tooth like pro- 
 cefs of the fecond vertebra, being faftened by 
 a ligament that riles from each fide of the finus, 
 that it comprefs not the medulla fpinalis it 
 has two fmail finufes in its upper part, in which 
 the tenth pair of nerves and the vertebral ar- 
 teries lie. The fecond vertebra is called epiftro- 
 phreus, dentata, or axis, from a procefs which 
 pafles through the former bone, and is the axis 
 upon which it turns never chelefs, all the vcr- 
 tebrre of the neck contribute fomething to the 
 rotatory motion of the head. The proceflus 
 dentatus, which is long anti round like a tooth, 
 from whence its name, is fituate in the middle, 
 between the two oblique fupei ior procclfes it 
 is received into the aforefaid finus of the atlas, 
 and is ftrongly tied to the os occipitis, and to 
 I 2 the 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 the atlas by ligaments, to prevent its hurting 
 the fpinal marrow. All the reft of the vertebrae 
 of the neck are alike. See the account of the 
 vertebrts in general, page ii i. 
 
 What are the cartilages of the neck ? 
 
 A. I'l e cartilages of the bones of the neck, 
 and of all the vertebrs in general, are of two 
 kinds, one proper to each vertebra, the other 
 common to the two vertebrte that lie next each 
 other •, the lirft I term cartilages of articulation, 
 the other cartilages of fymphylis. The proper 
 articular cartilages of each vertebra of the whole 
 fpine are thofe four which cover the furfaces of 
 the four fmall oblique or articular apophyfes. 
 The cartilages of fymphyfis lie between the bo- 
 dies of the vertebra, one clofely joined to each 
 bone; their height and thicknefs is different in 
 each clafs of the vertebrs ; thofe of the neck 
 are not fo thick as thofe of the loins, nor fo 
 thin as thofe of the vertebrae of the back ; nor 
 are the cartilages of an equal thicknefs in all 
 their parts ; thofe of the neck and loins appear 
 to be the thickeft on the fore fide, and thofe of 
 the back rather thickeft on the backfide. Thefe 
 cartilages are different from all others in the 
 body, being made up of horizontal, concen- 
 trical rings, clofeft, and thinneft near the cen- 
 ter, refembling the other cartilages of the body 
 in nothing but their whitenefs and elafticity ; the 
 interftices between tire rings are filled with a mu- 
 cilaginous fubftance, lefs fluid than that of 
 the joints. All thde cartilages yield to com- 
 preflion, (and in the inflexions of the fpine, the 
 
 external 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 1 1 7 
 
 external furface of the cartilage jets out on that 
 fide toward which the inflexion is made)i they 
 reftore themfelves afterwards, by being freed 
 from compreiTion ; fo that a man is really taL 
 ler, after lying fome time, than after .he has 
 walked or carried a burthen for a great while ; 
 owing to the different ftate of the intervertebral 
 cartilages. The cartilages of the larynx, &c. 
 will be defcribed with the mufcles. 
 
 What are the ligaments of the neck ? 
 
 A. All the vertebrm of the fpine in general 
 are ftrongly connedled to each other by liga- 
 ments, which are very fhort and flrrong •, they 
 crofs each other obliquely, and are fixed round 
 the edges of the body of each vertebra, cover- 
 ing the intervertebral cartilages, and adhering 
 clofely to them ; but the firft and fecond ver- 
 tebra have both ligaments of a peculiar kind 
 from the reff. All the vertebra are likewife 
 ftrongly connedled by a ligamentary tube, which 
 lines the inner furface of the medullary canal, 
 reprefenting a long flexible funnel, its cavity at 
 the upper part being equal to that of the occi- 
 pital foramen, and ending in a fmall point at 
 the os facrum ; the articular ligaments of the 
 fpine are thofe which tie the glenoide cavities of 
 the atlas to the condyles of the os occipitis ; 
 thofe that join the cartilaginous furface of the 
 apophyfis dentiformis to the anterior cavity of 
 the_ firft vertebra, and thofe by which all the 
 oblique or articular apophyfes are connedled to- 
 gether ; thefe are all fmall, Ihort, ftrong liga- 
 ments, fixed by both extremities round the car- 
 I 3 tilaginous 
 
liS anatomical 
 
 tilaginous furfaces of the apophyfes, furround- 
 ing very clofqly all the capfular ligaments of 
 thefe articulations before mentioned. The 
 membranous ligaments of any fignification will 
 be deferibed with the mufcles. 
 
 Cb What are the iiiucilaginous glands of the 
 lieck ? 
 
 A. The mucilaginous glands of all the arti- 
 culations of the vertebras of the neck are very 
 Imall, but are accompanied by many fatty 
 moleculte lying round each joint ; the inner fur- 
 face of the ligamentary tube juft now men- 
 tioned, is lubricated by an oily or adipofe fub- 
 ftance, which I have mentioned already. See 
 page 25. 
 
 What are the mufcles of the neck ? 
 
 A. Befides thofe only peculiar to the neck, 
 there are firft thofe of the head and neck con- 
 jointly, then thofe peculiar to the neck, larynx, 
 epiglottis, and pharynx : thole of the head and. 
 neck conjointly are, biventer cervicalis, com- 
 plexes, maftoideus, trachelomaftoideus, fple- 
 nius capitis, and reflus capitis internus major. 
 Thofe only peculiar to the neck are, interfpi- 
 tiales cervicis, intertranfverfalis cervicis, fpinalis 
 cervicis, tranfverfalis cervicis, longus colli, 
 fplenius colli •, the reft I muft omit till I come 
 to deferibe thofe of the thorax and abdomen. 
 The mufcles of the larynx are, fternothyroide- 
 iis, hyothyroideus vel cerato-thyroideus, crico- 
 thvroideus, crico-arytsnoideus lateralis et pofti- 
 cus,thyro-aryt£enoideus,arytaenoideus, and with 
 thxle I fhall firft mention the cartilages and 
 
 membrang 
 
dialogues. 
 
 >1:19 
 
 :inembrane of the larynx. The mufcles of the 
 epiglottis, viz. arytseno epiglotticus, and the 
 •hyo-epiglotticus, to thefe I Eiall add the oefo- 
 phagus. The mufcles of the pharynx are, ftylo- 
 pharing£us, pterygopharingJEUs, conftriftor 
 :pharyngei vel oefophagus, palato pharingsus. 
 
 What is the biventer cervicalis ? 
 
 A. The biventer cervicalis arifes from the 
 tranfverfe procefles of the feven fuperior dori'al 
 vertebrae, and is inferted into the back part of 
 the os occipicis. 
 
 Which is the com plexus ? 
 
 A. The complexus is a broad and pretty 
 long mufcle fituate along the back part and fide 
 of the neck •, it arifes from the three fuperior 
 dorfal vertebrte, and the fix inferior vertebrte of 
 the neck, and is inferted with the biventer into 
 the os occipitis and back part of the os temporis. 
 It pulls the head and neck back. 
 
 Which is. the maftoideus? 
 
 A. The maftoideus is fituate obliquely 'be- 
 tween the back part of the ear and lower part 
 of the throat it is in a manner compofed of 
 two mufcles, (which Albinus terms fterno- 
 maftoideus, and cleido-maftoideus) though in 
 faff but one : it arifes from the fternum and cla- 
 vicula ill-two portions, but foon unites in one, 
 and is inferted into the outer part of .the pro- 
 ceflTus maftoideus of the os temporis ; over this 
 procefs it fends off a very broad aponeurofis, 
 which covers the fplenius, and is inferted in the 
 os occipitis : it pulls that fide of the head it is 
 inferted into towards the fternum, and turns the 
 I 4 face 
 
120 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 face towards the contrary iltoulder ; this mnfcle,, 
 with its fellow, pulls the head and neck toward 
 the breafe *, but adls with more force on the 
 joints of the neck, than upon the head. 
 
 Which is the trachelo- mafeoideus ? 
 
 A. The trachelo maftoideus arifes from the 
 tranAerfe procefs of the firft and fecond verte- 
 brae of the back, runs up under the fplenius, 
 and is inferted into the middle of the backfide 
 of the proceffus maftoideus. 
 
 Which is the fplenius capitis ? 
 
 A. 1 he fplenius capitis arifes from the fpi- 
 nal procefles of the five lower vertebra: of the 
 neck, and the five upper ones of the back, and 
 alfo the linea alba colli. It is inferted into the 
 03 occipitis a little above the tranfverfe proceffes 
 of the three fuperior vertebrse of the neck. 
 This mufcle pulls the head and neck backward, 
 and to the contrary fide •, but both of them a<5l- 
 ing together, pull them diredtly backward. 
 
 Q. Which is the redtus internus major ? 
 
 A The redlus capitis internus major I have 
 already deferibed with the mufcles of the head. . 
 
 Which are the interfpinales cervicis ? 
 
 A. They are mufcles arifing from the fuperior 
 parrs of each double fpinal procefs of the cer- 
 vical vertebrae;, and inferted into the inferior 
 paits of the fame. When thefe mufcles adt, 
 they bend the neck backward, drawing the 
 fpines of the vertebra nearer each other. 
 
 Which are the interrranfverfales cervicis.^ 
 
 A. They are fituate between the tranfverfe 
 procefs of the vertebrae like the interfpinales ; 
 
 they 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 i2I 
 
 they arife from the lower vertebra of the neck, 
 and are inferred into that next above : thefe 
 Douglas calls intervertebrales. 
 
 Which is the fpinalis cervicis ? 
 
 A. The fpinalis cervicis arifes from the tranf- 
 verfe proceffcs of the five fuperior vertebrae of 
 the back ; and is inferred into the fpinal pro- 
 celTes of the fecond, third, fourth and fifth ver- 
 tebrae of the neck. This pulls the neck back- 
 ward. 
 
 Which is the tranfverfalis cervicis ? 
 
 A. The tranfverfalis vel femi-fpinalis cervicis 
 arifes from the oblique proceffes of the four in- 
 ferior vertebra of the neck, and is inferred 
 into the fpinal procefs of the fecond vertebra 
 of the neck. This is only a continuance of 
 the tranfverfalis dorfi, and moves the neck ob- 
 liquely backwards, as when we look over the 
 flioulder. 
 
 Qc Which is the longus colli ? 
 
 A. The longus colli arifes laterally from the 
 bodies of the four fuperior vertebrte of the 
 back, and from the anterior part of the tranf- 
 verfe procefies of the five inferior vertebra of 
 the neck •, and is inferred into the fore part of 
 the firft and fecond vertebrte of the neck, which 
 it bends forward. 
 
 Which is the fplenius colli ? 
 
 A. The fplenius colli arifes from the fpinal 
 procefies of the ninth and tench vertebrse of the 
 back, and is inferred into the tranlverfe pro- 
 cefiTes of the fifth, fixth and fevench vertebra 
 of the neck. 
 
 The 
 
122 ANATOMICAL 
 
 The reft of the mufclcs of the neck I fliall 
 liefer mentioning till I come to fpeak of thofe 
 •of the thorax and abdomen. 
 
 The mufcles of the head and neck are mofl 
 of them obliquely direfted ; therefore they per- 
 form the oblique motions, as well as extenfion 
 and flexion. 
 
 The afpera vel trachea arteria or wind- pipe, 
 I fhail defcribe hereafter, with the contents of 
 the thorax. 
 
 What is the larynx ? 
 
 A. The larynx is the thick upper part of the 
 afpera arteria or wind-pipe, principally com- 
 pofed of five cartilages. 
 
 What are the cartilages of the larynx ? 
 
 A. They are five, viz. i. The thyroide, or 
 fcutiform cartilage, which Hands in the anterior 
 parr, and as the largefl; of the five ; in the fore 
 part of this cartilage is the protuberance called 
 pomum adami. 2. The cricoide or annular 
 cartilage. 3, and 4. The arytenoide cartilages, 
 •which with the cricoide, make the glottis, (that 
 is the naouth of the larynx) more eafily open 
 and contract. Between the aryttenoides and 
 Tides of the thyroides, there are two fmall ca- 
 vities on each fide ; in which, if a little drink or 
 bread fall, (as fometimes happens, when we 
 laugh or fpeak when eating or drinking) it 
 caufes a violent cough, and a great tickling. 
 5. The fifth and laft cartilage, which is fofter 
 chan the relf, is the epiglottis ; its ufe is to 
 cover the glottis, in eating and drinking ; for 
 .the aliments, by their own v/eight, prefs it clofer 
 £ down 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 I2J 
 
 <^o\!'.'n upon the glottis, and they pafs over with- 
 out entering the larynx, into the oeibphagus or 
 gullet ; but when the aliments are pafied, the 
 epiglottis by its natural adion, (which is com- 
 mon to all cartilages) lifts up again, and gives 
 way to the air in breathing. While we fpeak, 
 or laugh, the glottis muft neceffarilly be opened 
 for the paffage of the air in breathing; there- 
 fore it is not convenient to fpeak while we fwal- 
 low. 
 
 The membrane which invefls the larynx is 
 Very fenfible, and is furnifhed with a number of 
 exceeding fmali glands and ofcula or openings, 
 which difcharge a lubricating fluid. The ven- 
 tricles of the larynx are certain hollows, fome 
 of them fmaller, Ibme larger ; they are on the 
 inflde of it, under the glottis, and ferve to mo- 
 dulate the voice. I'hefe, with the dilatation and 
 ftraitening of the mufcles and cartilages of the 
 glottis, give that wonderful variety of notes, the 
 voice is capable of in flinging, &c. 
 
 Q. Which is the fterno-thyroideus ? 
 
 A. The fternothyroideus mufcle ari fes from 
 the fternum, and is inferred into the fcutiform 
 cartilage which it pulls dov/nward. 
 
 Which is the hyothyroideus ? 
 
 A. The hyothyroideus vel cerato-thyroideus 
 mufcle arifes from the os hyoides, and is in- 
 ierted into the fcutiform cartilage which it pulls 
 upward. 
 
 Q. Which is the cricothyroideus ? 
 
 A. 7 he cricothyroideus arifes from the fore 
 part of the cricoide cartilage, runs under the 
 
 thyroid? 
 
124 ANATOMICAL 
 
 thvroide cartilage, and is inferted into its infidc, 
 which it pulls towards the cricoides, andferves 
 occafionallv either to dilate or conftringe the 
 glottis. 
 
 Which is the crico-arytaenoideus ? 
 
 A. The crico-aryttenoideus lateralis arifes 
 from the lateral part ot the cricoide cartilage ; 
 and is inferted into the lateral part of the ary- 
 tJEnoides •, this with its fellow ferves to dilate 
 the remula or glottis. 
 
 Q. Which is the crico-aryttenoideus pof- 
 ticus ? 
 
 A. The crico-arytenoideus poflicus arifes 
 from the back part of the cricoid cartilage, and 
 is inferted into the arytasnoides to pull it back- 
 ward and dilate the glottis. 
 
 CX Which is the thyro-arytcenoideus ? 
 
 A. The thyro-aryt^noideus arifes from the 
 fcutiform, and is inferted into the fore part of the 
 arytaenoide cartilage •, it ferves together with 
 the following mufcle, to conftringe the rimula 
 or glottis. 
 
 Vv'hich is the arytaenoideus ? 
 
 aT The arytsnoideus is one fingle mufcle, 
 though Window and Douglas divide it into 
 two or three. It arifes from one arytaenoidal 
 cartilage, and is inferted into the other, which 
 forms a fphinder for contracting the rimula, 
 and fhutting the glottis. 
 
 Which is the epiglottis ? 
 
 A. 1 he epiglottis has three exceedingly fmall 
 mufcles, (viz the thyroepiglotticus, aryteeno- 
 cpiglotticus, and the hyoepiglotticus) which 
 
 3 ferve 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 ferve to cover the glottis, in the act of Aval- 
 lowing, and prevent anything getting into it 
 but they are fo very minute as to render any fur- 
 ther defcription unnecelTary. 
 
 Thecsfophagus, gulaorgullet,! fhall defcribe 
 hereafter with the contents of the thorax. The 
 pharynx is the upper part of the cefophagus 
 next the mouth, in which are a number of 
 glands fituated, and excretory ofcula or open- 
 ings are frequently difcovered with them ; the 
 mufcles of the pharynx ferve to open and fhut 
 the cefophagus. 
 
 Which is the flylopharingteus ? 
 
 A. The llylopharingtEUs mufcle arifes from 
 the ftyloide procefs, and is inferted on both 
 Aides into the ftyloide and thyroide proceffes : 
 this mufcle with its fellow ferve to elevate as 
 well as dilate the pharynx to receive the ali- 
 ments. 
 
 Which is the pterygopharingteus ? 
 
 A. The pterygopharingseus fpheno vel fal- 
 pingopharyngEus, arifes from the inner w’ing of 
 the 03 fphenoides, and is inferted partly into 
 the pterygoide apophyfis, and partly into the 
 cartilaginous portion of theEuftachian tube: its 
 ufe is to dilate the pharynx, and draw the mid- 
 dle part of it upwards. 
 
 Which is the conftriclor pharyngei ? 
 
 A. The conftridlor pharyngei, vel ceibpha- 
 gus, ariles like a wing from feveral parts of the 
 fkull, tongue, os hyoides, cricoide and thyroide 
 cartilages, and is inferted into the back part of 
 the pharynx, which it draws to the fore part, 
 
 and 
 
126 ANATOMICAL 
 
 and not only conftringes the pharynx for prefling 
 down the aliment, but alio comprefles the ton- 
 fillae, which fend out their liquor to lubricate 
 the aliment, whereby it glides the more eafily 
 down into the ftomach. 
 
 Which is the.palatopharingrcus ? 
 
 A. The palatopharingEEus arifes from the 
 aponeurofis of the circumflexus palati, and is 
 inferred into the flylopharingaeus. 'I his mufcle 
 more properly belongs to the palate. 
 
 Window and fome others make many fub- 
 divifions of the mufcles of the pharynx, and 
 give them peculiar names, but they are quite 
 unneceflary. 
 
 What are the arteries of the neck ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the neck are the vertebral 
 arteries, and the internal and external carotids ; 
 and their branches are called by the names of 
 the parts they are, bellowed upon, as laryngetE, 
 pharingeae, &c. 
 
 What are the carotid arteries ? 
 
 A. The carotid arteries are two in number, 
 as I have before obferved (in defcribing the ar- 
 teries of the head,) one called the right carotid, 
 the other the left. They arife near each other, 
 from the curvature, or arch of the aorta. The 
 left immediately, but the right molt commonly 
 from the trunk of the fubclavia, as 1 have al- 
 ready obferved. They run up on each fide of 
 the trachea arteria, between it and the internal 
 jugular vein, as high as the larynx, without any 
 ramification. During this courfe, they may be 
 called carotid trunks, as each of them are after- 
 wards 
 
dialogues. 
 
 12:7 
 
 wards ramified. The trunk having reached as 
 high as the larynx, divides into two large 
 branches, one named the external carotid ar- 
 tery, and the other the internal. 
 
 Which is the external carotid artery, and 
 how diftributed ? 
 
 A. The external carotid artery is anterior, the 
 internal carotid pofferior j and the former lies 
 more inward, and nearer the larynx than the 
 latter ; but the names of the blood vefiels are 
 taken, from the parts they are diftributed to, 
 and not from their fituation. The external 
 carotid is the fmalleft, and yet appears by its 
 diredion to be a continuation of the common 
 trunk •, its branches may be divided into an- 
 terior or internal, and pofterior or external. 
 The firft anterior or internal branch goes out 
 from the very origin of the carotid on the in- 
 fide,, and fends off branches to the jugular 
 glands, fat and fkin, glandulas thyroidete, 
 mufdes, and other parts of the larynx, there- 
 fore termed laringe^ ; it likewife fends fome 
 twigs to the pharynx. The third anterior 
 branch, or arteria maxillaris inferior, goes to 
 the maftoide mufcle, the fraall flexors of the 
 head, and mufcles of the pharynx, and alfo to 
 the parts juft mentioned. The other branches 
 lupplying the head and its parts I have already 
 deicribed. See the arteries of the head. 
 
 Q. How is the internal carotid artery diftri- 
 buted ? 
 
 A. The internal carotid artery leaving the 
 general trunk,,pafles behind the external carotid, 
 
 & 
 
128 A N A T O M I C A LI 
 
 a little more backward, and generally mns np 
 without any ramification as high as the lower 
 orifice of the great canal of the apophyfis pe- 
 trofus of the os tcmporis •, therefore fends no 
 branches to the neck. 
 
 Q^. What is the vertebral artery ? 
 
 A. The vertebral artery arifes from the pof- 
 terior and upper fide of the fu'oclavian •, it runs 
 up through all the holes- in the tranfverfe apo- 
 phyl'es of the vertebra of the neck, and in its 
 paffage fends off branches to the afpera artcria, 
 cefophagus, muicles of the pharynx, larynx, ju- 
 gular glands, and all the. mufcles and integu- 
 ments of the neck, which take their names (as 
 I'have before obferved,) from the ftveral parts 
 they are bellowed on. See arterial cervkales. 
 
 What are the veins of the neck ? 
 
 A. The veins of the neck arc the, internal 
 and external jugulars, and the vertebral veins, 
 which all arife from the fubclavians. 
 
 Qa What are the external jugular veins ? 
 
 A. The external jugular veins are fometimes 
 double from their origin; and when they are 
 finale each of them divides afterwards into two ; 
 
 D . . 
 
 one anterior, and the other polLerior or rather 
 fuoerior. 'I he anterior in its pafTage lends 
 branches to the mufcles of the larynx, and to 
 part of the mafloideus ; befides thofe fenc to 
 the head and its parts. The poflerior, a little 
 higher up than its origin, gives off the vena 
 cervicalis to the vertebral mufcles of the neck ; 
 near the cervical vein fometimes arifes the fmall 
 venacephalica which running down between the 
 
 pcdoral 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 1 29 
 
 pectoral and deltoide mufcles unites with the 
 cephalic vein of the arm, which I flsali defcribe 
 hereafter : both the anterior and pofterior ex- 
 ternal jugular run up the neck, between the in- 
 teguments and the mufculus maftoidteus. 
 
 How is the internal jugular vein diftri- 
 buted ? 
 
 A. The internal jugular vein is the largefb of 
 all thofe that go to the neck : it runs up be- 
 hind the maftoideus and coracohyoideus, along 
 the fides of the vertebrte of the neck to the 
 fofllila of the foramen lacerum of the bafis 
 cranii ^ in its paffage it fends off fmall branches 
 to the thyroide glands, then the vena gutturalis 
 to the thyroide gland larynx, and neighbour- 
 ing mufcles. 
 
 Ck What is the vertebral vein ? 
 
 A. The vertebral vein arifes pofteriorly from 
 the fubclavian or axillaris, fometimes by two 
 Ifems, fometimes by one, which foon after- 
 wards divides into two ; the firft and principal 
 Item gives out the vena cervicalis to the neigh- 
 bouring mufcles, and then runs up through the 
 holes of the tranfverfe apophyfes of the vertebrts 
 colii. The other flem runs up on the fide of 
 the vertebra, and communicates with the firff, 
 running in between the tranAerfe apophyfes of 
 the fourth and fifth vertebra. Thus the ver- 
 tebral vein accompanies the vertebral artery 
 fometimes in one trunk, fometimes in feveral 
 fiems, through all the holes of the tranfverfe 
 apophyfes of the vertebra, all the way to the 
 great foramen occipitale, comsmunicating with 
 K the 
 
130 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the occipital veins, and Tmall occipital finufes 
 of the dura mater : thefe veins as they pals fup-^ 
 ply the mufcles of the neck, and great canal of 
 the fpinal marrow, where tiiey form finufes, 
 wJiich communicate with thofe on the other 
 fide ; thel'e finufes are pretty numerous, placed 
 one above another all the way to the occiput, 
 communicating with one another, and at laft 
 with the occipital finufes of the dura mater. 
 
 What are the nerves of the neck ? 
 
 A. The nerves of the neck proceed from the 
 medulla fpinalis, and are feven pair ; though 
 by feme reckoned eight, as before obferved. 
 'I'he firft pair goes out between the firft and 
 fecond vertebrae, and after communicating with 
 the tenth and fecond vertebral, is fpent on the 
 mufculus flexus colli, fplenius, complexns, and 
 teguments of the occipitis. The fecond pair 
 communicates with the ninth, and with -the 
 hill and third of the neck, and then is diftri- 
 buted to the teguments of the neck, and fide 
 of the head, and to the glandula parotis and 
 external ear, where it joins with the portio dura. 
 The third pair of cervical nerves palles out be- 
 tween the third and fourth vertebra, foon com- 
 municates with the fecond, and fending down a 
 large branch, which being joined by another 
 from the fourth pair, forms the phrenic nerve 
 that runs along the pericardium to be loft in the 
 diaphragm, making a fmall turn round that part 
 of the pericardium which covers the apex of 
 the heart ; hence it is that fuch as have ftrong 
 palpitations of the heart, feel a pungent acute 
 
dialogues. 
 
 13 * 
 
 pain immediately above the right orifice of the 
 ftomach : the other branches of the third cer- 
 vical are diftributed to the mufculus trapezius, 
 and deltoides, and to the teguments on the top 
 of the diOLilder •, which with the defcription of 
 the eighth pair, leads us evidently to the reafon 
 that an inflammation of the liver is generally 
 attended with a hiccup, and a fuppuration of 
 that vifcus with a violent pain on the top of the 
 fhoulder ; however, it is not always a certain 
 fign of the liver being fuppurated, for any other 
 caufe ftimulating or ftretching the nerves, fuch as 
 inflammation, wounds, fchirrousor fteatomatous 
 tumours, &c. may produce the fame effed:. 
 The fourth cervical pair, after fending off that 
 branch \Nhich joins with the third to form the 
 phrenic, runs ftrait to the axilla, \vhere it meets 
 with the fifth, fixth, and feventh cervicals, and 
 firft dorfal that efcape in the interftices of the 
 mufculi fcaleni ; thefe give off nerves to the 
 mufcles of the neck, fcapula, arm, and thorax, 
 and to the teguments ; and the confiderable 
 branches into which they are divided are fix j 
 but as they properly belong to the hand and 
 arm, I fliall defcribe them v/ith thofe parts. 
 
 What are the glands of the neck ? 
 
 A. The principal gland of the neck is the 
 thyroides •, befides which there are a great num- 
 ber of lelfer ones by the fides of the carotid ar- 
 teries and jugular veins, and diftributed here 
 and there among the mufcles and fat. Thofe 
 in the anterior part of the neck are called ju- 
 gulars j and thofe in the hinder part occipitales 
 K 2 and 
 
132 ANATOMICAL 
 
 and cervicales ; and thefe are all called lym- 
 phatic glands. 
 
 CX What are the glandulse thyroidse ? 
 
 I\. 'i he glandiila; thyroidte are two lyntpha- 
 tic glands, in figure refembling the new moon j 
 they adhere to the larynx and cefophagus, and 
 are of a red colour ^ and they have arteries,, 
 veins, and nerves, as the larynx. Thefe glands 
 fecrete a lubricating 'fluid, which moiftens the 
 cartilages and mufcles of the larynx. 
 
 The cefophagus, efpecially towards its upper 
 part, has a great number of glands. 
 
 DIALOGUE IV. 
 
 Of the Thorax, and its Parts. 
 
 Q. HAT is the thorax ? 
 
 y A. The thorax is that large part 
 of the body fituated between the abdomen and 
 the neck, and anfwers to the extent of the fter- 
 num, ribs, and vertebrse of the back, both 
 outwardly and inwardly. The anterior part is 
 commonly called the breaft; the pofterior parr, 
 the back j and the lateral parts, the right and 
 left fides. This cavity is lined by a membrane 
 named plura, and divided into lateral cavities 
 by a membranous feptum named mediaftinum> 
 which is a production or duplicature of the 
 plura. The parts contained in the thorax are 
 the heart, pericardium, trunk of the aorta,, 
 
 trunks. 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 133 
 
 minks of the carotid arteries, fubclavian ar- 
 teries, trunks of the vertebral and axillary ar- 
 teries, the fuperior portion of the defcending 
 'aorta, the intercoilal arteries, the vena cava 
 fuperior, vena azygos, fubclavian veins, trunks 
 of the jugular, vertebral and axillary veins, a 
 portion of the afpera arteria, the greater part of 
 the oefophagus, the duflus lafteus, or thoraci- 
 cus, the lungs, pulmonary artery, pulmonary 
 veins, and nerves of the feveral parts. The 
 cavity of the thorax is terminated downwards 
 by the diaphragm, which feparates it from the 
 abdomen. The heart and lungs are properly 
 thevifceraof the thorax, I fltall therefore fpeak 
 of them feparately. 
 
 What are the bones of the thorax ? 
 
 A. The bones of the thorax are the twelve 
 fuperior vertebrse of the back, (from the laft 
 vertebra of the neck downward,) the ribs, and 
 the fternum. The claviculs and fcapuls be- 
 longing properly to the upper extremities, fhall 
 fpeak of them hereafter. The whole fpine, (as 
 I have before obferved) confifts of twenty-four 
 vertebrte ; thofe of the neck are already fpoken 
 of ; the next twelve of the fpine belong to the 
 thorax, to thefe the ribs are articulated. See a 
 general defcription of the vertebrae, page 1 1 1, 
 
 The twelve vertebrae of the thorax, or back, 
 differ from the reft in this, that they are larger 
 than thofe of the neck, and fmaller than thofe 
 of the loins ; their acute proceffes Hope down- 
 wards upon one another •, they have in each 
 fide of their bodies a fmall depreffion, wherein 
 K 3 they 
 
134 ANATOMICAL 
 
 they receive the round extremities of the ribs, 
 and another in their tranfverfe procefles, which 
 receive the little tubercle near the extremity of 
 the ribs. T he articulation of the twelfth ver- 
 tebra of the thorax, with the firft of the loins, 
 is by arthrodia i for both its afcending and de- 
 fcending oblique procefles are received. 1 he 
 twelve vertebrae of the back have the leafl mo- 
 tion of any, becaufe their cartilages are thin, 
 their acute procefTes are leng, and very near to 
 one another j and they are fixed to the ribs, 
 which neither move backwards nor forwards. 
 They are bent backwards, behind the center of 
 motion, to make room for the parts contained in 
 the thorax; and that they might not be made 
 too weak by this flrufture, they are formed for 
 lefs motion than other vertebra ; and thofe in 
 particular which are bent farthefl; from the 
 center of gravity have the leafl motion. The 
 fore-part of the two upper vertebras of the 
 thorax are flat forwards, as thofe of the neck, 
 to make room for the afpera arteria and gula : 
 the third and fourth vertebras are acute, to give 
 way to the veflTds of the lungs and heart, and 
 bent to tlie right fide, for the better fituation of 
 the heart, v\liich makes that fide of the breaft: 
 more convex than the other, and therefore 
 flronger -, which feems advantageous to the 
 right arm, its motions depending upon thefup- 
 port it receives from t!ie bread, hence the right 
 arm is capable of more perfe^l adlions than 
 the other. The vertebrs of the back are hin- 
 dered from diflocating forwards by the fame pro- 
 
 vifion 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 135 
 
 vifion with thcfe of the neck ; and from luxat- 
 ing backwards by the ribs, which are faftened 
 to the tranfverfe procelfes of the inferior verte- 
 bras, and againft the back part of the body of 
 the next fuperior ; they alfo hinder them from 
 diflocating to either fide but the lad: ribs are 
 not fixed to the tranfverfe procefifes of the ver- 
 tebrtE of the thorax ; and therefore it is that 
 luxations are mod: frequently feen in this part : 
 but the vertebrtE of the loins are received into 
 deep cavities, and are tied with much ftronger 
 ligaments for their fecurity. 
 
 Thofe that have the vertebrae of the back 
 flick out are faid to be bunch-backed ; and in 
 fuch the cartilages which are between the verte- 
 bra are very thin and hard forwards, but con- 
 fiderably thick backwards, where the oblique 
 proceffes of the fuperior and inferior vertebras 
 are at a confiderable diftance from one another, 
 which dillance is filled up with a vifcous fub- 
 flance. This inequality of the thicknefs of the 
 cartilages happens either by a relaxation or 
 weaknefs of the ligaments and mufcles, which 
 are fad:ened to the back fide of the vertebra, 
 in which cafe their antagonids finding no oppo- 
 fition, remain in a continual contradlion, and 
 confequently there can be no motion in thefe 
 vertebrte. If this deformity has been from the 
 womb, the bones being at that time lott and 
 tender, the bodies of the vertebrae partake of 
 the fame inequality as the cartilages. If the 
 bunch be towards one fhoulder, for example 
 towards the right, then the cartilages on that 
 K 4 fide 
 
136 ANATOMICAL 
 
 fide are very thick, but thin and dry on the 
 other fide ; on the left fide the oblique apo- 
 phyfes come clofe together ; but on the right 
 there is a confiderable dillance betwixt them, 
 and the ligaments and mufcles are greatly ex- 
 tended on the right fide, but thofe on the left 
 are much contradled. If the vertebrie are dif- 
 tortcd inwards, all things have a different face ; 
 the cartilages, and fometimes the vertebrse, are 
 very thick forwards, but very thin and hard 
 backwards •, the acute and oblique procefle^ 
 are very clofe to one another ; and the liga- 
 ments upon the bodies of the vertebrte are 
 greatly relaxed, but the mufcles and ligaments 
 which tie the proceffes together are very much 
 contrafted. Thefe diflortions feldom happen 
 in the vertebrae of the loins ; but fuch as are 
 fo miferable, have little or no motion of their 
 back. 
 
 How is the fternum or breaft-bone com- 
 poled ? 
 
 A. The flernum or breaft-bone is generally 
 ccmpcfed of three fpongy bones, fometimes 
 more ; in the upper part of this bone, on each 
 fide, the clavicles are articulated ; the middle 
 part is narrow, the lower part broad ; to the 
 end of this adheres a cartilage, called from its 
 figure cartilago enfiformis vel xiphoides, which 
 is ufually fingle •, fometimes it is double, and 
 bifurcated, and not unfrequently bony through- 
 out. There is alfo frequently found a variety 
 in the form of the cartilages which join the ribs 
 and flernum, fometimes one cartilage ferving 
 
 two 
 
137 
 
 dialogues. 
 
 two ribs, and fometimes a cartilage not joined 
 to any rib •, frequently in old people we find 
 parts of them offified. On each fide of the 
 fLernum, there arefeven cavities, for the articu' 
 lation of the feven true ribs, to which their car- 
 tilages are fixed. The ilernum ferves to form 
 the anterior part of the breaft, to fupport the 
 ribs and clavicles, and to defend the parts con- 
 tained in the cavity of the breaft : it alfo ferves 
 for the infertion of the mediafl:inum, and for 
 the fuftaining the heart itfelf and feveral mufcles. 
 
 Q. Flow many ribs are there, and how are 
 they compofed ? 
 
 A. I'he coftte or ribs are tv/enty-four in 
 number, twelve on each fide ; the middle ribs 
 are the largeft : all the ribs are harder, rounder, 
 and more incurvatcd towards their articulati- 
 ons with the vertebrm, than at the other extre- 
 mity towards the fternum, which is thinner, 
 broader, and more fpongy. The ribs are dif- 
 tinguillied into true and Ipurious : the true ribs 
 are the feven upper pair, fo called, becaufe their 
 cartilages reach the fternum •, the fpurious, or 
 baftard-ribs, are the five loweft pair, fo called, 
 as being fmaller, fhorter, and more cartilaginous 
 than the reft, and not reaching fo far as the fter- 
 num, which makes their articulations very lax, 
 as they terminate in long, foft cartilages, which 
 bending upv/ards, are joined to the upper ribs. 
 On the infide of the middle ribs runs a pretty 
 deep finus, or channel, for the paftage of the 
 intercoftal veffels, reaching from the end next 
 the fpine, almoft to its junflure with the carti- 
 lage. 
 
138 ANATOMICAL 
 
 l::ge. In the anterior extremities, the carti- 
 lages of thefeven true ribs are all joined to the 
 fternum ; the eighth, ninth, and foinetimes 
 the tenth, cohere either with the fternum, 
 or mutually adhere to one another, by means 
 of their tranfverfe cartilages. The anterior 
 extremities of all the others, are loofe and 
 free, between the mufcles of the abdomen and 
 the diaphragm. In the pofterior extreniities 
 there are in moft of them two capitute, or 
 heads, which are firmly joined to the vertebr® 
 of the back, yet fo as to form movable articu- 
 lations •, for when they are drawn upv/ards, the 
 cavity of the breaft is enlarged for infpiration, 
 and fo the contrary. The ribs of infants may 
 be broken inwards like a green ftick, without 
 the broken ends being feparated i which is often 
 done, by the idle cuftom of carelefs nurfes, 
 taking hold of their breafts, and hoifting them 
 up on one hand frequently: thefhape of chil- 
 dren’s breafts are many times quite fpoiled by 
 fuch tricks, which occafions weaknefs of body, 
 crookednefs, and other difeafes. 
 
 What are the cartilages of the thorax ^ 
 
 A. The cartilages of the bones of the thorax 
 arc thofe of the vertebr<T, fternum, and ribs j 
 but the cartilages of the vertebrte are already' 
 fpoken of. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the fternum 
 and ribs ? 
 
 A. The Hernum of an adult has commonly 
 fixteen cartilages, (eight on each fide) fourteen 
 are articular, the other two fymphyfes. Of the 
 
 articular 
 
dialogues. 
 
 
 articular cartilages, two belong to the articula- 
 tions of the clavicula, and twelve to thofe of 
 the true ribs, from the fecond to the feventh in- 
 clufively. The two fymphyfes are thofe be- 
 tween the fternum, and the firft rib on each 
 fide. There is likewife another fymphyfis by 
 which the upper portion of the fbernum is con- 
 nedted to the lower, the cartilage of which is 
 often obliterated in an advanced age. The apo- 
 phyfis enfiforinis is often bony towards the fter- 
 num ; and more or lefs cartilaginous at the other 
 end. In very aged perfons it has been found 
 entirely oftified, and fometimes wholly cartila- 
 ginous, even in adults. All the ribs have car- 
 tilaginous portions (as before mentioned) which 
 differ from each other in length, breadth, in- 
 curvation, adhefions, and in their extremities 
 are whiter, more polifhed, broader and thicker 
 in the natural ftate than when they are dried. 
 The cartilages of the baftard, or falfe ribs, are 
 naturally more (lender and pliable than thofe of 
 the true ribs, the middle or inner fubftance of 
 which acquires the confiftence of bones in old 
 age, and their extremities fometimes ofllfy, and 
 are immovably fixed to the fternum. 
 
 What are the ligaments of the fternum 
 and ribs ? 
 
 A. The fternum has feveral ligaments by 
 which it is connedted with the clavicles and 
 ribs. It is joined to the clavicles by ftrong 
 fhort ligaments fixed by one extremity round 
 the edges of its fuperior notches ; by the other, 
 in the extremity of each clavicle ; and by the 
 
 middle 
 
1 
 
 A N A 1' O M i C A L 
 
 niidc^ie to the -inter-articular cartilages already 
 explained All the ribs are connedecl to the 
 bodies of the vertebrs, by ftrong fliort liga- 
 mentary fafciculi, fixed by one ei^d round the 
 foti'ulte in the vertebrae, and by the other round 
 the head of each rib. 1 he ribs are likewife tied 
 TO each other by thin ligaments which go ob- 
 liquely from the cartilage of each rib to that of 
 file next. I'he ten upper moll: ribs on each 
 iide are connedled to the tranfverfe apophyfes of 
 the vertebrae of the back, by ftrong ftiort arti- 
 cular ligaments fixed much in the fame manner 
 as thofe between the heads of the ribs and bo- 
 dies of the vertebrte. Both thefe articulations 
 are provided with capfular ligaments. The 
 eleventh rib on each ficie having no articulation 
 with the tranfverfe apophyfes is conneded to 
 them by auxiliary ftrong fliort ligaments fixed in 
 its neck. The laft rib is only joined by its head 
 to the body of the twelfth vertebra of the back-; 
 but it is conneded in a particular manner to the 
 tranfverfe apophyfis of the firft vertebra of the 
 loins by a broad ligament The firft true rib 
 has no ligamennary connexion with thefternum, 
 the carciiaginous lymphyfis being fufiicient. 
 The reft are clofely joined to that bone, in the 
 fame n’.anner as the clavicles abovemientioned. 
 The cartilage of the firft falle rib is joined to 
 that of the laft true rib, by feveral fhort liga- 
 mentary filaments •, and the other baftard ribs 
 are con'neded together much in the fame man- 
 ner. 
 
 Q. What are the mufcles of the thorax. 
 
 A, The 
 
D I z'i L O G U E S. 
 
 A. The miifcles of the thorax are, exten- 
 for dorfi et lumborum vel multifidus fpinje, 
 icalenus, ferratus, iuperior et inferior poflicus, 
 intercoftales externietinterni, triangulari fcerni, 
 and diaphragma •, befides thofe whofe aflions 
 tend chiefly to the upper extremities, which I 
 fhall defcribe hereafter. 
 
 Q. Which is theextenlbr dorfi et lumborum, 
 muicle ? 
 
 A. The longiflimus dorfi, multifidus fpinae, 
 femifpinaiis, facrolumbalis, &c. are all that 
 portion of flefli betwixt the os facrum and the 
 neck, which feeing there is no membrane to 
 diftinguifh it into feveral mufcles, is all employ- 
 ed in the fame adtions, I give it the name of 
 extenfor dorfi et lumborum vel mulrifidus fpinte, 
 which arifes from the upper part of the os fa- 
 crum, the fpine of the os ilium, the back parts 
 of the iowermpfl: vertebrse of the loins, and 
 remarkably from thofe ftrong tendons which 
 appear on their outfides. That part of this 
 mul'cle which is known by the name of facro- 
 lumbalis is inferted into all the ribs near their 
 aiticulations with the tranfverfe procelTes of the 
 vertebra, and into the tranfverfe procefs of the 
 ialt vertebra of the neck j befides, as this pafles 
 over the ribs, it receives an origin from every 
 rib. The portions of this mufcle, which arifc 
 from the ribs, and are inferted into other ribs 
 above, will necelTarily draw the back part of 
 the ribs nearer together, which mu ft: always be 
 done as the back extends. The next portion 
 of this mufcle, called longiflimus dorfi, is in- 
 fer ted 
 
M2 ANATOMICAL 
 
 ferted into all the tranfverfe procefTes of the 
 vertebra of the back (belonging to the thorax) 
 and partly into the ribs, and the uppermoft 
 tranfverfe procefTes of the vertebrs of the loins 
 the upper end of it is neither very diftindl from 
 the complexus of the head, nor fpinalis of the 
 neck. 1 he reft of this mufcle, known by the 
 names of femi-fpinalis, facer, &c. arifes alfo 
 from all the tranfverfe and oblique procefies of 
 the loins and back ; every portion, except the 
 lowermoft, paffing over five joints, is inferted 
 into the fpinal procefs of the fixth vertebra 
 above its origin, all the way up the back, and 
 at the neck commences tranfverfalis colli. Be- 
 fides the ufes of the extenfor dorfi et lumborum, 
 which its name implies, it and its fellow alter- 
 nately raile the hips in walking, which any one 
 may feel by laying his hand upon his back. 
 
 ^ Which is the fcalenus mufcle ? 
 
 A. I'he fcalenus arifes from the tranfverfe 
 procefies of the fecond, third, fourth, fifth, and 
 lixth cervical vertebrae. It is inferted in three 
 parts, into the firft, fecond and fometimes the 
 third rib, being thus divided for the tranfmif- 
 fion of the fubclavian veficls •, hence fome ana- 
 tomical writers have made three mufcles of it, 
 under the names of firft, fecond, and third fcale- 
 nus, or prior, medius, and pofticus. This 
 mul'clc may bend the neck •, but its chief ufe 
 is to fupport the upper ribs, and partly elevate 
 the thorax. 
 
 Which is the ferratus fuperior pofticus I 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 H3 
 
 A. The ferratus fuperior pofticus lies -imme- 
 diately under the rhomboides, and arifes from 
 the fpinal proceffts of the two inferior verte- 
 bra of the neck, and the three fuperior of the 
 thorax ; but it is inferted at the bending of the 
 fecond, third, and fourth ribs ; this, with the 
 fcalenus, fuftains the upper ribs, that they might 
 not be pulled downward by the depreffors of the 
 ribs in expiration, as the lower ribs are upward 
 in infpiration. 
 
 Which is the ferratus inferior pofticus ? 
 
 A. The ferratus inferior pofticus arifes from 
 the fpinal proceftes of the three fuperior v'erte- 
 brae of the loins, and two inferior of the thorax; 
 and is inferted at the bending of the ninth, 
 tenth, and eleventh ribs. It pulls down the 
 ribs in expiration. 
 
 Which are the intercoftales externi et in- 
 tern i ? 
 
 A. The intercoftales externi et intcrni, are 
 eleven pair on each fide, in the interftices of 
 the ribs •, from their fituations diftinguiftied into 
 external and internal ; they all arife from the 
 under edge of each rib, and are inferred into 
 the upper edge of the rib below. The exter- 
 nal are largeft backward, having their firft be- 
 ginnings from tlie tranfverfe proceftes of the 
 vertebrte like diftindt mufdes, which fome call 
 levatores coftarum. The internal run all from 
 above obliquely backward, being thickeft for- 
 ward and thinneft toward the fpine ; thefe are 
 alfo continued betwixt the cartilages of the 
 fternum, which fibres are perpendicular to tlie 
 2 cartilages ; 
 
144 ANATOMICAL 
 
 cartilages ; and between the cartilages of the 
 lowed ribs, they are infeparable frorri the obli- 
 quus afcendens abdominis, Thefe mufcles, by- 
 drawing the ribs nearer to each other, pull them 
 all upward, and dilate the thorax, they being 
 fuftained at the top by the fcaienus and lerratus 
 fuperior pofticus. 
 
 Which is the triangularis flerni mufcle ? 
 
 A. The triangularis fterni ariies from the 
 lower and interior part of the fternum, and in- 
 ternally from the cartilage enfiformis ; it is in- 
 ferted on each fide into the cartilages of the 
 fourth, fifth, fixth, and feventh true ribs ; and 
 it is one of the conftriftor or deprefibr naufcles 
 of the bread, which pulls the ribs to the bone of 
 fhe dernum, and thereby bends its cartilages in 
 expiration. 
 
 Qa Which is the diaphragnia ? 
 
 A. The diaphragma, is the tranfverfe mufcle 
 which feparates the thorax from the abdomen. 
 This is a very broad and thin mufcle, fituated 
 at the bafis of the thorax, and ferving as a 
 tranfverfe partition to feparate that cavity from 
 the abdomen : for this reafon the Greeks termed 
 it diaphragma, and the Larins, feptum tranf- 
 verfum. Its upper fuperficies is convex, and its 
 lower concave. It is connebted with the der- 
 mim, the fpurious ribs, the pericardium, tlie 
 mediadinum, and the vertebrse of the loins. 
 1 here are in the diaphragm two large foramina ; 
 the fird is in the left fide of it, and gives paf- 
 fage to the gula, and the par-vagum ^ the le~ 
 cond is in the right fide, and the lower trunk of 
 3 the 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 H5 
 
 t’ne vena cava pafies through it •, there is alfo an 
 interflice between the two heads of the lower 
 part *, through which pal's the aorta, the vena 
 azygos, and the dudlus thoracicus. The dia- 
 phragm is covered with a membrane on the up- 
 per part from the pleura ; on the lower from the 
 peritonaeum. This mufcle arifes on the right 
 fide by a procefs from three lumbal vertebrae, 
 and one of the thorax ; and on the left, froni 
 one fuperior of the loins, and inferior of the 
 thorax ; and is inferred into the lower part of 
 the fternum, and the five inferior ribs. The 
 middle of this mufcle is a fiat tendon, from 
 whence the fiefhy fibres begin, and are diftri- 
 buted, like radii from a centre to a circum- 
 ference. The ufes of the diaphragm are, firix, 
 to aflifc in refpiration ; for in taking in the 
 breath, it is prefied downwards, and in expira- 
 tion, it ril'es upward, into the cavity of the 
 thorax : fecondly, to alTifl: the necelTary moti- 
 ons of the contents of the abdomen, viz. of 
 the flomach, inteftines, liver, and fpleen j and 
 in the promoting the fecretions of the chyle, 
 bile, &c, and, lalfly, for affifting the expulilon 
 of the feces, the urine, the foetus in parturition, 
 and of the fecundines. When the diaphragm 
 adfs alone, it confirridts the thorax, pulling the 
 ribs downward, which adlion is generally per- 
 formed to promote the ejedtion or the feces. 
 
 What are the vifcera of the thorax ? 
 
 A. The vifcera of the thorax are properly 
 only the heart and lungs but that cavity alio 
 contains the plura, mediailinum, pericardium ' 
 
 T ^ 9 
 
146 ANATOMICAL 
 
 a portion of the trachea arteria, and the greater 
 part of the cefophagus, befides the thoracic 
 dudt, blood veffes, nerves, and glands. 
 
 What is the pleura ? 
 
 A. The pleura is a fine fmooth, robuft, and 
 tenfe membrane, adhering very clofely to the 
 inner furface of the ribs, fternum, and inter- 
 coftal mufcles, and lining the whole cavity of 
 the thorax, except the diaphragm, which is 
 covered with no other than its own proper 
 membrane. Its ftrudlure refembles two facks 
 or bags (one on each fide the thorax,) which 
 contains the two lobes of the lungs : from the 
 conjunction of thefe two facculi of the pleura 
 in the middle of the thorax, is formed the me- 
 diaftinum, which I fliall fpeak of by and by. 
 The pleura is compofed of a double membrane 
 of a very firm texture, and plentifully ftored 
 with blood-veflels and nerves, in all which it re- 
 fembles the peritonreum, (which I fhall defcribc 
 hereafter) and likewife, in that it is made up 
 of an inner true membranous lamina, and a 
 cellular fubftance on the outfide, which is a 
 produdion or continuation of the lamina. Its 
 veflels are arteries, veins, nerves, and lympha- 
 tics. The arteries arife from the intercoltals, 
 the diaphragmatic, and the mammary ones, 
 and are very numerous ; the veins from the 
 veins of the fame name with thofe arteries; but 
 all of them difcharge themfelves into the trunk 
 of the vena azygos, and the upper trunk of the 
 cava. The nerves are from the vertebrae of 
 the thorax, and the diaphragmatic ones. Tiie 
 
 lymphatics 
 
dialogues. 
 
 U7 
 
 lymphatics all run to the du6lus thoradcus. 
 The ufe of the pleura is :o make the infide of 
 the thorax fmooth and equal, and to lubricate 
 and ftrengthen the whole cavity. 
 
 a What is the mediaflinum ? 
 
 A. The mediaftinum, is a double membrane 
 continuous to the fternum, ntuated under it, 
 and adhering firmly to it ; it is formed by the 
 continuation of the pleura, which comes from 
 the fternum, and goes through the middle of the 
 thorax to the vertebras, dividing the cavity of 
 the thorax longitudinally into two parts ; but 
 as it is not exadlly under the middle of the fter- 
 num, but fomewhat to the left fide, the right 
 part of the thorax is larger than the left : hence 
 may be judged the uncertainty of trepaning the 
 fternum, recommended by the ancients in fome 
 cafes. This double feptum, or partition, con- 
 tains in its duplicacure, the heart in its pericar- 
 dium, the vena cava, the oefophagus, and fto- 
 machic nerves. The mediaftinum receives veins 
 and arteries from the mammary and diaphrag- 
 matic veflels, and fometimes has proper and par- 
 ticular ones of its own from the aorta and cava : 
 thefe are then called the mediaftinal veflels. 
 Its nerves, which are fmall, are from the dia- 
 phragmatics, and the par vagum. It has a 
 member of lymphatics, which run to the 
 dudlus thoracicus. The ufes of the mediafti- 
 num are two : the firft is to divide the breaft 
 longitudinally into two parts, by which feveral 
 great purpofes are anfwered j as, i. That on 
 one of the lobes being ulcerated, the other 
 L 2 might 
 
148 ANATOMICAL 
 
 might not be immediately afFefted. 2. That 
 water, matter, or any thing elfe contained in 
 one part of the thorax, might nor, at the fame 
 time, affedt both parts of the lungs. 3. That 
 in cafe of a wound in one fide of the thorax, 
 refpiration might be continued in the other, 
 and the perfon not be immediately fuffocated. 
 The fecond general ufe of the mediaftinum is to 
 fupport the heart in its pendulous ftate, for the 
 benefit of its free motion, efpecially when we 
 lie on our backs. 
 
 Q. What are the lungs ? 
 
 A. The lungs are the largeft vifcus of the tho- 
 rax : they are fituated in the two Tides of it, with 
 the heart as it were between them ; and are con- 
 nedled by means of the mediaftinum with the 
 fternum®and vertebra-, with the heart by means 
 of the pulmonary vefTels, and immediately with 
 the afpera arteria. The colour of the lungs ih 
 infants is a fine florid red ; in adults it is 
 darker ; and in old people livid, or variegated 
 with black and white. When inflated they have 
 fome refemblance to the hoof of an oxj and are 
 convex on the upper fide next the ribs, and con-« 
 cave underneath next the diaphragm. They are 
 divided into two large lobes, one feated on each 
 fide of the mediaftinum •, the left lobe, which 
 is the fmalleft, is fubdivided into two lobules, 
 and the right, which, is larger, is fubdivideci 
 into three lobules. The double membrane, 
 with which the lungs are furrounded, is con- 
 tinuous externally with the pleura, and inter- 
 nally not only immediately covering the fub- 
 ilance of the lungs, but alfo all its inner lamina, 
 
 and 
 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 149 
 
 and fills up the interftices which are between 
 the bunches of the fmall lobes or lobules with 
 little veficular cells. The fine capillary blood 
 velTels are fo thick upon this membrane, that it 
 feems to be nothingr but a net-work of veins 
 and arteries. The fubftance or the lungs is 
 fpongeous, or veficulous, and they feem, in- 
 deed, entirely compoled of an infinite number 
 of little lobes, or lobules, of various figures 
 and magnitudes ; but their furfaces are lb a- 
 dapted to one another, as to leave but very few 
 and fmall interftices. Thefe lobes are difpofed 
 like fo many bunches of grapes, upon dre fides 
 of the bronchia, or ramifications of the trachea 
 (delcribed hereafter) ; each little lobe, or lobule, 
 contains within its own proper membrane an 
 infinite number of fmall orbicular vefiels, which 
 leave fmall interftices betv/een them, full of 
 little membranes, like thole which tie the lobes 
 together. The bronchia, in their origin, are 
 formed of imperfed annuli, and in their pro- 
 grefs of cartilaginous and membranous feg- 
 ments, very cunoufly conneded and joined to- 
 gether; thefe have their origin from the trachea; 
 and after being fubdivided into innumerable 
 ramifications, finally terminate in thofe fmall 
 veficles which form the greater part of the fub- 
 ftance of the lungs, as before mentioned. 
 Thefe extremities (of the branches of the bron- 
 chia) open into the cavity of the vefiels, which 
 are properly formed by its membranes ; but the 
 capillary blood vefiTels are only fpread upon the 
 veficles like a net, with frequent and large in- 
 L 3 ofculation. 
 
150 ANATOMICAL 
 
 ofcu’ation. The veflels which enter the lungs 
 are the trachea, or afpera arteria, by which we 
 draw in the air, (hereafter to be defcribed.) 
 The arteria pulmonalis, which comes from the 
 right ventricle ; fee page 22, and the vena pul- 
 monalis, whofe trunk opens into the left ven- 
 tricle of the heart, fee page 34; each of thefe 
 divides into two branches, for the two great 
 lobes of the lungs, where they are fubdivided 
 into as many branches as there are little lobes 
 or veficies in the lungs. Wherever there is a 
 branch of the trachea, there is alfo a branch of 
 the vein and artery j and the trachea is always 
 in the middle. Upon the branches of the 
 trachea arteria (which I obferved before are 
 termed bronchia) runs a fmall artery called 
 arteria bronchialis, and a fmall vein called vena 
 pneumonica ; the artery comes from the aorta, 
 and the veins open into the fubclavian. Upon 
 the bronchi, even to the minuteft ramifications, 
 run likewife the fine threads of the eighth pair 
 of nerves. Befides thele, the lungs have lym- 
 phatics, which difeharge themfelves into the 
 thoracic du6t i but they are fmaller, and make 
 more frequent inofculations than are obferved 
 any v;here elfe. The lungs of animals before 
 they have been dilated with air, are fpecifically 
 heavier than water ; but upon inflation, they be- 
 come fpecifically lighter, and fwim in water ; 
 which experimient may be made to difeover 
 whether a dead child was ftiil-born, or not: 
 but if the child has breathed but a little, and 
 the experiment is made long after, the lungs 
 
 may 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 151 
 
 may be collapfed, and grow heavier than water, 
 as I have found by experiment, which may 
 fometimes lead a man to give a wrong judg- 
 ment in a court of judicature, but then it will 
 be on the charitable fide of the queftion, Ad- 
 hefions of the lungs to the pleura are in men fo 
 common, I know not hov/ to call it a difeafe ; 
 they being found fo, more or lels, in moil a- 
 dult perfons, and without any inconvenience, 
 if the lungs are not rotten. 
 
 What is the pericardium ? 
 
 A. The pericardium, or heart-purfe, is an 
 exceeding flirong membranaceous bag, loofely 
 including the heart *, the figure of the pericar- 
 dium is conic, like that of the heart itfelf ; its 
 fize is fuch as can conveniently contain the 
 lieart, without prefilng upon it-, it is connedted 
 with the mediaftinum, with a great part of the 
 diaphragm, and with the large velfels of the 
 heart, which, together with this covering, fuf- 
 tains alfo the heart itfelf in its place. The 
 pericardium is compofed of a double mem- 
 brane i the exterior one is common with the 
 pleura and mediaftinum •, the interior is proper, 
 lubricous, and is continuous with the coats of 
 the larger veflels. This membrane, when ex- 
 panded upon the finger, frequently difcovers a 
 great number of foraminula, or little apertures. 
 The arteries and veins of the pericardium are 
 from thofeof the mediaftinum and diaphragm, 
 and its nerves are alfo from the diaphragmatics. 
 Its lymphatics all run to the thoracic du6l. The 
 nfes of the pericardium are, to fupport the heart 
 L 4 in 
 
i 52 ANATOMICAL 
 
 in a pendulous ftate, efpecially when we Lite 
 down ; to defend the heart from the cold air 
 taken in at the lungs, to preferve it from be- 
 ing injured by water, by matter, or any other 
 extraneous fluid in the cavity of the thorax; 
 and to contain a liquor to lubricate the furface 
 of the heart, facilitate its motions, and abate 
 its friftion againil the pericardium. The peri- 
 cardium is found fometimes in perfons who 
 have been long hedic, to cohere with the fub- 
 llance of the heart ; and there have been in- 
 ftances of its liaving been wholly wanting. 
 
 Q. What is the heart ? 
 
 A. lire heart is a mukular body, included 
 in the pericardium (juft now deicribed) and 
 lituated in the cavity of the thorax, nearly 
 in the middle of the breaft, on the anterior part 
 of the diaphragm, between the lobes ol the lungs 
 and the two laminae of the mediaftinum. Th« 
 heart is the primary organ of the circulation of 
 the blood, and confequently of life. It is in 
 focne meafure of a conical figure, flatted on the 
 lides, round at the top or apex, and oval at the 
 bafis ; its lower part is plane, and the upper 
 part convex. Its fituation is nearly tranfverfe, 
 or horizontal; fo that its bale is in the right fide, 
 upon the fourth and fifth vertebra of the thorax; 
 and its apex or point is inclined downwards, ly- 
 ing v ith. the greateft part of its bulk in the left 
 fide of the thorax, and confequently it is there 
 that the puliation is felt. Its bafe is fixed by 
 the veffcls going to and from it ; but its apex 
 js jrce, and is received in a kind of cavity of 
 
dialogues. 
 
 1 r ^ 
 
 the left lobe of the lungs, as may be obferved, 
 the lungs being extended with air. This in- 
 cumbrance on the left lobe of the lungs feems 
 to be the caufe of that fides being moil fubjed; 
 to the pleuritic pains, which have generally 
 been found upon diOedion to proceed from in- 
 flammations in the lungs. I'he length of the 
 human heart is about iix fingers breadth, ar. 
 the bafe about five fingers, and its circum- 
 ference about thirteen. 
 
 At tiie bafis of the heart, on eadi fide, are 
 fituated two appendices called auricles, to re- 
 ceive the blood ; the right from the two venm 
 cavee, and the lett from the pulrnonaiy veins, 
 (bee vena cava and pulmonaris.j In the right 
 auricle, at the meeting of the cavte, is an emi- 
 nence called tuberculum Loweii, which direfts 
 the blood into the auricle •, immediately below 
 this tubercle, in the ending of the cava afeen- 
 dens is the veftige of the foramen ovale, and 
 near this in the auricle, is the mouth of the 
 coronary veins. The left auricle is much Ids 
 than the right ; but the difference is fupplied 
 by a large mu.ffular cavity, which the veins 
 from the Jungs afford in that place. 1 he fides 
 of this muicular cavity are thicker than the 
 fides of the right auricle, in about that propor- 
 tion in which the left ventricle of the heart is 
 ffronger chan the right 5 their ufes being to re- 
 ceive blood from the veins that lead to the 
 heart, and prefs it into the ventricles, as a 
 ffrengrli in each auricle proportionable to the 
 ffrength of the ventricle that it is to fill with 
 
 blood. 
 
154 ANATOMICAL 
 
 blood, feems neceffary : and this different thick- 
 nefs of the coats of the auricles makes the blood 
 in the left, which is thickdf, appear through it 
 of a paler red ; but when it is let out of the 
 auricles, it appears alike from both •, which 
 they would do well to examine, who affirm the 
 blood returns from the lungs of a more florid 
 colour than it went in, and offer it as an argu- 
 ment of the blood’s being mixed with air in 
 lungs. 
 
 There are alfo two cavities in the heart called 
 its ventricles, w'hich receive the blood, and are 
 hollow mulcles, or two cavities in one mufcle. 
 Both thefe cavities receiving the fame quantities 
 of blood in the fame times, and alwajs afting 
 together, mult be equal in fize, as it is general- 
 ly fuppolt-d they equally difcharge what they 
 contain at every fyftole neverthelefs, the left 
 appears Icfs than the right, it being found 
 empty in dead bodies, and the right ufually full 
 of blood. Each ventricle opens at the bafe by 
 two orifices, one of which anfwers to the auricles, 
 the other to the mouth of a large artery ; the 
 former receives the blood through the veins, the 
 latter delivers the blood through the arteries. 
 The right ventricle is fituate anteriorly, and is 
 thinner and weaker in its circumference, but 
 ufually much more capacious than the left: it 
 receives the blood from the vena cava and the 
 right auricle, and delivers it into the pulmonary 
 artery, to be carried to the lungs. The left 
 ventricle is much ftronger and thicker in its 
 Tides, but is narrower and fmaller than the 
 
 right j 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 155 
 
 right j it receives the blood from the pulmo- 
 nary vein and the left auricle, and drives it 
 very fwcibly into the aorta, and fo through the 
 whole body. 
 
 Over the orifices of the veins at the entrance 
 of the auricles in each ventricle, are placed 
 valves, to hinder a return of blood while the 
 heart contrafts •, thofe in the right ventricle are 
 named tricufpides, thofe in the left mitrales : 
 in the beginning of each artery from the heart, 
 are placed three valves, which hinder a return 
 of blood into the ventricles The fi' ft fort of 
 valves open inward toward the ventricles, allow- 
 ing the blood to enter the heart, but hindering 
 it from returning the fame way •, the other kind 
 open outward from the heart toward the great 
 veffels, fuifering the blood to go out of the 
 heart, but hindering it from returning; thefe 
 laft are termed femi lunar valves ; but thofe in 
 the pulmonary artery are more properly named 
 figmoidales, and thofe in the aorta femi- 
 lunares. 
 
 The inner furface of the ventricles is verv 
 uneven, many eminences and cavities being 
 obfervable therein ; the ventricles are divided 
 by a feptum running between the edges ; and 
 their moll confiderable eminencies are thick 
 flefhy produdions called column^e. To the ex- 
 tremities of thefe pillars are fallened feveral ten- 
 dinous cords, the other ends of which are join- 
 ed to the valvuia: tricufpides. The cavities of 
 the inner furface of the ventricles are fmall deep 
 foffula; or lacunae placed very near each other, 
 
 with 
 
15 ^ ANATOMICAL 
 
 with fmall prominent interftices between them. 
 I'he greatefl: part of thele lacunae are orifices of 
 the venous duffs. 
 
 '1 he blood vcfiels of the heart are of two 
 kinds, common and proper ; its proper or pe- 
 culiar vefTels being the coronary arteries and 
 ■\'eins. 'I he common veflels of the heart are 
 tv^/o veins, called the vena cava and the vena 
 pulmonalis-, and two arteries, the pulmonary, 
 cne, and aorta. The nerves of the heart are 
 fmall, and arife from the par vagum and inter- 
 cofbals. See Dialogue 1. arteries, veins and 
 nerves, 
 
 Cd Which are the coronary arteries ? 
 
 A. The coronary arteries are two in number, 
 and go out from the beginning of the aorta, and 
 afterwards fpread themfelves round the bafis of 
 the heart, to the. fub fiance of which they fend 
 numerous randiications One turns to the 
 right hand, the other to the left : the right coro- 
 nary artery runs in between the bafis and right 
 auricle all the way to Tc flat fide of the heart, 
 and fo goes half way round : the left artery has 
 a like courfe between tiie bafis and left auricle, 
 and before it turns on the bafis, it fends off a 
 capital brancli, wliich runs between the two 
 ventricles. Another principal branch goes off 
 from the union of the two arteries on the fiat 
 fide of the heart, which: running to the apex,, 
 there joins the other branch. 
 
 Cf Which are the coronary veins ? 
 
 A. The coionary veins are diflributed ex- 
 teriorly much in the fame manner as the arteries, 
 
 but 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 157 
 
 but they end partly in the right auricle, and 
 partly in the right ventricle •, their trunk prin- 
 cipally in the former, by a particular orifice,- 
 furnillied with a femi-lunar valve. They like- 
 wife terminate in the left ventricle, but in fmaller 
 numbers. All the coronary veins and tlieir 
 ramifications communicate with each other. 
 
 Cb What is the trachea or afpera arteria ? 
 
 A. The trachea or afpera arteria, vulgarly- 
 called the wind-pipe, is a large canal, partly car- 
 tilaginous, and partly membranous, extended 
 from the mouth to the lungs. It is fituated in 
 the middle and anterior part of the neck, and 
 is connedled with the fauces, lungs and csfopha- 
 gus. Its mouth or entrance is, by anatomiils, 
 called the larynx, the reft afpera arteria. The 
 afpera arteria extends from the larynx to the 
 bronchia, or lungs, being in fome meafure of 
 a conic figure. Its beginning is cylindrical, 
 and capable of admitting a finger ; and its 
 other end is fome'what narrower. It runs down 
 into the thorax, under the fternum, between 
 the two pleurm, through the upper fpace left 
 between the duplicature of the mediaftinum, 
 behind the thymus gland. Having reached as 
 low as the fourth vertebra of the back and cur- 
 vature of the aorta, it divides into two lateral 
 parts or branches, one, tov/ards the right hand, 
 the other towards the left, which enter the 
 lungs, and are diftributed through them in the 
 manner there deferibed : thefe two branches are 
 called bronchia, and that on the . right fide is 
 Iborter than chat on the left; v/hereas the right 
 
 pulmonary 
 
15 ? ANATOMICAL 
 
 pulmonary artery is the flrongeft. The trachea 
 is made up of fegments of circles, or cartilagi- 
 nous rings, difpofed in luch a manner as to form 
 a canal open on the back part i the cartilages 
 not going quite round ; but this opening is filled 
 by a foft glandular membrane, which com- 
 pletes the circumference of the canal. Thele 
 circles or hoops, are in number from fixtcen to 
 twenty, and are all connefted by a very ftrong, 
 elaftic, membranous ligament, fixed to their 
 edges. 
 
 The canal of the afpera arteria is lined on 
 the infide by a particular membrane, which ap- 
 pears to be partly flefhy, or mufcular, and part- 
 ly ligamentary, perforated by an infinite num- 
 ber of fmall holes, more or lefs imperceptible, 
 through which a mucilaginous fluid continually 
 pafles to defend the inner furface of the trachea 
 againfl; the acrimony of the air which we breathe. 
 At the angle of the firft ramification of the tra- 
 chea arteria, we find on both the fore and back- 
 fides certain foft, roundifh, glandular bodies, of 
 a livid colour, and of a texture partly like that 
 of the thymus, and partly like that of the glan- 
 dule thyroides. I'here are other glands of the 
 fame kind at the origin of each ramification of 
 the bronchia, but they decreafe proportionably, 
 in number and fize : they are fixed immediate- 
 ly to the bronchia, and covered by the interlo- 
 bular fiibftance ; and they feem to communi- 
 cate by fmall openings, with the cavity of the 
 bronchia, as bciore obfei ved. 
 
 4 
 
 The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 *59 
 
 The ules of the trachea are to afTift in deglu- 
 tition, and to be affilfant to the lungs. On the 
 exterior part of the trachea are the thyroide and 
 bronchial glands, (which I fhall hereafter men- 
 tion) which fecrete a humour to moiften it : its 
 arteries are from the external carotids, the veins 
 from thejugulars, and the nerves from the re- 
 current ones of the plexus cervicalis. 
 
 What is the cefophagus ? 
 
 A. The cefophagus, or gullet, is that mem- 
 branous canal which conveys the aliment from 
 the mouth to the ftomach. It is partly mufcu- 
 iar, and partly membranous, fituated behind 
 the trachea arteria, and before the vertebra of 
 the back, from near the middle of the neck, 
 down to the lower part of the thorax, from 
 whence it paffes into the abdomen, through a 
 particular hole of the fmall or inferior mufcle 
 of the diaphragm, and ends at the upper ori- 
 fice of the ftomach. Its upper part is wide and 
 open, I'pread behind the tongue to receive the 
 mafticated aliment, and is termed pharynx, the 
 mufcles of which 1 have already fpoken of. 
 The fubftance of the cefophagus is compofed 
 of feveral coats, almoll in the fame manner 
 as the ftomach, of which it is the continuation. 
 The firft coat, while in the thorax, is formed 
 only by a duplicature of the pofterior part of 
 the mediaftinum, and is wanting above the 
 thorax, and in the neck, where the outer coat 
 of the cefophagus is only a continuation of the 
 cellular fubftance belonging to the neighbour- 
 ing parts. The lecond coat is mulcuiar, made 
 
 up 
 
i5o ANATOMIC A L 
 
 up of feveral ftrata of flefhy fibres. The outei- 
 moft are chiefly longitudinal, but are not all 
 continued from one end of the canal to the 
 other. The following ftrata are obliquely tranf- 
 veiTe, the next to thefe more tranlVerfe, and 
 the innermoft are turned a little. obliquely the 
 contrary way j,,yjey«"erofs each other irregular- 
 ly in many places, but are neither fpiral nor 
 annular. The third coat is termed the nervous 
 coat, and is like that of the ftomach and in- 
 teftines. It is diflerently folded or plaited, ac- 
 cording to its length ; being much wider than 
 the mufcular coat, and furrounded by a whitifli, 
 fine, filamentary fubflance, like a kind of cotton, 
 which, vdren fteeped in water, fwells and grows 
 thicker. The fourth or innermoft coat refem- 
 bles, in fome meafure, that of the inteftines, 
 except, that inftead of the villi, it has fmall 
 and very fhort papillae. It is folded length- 
 wife, like the third coat, fo that the oe.ft>pha- 
 gus when cut acrois, reprefents one tube with- 
 in another. Through the pores of this coat, a 
 vilcid lymph is continually difeharged. 
 
 ■ The osfophagus, from its very beginning, 
 turns a little to the left hand, and naturally 
 runs along the left extremities of the cartilages 
 of the afpera arteria. The arteries of the oelb- 
 phagus are from the carotids, the aorta, the in- 
 tercoftal, and the cnsliac. 1 he veins are from 
 the jugulars, the azygos, and the coronary veins 
 of the ftomach ; and the nerves from the par 
 vagum. 'I'hei'e are alfo certain exci'etory duds, 
 called dud'us excretorii novee vercelloni, which 
 
 arife 
 
dialogues. i 6 i 
 
 &Hfe from the glands, and convey a faltifli li- 
 quor into the oefophagus and ftomach : fee the 
 glands of the thorax. The glands, from which 
 thefe dufts have their origin, are of three kinds, 
 viz. thegaftric glands, which are conglomerate, 
 and are fituated near the left orifice of the 
 ftomach, the dorfal ones, which are fituated near 
 the fifth vertebra of the thorax ; and the bron- 
 chial, thyroidcj and tracheal, defcribed below. 
 The ufe of the oefophagus is to carry the meat 
 from the mouth into the ftomach, by means of 
 the mufcles of the pharynx and flelhy fibres of 
 the gula, which perform its penftaltic motion, 
 and alfofor a commixtion of the liquid ferving 
 for digeftion. 
 
 What are the arteries of the thorax ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the thorax (befides thole 
 of the vifcera 1 have already mentioned) are 
 various, and proceed chiefly from the aorta al- 
 ready fpoken of. The branches of the afcend- 
 ing aorta in the thorax take their names 
 from the parts they are bcftowed onf the prin- 
 cipal branches are arteri^ coronari^e, carotides, 
 fubclavis, from the latter arife the thymica, 
 diaphragmaticte, pericardia, mediaftina, tra- 
 chealis, and mammaria interna : thefe from 
 the aorta afcendens. From the fuperior por- 
 tion of the aorta defcendens arife arteriffi bron- 
 chiales, cefophagese, intercoftales, to their parts 
 of the thorax. The coronary and carotid ar- 
 teries are already defcribed. 
 
 CX Which are the fubclavian arteries ? 
 
 A. The fubclavian arteries are fo named from 
 their fituation near the clavicles, in the tranfverfe 
 M direc.. 
 
i 62 anatomical 
 
 direftion of which they run j they are , two m 
 number-, one right, the other left. Ihefe ar- 
 teries arife from the arch of the aorta, on each 
 fide of the left carotid, which commonly lies in 
 the middle between them but when both caro- 
 tids go out feparately, they both lie between the 
 fubclavijE. 1 hefe arteries terminate, .or rather 
 change their name, above the middle of the two 
 firif ribs, beewetn the anterior infertions of the 
 mufeuli fcaleni They give off fmall arteries to 
 the media9:inum, pi^ricardium, and afpera arte- 
 ria -, afterwards they lend off the mam maria inter- 
 na, cervicalis, and vertebralis, and fometimes an 
 intercoftal artery to the firft ribs. The right 
 fubclavian, at about a finger’s breadth from its 
 origin, alfo often produces the common carotid 
 of the fame fide. 
 
 Which is the arteria thymica ? 
 
 A. 1 he arteria thymica arifes front the fub- 
 clavian, communicating with and receives fome 
 branches from the mammaria interna and has 
 fome from the intercoffalis fuperior. The me- 
 diaftina and pericardia the fame. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria pericardia ? 
 
 A. The arteria pericardia aifo arifes from the 
 anterior middle part of the fubclavian, and runs 
 down iipon the pericardium all the way to the 
 diaphragm to which it fends fome fmall ramifi- 
 
 cations. . n- ? 
 
 Q Which is the arteria medialtinaf 
 
 A. The rpediaftina arifes fometimes 
 diately after the thymica, and is dillributed 
 principally to the mediaftinum. ^ 
 
DIALOGUES. 163 
 
 Which is the arteria trachealis ? 
 
 A. I he trachealis runs up from the fubcla- 
 Via, in a winding courfe, along the afpera ar- 
 teria, to the glahdulse thyroides and larynx, 
 detaching fmall arteries to both Tides, one of 
 which runs to the upper part of the fcapula. 
 
 Qa Which is the arteria mammaria interna? 
 
 A. The interna) mammary artery comes from 
 the anterior and lower fide of the fubclavian 
 hear the middle of the clavicle, and runs down 
 for about one finger’s breadth behind tlie car- 
 tilages of the true ribs, an inch diftant from the 
 fternum. In its pafTage, it fends branche.>> to 
 the thymus, mediaflinum^ pericardium, pleura, 
 and intercoftal mufcles •, and through thel'e 
 tnufcles, and between the cartilages of the ribs, 
 to the pecloralis rhajot, mamms, rhembrana 
 adipofa, and fi<in. Several uf thefe branches 
 communicate by anaflomofes with the mamma- 
 ria interna, and other arteries of the thorax. 
 Afterwards it goes out of the thorax, on one 
 fide of the appendix enfiformii, ancTis loft in 
 the mufculus abdominis reCtus, a little below* 
 its upper part ; communicating at this place 
 with the epigaflric artery, and in its courfe it 
 gives off branches to the peritonaeum, and the 
 anterior parts of the abdominal mufcles. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria intercoffalis fuperior? 
 
 A. The fuperior intercoftal artery^ when it 
 It does not go out from the trunk of the aoi ta 
 delcendens, commonly arifes from the lower 
 fide or the iubclavian, and runs down on the 
 infide of the two, three, or four uppennoft 
 M 2 iiue 
 
i 64 anatomical 
 
 true ribs, near their heads, fending off under 
 each rib a branch, which runs along the lower 
 edge, and fupplies the intercoftai mufcles, and 
 neighbouring parts of the pleura. Thefe 
 branches all communicate with one another, 
 up and down the intercoftai mufcles. They 
 alfo give branches to the mufculi fterno-hyoi- 
 dei, fubclavius, vertebrales, and bodies of the 
 vertebrae, peiftoralis, and through the notches of 
 the firft four vertebra to the medulla fpinalis. 
 Which are the arteriae bronchiales ? 
 
 A. The bronchial arteries go either from 
 the forefide of the fuperior part of the defcend- 
 ing aorta, firft intercoftai, or arteriae oefophagea. 
 They rife fometimes fingle fometimes double, 
 fometimes triple, and adhere every where firm- 
 ly to the bronchia •, their branches, or ramifica- 
 tions, communicate fometimes with thofe of the 
 pulmonary vein, arteria oefophagea, coronaria 
 cordis, and vena azygos. 
 
 Which are the arterise oefophagete ? 
 
 A. The oefophagese are generally two or 
 three in number, though fometimes but one. 
 They arile anteriorly from the aorta defcen- 
 dens, and are diftributed to the cefophagus, 
 &c. Sometimes the uppermoft cefophagus pro- 
 duces a bronchial artery. 
 
 Which are the arteriae intercoftales in- 
 feriores ? 
 
 A. The inferior intercoftals are commonly 
 feven or eight on each fide, and fometimes ten, 
 Vv'hen the fuperior intercoftals arile likewife 
 from the aorta defcendens ; in ^Yhich cafe, thefe 
 
 run 
 
dialogues. i6g 
 
 run obliquely up upon the ribs. They arife 
 along the backfide of the defending aorta ge- 
 nerally in pairs, all the way to the diaphragm, 
 and run tranfverfely toward each fide, on the 
 bodies of the vertebrge. Thofe on the right 
 fide pafs behind the vena azygos ; and after- 
 wards, they run to the intercollal mufcles, a- 
 long the lower edge of the ribs, all the way to 
 the fternum or near it. They fend branches to 
 the pleura, vertebral mufcles, mufcles of the 
 thorax, and to the upper portions of the muf- 
 cles of the abdomen, and they comm.unicate 
 with the arteriae epigallricas and lumbares. 
 Before they take this courfe along the ribs, &c. 
 they detach branches to the great canal of the 
 fpina doifi, which communicating with the like 
 arteries from the other fide of the fpine, form a 
 kind of arterial rings, as do the arterise lum- 
 bares, After the above courfe, each intercoftal 
 about the middle of the rib fends a principal 
 branch internally, and another externally ; thofe 
 that run upon the falfe ribs are afterwards dif- 
 tributed to the abdominal and other neighbour- 
 ing mufcles, particularly to thofe of the dia- 
 phragm. They alfo communicate with the 
 lumbares, and Ibmetimes with branches of the 
 hypogaftricas. 
 
 a wh ich is the arteria mammaria externa 
 vel thoracica fuperior ? 
 
 A. The externa] mammary or fuperior tho- 
 racic artery, runs down in a winding courfe 
 on the lateral parts of the thorax, and crofles 
 the ribs. It gives branches to the two pecloral 
 M 3 mufcles, 
 
i66 ANATOMICAL 
 
 mufcles, to the mamma, mufculus fubfclavius, 
 ferratus major, latlfTimus dorfi, and to the upper 
 portions of tlic coracorbrachialis and biceps. 
 
 Q, W hich is the arteria thoracica interior ? 
 
 A. The inferior thoracic artery runs along 
 the inferior coda of the tcapula to the mufcu- 
 lus fubfcapularir, teres major, and minor, infra, 
 fpir.atus, fenatus major, latiffimus doifi, an4 
 thr neighbouring intercoftal mutcles, commu- 
 picacing with the arteriae fcapti'ares. 
 
 Q. Wliat are the veins of the tnorax ? 
 
 A. The veins of the thorax are alfo various, 
 anci proceed chiefly from the vena cava fupe- 
 rior already fpoken of. T he principal branches 
 are, vense coronarite cordis, vena azygos vel 
 fine pari, vente intcrcoftales, pedoralis inter- 
 nal, (from the latter arife the diaphragmaticae 
 ftiperiores, mediaftinte, mammarias interniE, 
 thymics, peripardite, and gutturales, or tra- 
 cheales) fubclaviae, jugulares, vertebrales. 
 The coronary veins of the lEart, the jugular? 
 and vertcbrals, I have already fpoken of. 
 
 In deferibing the veins, 1 lliall begin with 
 the great trunks, and end with the raipifications 
 and capillary extremities, according to their 
 feveral divifions and fubdivifions, as I have 
 before obfervtd. 
 
 Ck Which is the vena azygos, or fine pari ? 
 
 A. The vena azygo?, or fine pari, is a vein 
 arifing within the thorax on the right fide, hav- 
 ing no fellow on the left *, whence it is called 
 azygos, or vena fine pari. This vein is very 
 confiderable, and arifes pofteriorly frdm the 
 
 vena 
 
dialogues. 167 
 
 vena cava fuperior, a little above the pericar- 
 dium, and is immediately afterwards bent back- 
 ward over the origin of the right lobes of the 
 lungs ; forming an arch which furrounds the 
 great pulmonary veflels on that fide, as the 
 arch of the aorta does thofe of the left fide, 
 with this difference only, that the curva- 
 ture of the azygos is almoft direftly backward, 
 whereas that of the aorta is oblique. From 
 thence it runs down on the right fide the ver- 
 tebra dorfi, on one fide the aorta, and before 
 the intercoftal arteries I have fcen this vein ex- 
 tremely large like the trunk of the inferior 
 cava, from the diaphragm to the original of the 
 renales ; the true cava being through all this 
 (pace very narrow, or of the fize of the ordinary 
 azygos. The vena azygos fends out firft of 
 all two or three fmall veins from the top of the 
 arch, one of which goes to the afpera arteria, 
 and the others partly to that and partly to the 
 bronchia, by the name of venae bronchiales, 
 accompanying the ramifications of the bron- 
 chial artery. And from the extremity of the 
 arch proceeds a fmall trunk common to two or 
 three fmall veins, called intercoffales fuperiores 
 dextras, which bring back the blood from the 
 firff three feries of intercoftal mufcles, and 
 from the neighbouring parts of the pleura. 
 Thefe intercoftal veins fend branches through 
 the intercoftal mufcles to the ferratus major 
 pofticus, &c. and afterwards they run along 
 ihe interflices between the ribs, communicat- 
 ing with the venae mammariae. They like- 
 M 4 wife 
 
i68 ANATOMICAL 
 
 wife fend fmall branches backward to the ver-» 
 tebral mufcles, and canal of the fpine, where 
 they communicate with the venal circles or 
 finufes, which bring back the blood from the 
 medulla fpinalis. As the azygos runs down 
 it fends off the inferior intercoltal veins on the 
 right fide, one going to each feries of inter- 
 coftal mufcles : thele veins runs along the 
 lower edges of the ribs, and perforate the 
 mufcles which goto the pofterior and external 
 parts of the thorax. The azygos fends off like- 
 wife the left intercoftal veins, but feldom the 
 whole number alfo fix or feven, more or lefs, 
 inferior intercoftals, which run between the 
 aorta and vertebra and the fame ramificati- 
 ons on the right fide, and likewife fome rami- 
 fications to the (sfophagus *, but fometimes 
 thefe diftributions vary, and are not all fubjedts 
 alike. Juft below the laft rib, the azygos fends 
 off a large branch to the mufcles of the abdo- 
 men, communicating with the laft two inter- 
 coftal veins : fometimes this extremity com- 
 municates either mediately or immediately with 
 the vena adipofa, and even with the vena fper- 
 matica. 
 
 I he diaphragmaticre fuperiores, mediaftinas, 
 mammariae interns, thymicas, pericardias, and 
 tracheales, are fmall veins difpofed in pairs to 
 the right and left, behind the fternum and parts 
 pear it, and fome called venae pedlorales interns, 
 
 Q. Which is the vena mediaftina ? 
 
 A. 1 he right vena mediaftina goes out an- 
 teriorly from the trunk of the fuperior cava, 
 
 a 
 
dialogues. 169 
 
 a little above the origin of the azygos 5 the left 
 comes from the fubclavia. 
 
 Which is the vena diaphragmatica fu- 
 perior ? 
 
 A. The right fuperior diaphragmatica a- 
 rifes near the mediaftina, and its branches are 
 diftributed to the pericardium. The left comes 
 from the left fubclavian, a little below the ori- 
 gin of the mammaria. 
 
 a Which is the vena mammaria interna ? 
 
 A. 1 he right internal mammaria arifes from 
 the vena cava, a little below the angle of the 
 bifurcation. It runs along the poiferior edge 
 of the fternum, and on the cartilaginous ex- 
 tremities of the right ribs, together with the 
 artery of the fame name •, it alfo fends the dia- 
 phragm a branch, and communicates with 
 tnofe veins. Afterwards it gives fmall branches 
 to the mediaftinum and others between the ribs 
 to the integuments. The left internal mam- 
 maria arifes anteriorly from the left fubclavian, 
 oppofite to the cartilage or anterior extremity of 
 the firfl true rib. 
 
 CX Which is the vena thymica ? 
 
 A. The right vena thymica, when it arife.s 
 feparately, goes out from the bifurcation ; this 
 vein often reaches no lower than the inferior 
 part of the thymus. The left vein of the fame 
 name comes from the left fubclavian, almoft 
 oppofite to the fternum. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena pericardia ? 
 
 A, The vena pericardia feems to go out ra- 
 ther fr )m the origin of the right fubclavian, 
 
 but 
 
i;o ANATOMICAL 
 
 but in this there are nnany varieties. It goes 
 . to the upper fide of the pericardium, and other 
 neighbouring parts ; the left pericardia comes 
 fometimes from the left fubelavian, and fome- 
 times from the mammaria on the fame fide. 
 
 Which is the vena trachealis ? 
 
 A. The right trachealis goes out from the 
 upper part of the bifurcation above the mam- 
 mar a of the fame fide, fometimes more back- 
 ward, and fometimes from the fubclavia. It 
 is difiributed to the glandule thyroide^, thy- 
 mus, and bronchialis, trachea arteria, and muf- 
 culi fterno-hyoidei : it communicates with the 
 internal jugular vein. The left trachealis 
 comes from the upper, or pofterior part of 
 the left fubfclavian near its origin. Of all 
 thele fmall veins, the mammaria interna, is the 
 moll confiderable. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena fubclavia ? 
 
 A. The right fubelavian vein (as has been 
 alread) faid) is very Ihorc, and its courle very 
 oblique, fo that it appears to rife higher than 
 the left vein. It fends off, firft of ail, four 
 large branches, already mentioned, viz. the 
 vcrtebralis, which is the firft and moft pofleri- 
 or ; the jugularis et axillaris. It lends olT 
 four large branches befides the fmall ptdloral 
 veins, and receives tie dudlus thoracicus. 
 Alfo a fmall trunk for the left luperior inter- 
 coftals, which are fometimes fix in number, 
 and commun.cate with the inferior intercoftals, 
 and with a branch of the vena azygos. This 
 Imall common intercoftal trunk furniihes like- 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 171 
 
 wife ihe left bronchlalis. Each fubfclavian 
 vein, near the middle of the clavicle, fends off 
 a branch called cephalica, which defcends near 
 the furface of the body, between the deltoides 
 and peftoralis major, and reaches the arm in 
 the manner which fhall be deferibed hereafter. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena cava inferior ? 
 
 A. T he two inferior vena cava having run 
 ^lown about a quarte'-of an inch from the right 
 auricle of the heart, within the pericardium, ^as 
 has been already faid,) pierces that membrane, 
 and the tendinous portion of the diaphragm 
 which adhere very clofely to each other : at 
 this place it gives off the venae diaphragmaticte 
 jnferiores vel phrenics, the other branches, &c, 
 of the inferior cava I fhall deferibe hereafter. 
 
 Q. V\ hich are the venae phrenicte ? 
 
 A. The vense phrenicas are fent off from the 
 vena cava inferior, as abovementioned, and are 
 diftributed to the diaphragm, and appear chiefly 
 on its lower fide, one to the right hand, the 
 other to the left. The right vein is more back- 
 ward and lower than the left. The left is dif- 
 tributed partly to the pericardium, and partly 
 to the diaphragm, and fometimes branches to 
 the capful£e renales. 
 
 Q. What are the nerves of the thorax ? 
 
 A. The twelve pair of dorfal or coflal 
 nerves, which all communicate with one ano- 
 ther, as Toon as they make their way out be- 
 twixt the vertebrte •, each of them gives a pof- 
 terior branch to the mufculi ereebores trunci 
 corporis j the firft after having fent off the 
 
 brachial 
 
172 ANATOMICAL 
 
 brachial nerve, already dcfcribed, is, after the 
 fame manner with the fucceeding eight, be- 
 llowed on the pleura and intercoftal mufcles ; 
 the tenth and eleventh are mod of them fent 
 to the abdominal mufcles •, the twelfth com- 
 municates with tlie firll lumbar, and is be- 
 llowed on the mufculus quadratuslumbalis and 
 iliacus internus. 
 
 What are the glans of the thorax ? 
 
 A. The glands of the thorax are the glan- 
 dulas bronchiales, the thymus, and dorlalis. 
 Befides thefe, the cefophagus has a great num- 
 ber of glands, (efpecially towards its upper 
 part,) as before obferved. 
 
 Q. Which are the glandulas bronchiales. 
 
 A. The glandulas bronchiales are very ob- 
 fervable glands, fituated externally in the larger 
 divifions of the trachea and bronchia. They 
 are of a blackifh colour, and their ufe, like that 
 of many others of the glands of this part of 
 the body, is yet very little known. 
 
 Which is the glandula doiTalis ? 
 
 A. I'he glandula dorfalis is a remarkable 
 gland fometimes found in the thorax, about 
 the fifth vertebra of the back, adhering to the 
 pofterior part of the oelophagus. It is in dif- 
 ferent fubjedls of various fizes •, being often of 
 the fize of a kidney bean •, fometimes of that 
 of an almond, and fometimes confiderably 
 larger ; in others, it is much lefs than the 
 fmaller, and fometimes it is Vv^holly wanting,- or 
 at leafl fo extremely minute, and inconfidera- 
 ble, that the bell dilledors are not able to find 
 
 5 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 It. Sometimes alfo two glands are found ia 
 this part in the place of one. 
 
 Q, Which is the glandula thymus ? 
 
 A. The thymus is a gland which in infants 
 is very remarkable : it is fituated in the upper 
 part of the thorax, immediately under the fter- 
 num, and lies upon the pericardium, and on 
 the trunk of the aorta, and of the vena cava. 
 It extends itfelf from the pericardium along 
 the trunk of the aorta, to the beginning of 
 the carotids, fometimes fo far as to the thyroide 
 gland ; its figure is irregular and uncertain •, its 
 colour in infants is a pale red, in adults, it is of 
 a dufkier hue : it is much larger in infants 
 nev/ly born, than in fubjecfls at any more ad- 
 vanced period. Its length in the former is no 
 lefs than three fingers breadth, and its diame- 
 ter two *, its thicknefs is about half a finger : 
 it gradually decreafes from this fize as the^ 
 child grows up ; in adults it is very final], and 
 in old people it entirely difappears. Its fub» 
 Ifance is glandular and conglomerate; and it is 
 furrounded by a m.embrane ; it has blood vef- 
 fels of the fame name ; its lymphatics fome- 
 times run to the thoracic du6f, fometimes to 
 the fubclavian veins, and they have in general 
 no valves. The nerves of the thymus are from 
 the par vagum, or from the intercoftals ; there 
 is fometimes a miikyjuice found in this gland 
 in new born fubje^s. It has no excretory 
 dud hitherto difeovered, and its ufe is there- 
 fore not certainly known : poffibiy, according 
 to Heifter, it ferves to fccrete lymph, which ir, 
 
 dif. 
 
174 anatomical 
 
 difcharges into the thoracic dutl, for the dilu- 
 tion of the blood and of the chyle, as the 
 glands of the mefentery and of the pancreas 
 do, in regard to the chyle. On this fLippofi- 
 tion, its ufe is much greater in the foetus, than 
 at any time after the birth, bccaufe the want 
 of refpiration in that ftate may well be fup- 
 pofed to fubjedl the blood to be thicker, and to 
 need more dilution than afterwards ; nothing 
 tending to attenuate the blood fo much as ref- 
 piration. 
 
 Q. What are the mammtE or breaffs ? 
 
 A. The mammas or breads, are two glan- 
 dular bodies, of a roundifh oval figure, fi- 
 tuated on the anterior, and a little towards the 
 lateral parts of the thorax : thefe are moil re- 
 markable in women. They differ in fize ac- 
 cording to age and fex ; in very young and 
 very old people they are always fmall, alfo in 
 virgins and males of ail ages : but in women 
 with child, or thofe who give fuck, they are 
 generally large, often very enormous. In chil- 
 dren of both fexes,and in males of all ages, they 
 are commonly no more than cutaneous tuber- 
 cles or fofc veruccte, of a reddiih colour, called 
 papillte, or nipples ; each of them being fir- 
 rounded by a final], thin, and pretty broad 
 circle, or diflc, more c>r lefs of a brownifh co- 
 lour, and an uneven furface, termed areola. 
 The time of the breads giowing lull in wo- 
 men, is about the age of fourteen, or tliat of 
 puberty, which is lomctimcs fooner, fome- 
 times later ; and the moft nature! time of their 
 
 de- 
 
DIALOGUES. 175 
 
 decreafing is about the forty- feventh, or fiftieth 
 year, when their menfes totally ceafe, and the 
 breafts become flabby, lofing their natural con- 
 fiflence and folidity. The breafts, befides the 
 coinmon integuments of the body, (already 
 mentioned in the beginning of this work,) ate 
 compofed of a glandular fubtfance, and a mul- 
 titude of lafliferous du6ts, or fmal! tubes, which 
 unite by frequent anaftomofes, and, as they 
 approach the nipples, join and unite together, 
 till at lafl they form feven, eight, or more fmall 
 pipes, called tubuli laifliferi, which have feve- 
 ral crofs canals, by which they communicate 
 with each other •, fo that if any of them be 
 obftrufled, the milk which was brought to it 
 might not ftagnate, but pafs through by the 
 other pipes, which all terminate in the extre- 
 mity of the nipple. The fubftance of the 
 nipple is cavernous, almoft like that of the 
 human penis. The excretory duds or tubes 
 are larger in women who give fuck, and are 
 dilated into finufes in many places formino- a 
 kind of cells,^ which hold the ftcreted mflk, 
 and communicate with the veins and arteries. 
 All thefe parts are to be feen much more dif- 
 tindly in breads that are large and full of milk 
 than in ethers ; in young women, indeed, they 
 they are fcarce to be didinguifhed at all •, as 
 alfo in fuch as have little breads, in fuch as are 
 emaciated, and in thofe of very old people. 
 
 This glandular fubflance of the breafts is 
 feated in, and furrounded by, a great quantity 
 of fat ; which makes by much the greater psrt 
 i of 
 
170 A 2^ A T O M I C A L 
 
 of the breafts. The arteries and veins of the 
 breads are called mammary vefle/s, and are 
 fent from the fubclavian and axillary veiTels. 
 The nerves are from the dorfal ones of the 
 fpinal marrow. A fulnefs of the breafts, efpe- 
 cially if there be milk found in them, is gene- 
 ally judged a mark of the lofs of virginity, and 
 a proof that a woman has been with child ; but 
 this is not an infallible fign. 
 
 Thsk fwelling of the breafts during the time 
 of geftation, is owing to the confent between 
 the breafts and the uterus ; there being fo near 
 a communication betw'een the mammary vef- 
 fels and the hypogaftric veflcls of the womb, 
 that a dilatation of the latter is attended with a 
 fimilar one in the former. For the tubes which 
 compofe the glandular fubftance of the breafts 
 in maids, like a fphindler mufcle, contrail fo 
 clofely, that no part of the blood can enter 
 them ; but when the womb grows big with a 
 foetus, and comprefles the defeending trunk of 
 the aorta, the bLod flows in a greater quan= 
 fity, and with a greater force, through the ar- 
 teries of the breafts, and forces a pafiage into 
 their glands, which being at firft narrow, ad- 
 mit only of a thin water •, but growing wider 
 by degrees, as the womb grows bigger, the 
 glands receive a thick ferum ; and alter birth, 
 they run with a thick milk, becaufe the blood, 
 which before flowed to the foetus, and for three 
 or four days afterwards by the uterus, begin- 
 ning then to flop, dilares the mammillary 
 glands, and confequently fwells the breaft. 
 
 DIALOGUE 
 
Dialogues. 1^; 
 
 DIALOGUE V. 
 
 Of the Abdomen, and its Parts. 
 
 Q. II /hat is the abdomen ? 
 
 V V The abdomen begins imme- 
 
 diately under the thorax, and terminates at the 
 bottom of the pelvis of the olTa innominata. 
 Its circumference or outer furface is divided 
 into regions, of which there are three anterior, 
 viz. the epigaftric, or fuperior region ; the 
 umbilical, or middle region : and the hypo- 
 gaftric, or lower region. There is but one 
 pofterior region, named regio lumbaris. 
 
 Qi Where is the epigaftric region fituated ? 
 
 A. The epigaftric region begins immediately 
 Under the appendix enfiformis, at a fmall fuper- 
 ficial depreflion, called the pit of the ftomach, 
 and in adult fubjecls ends above the navel in a 
 tranfverfe line from the laft falfe ribs on each 
 fide. This region is fubdivided in three parts, 
 one middle, named epigaftrium., and two la- 
 teral, termed hypochondria. The epigaftrium 
 takes in all chat fpace which lies betv/een the 
 falfe ribs of both ftdes, and the hypochondria 
 are the places covered by. the falfe ribs. 
 
 Q. Where is the umbilical region fituated ? 
 
 A. 1 he umbilical region being in adults, • 
 above the navel from the tranfverie line, where 
 the epigaftric ends, and ends below the navel at 
 another tranfverie line, fuppofed to be drawn 
 parallel to the former, between the tv/o criftce 
 
 N 
 
 of 
 
378 ANATOMICAL 
 
 of the ofl'a ilium. This region is likewife 
 divided into three parts, one middle, which is 
 properly the regio umbilicalis, and two lateral, 
 called ilia, or the flanks •, and they compre- 
 hend the fpace between the falfe ribs and up- 
 per part of the os ilium on each fide. 
 
 Where is the hypogaftric region ? 
 
 A. The hypogaftric region is extended 
 downward from the inferior limit of the umbi- 
 lical region, and is alfo divided into three parts, 
 one middle called pubis ; and two lateral, 
 called inguina, or the groins. 
 
 CL Where is the lumbar region fituated ? 
 
 A. The lumbar region is the pofterior part 
 of the abdomen, and comprehends all that fpace 
 which reaches from the loweft ribs on each 
 fide, and the laft vertebra of the back, to the 
 os facrum, and neighbouring parts of the ofTa 
 ilium. The lateral parts of this region are 
 termed the loins, but the middle part has no 
 proper name in men. 
 
 The bottom of the abdomen, which anfwers 
 to the pelvis of the fkeleton, is terminated an- 
 teriorly by the pudenda, or parts of genera- 
 tion, and pofteriorly by the buttocks and a- 
 nus. The buttocks are feparated by folTa, 
 which lead to the anus, and each buttock is 
 terminated downward by a large fold, which 
 diftingutOies it from the reft of the thigh. 
 T his lumbar region takes in likewife the muf- 
 culus quadratus lumborum on each fide, the 
 lower portions of the facro lumbares of the lon- 
 gifiimi and latifllmi dorfi, facer, &c. The fpace 
 
 between 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 179 
 
 between the anus and the parts of generation is 
 called perinasum, and is divided into two equal 
 lateral parts by a very diftind line, which is 
 longer in males than in females, (as I lhall 
 make appear hereafter.) The cavity of the ab- 
 domen, formed by the parts already mention- 
 ed, is lined on the infide by a particular memr 
 brane called peritonseum. The cavity of the 
 abdomen is feparated from the cavity of the 
 thorax by the diaphragm, and terminated be- 
 low by the mufculi levatores ani. This cavity 
 of the abdomen contains the flomach and the 
 inteftines, which are commonly divided into 
 three fmall parts, named duodenum, jejunum, 
 and ilium ; and three large, called csecum, 
 colon, and redum. It contains likewife the 
 mefentery, mefocolon, omentum, liver, gal), 
 bladder, fpleen, pancreas, glands of the me- 
 fentery, vafa ladea, receptaculum chyli, kid- 
 neys, renal glands, ureters, bladder, and the 
 internal parts of generation in both fexes. 
 Alfo the following bones pertaining to this 
 lower venter, viz. the five vertebrae of the 
 loins, os facrum, os coccygis, and ofla inomi- 
 nata which contain the ilium, ifehium, and 
 pubis. Thefe bones, below the vertebra, form 
 the pelvis or bafon, which is much larger in 
 women than in men, to give room for the 
 growth, &c. of the foetus. The external 
 parts of generation alfo belong to the abdo- 
 men, but I fliall deferibe them hereafter. 
 
 Q:, What are the bones pertaining to the 
 abdomen ? 
 
 N 2 
 
 A. The 
 
i8o ANATOMICAL' 
 
 A. The bones belonging to the abdomert 
 are the vertebra; of the loins, which are the 
 five lowermofl; vertebrae of the fpine or back- 
 bone, and complete the whole twenty*four ; 
 (fee thofe of the neck and thorax before de- 
 fcribed.) The os facrum, os occygis, ofia inno- 
 rninata or pubes, which confifts of the ilium, 
 ifehium, and pubis. 
 
 Does the five vertebrae of the loins 
 differ from thofe of the neck and thorax 
 which you have already deferibed, page iii 
 and 1 2 5. 
 
 A. Yes ! The five vertebras of the loins dif- 
 fer from the red in this, that they are the 
 broadefi, and the lad of them is the larged 
 of the vertebrae. Their acute proceffes are 
 broader, drorter, and wider from one another, 
 their tranfverfe longer to fupport the bowels 
 and mufcles of the back j they are not per- 
 forated as thole of the neck, nor have they a 
 diiuple or finus as thofe of the back. The 
 cartilages which are betwixt their bodies are 
 thicker than any of the reft. The greated 
 motion of the back is performed by the ver- 
 tebras of the loins, becaufe their cartilages are 
 thicker, and their acute proceffes are at a greater 
 diftance from one another •, for the thicker the 
 cartilages are, the more we may bend our body 
 furwards y and the greater diftance there is be- 
 twixt the acute proceffes, the more we may 
 bend ourfelves backwards. 
 
 Q. Vv^hich is th# os facrum ? 
 
 . A. The 
 
dialog U E S. I8i 
 
 A. The os facrum is the lower extremity of 
 the fpina dorfi, the vertebrs of which grow fo 
 clofe together in adults, as that they make but 
 one large and foiid bone of a triangular figure, 
 whofe bafis io tied to the lafi: vertebra of the 
 loins, and the upper part of its fides to the ilia, 
 and its point to the os coccygis. This bone in 
 infants is almofi: entirely cartilaginous •, and in 
 children more grown up, it always confifts of 
 feveral pieces, the jundfures of four or five of 
 v/hich may be feen even in adults, although it 
 be one continued bone. It has four or five 
 holes on each fide which give paflage to the 
 nerves of the inteflinum redium, bladder, and 
 parts of generation, and to the large crural and 
 ifchiatic ones. The ufes of this bone, are to 
 ferve as a bafis for the fpine ; to form the pel- 
 vis along with the ofia innominata, and to de- 
 fend the parts contained in it j to ferve as a 
 place of origin to many of the mufcles ; to 
 contain in its canal or finus, the lower part or 
 end of the fpina! marrow, called cauda equina ; 
 and likewife to give pafiage to the nerves a- 
 bovementioned. 
 
 Or Which is the os coccygis ? 
 
 A. The os coccygis is joined to the extre- 
 mity of the os facrum, and is compofed of 
 three or four bones ; (but fometitnes all the 
 pieces are entirely cemented together,) the 
 lower piece is (till lefs than the upper, till the 
 lafi ends in a fmall cartilage, which refembles 
 a little tail turned inward. Its ufe is to fuftain 
 ;the redtum inteflinum •, it yields to the prtfTure 
 N 3 ' of 
 
'igi ANATOMICAi: 
 
 of the foetus in women in travail, and mid« 
 wives fometimes thruft It rudely and violently 
 backwards, which occafions great pain and 
 feveral bad effeds. 
 
 Which are the olTa innominata ? 
 
 A. The ofla innominata are compofed of 
 three bones in young fubjeds, each of which 
 has its peculiar name j the upper one is called 
 the ilium, (the inteftinum ilium lying between 
 it and its fellow,) the anterior one the os pubis, 
 and the lower and pofterior one the os ifchiumo 
 iThe offa innominata are joined on each fide, in 
 the hinder parts to the os facrum, forming a 
 very firm and ftrong, though fomewhat move- 
 able, articulation with it ; and with this bone 
 they alfo form the cavity called the pelvis. 
 The ufe of thefe bones is to fupport and fuf- 
 tain the fpina dorfi, and indeed all the parts 
 above them ; to make a firm and proper junc- 
 ture of the other parts of the body with the 
 thighs } to ferve for the place of origin to fe- 
 veral mufcles *, to form the cavity of the pel- 
 vis, and to defend its contents from external 
 injuries. 
 
 In the center of thefe bones is the acetabu- 
 lum coxendicis, or focket for the thigh-bone •, 
 in the bottom of which lockets is another ca- 
 vity, in which lies the mucilaginous gland of 
 this joint. When impofUiumations happen in 
 this joint they ufually caufe a great fwelling 
 and lamenefs in the hip, which in time makes 
 a colledion of matter in the external part of 
 the hip, &c, 
 
 Q. Wha| 
 
dialogues. 183 
 
 What are the cartilages pertaining to 
 the bones of the abdomen bcfidesthafe of the 
 vertebrte already mentioned ? 
 
 A. The true eartilages of the ofla innomi- 
 nata in adult fut^ebls, are five in number, three 
 common and two proper. The firft and prin- 
 cipal common cartilage is that which makes the 
 fymphifis of the ofla pubis ; the two other com- 
 mon cartilages join the ofTa ilium to the os fa- 
 crum, but are thinner than that of the ofTa 
 pubis. The proper cartilages are thole that 
 line the cotyloide cavities, and except the 
 notches and depreflions in thefe cavities, all 
 the reft of the fuiface of the acetabulum 
 coxendicis is covered with a very white fhin- 
 ing fmooth cartilage. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the bones 
 pertaining to the abdomen, befides thofe of 
 the vertebra already mentioned ? 
 
 A. The ligaments of the ofla innominata are 
 alfo of two kinds, common and proper. The 
 common are thofe which go between thefe and 
 the neighbouring bones, of which there is a 
 confiderable number. To thefe mu ft be added 
 the ligaments by which the os femoris is joined 
 to the os innominatura, which I fhall deferibe 
 hereafter among the other ligaments of the 
 thigh. The principal proper ligaments are four 
 in number, two called facro-fciatic, one broad 
 and external, the other fmall and internal, one 
 obturator, and one inguinal. The broad facro- 
 leiatic or internal fciatic ligament proceeds 
 from the infide of the fpine of the crifta of the 
 N 4 os 
 
i84 ANATOMICAL' 
 
 os ilium to the falfe tranfverfe apophyfes of the 
 os facrurr. and the fpine of the ifchium. The 
 internal fciatic ligament adheres clofely to the 
 jnfide of the pofterior portion of the former, 
 going from the fourth falfe tranfverfe apophy- 
 lis of the os facrum, all the way to the upper 
 part of the os coccygis. 1 he obturator liga- 
 ment fills up all the great foramen ovale, ex- 
 cept the oblique notch at its proper part, from 
 which there is a tranfverfe ligament to the in- 
 fide of the upper and anterior part of the os 
 pubis. The inguinal ligament, called from 
 the difcoverer ligamentum Fallopii, is an apo- 
 neurotic or ligamentary band, faftened by one 
 end to the anterior and fuperior fpine of the os 
 ilium, and by the other to the fpine of the os 
 pubis. Another ligament runs tranfverfely 
 between the two angles of the cotyloide 
 notch. 
 
 CX Where is the mucilaginous gland be-= 
 longing to the os innominatum fituated ? 
 
 A. Ihe rough unequal deprcffion at the 
 bottom of the acetabulum, or fockct for the 
 thigh bone, is filled by a broad fiat mucilagi- 
 nous gland, bordered with a fatty fubftance, and 
 covered by a fine membrane, through which a 
 mucilaginous liquor pafies to moiften the joint, 
 and facilitate its motions. This membrane 
 rifes above the gland, and gives a fo/t of co- 
 vering or coat to the ligament contained in the 
 joint i the blood veffels of the glahd pafs be- 
 tween the bottcm of the cotyloide notch, and 
 the tranfverfe ligament thereof. 
 
 What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 What are the mucilaginous glands of 
 the joints ? 
 
 ' A. The mucilaginous glands of the joints, 
 •where the bones are furnillaed with a cartilage 
 are fmall glands which furnilh every joint 
 for a Aiding motion, with a mucilaginous 
 matter, for lubricating the ends of the bones, 
 that they may move eafily upon one another ; 
 and that there may be no wafte of this necef- 
 fary Auid, it is contained in the invefting liga- 
 ments ; which for this very reafon are no vdiere 
 divided, except to communicate with the li- 
 gaments of the tendons. Thefe glands are 
 generally feated in a little fat, near the inler- 
 tion of the 1‘gaments, that they may be com- 
 prefled by them when the joints are in mo- 
 tion, which is a proper time to have their Auid 
 preffed out. The moft confiderable parcel of 
 thefe glands v/ith their fat, are feen in thejoint 
 of the knee, and the large ft gland of this fort, 
 is found in the Anus, at the bottom of the ace- 
 tabulum of the os innominatum, and is com- 
 preffed by the ligamentum teres. 
 
 The difeafes of the joints either happen from 
 ulcers in the mucilaginous glands, when 
 pouring out matter that cannot be difcharged, 
 and foul the ends of the bones, or elfe from 
 fwdlings in the ends of the refpecftive ones. 
 Either of thefe in time create exceffive pain, 
 which appears to be chieAy in the ligaments of 
 the joints, notwichftanding what has been faid 
 of the infenfibility of thefe parts. When a 
 joint is much fwelled and painful, without ex- 
 ternal inAammation, it is vulgarly called a white 
 i fwcllirji. 
 
i$6 ANATOMICAL’ 
 
 fivdling, and more properly than a fpina ven- 
 tola. It is fometimes in the beginning cure4 
 by evacuations, but when the limb waftes be- 
 low the fwelling, and the fingers or toes of the 
 limb grow thinner at their joints, and lofe their 
 lliapc, the cafe is abfolutely irrecoverable. 
 Sometimes the ends of the bones erode, then 
 join together, and form an anchylofis, which, 
 though a fevere difeafe of itfelf, yet proves 
 often the remedy of a much worfe. In like 
 manner, the bones of the hands and feet, 
 when they are ulcerated, fometimes unite, and 
 are thus preferved from total ruin. But there 
 is one cafe of a white fwelling that is amazing, 
 when the pain is fo great that we are forced to 
 take off the limb, and yet neither find upon 
 diiTedlion, the ligaments or glands difeafed, 
 matter in the joints, the bones carious, nor 
 any difeafed appearance, except that the ends 
 of the bones are a little larger and fofter, 
 
 . What are the mufcles of the abdomen ? 
 
 A. The mufcles peculiar to the abdomen 
 only are five pair, (exclufive of the diaphrag- 
 ma, and triangularis fierni, already fpoken of 
 with the mufcles of the thorax) viz. obliquus 
 afcendens vel exrernus, obliquus defcendens 
 vei internus, pyramidalis, redfus abdominis, 
 and tranfverfalis abdominis. To tbefe we may 
 add thofe of the genital parts, anus and pe- 
 rintEum, viz. cremafier teftis, eredlor penis, 
 accelerator urinae, tranfverfalis penis, fphintfler 
 vehcae urinari^e, detrufor nrlrta;, eredlor clito- 
 jidis, fphindlter vaginae, fphjncter ani, elevator 
 
 an;. 
 
DIALOGUES, 
 
 ^1, intertranfverfales lumborum, pfoas par- 
 vus, quadratus lumborum, and coccygei. 
 
 Q. \yhich is the obliquus afcendens muf- 
 fle ? 
 
 A. The obliquus afcendens vel externus 
 arifes from the eight inferior ribs, the upper 
 part of its origin being indented with the ler- 
 rac.us major anticus, and the low^er lying un- 
 der a fmall portion of the latifTimus dorfi : 
 it is inferted into the fpine of the ilium, into 
 the os pubis, and linea alba, which is a ftrong 
 tendinous line extended from the os pubis to 
 the fternum, between the mufculi redti. 
 
 Which is the obliquus defcendens ? 
 
 A. The obliquus defcendens vel internus 
 arifes, under the former mufcle of the fpine of 
 the ilium, os facrum, and fpines of the loins, 
 and is inferred partly into the lower fide of the 
 fpurious ribs, and by a flat tendon into the 
 fternum and linea alba, together with the ten- 
 don of the afcendens. 
 
 Q. Which is the pyramidalis ^ 
 
 A. The pyramidalis is a fmall mufcle lying 
 in the lower part of the reflus. It has the 
 name from its figure, and its origin from the 
 margin of the os pubis, w'ith a broad flefliy 
 head, but ends in a fmall round tendon in the 
 linea alba, about three or four inches below the 
 naval. This mufcle is fometimes double and 
 fometimes Angie, and foimetimes they are both 
 wanting. 
 
 Q. Which is the reftus abdominis ? 
 
 A, The redtus abdominis, arifes from the 
 
 fternum 
 
183 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 flemiim near the cartilago enfiformis, and the 
 extremity of the two lail ribs. It goes ftrait 
 down to the forepart of the abdomen, and is 
 inferred into the os pubis. 
 
 Which is the tranfverfalis abdominis ? 
 
 A. The tranfverfalis abdominis arifes from 
 the cartilago enfiformis, the extremities of the 
 falfe ribs, and the tranfverfe apophyfis of the 
 vertebra of the loins ; it is fixed to the inner 
 fide of the fpine of the ilium, and then becom- 
 ing a flat tendon, it pafles under the redtus, 
 nnd is inferted into the os pubis and linea alba. 
 Between this tendon and the peritonseum, 
 fometimes v,fater is found in great quantities, 
 conflituting a dropfy in the duplicature of the 
 peritonseum, which fnews this membrane has 
 been miftaken for part of the peritonaeum. 
 
 The ufes of thefe abdominal mufcle are to 
 fuftain the vifeera of the abdomen, and to 
 -comprefs the parts contained therein, in order 
 to clear it of w'hat ought to pafs off by the 
 natural outlets, to relieve the ftomach by vo- 
 miiinp, from whatever misht be hurtful to it 5 
 
 O O ^ 
 
 and laftly, to drive out by a violent expiration 
 whatever may incommode the organs contain- 
 ed in the thorax. The obliquus defeendens on 
 the right fide, and afeendens on the lelt, adling 
 together turn the upper part of the trunk of 
 the body towards the left, and vice vei fa-, but 
 the trunk is chiefly turned upon the thighs ; 
 the reifli bend the body forvvard, and pull the 
 furnurn downward in expiration; the two 
 obi que mufcles and the tranfverfe on each fide 
 
 near 
 
dialogues. 
 
 IS9 
 
 near the groins, are perforated to let through 
 the proceifus vaginalis with the fpermatic vef- 
 fels. Thefe perforations are diftant from each 
 other, fo as to fufrer the veffels to defcend 
 conveniently into the fcrotum : this way the 
 inteftines or the omentum defcend in rup- 
 tures. 
 
 Which is the cremafter teftis ? 
 
 A. The cremafter tehis mufcle is fo named 
 becaufe (with its fellow) it fufpends the tedi- 
 cles, and draws them up in the adt of gene- 
 ration : it arifes from the os ilium, and upper 
 part of the ligamentum pubis, and almoft 
 encompafling the procefs of the peritoneum 
 (which furrounds the fpermatic veffels as they 
 come out of the abdomen) defcends with it^ 
 and is inferred into the tunica vaginalis, up- 
 on which it is fpread in feveral diftindl por- 
 tions. 
 
 Which Is the eredlcr penis ? 
 
 A. The eredtor penis and its fellow ferve 
 for the erection of the penis. Thefe arife on 
 each ftde from the offa ifchii, and each of them 
 is inferted into the corpus cavernofum of the 
 fame fide. Thefe mufcles when they adt to- 
 gether, prefs the veins of the back of the pe- 
 nis againft the us pubis, by which they pre- 
 vent the reflux of blood from the penis ; and 
 confequently when at the fame time the blood 
 flows impetuoudy into the part by the arteries, 
 and cannot get back this way, the penis be- 
 comes extended and eredt. 
 
 Q. Which is the acpelerator urin^ ? 
 
 A. The 
 
1^0 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The accelerator urinje arifes tendinous 
 from the ofTa ifchia, and flefby from the fphinc- 
 ter ani, and being expended over the bulb 
 of the urethra, afterwards divides, and is in- 
 ferred into the penis. The ufe of this mufcle 
 is not to accelerate the urine, for that is pro- 
 pelled by the detrufor urinse, or mufcu- 
 lar coat of the bladder, but to protrude the 
 femen, which is done only by this. They like- 
 wife alTifl; the eredteres in the eredtion of the 
 penis, by driving the blood contained in the 
 cavernous body of the urethra towards the 
 glands, which is thereby diftended ; the tume- 
 fadtion of thefe mufcles at the fame time com- 
 prefling the veins that carry off the refluent 
 blood from the corpus cavernofum. 
 
 Q. Which is the tranfverfalis penis? 
 
 A. The tranfverfalis penis vel perintei, is 
 one of the dilators of the urethra, arifingfrom 
 the tubercle of the os ifchium on each .fide, 
 and inferted into the poflerior part of the bulb 
 of the urethra. Thefe mufcles, however, are 
 not quite determinate and certain in their origin 
 or infcrtion, and fometimes they are wholly 
 wanting. When they acft, they dilate the ure- 
 thra in its poflerior parts. 
 
 Q. Which is the fphindter veficte urinariae 
 
 A. The fphindler veficas urinariae is com* 
 pofird of tranverfe fibres, which form a circle 
 round the neck of the bladder ferving to clofe 
 it, to prevent the involuntary difcharge of the 
 urine. In men this mufcle is connedfed to the 
 
 fibres 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 tg-i 
 
 fibres of the inteftinum rev5lum, and in 
 women to thofe of the vagina. 
 
 Q. Which is the detrufor urinfs ? 
 
 A. The detrufor urins is the mufcular coat 
 of the bladder, its fibres terminate in the 
 fphindter vefic^, whereby it not only prelTes 
 the urine forward, but, when the bladder is 
 full, becomes an antagonift to the fphinfter, 
 afting almoft at right angles. 
 
 Q. Which is the eredtor clitorldls ? 
 
 A. The eredtor clitoridis arifes from the 
 ifchium, and is inferred into the corpora ca- 
 vernofa of the clitoris, like the eredtor penis in 
 men, and is faid to caufe eredHon in the fame 
 manner. 
 
 Which is the fphindler vaginse ? 
 
 A. The fphindler vagina arifes from the 
 fphindler ani, and furrounds the orifice of the 
 vagina ; after which it is inferred under the 
 crura of the clitoris. Its ufe is to conflringe 
 the orifice of the vagina, to prefs out a liquor 
 from the glands of the vagina, and embrace 
 the penis in coition. 
 
 Q:^ Which is the fphindler ani ? 
 
 A. The fphindler ani is a mufcle near two 
 inches broad, compofed of circular fibres, 
 which clofes the extremity of the intcflinuni 
 redlum, and forms the anus. It is connedled 
 forward with the accelerator urins in men, and 
 with the neck of the uterus in women, and 
 backwards with the os coccygis. This muf- 
 cle furrounds the anus to clofe it, and to pre- 
 vent involuntary falling out of the faeces. 
 
 Which 
 
J92 
 
 ANATOMICAL' 
 
 Q. Which is the elevator ani ? 
 
 A. The elevator ani arifes from the off^ 
 ifehii, pubis, and facrum, within the pelvis, and 
 is inferted round the lower end of the intefti- 
 num redlum. It furrounds alfo the collum ve- 
 ficse, glandulse prollatac, and veficulas femina- 
 les in men, and the vagina in women. The 
 ule of this nuifcle, is to fu Train and elevate 
 the anus, left the feces flrould be burthenfome 
 to the fphinfter j and to prefs the proftatse 
 and veficufe feminales, in order to promote 
 the emiftion of the feminal juices in coition. 
 
 Fiftufe in ano, that are within this mufcle, 
 generally run in the diredlion of the gut, and 
 may be laid open into the gut with great fafe- 
 ty •, but thofe fiftuls or rather abfeefles that 
 are frequently formed on the outfide of the 
 fphincter, and ufually furround it, all but 
 wh^re this mufde is connefted to the penis, 
 cannot be opened far into the gut, vdthout to- 
 tally dividing the fphindler, which authors fay 
 renders the fphindler ever after incapable of 
 reftraining the excrement : but this does not 
 always hold true •, for there have been many 
 inftances of the fphinfter being divided, which 
 made the patients unable to hold their excre- 
 Uxienrs during the cure, but the wounds being 
 healed, they have retained them as well as 
 ever. 
 
 Q,. Which are the intertranfyerfales lumbo- 
 rum i' 
 
 A. The IntertranTyerfales lumborum are 
 fmall mufcles feated between all the tranlverfe 
 
 proceffes 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 193 
 
 procefles of the vertebra lumborum, to bring 
 them nearer together. 
 
 CX Which is the pfoas parvus ? 
 
 A. The pfoas parvus is one of the flexor 
 mufcles of the loins, which arifes laterally from 
 the body of the upper vertebra of the loins, 
 and the laft of the back, and is inferted into 
 the os^pubis, where it is joined to the ilium. 
 
 CX Which is the quadratus lumborum ? 
 
 A. The quadratus lumborum has its ori- 
 gin in the anterior and fuperior part of the 
 pofterior procefs of the ilium, and is inferted 
 into all the tranfverfe procefles of the verte- 
 brae of the loins, the latt vertebra of the tho- 
 rax, and the laft rib. This with its fellow, 
 ading alternately, afflft the extenfor dorfi et 
 lumborum, in raifing the oflfa innominata in 
 progreflion : or each ading fingly, while the 
 lower limbs are not moved, inclines the body 
 to one flde. 
 
 Which are the coccygrei ? 
 
 A. The coccygaei arife from the acute pro- 
 celTes of the offa ifchii, and are inferted Into 
 the os CQccygis, which they pull forward. 
 
 What is the peritoneum ? 
 
 A. The peritoneum is a thin, foft, fmooth, 
 and lubricous membrane, which lines the 
 whole cavity of the abdomen, containing moft 
 of the vifcera of that part, as it were in a bag. 
 It has a number of fmall glands that leparate. 
 a liquor, which fupplies the inteftines, and fa- 
 cilitates their motion : the external fuperficies 
 of this membrance is unequal where it adheres 
 U to 
 
154 ANATOMICAL 
 
 to tlie tranfverfe mufcles, but tlie internal is 
 very fmooth and poliflied. The upper part 
 of the periconsum covers the diaphragm or 
 midriif, to which it clofdy adheres, and is no 
 other than the proper membrane of the dia- 
 phragm. The fore part of the peritonaeum 
 llicks to the tranfverfe mufcles and linea al- 
 ba; the lower part of it to the os pubis, 
 and the back part of it to the os facrum and 
 vertebrae of the loins. It is a double mem- 
 brane, and contains in its duplicatures the 
 umbilical vefTds, the bladder, ureters, kid- 
 neys, and the fpermatic veffels, to all which it 
 gives a membrane, as alfo to the liver, fpleen, 
 (lomach, inteftines, and womb. Its external 
 laminte have two produdions or procefles, 
 named proceffus vaginalis, which refemble 
 two ilieaths, paffing through the rings of the 
 oblique‘and tranfverfe abdominal mufcles iii 
 the groin, to enclofe the fpermatic vefiels and 
 teflicles in men, and the round ligaments of 
 the womb in women. The arteries an.l veins 
 of the peritonreum are fupplied from the epi- 
 gaftric, mammary, lumbar, and diaphrag-* 
 rnatic veffds, and often from the fpermatics. 
 Its nerves are from thofe of the diaphragm, 
 back, loins, and cs facrum. It has alfo a few 
 lymphatics, which' difeharge themfelves into 
 the iliac glands. ^ 
 
 Theufes of the peritonteum arc, to enclofe 
 the contents or vifeera of the abdomen ; for 
 when it is dilated, wounded, or broken, they 
 fall out of their proper places, and ruptures 
 are formed. It alfo gives an external covering 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 to almofl; all the parts contained in the abdo- 
 men, and forms the procefs of the peritone- 
 um, and the tunica vaginalis of the tefres. 
 
 The dropfy of the pei itoneum maybe di- 
 ftinguifhed by being leaft prominent about 
 the navel, for there the tendons of the muf- 
 cles and the peritoneum will not lepararei 
 and the water, in fome that have been difiec- 
 ted, has been found to have made the parts 
 where it was contained as foul as any ulcer; 
 therefore none of them could have been cured 
 by operation. 
 
 Q. What are the vifcera of the abdomen ? 
 
 A. The vifcera of the abdomen, are the 
 ftomach, omentum, duodenum, jejunum, 
 ilium, c^cum, colon, reftum, mefentery, me- 
 focolon, liver, gall bladder, porus biliarius, 
 pancreas, fpleen, kidneys, renal glands, ureters, 
 and bladder; befides the vafa ladtea, recepta- 
 culum chyli, and dudus thoracicus a'ready 
 fpoken of, and the urethra and interna! and 
 external parts of generation, which I hiail here- 
 after defcribe. 
 
 Q. What is the ftomach ? 
 
 A. The ventriculus or ftomach, is a hollow 
 membranous part, placed moftly in the left 
 hypochondrium, immediately under the left 
 fide of the diaphragm, its left fide touching 
 the fpleen, and its right covered by the thin 
 edge of the liver. Its figure nearly refcmbles 
 a pouch of a bag-pipe, but its upper fide is 
 concave, and the lower convex ; it has two 
 orifices, both on its upper uarts : the left cal^ 
 O 2 ‘ kd 
 
196 ANATOMICAL 
 
 led cardia, is placed much higher than the right, 
 continuous to the gula, through which the 
 aliment paffes into the ftomach ; its right ori- 
 fice is called the pylorus, through which the 
 aliment is conveyed out of the ftomach into 
 the duodenum : in this parr, there is a circu- 
 lar valve v>?hich clofes the ftomach, and hin- 
 ders a return of aliment out of the gut, but 
 does not at all times hinder the gall from flow- 
 ing into the ftomach. The pylorus is conncdf- 
 ed to the upper part of the ftomach by a liga- 
 ment. The fize of the ftomach in human fub- 
 jefts is various ; in people addidfed to gluttony 
 it is ufuaily very large •, and in men it is ge- 
 nerally larger than in women. Its veflels are 
 arteries, veins, nerves, and lymphatics. The 
 gaftric arteries it receives from the celiac ; and 
 the gaftric veins ail run to the vena portse : a- 
 mong thefe are obfervable the vafa brevia, 
 which go off to the fplenic branch, and the 
 vena coronaria, which furrounds the ftomach. 
 Its nerves principally enter at the left orifice ; 
 they come from the par vagura, and are very 
 large, whence it is that the ftomach is fo fenfi- 
 ble : the lymphatics go to the receptaculum 
 chyli. d he fubftance of the ftomach is mem- 
 branaceous, and is compofed of four coats, as 
 the oefophagus. The firft, or external coat, is 
 membranous, the fibres of w'hich run tranfverfe- 
 ]y •, the fecond coat is mufcular, whofe fibres 
 are chiefly longitudinal and circular •, the third 
 is nervous, this forms a multitude of wrinkles, 
 and is furnifhed with a number of fanguifer- 
 
 ous 
 
dialogues. 
 
 197 
 
 ous veflels, and fmall glands, which fecrete a 
 mucus-, the fourth coat is thin, villofe, and po- 
 rous, and adheres very firmly to the former, 
 As the mufcular coat contrafts, the inner coat 
 falls into folds, which increafe as the ftomach 
 lelTens, and confequently retard the aliment 
 molt when the fcomach is neared; being emp- 
 ty. Theufeof the ftomach is for the digef- 
 tion of our food, that is to receive, contain, 
 dilTolve, and change what is fwallowed by the 
 mouth -, and after a fufficient concodlion, to 
 expel it through the pylorus into the inteflines ; 
 poiTibly it alfo abforbs, and retains the moft 
 fubtie parts of what it has thus prepared for 
 nutrition : but 1 (hall fpeak more of this here- 
 after. 
 
 CX What is the duodenum ? 
 
 A. The inceflinum duodenum is the firfl of 
 the three fmall guts, fo called from its being 
 about twelve fingers breadth in length. It be- 
 gins from the pylorus, from which turning 
 downwards, it firfl paues by the gall bladder, 
 and then under the jejunum and mefentery, 
 and coming in fightagain in the left hypochon- 
 drium, it there commences jejunum, which is 
 the fecond of the fmall guts -, but the place 
 where this ends and the other begins, is not ex- 
 actly determined. About four fingers breadth 
 from the pylorus it receives a dufil from the 
 liver and gall bladder, called dufrus commu- 
 nis choledochus, and another from the pancre- 
 as, called pancreaticus, at a little diflance from 
 each other, which difeharge their relpedtiye 
 U 3 liquors 
 
spS ANATOMICAL 
 
 3'quors into it. The coats of the duodenuni 
 are thicker tlian thofe of any other of the frnall 
 guts, its cavity is alfo greater, and its pafTage 
 in a fcraiter direfl on than any of them. Near 
 its origin it has no valves, nor rugm or wrin- 
 kles; but in its continuation it has very nu- 
 merous and remarkable ones, called by authors 
 juga. It has alfo the glands of Brunnerus in 
 great number, which krve for the fecreting of 
 a thin aqueous fluid, and it receives an artery 
 from thecreliac and a vein from the porta. 
 
 What is the jejunum ? 
 
 A. 7'he jejunum is fo called from its being 
 ufually found empty, which is owing to the 
 fluidity of the chyle, the greater flimulus of 
 the bile in it, and the abundance of the lafteal 
 veffels with which it is furniflaed. It is fltua- 
 ted in the regio umbilicalis, and being the fe- 
 cond of the Imall guts, it begins where the duo- 
 denum ends, and terminates where the valves 
 are obliterated. Its length is dilferent In vari- 
 ous fubjeds; but is ufually between thirteen 
 and flxteen hands breadth long, making fome- 
 what more than a third part of the frnall guts. 
 It is dilfinguifhed from the ilium by its coats, 
 which are a frnall m.atcer thinner, and lefs pale ; 
 it receives arteries from the mefentericre, and 
 veins from the .mefaraicte, and has alfo a great 
 many connivent glands and valves. 
 
 Q W'hat is the ilium ? 
 
 A? The ilium is the continuation of the je- 
 junum, and is the third and laft of the fmall 
 guts, it is fituated in the hypogaftrium, and 
 
 very 
 
dialogues. 
 
 199 
 
 very often feme part t f it in the pelvis, upon 
 the bladder, efpecially in women; filling all 
 the fpace between the ilia, whence its name. 
 Its length is various, fometimes not more than 
 fifteen, fometimes twenty-one hands breadth, or 
 more. Its beginning is v/here the valves of the 
 jejunum ceafe to be confpicuous, and its end is 
 where the larger inteftines begin ; in which 
 place, it is in a very fingular manner inferred 
 into the right fide of the colon, near the up'^ 
 per edge of the os ilium. It has no other val- 
 ves except that great one at the end which is 
 called by many valvula coli Bauhini : its glands 
 are, in general, more numerous towards the 
 end than in any other part. The great length 
 of the fmall guts is evidently for the conveni- 
 ence of a greater number of ladteals, that the 
 chyle which mifies the orifices in one place may 
 not efcape them in another. This imeftine, 
 becaufe of its fituation, falls eafily clown into 
 the ferotum, by the produdion of the peri- 
 tonteum. 
 
 What are the thick and great guts ^ 
 
 A. I he thick and great guts are the caecum, 
 colon, and redum but the ctecum here 
 pieant, is the head of the colon. 
 
 Q. What is the emeum ? 
 
 A. The caecum, or apendicula vermiformis, 
 is the only true caecum, though the antients 
 deferibe it otherwife. It is fituated on the be- 
 ginning of the colon, and is properly an ap- 
 pendage of that gut. k is about four fingers 
 preadrfi long, and the bignefs of an earth'^worm 
 O 4 or. 
 
200 ANATOMICAL 
 
 or goofe-quill, with a fmall orifice opening 
 into the colon : this gut has feldom any thing 
 in it. It is called caecum, or blind, becaufeit 
 is open only at one end, by which it is fixed 
 to the beginning of the colon ; its other end, 
 which is fhut, is not tied to the mefentery, 
 but to the right kidney, by means of the pe- 
 ritonaeum. In human fubjedts, the caecum is 
 called one of the large guts, though it is the 
 fmalleft by far; this miltake is owing to the 
 ancients taking their defcription of the vifcera 
 from dogs and fome other animals in whom the 
 ctECum is very large, as Chelfeden and others 
 obferve, 
 
 Q. What is the colon ? 
 
 A. The colon may be reckoned the firfl of 
 the great guts, as I have before obferved. It 
 is the greatefl and wideft of all the inteftines, 
 and about eight or nine hands breadth long;. 
 It begins where the ilium ends, in the cavity 
 of the os ilium, on the right fidej from thence, 
 afcending by the kidney on tite fame fide, it 
 pafles under the concave fide of the liver, to 
 v/hich it is fometimes tied, as likewife to the 
 gall bladder, which tinges it yellow in that 
 place •, then it runs under the bottom of the 
 Ilomach to the fpleen, in the left fide, to which 
 it is alfo knit-, from thence it turns down to 
 the left kidney ; and thence, paffing in form 
 of an S, it terminates in the upper part of the 
 os facrum, in the redtum. Ait the beginning 
 of this gut there is, a valve formed by the pro- 
 dudtion of the inmlifl: coat of the inteftines ; in 
 
 this 
 
 4 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 201 
 
 this place it hinders the excrements, which are 
 once fallen into the colon, from returning a- 
 gain to the ilium. It has a ftroog ligament, 
 which, running along its upper fide from the 
 ilium to the redum, flrengthens it againft the 
 weight of the excrements, and draws it toge- 
 ther into the ceils, which, with the valvuls 
 conniventes, retards the pafTage of the excre- 
 ments, that we may not be obliged continu- 
 ally to go to ftool. The fiefiiy fibres of its fe- 
 cond coat are greater and ftronger than rhofe 
 ot the other inceffine, becaufe greamr ftrength 
 is requibte to caufe the excrements to afcend. 
 The connivent valves are larger in tlds than in 
 any other of the guts, as well as the coats 
 ftronger. 
 
 What is the rcdum ? 
 
 A. Theredum is the laid of all the intef- 
 tines. It is about two hands breadth long, and 
 tliree fingers breadth broad •, it begins at the 
 upper part of the os factum, where the colon 
 ends, and going ftraitdown (whence its name) 
 it is tied to the extremities of the coccyx, by the 
 peritonsEum behind, and to the neck of the 
 bladder in men, but in wi.men to tiie va- 
 gina uteri before, from whence comes chefym- 
 pathy between thofe parts. The co.ms of the 
 redum are more thick and fiefhy chati thole 
 of any other of the inteftincs : it has in gene- 
 ral no valves, but feveral rugse; the abfcnce 
 of valves here, is to prevent the expullion - 
 of the faeces from being retarded. 1 he extre- 
 mity of this gut forms the anus. 1 he lower 
 end of this gut is the feat of the true fiftula 
 
 in 
 
iQi ANATOMICAL 
 
 jn ano, which iifually runs betwixt the muf- 
 cular coat and the inner coat •, it is cured by 
 opening it the whole length into the cavity of 
 the gut ; it is yet better, if it can be dene, to 
 extirpate all that is nfculous and fehirreus. 
 The other kind of fihula, improperly fo call- 
 ed, is an ablctfs running round the outhde of 
 the fphinbler, in the fhape of a horfe-ftioe, be- 
 ing a circle all but where this mufclc unites 
 with thofe of the penis •, this is beft cured by 
 opening and removing part of the outer ilsin. 
 The former of thefe cafes happens efteneft in 
 full habits, proceeding frequently from the 
 piles •, the latter is generally a critical difeharge, 
 and one of nature’s lafl efforts in confumptive 
 and fcorbutic habits of body. The inverfion 
 and Aiding down of this gut is called prolap- 
 fus ani, a difeafe common in children, efpeci- 
 ally thofe who are afflided with the ftone, and 
 not of much confequence ; in men it is more 
 rare and dangerous, being generally attended 
 with a Aux oi humours, i have feen cafes re- 
 lated of a prolapfus ani being cured by taking 
 away a piece of the prolapfed gut with a 
 caulilic, lengthways of the gut; when the 
 wound difeharged the Aux of the humours, the 
 gut was eafily reduced, and cicatrizing in that 
 Hate, it never more fell dov/n Another, w'here 
 a bold unthinking furgeon having cut off the 
 prolapfed part, the cicatrix was fo hard and 
 contrafted, that th.e patient could never after 
 go to Aool without a glvAer, and then not 
 without great mifery. Oitentimes the piles 
 2 occafio.f^ 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 203 
 
 occafion large tumours at the lower end of this 
 gut: thefe are always belt extirpated by liga- 
 ture for if tlrey are cut, they will Ibmetimes 
 bleed excelTively, and it is no eafy matter to ap- 
 ply any thing to ftop a flux of blood in that 
 part. The guts have the fame coats as the 
 ftomach, and the great guts have three mem- 
 branes or ligaments, running on the outfide 
 their whole length, and fupporting the facculi 
 into v/hich thofe guts are divided. The lefier 
 guts have, at very fmall diflances, femi lunar 
 valves, placed oppofite to the interftices of each 
 other, to prevent the aliment from pafling too 
 fpeedily through the guts-, and the better to 
 anfwer that end, they are larger and more nu- 
 merous near the ftomach, where the food is thin- 
 ner, than they are towards the colon, where the 
 food is continually made thicker in its progrefs 
 by a difcharge of part of the chyle. This contri- 
 vance, fo neceffary to men becaufe of their 
 erebl pofture, when they are obliged by fick- 
 nefs or accidents, to lie along, becomes a great 
 inconvenience, and calls for the help of gly- 
 fters and purges. But brutes have not thefe 
 valves, becaufe they are not convenient in an 
 horizontal pofture. At the entrance of the 
 ilium into the colon, are two very large valves, 
 which effeftually hinder the regrels of the 
 faeces into the ilium. Clyfters, indeed, have 
 been frequently known to pafs them, and be 
 vomited up j but the excrement that is fome- 
 times vomited up I am apt to think, is fu.;h as 
 had not pafled into the great guts. The other 
 valves in the colon are placed oppofite, but not 
 
 ill 
 
204 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 in the fame place, to each other, and make 
 with their anterior edges an equilateral tri- 
 angle; but as the gut approaches the anus, 
 they become lels remarkable, and fewer in 
 number, as before obferved. All the inteftines 
 have in their inner membrane an almofl infi- 
 nite number of very fmall glands; fomeof them 
 in the large guts will appear to the naked eye 
 when they are deceafed. Their office istodif- 
 charge into the inteftines; a liquor which 
 ferves for the attenuation of the chyle, for 
 lubricating tlie intellines and in the large 
 guts, to ioften the faeces, that they may be 
 evacuated without pain. I’he ufe of the fmaller 
 guts is to promote the formation of the chyle, 
 to perfe6l its fecretions, and to propel the re- 
 maining fasces to the larger. The office of 
 the larger guts is to receive and colled the 
 matter of the fasces, and at a proper time to 
 expel it. The length of the guts to that of 
 the body is as five to one in a middle fized man ; 
 in taller men the proportion is ufually lefs, and 
 in fnort men greater. The inteftines have 
 veftels in great abundance, running over every 
 part of their fubftance. Their arteries are from 
 the mcferaic, fervingfor the fmallsr inteftines, 
 the lower for the larger ; and thefe make a 
 multitude of very fingular and furprizing anaf- 
 tomofes. Tire veins are meferaics, and go 
 oft to the vena portm and the liver. The 
 nerves r%re fenc from the inteicoftals, and the 
 par vagum ; befides thefe, we arc to oblerve the 
 lacteal veftels already deferibed. The redum 
 rcceiv^es blood veftTcls alfo' from the hypoga- 
 fti'ics. Q. What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 205 
 
 What is the omentum ? 
 
 A. The omentum, epiploon, or caul, is a 
 fine membrane larded with fat, fomewhat 
 like net-work. It is fituate under the perito- 
 nteum, and immediately above the inteftines 
 on the furface of the fmall guts, and refem- 
 bles an apron tucked up. Its outer or upper 
 part, named ala fuperior, is connedled to the 
 bottom of the ftotnach, the fpleen, and part 
 of the inteftinum duodenum •, and thence def- 
 cending a little lower than the navel, is refledled 
 and tied to the intcftinum colon, the fpleen, 
 and part of the duodenum ; this laft part is 
 called ala inferior, and thefpace between the als 
 is named burfa. Sometimes both aise are tied to 
 the liver, and in difeafed bodies adheres to the 
 peritoneum. The ufes of the omentum are, 
 to lubricate the inteftines, that they may the 
 eafier perform their periftaltic motion, and to 
 cherifli and defend them from cold •, to afiift 
 in the formation of the bile, the fatty part of 
 which is wholly owing to the vefiels of the o- 
 mentum ; every thing (according to Malpighi) 
 that returns from this part going to the liver 
 through adipofe dudls to the vena ports. It 
 ferves alfo to temperate the acrimony of the 
 humours, and probably to give nourifhmcnt to 
 the body, as all the other fat is fuppofed to 
 do, when it is incapable of being nouriflied 
 any other way. The arteries of the omentum 
 come from the csliac, and are very numerous ; 
 its veins arife chiefly from the fplenic branch 
 
 of 
 
2o5 ANATOMICAL 
 
 of the vena portae, and its nerves are from th^ 
 intercoftals and par vagum. 
 
 What is the inefentery ? 
 
 A. The inefentery is a thick fat membrane^ 
 placed in the middle of the abdomen, or 
 midft: of the inteftines, particularly of the 
 I'maller ones, whence it has the name. It is 
 almofi: of a circular figure, with a narrow pro- 
 duftion, to which the end of the colon and 
 beginning of the redfum are faftened. It is 
 about four fingers in breadth, and half a hand’s 
 breadth in diameter; its circumference is full of 
 plaits and foldings, and about three ells in 
 length ; the inteftines are tied like a border on 
 this circumference, fo that to every inch of the 
 mefentery, there are about three inches of the 
 intdlines faftened. Its fubftance is compofed 
 of membranes, fat, veffels of all kinds, and 
 a number of glands. Its coats or membranes 
 are two, and between thefe there is a cellular 
 fubftance, which contains the fat : the mefe- 
 raic veflels and glands arc alfo placed there; 
 which many reckon a third coat of the mefen- 
 tery, and that not improperly; this they call 
 the tunica cellulofa. In the upper part it is 
 ftrongly faftened to the three luperior verte- 
 bra of rhe loins ; and in the lower, with the 
 ir.t'ftines, and particularly with the jejunum 
 and ilium. The veffels ot the mefentery arc 
 blood veflels, nerves, lad'cals, and lymphatics. 
 3'he blood-veflels are the ft me with thofe of 
 the inteftines, and theft make a multitude of 
 ft range meanders, and have very frequent 
 
 anaftomo^iSv 
 
dialogues. 
 
 207 
 
 anaftomofes. The nerves alfo come from the 
 par vagum, and the interco!la!s. There are 3 
 number of glands difperfed throughout the 
 whole mefentery, from which they take their 
 name; thefe vary greatly In their fize, figure, 
 and fituation in different fubjebls, and in old 
 people they frequently almoft difappear. The 
 ufes of the melentery are to preferve the je- 
 junum and ilium from tw’ifting in their pe- 
 rillaltic or vermicular motion, and to confine 
 the red to their places, to fuffain the fangui- 
 ferous and lafteal veffels of the inteftines, and 
 to make the way for the iacleals to the recepta- 
 cle the flhorter. 
 
 (T What is the mefocolon ? 
 
 A. The mefocolon is that part of the meferi- 
 tery connedled with the great guts, and efpe- 
 cially the colon. The mefocolon meets the 
 middle of the colon, to which it is joined. Its 
 lower part flicks to a part of the rebtiim. 
 
 Q. What is the liver 
 
 A. The liver is the largefl gland in the body, 
 of a dufky red colour, ficuated immediately un- 
 der thediaphragm in the right hypoehondriuni. 
 Its figure is almoft round, the upper furface 
 convex, fmooch, and equal ; the lower, hol- 
 low and unequal ; backv/ard, towards the ribs 
 it is thick, and thin on its fore part, where it 
 covers the upper fide of the ftornach, and fome 
 of the guts. In its middle and fore parr, it is 
 divided into two by a fiffure, where the umbili- 
 cal veffels enter, It is faftened in the body by 
 two ligaments the firft, which is large ani 
 
2o8 anatomical 
 
 ftrong, comes from the peritoneum that covers 
 the diaphragm, to v^hich the upper, fide of the 
 liver adheres, and is thus tied to it- and the 
 fternum, being named latum or fufpenforium : 
 the fecond is the umbilical vein, which after 
 the birth degenerates into a ligament called te- 
 res or umbilicale ; it is inlerted at a fmall fif- 
 fure in the lower edge of the liver. The li- 
 gamentuna latum vel I'afpenforium, fuftains 
 the liver in an erect pofture, or rather fixes it 
 in its fituation, while it is fupported by the 0- 
 thervifcera, they being compreffed by the ab- 
 dominal mufcles. 
 
 In lying down, the teres prevents it from 
 preffing on the diaphragm ; and in lying on 
 the back, they both together fufpend it, that 
 it may not comprefs and obfiruct theafeending 
 vena cava. The veffeis of the liver are very 
 numerous, receiving arteries from the cseliac 
 and mefenterica fuperior, called arteri<e hepa- 
 ticte ; veins from the vena cava, and vena 
 porttE ; and nerves, from the plexus hepati-^ 
 cus of the intercoftals. The biliary vefiTels are 
 the ductus choledochus communis, which 
 opens obliquely into the duodenum ; the duc- 
 tus cyfticus, which runs from the gall bladder 
 to the common duct ; the ductus hepaticus, 
 which runs from the liver to the comm.on duct ; 
 and the branches of this dill'-ibuted through 
 the liver, make what are called pori biliarii. 
 Tfhe liver lias alio a great number of lympha- 
 tics, mod of which open near the vena portse, 
 or the concave fide of the liver; from thence 
 
 the 
 
dialogues. 
 
 209 
 
 the lympha Is carried by other lymphatics to 
 the receptaculum chyli. To thefe vefTels we 
 may add the canalis venofus, and the great 
 fin us of the vena portse in the foetus. The 
 vena cava, and the vena portse, are accompa= 
 nied in the liver with many fmali branches of 
 the ccdiac and meferaic arteries already men- 
 tioned. The vena portae fupplies the place of 
 an artery, and brings the blood full , of bile for 
 fecretion, which being ftrained off, the vena 
 eava returns the blood which remains. The 
 vena portae and the cava, enter the liver by its 
 concave fide, and are equally diftri bated 
 through all its lubftance ■, wherever there is a 
 branch of the one, there is alio a branch of 
 the other-, 
 
 Q. What are the excretory dudls of .the 
 .liver ^ 
 
 A. The excretory dudls of the liver are the 
 veficula fellis, and porus biliarius. 
 
 Qe What is the vcficuja fellis P 
 
 A. The veCcuJa fellis, or gall bladder, is a 
 receptacle of bile, faftened to the concave part, 
 or under fide of the liver j its figure is like that 
 of a pear, and, in general, of the fize ,of a 
 fmali hen’s egg, though it differs in bignefs 
 in almoft every perfon. When the liver is in 
 its natural fituation, the bottom, or largefi; 
 .part of the gall bladder, is downwards, and the 
 neck, or narrow part upwards ; and then ic 
 touches the ftomach as well as the colon, .v/here 
 it frequently dyes them yellow. This bladder 
 is compofeJ of three membranes, or coats ; 
 
 T the 
 
aio ANATOMICAL 
 
 the outermoft is common to it with the liver, 
 the next, is mufcular, and the third, is ner- 
 voiis, covered with a kind of cruft or mucus, 
 which preferves it ^gainft the acrimony of the 
 fecreted bile, probably by fome fmall glands, 
 which Malpighi has remarked, between it? 
 coats, where the cyftip arteries end. The bile 
 is brought into the gall bladder by Pjme fmall 
 veftels which arifp from the neighbouring 
 glands, and which uniting, form one or two 
 pipes, which open at the neck of the bladder. 
 Thefe dufls are hard to difcover in any liver 
 except that of an ox. From the neck of the 
 gall bladder there goes a pipe about the bigr 
 pefs of a goofe-quill called dudlns cyfticus, 
 running towards the duodenum. Some fmall 
 biliary dufls open likewife into it, and its in- 
 ner membrane has feveral rugte, which retard 
 the motion of the bile. From the liver to this 
 du(5l, runs pne called hepaticus, which car- 
 ries off the gall this way, when the gall bladr 
 der is full ; thefe two together make the duc- 
 tus communis choledochus, which goeth ob- 
 liquely to the duodenum, and enters that gut 
 about four inches below its beginning. The 
 gall bladder has twq veins from the vena 
 portae, which are called cyfticae gemellae. It 
 has fome fmall arteries frotn the cteliaca dex- 
 tra, and fome lymphatics. The ufe of the 
 gall bladder is tp, collect the bile, firft fecreted 
 in the liver, and mixing it with its own pe- 
 culiar produce, to perfed it farther, tp retain 
 
DIALOGUES. 4II 
 
 St together a certain time, and then to expel 
 it. 
 
 What is the porus biliarius ? 
 
 A. The porus biliarius is another excretory 
 vefiel of the livery and, according, to fome, is 
 the fame with the duftus hepaticus : but I, as 
 well as many others, make a diftinftion between 
 them, and have already 'obferved that the he- 
 patic dudl runs from the liver to the dudtus 
 choledochus. The porus biliarius has as 
 many branches as the vena ^ports, which k 
 accompanies through every part of the liver. 
 "Wherever there is a branch of the one, there 
 h a branch of the other ; and thefe^we are in- 
 clofed in one common capfule, as in a flieath. 
 The ufe of this capfule is to facilitate the 
 ^motion of thehlood and bile, by the contrac- 
 iion of its fibres. All thefe branches unite, 
 and make onetrunk, of the bignefs of a fmall 
 quill, which joins the end of the cyftic duff, 
 ccarrying the bile from the liver to the 
 inteftines by the common dudl, as was faid 
 before. The infertion of the porus biliarius 
 into the cyftic duJl is oblique, with its mouth 
 looking towards the dudtus communis, by 
 which means it is impofiible mat the bile, which 
 comes from the cyftis, can enter the pcius bi- 
 liarius, unlefs the common du6l is hopped. 
 
 As the liver, from its fituation in the fame 
 cavity with the ftomach, will be moft preffed, 
 and confequently feparate moft gall when the 
 ftomach is fulleft, which is the time when it 
 is moft wanted fo the gall bladder, being feat- 
 P 2 ed 
 
212 ANATOMICAL 
 
 cd againft the duodenum, will have its fluid 
 prefled out by the aliment pafling thro’ that 
 gut, and confequently at a right time, and in 
 due proportion ; becaufe the greater that quan- 
 tity of aliment is, the greater will be thecom- 
 prcfflon : and fo the contrary.' 
 
 There is no way of computing with any 
 exaflnefs the quantity of bile that is ufually 
 fecreted by the liver in a given time; but if 
 it is four times as much as all the falivary 
 glands fecrete, it may be twenty-four ounces 
 for every meal ; to vvhich being added fix oun- 
 ces of faliva, vvhich appears to be a moderate 
 computation, fuppofing the pancreas in the 
 fame time fecretes three ounces, there will then 
 be thirty-three ounces of fluids feparated for 
 the digellion of one meal ^ and that thefe ne- 
 cefTary fluids may not be wafled in fuch quan- 
 tities, they pafs into the blood with the chyle, 
 and may be foon feparated again for the fame 
 ufe, and very likely, fome of the fame bile 
 may be employed more than once, for digeft- 
 ing part of the fame meal. As the liver ex- 
 ceeds all the glands in the body in magnitude, 
 and its excretory dudts ending in the duode- 
 num, it feems to me to be much more capable 
 of making thofe large reparations from the 
 blood, which are procured by cathartics, than 
 the fcarce vifible glands of the guts. The 
 liver ordinarily weighs, in a middle fized man, 
 about three pounds twelve ounces : the pancre- 
 as, three ounces •, and the fpleen, fourteen 
 ounces. 
 
 What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 2rg 
 
 What is the pancreas ? 
 
 A. The pancreas, commonly called the 
 fweet-bread, is a large gland of the falivary 
 kind, lying acrofs the upper and back part of 
 the abdomen, near the duodenum, behind the 
 ftomach, and between the liver and fpleen. Its 
 length is eight or nine inches, its breadth a- 
 bouc two fingers, or two and a half, its thick- 
 nefs about one finger, and its weight about 
 three ounces, as before obferved. The fliape 
 of the pancreas very much refembles the tongue 
 of a dog ; it is broadeft cowards the duode-^ 
 num, and gradually narrower towards the 
 fpleen. It is furrounded with a membrane, 
 which is continuous with the peritonaeum •, it 
 has arteries from the csliac and iplenic branch- 
 es, and veins alfo from the fplenic vein ; its 
 nerves are from the par vagum and the inter- 
 coftals ; and finally it has a fhort excretory duft, 
 which is fituated in the middle of the pancreas, 
 where it refembles an empty vein, and is about 
 the thicknefs of a very fmall draw. This dudl 
 terminates in the duodenum, which it enters 
 obliquely, four or five fingers breadth below the 
 pylorus ufually at the fame orifice with the 
 dudus choiedochus, but fomctimes it has a 
 double aperture. The ufe of the pancreas is to 
 fecrete a peculiar liquor, Called the pancreatic 
 juice, which is of a falivofe nature, and is car* 
 ried by the pancreatic dud into the duodenum, 
 where it ferves to dilute the chyle, or render it 
 more fluid and fit to enter the mouths of the 
 ladealsi and, perhaps, to temper and dilute 
 P 3 the 
 
214 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the bile, to change its vifcidity, bltternei^, co- 
 lour, &c and make it mix with the chyle, in 
 order to aflimilate the feveral tafles, odours, and 
 properties of the feveral foods, into one ho- 
 mogeneous one. 
 
 In thofe who die of the jaundice, for the 
 mofl: part, are found in the gall-bladder, and 
 the biliary dufts, concretions of bile fo light 
 as to fwim in water, yet are called gall (tones r 
 thefe caufe the jaundice, by obdriidting the 
 dudlsj many perlons who have been cured of 
 this difeafa, have had great numbers' of thefe 
 Hones found io their excrements. 
 
 What is the fpleen ? 
 
 A. The fpleen is a vircus of a deep blac- 
 ki(h red colour, fituated on the left fide of the 
 Homach, immediately under the diaphragm, 
 near the ribs and above the left kidney. The 
 figure of it is a fort of deprelTed ovaL near 
 twice as long as broad, and almoft twice as 
 broad as thick. Its ufuaT fize is five or fix 
 inches long, three broad, and one inch thick j 
 but this varies in different fubje(^ts. It is fup- 
 ported by the contained parts, and fixed to its 
 place by an adhefion to the peritonaeum and 
 diaphragm ; kts alfo connedfed with the fto- 
 imch, by the vafa brevia, and with the pan- 
 creas, omentum, and left kidney, by mem- 
 branes. The ftibftance of the %leen is vafeu- 
 lar and fibrofe. There are two lymphatic 
 glands of about the bignefs of a bean, fituated 
 without it, sfcar where the veffels enter. The 
 vsflcls of the fpleen, eonfidering its fize, are 
 
 remarkably 
 
215 
 
 DlALOGtjES. 
 
 j-emarkably larger. Its artery is from the C£e- 
 liac, and is called the fplenic artery; the fple- 
 nic veioj is like thofe of the other vifcera, 
 very milch ramified, and its branches are car- 
 ried throughout the whole fpleen ; the nerves 
 of the fpleen are from the plexus fplenicus : 
 the fpleen has no excretory duft; but there 
 are in it lymphatic veffels running to the re- 
 ceptaculum chyli. The ufe of the fpleen has 
 been much controverted by authors ; but the 
 moft probable opinion feems to be, that it 
 ferves to render the blood more fluid, out of 
 which the bile is to be afterwards fecreted. 
 
 What are the kidneys ? 
 
 A. The kidneys are two dark-red vifcera of 
 an oblong figure; refembling a large bean ; fi- 
 tuated one on each fide the vertebra of the 
 loins, in the pofterior part of the abdomen, 
 upon the twolafl: ribs. The right kidney lies 
 under the great lobe of the liver, and is confe- 
 quently lower than the left, which lies under 
 the fpleen ; the edneave fide of the kidneys is 
 turned inward to the vertebra, and the convex 
 fide outv/ard. The kidneys are conne(5ted with 
 the loins, the lower rihs, the colon, glandulm 
 renales, the renal velfels, and the ureters. 
 They have two membranes, the one common 
 from the peritonseum, called the adipofe mem- 
 brane, from its being generally covered with 
 much fat ; this furrounds them but loolely,and 
 is furnifhed with its own proper velfels. 7 he 
 other membrane is proper, is very thin, and 
 every where applied clofely to the fiibftance of 
 P 4 the 
 
2i6 anatomical 
 
 the kidneys ; the fubftance of the kidneys itf 
 firm and hard, and is of two kinds. The exte= 
 rior, or cortical part, according to Malpighi, is 
 glandular, but according to the difcoveries of 
 Ruyfch, is throughout elegantly vafcular. The 
 interior is tubulous, and expreffed by the name 
 cf tubuli urinarii Bellini •, thefe terminate in ten 
 or twelve papillae, which open by a multitude 
 of apertures into the pelvis •, but thefe papillae 
 are not found in all fubjeds. This length an- 
 J'wers to the diftance between the two laft falfe 
 ribs and the os ilium, which is generally about 
 five or fix fingers breadth ; they are about half 
 as broad as long, and half as thick as broad. 
 The veffels of the kidneys are like thole of the 
 liver, included in a membrane, from the peri- 
 tonaeu-m. The arteries and veins are large, 
 and called emulgents, and renal veflels; thefe 
 are produced from the aorta and vena cava : 
 the nerves are from the plexus renal is, proceed- 
 ing from the intercoftals. There is alfo a num- 
 ber of lymphatics paffing to the receptaculum 
 chyli ; and alfo an excretory dud, called the 
 ureter, which 1 lhall by and by defcribe. The 
 ufe of the kidneys is to fecrete the urine from 
 the blood, which is brought there for that pur- 
 pofe by the cmulgenc arteries ; and what re- 
 mains from the fecretion, is returned by the 
 emulgent veins, while the urine fecreted is 
 carried off through the uteters to the blad- 
 der. 
 
 Q. What are the glandule renales ? 
 
 A. The 
 
dialogues. 
 
 2?7 
 
 A. The glandute renales, called alfo^ 
 false atrabiliariae, and renes fuccenturiati, 
 twoyellowilh glands of a compreffed figure, 
 lying on each fide of the upper part of the kid- 
 neys, a little above the emulgentvefiels. They 
 have a very narrow cavity imbued with a brown- 
 ifh liquor of a fweetifh tafte, and are about the 
 bignefs of a large nux vomica generally in a- 
 dults ; in the fcEtus they are larger, and often 
 exceed the kidneys themfelves in fize. The 
 very thin membrane that furrounds them clofe- 
 lyinvolves their whole fubftance, and connedts 
 them with the kidneys. They have blood vef- 
 fds and nerves, and their lymphatic veflels are 
 numerous. 
 
 What are the ureters ? 
 
 A. The ureters are tubes about the bignefs 
 of goofe'-quills, and about a foot long; they 
 arife from the hollow fide of the kidneys, and 
 terminate in the urinary bladder near the neck. 
 At their origin in the kidneys they are expand- 
 ed into the form of a funnel, and this expan- 
 fion makes the pelvis of the kidneys : at their 
 termination in the bladder, they pafs obliquely 
 for the fpace of an inch between its coats, 
 which manner of entering is to them as val- 
 ves, for their orifices being narrow, will admit 
 of nothing into them from the bladder. The 
 ureters are not ftrait, but fomewhat bent, fo 
 as to refemble the letter S. Their fubftance is 
 membranous, and they are compofed of three 
 coats ; the firft is from the peritonseum ; the 
 fecond is a thin mufcular one j and the third, 
 
 a nervous 
 
2i8 anatomical 
 
 a nervous one, covered with a flimy liquor to 
 defend it againfl; the acrimony of the urine •, 
 and in this, there are fometimes difcovercd 
 glands ; the blood veffels and nerves come from 
 the adjacent parts. Such as are fubjetft to the 
 gravel, and given to excefs of drinking, have 
 them fometimes fo much dilated, that you may 
 put the end of the little finger into them. Their 
 life is to carry the urine from the kidneys to 
 the bladder. 1 heir obftruftion caufes a fup- 
 prelhon of urine. 
 
 Qe Where is the bladder fituated, and how 
 compofed ? 
 
 A. The urinary bladder is feated in a dupli- 
 cature of the peritonaeum in the lower part of 
 the pelvis ; its fhape is orbicular, and its coats 
 are the fame with thofe ot the guts already de- 
 feribed, viz. an external, membranous, a mid- 
 dle mufcular (which is the detrufor urins,) 
 and an inner membranous or nervous coat, 
 which is covered with a peculiar fluid of a 
 mucous nature, fecreted in glands fituated in 
 this coat, and principally in that part which is 
 near the neck of the bladder. The coats of 
 the bladder are much thinner in the body and 
 the fundus (v/hich is the bottom, fituated up- 
 perrnofl;) than they are at the neck and lowed 
 part. I'he fphindter, in the neck of the blad- 
 der, clofes it, to prevent an involuntary dif- 
 ch arge of urine, i he bladder in adults will 
 conveniently hold about a pint*, but it is ca- 
 pable cf diflenfion fo as to hold much more. 
 It is eonnedled in the human body, in a fin- 
 
 gular 
 
DIALOGUES, 
 
 219 
 
 gular manner, by the peritoneum to the 03 
 pubis, different from other animals ; it is alfo 
 connected with the parts of generation by the 
 urethra, with the navel by the urachus anci 
 umbilical arteries, and finally in men with the 
 inteftinum reftum, and in women with the 
 vagina. The blood veffels of the bladder 
 come from the hypogaftric, the umbilical, and 
 the hemorrhoidal veffels in men and in wo- 
 men from, the fpermatics alfo. Its nerves are 
 from the intercoftals, and principally from 
 thofe of the os faerum. The bladder has three 
 foramina; two where the ureters enter in, at 
 which the urine pafics into the bladder ; and 
 one, much larger than thefe, in the neck, for 
 she difchargs of the urine into the urethra. 
 The nervous or inner coat of the bladder is 
 mofl exceeding fenfible, as is miferably expe- 
 rienced in the ftone and gravel. 
 
 What are the arteries of the abdomen B 
 A. The arteries of the abdomen are vari- 
 ous, and proceed from the aorta, already def- 
 cribed. They take their names from the parts 
 they are bellowed on, viz. artericE diaphrag- 
 matics vel phrenicse,. arteria caeliaca, ventri- 
 culi Goronaria, hepatica, pylorica, gaftrica, in- 
 teftinalis, cyfticae et bilaria, fplenica, pancre- 
 aticte, mefentericse, haemorrhoidalis, rcnales, 
 capfulares, fpermauc^e, lumbares,, facr^, ih- 
 acss, hypogaftrica, umbilicalis, glutsa, feia- 
 tica, pudicse, and obturatrix. 
 
 Which are the arteris diaphragmaticae 
 vel phrenic® ? 
 
 A. The 
 
220 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The arteri^e diaphragmatic^, called alfo 
 phrenicse, arife from the aorta in two branchesj 
 as it paffes under the diaphragm, which are ra- 
 mified on the diaphragm, fometimes it arifes 
 from the creliaca, and fometimes a trunk 
 from each. They give fmall branches to the 
 glanduls renales, and membrana adipofa of 
 the kidneys, the latter being called arteriae 
 adipofe. Smaller diaphragmatic arteries come 
 from the intercoflals, mammarise internae, me- 
 diaftinae, pericardijE, and cteliaca. 
 
 V^/hich is the arteria csliaca ? 
 
 A. The arteria c^liaca arifes from the aorta 
 defcendens, immediately below the diaphragm, 
 and is fcon after branched out to the liver, 
 pancreas, fpleen, ftomach, omentum, and duo- 
 denum, which branches are named from the 
 parts they are bellowed on, except the ventri- 
 CLili coronaria bellowed upon the ftomach, and 
 the branch upon the duodenum named intef- 
 tinalis, 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria ventriculi coronaria ? 
 
 A. The arteria ventriculi coronaria, arifes 
 from the celiaca, and is ramified on every part 
 of the ftomach, and fends off fmall branches 
 to part of the liver, neighbouring parts of the 
 diaphragm, and omentum. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria hepatica ? 
 
 A. The hepatica, arifes alfo from the CfEli- 
 aca, and goes to the pylorus with the vena 
 ports, fending off the pylorica and gaflrica 
 dextra, and is then ramified with the vena 
 ports through all the liver, 
 
 Q. Which 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 221 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria pylorica ? 
 
 A. The pylorica arifes from the hepatica, 
 and is ramified on the pylorus and neighbouring 
 parts of the ftomach. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria gaftrica dextra ? 
 
 A. The gaftrica dextra, arifes alfo from the 
 hepatica, 'and pafling behind and beyond the 
 pylorus, fends off the duodenalis vel intefbina- 
 lis, when it does not come from the hepatica ; 
 after this, it runs along the right fide of the 
 great curvature of the ftomach, and fends off 
 branches to all the neighbouring parts on both 
 fidts, which communicate with thofe of the 
 pylorica, coronaria ventriculi, and gaftro-epi- 
 ploicas dextra, the latter furnifiiing the near- 
 eft parts of the omentum, and communicating 
 with the mefentcrica fuperior, at laft the 
 right gaftric ends in the left, which is a branch 
 of the fplenica. 
 
 Which is the duodenalis vel inteftinalis ? 
 
 A. The duodenal or inteftinal artery runs 
 along the duodenum on the fide next the pan- 
 creas-, to both which it fends branches, and al- 
 fo to the neighbouring part of the ftomach. 
 
 Q. Which is the cyiticse and biliaria ? 
 
 A. The hepatic artery having fent out the 
 pylorica and gaftrica dextra, gives two bran- 
 ches to the veficLila fellis, called arteria cyfticse, 
 and another named biliaria, which is loft in the 
 great lobe of the liver. Afterwards, the he- 
 patic artery is ramified with the vena portre 
 through all the fubftance of the liver. 
 
 Qi Which is the arteria fplenica ? 
 
 A. The 
 
222 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The fplenica arifes clofe by the hepatlca* 
 the hepatic branch going to the right, and the 
 fplenic to the left immediately after its ori- 
 gin from the cteliaca it runs toward the left 
 junder the ftomach and pancreas to the fpleen. 
 
 Which are the pancreatics ? 
 
 A. The arterise pancreaticae are branches of 
 the fplenica ranified on the pancreas. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria gaftrica fmiftra ? 
 
 A. Under the left portion of the ftomach 
 it gives off a branch called gaftrica finlftra, to 
 the left fide of tlic ftomach, which communi- 
 cates with thofe of the coronaria ventriculi. 
 1 his gaftric artery alfo ftipplies the omentum 
 with branches, termed gaftro-epiplcicte fini- 
 ferae, which communicate with the right ga- 
 ftric. By this account it appears that the coro- 
 naria ventriculi, pylorica, inteftinalis, gaftrica, 
 gaftro-epiploicae and confequently the hepatica, 
 Iplenica, and mefenterica, communicate all 
 together. After this, before the fplenica ar^ 
 rives at the fpleen, it gives two or three bran- 
 ches to the large extremity of the ftomach, 
 commonly called vafa brevia j and one to the 
 omentuiTj, named epiploica. 
 
 Q. Which is the mefenterica fuperior ? 
 
 A. he arteria mefenteri'^a fuperior, arifes 
 ‘anteriorly juft below the csliaca, and gives off 
 branches to part of the pancreas and duode- 
 num communicating with the inteftinalis j then 
 going between the lamina of the mefentery, 
 and the duodenum and meferaic vein, it di- 
 ftribmes a number of branches to the fmail 
 
 inteftinesj) 
 
 K 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 223 
 
 Inteftines, from the lower third part of the 
 duodenum, to rhe csecum and colon. As they 
 approach the inteftines, all thefe branches com- 
 municate firft by reciprocal arches then by 
 areolsB and the mefties of all kinds of figures, 
 from which is detached an infinite number of 
 fmall ramifications, which furround the intef- 
 tinal canal like an annular piece of net-work. 
 
 Q. Which is the mefenterica inferior ? 
 
 A. The mefenterica inferior arifes anteriorly 
 from the aorta defcendens inferior, about an 
 inch above the bifurcation, and below the 
 fpermatic arteries ^ foon after it fends branches 
 to the colon and redtum, communicating with 
 one another ; it alfo fends off a branch called 
 hasmorhoidalis interna. 
 
 How is the hasmorrhoidalis interna dif- 
 tributed ? 
 
 A. The h^morrhoidalis interna runs down 
 behind the inteftinum redlum, to which it is 
 difl:ributed by feveral ramifications, and com- 
 niiinicates with the arterire hypogaftrics. 
 
 Which are the arterise renales ? 
 
 A. The renal arteries, commonly called 
 emulgents, are commonly two in number, and 
 go out laterally from the inferior defcending 
 aorta, immediately under the mefenterica fu- 
 perior, one to the right hand, the other to 
 the left. They enter into the depreffions of 
 the kidneys by feveral branches, and are rami- 
 fied through all the fubftance of the kidneys. 
 Sometimes the renal arteries fend branches to 
 
 the 
 
^224 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the glandulas renales, membrana adipofa of the 
 kidneys, and even to the diaphragm. 
 
 What are the arterise capfulares ? 
 
 A. The arteries capfulares are the arteries 
 of the renal glands, which arile fometimes 
 from the aorta, fometimes from the trunk of 
 the csliaca ; but generally the right comes 
 from the arteria renalis of the fame fide, near 
 the origin j the left, from the aorta above the 
 (renalis. 
 
 Which are the arterias fpermaticx ? 
 
 A. The arteriae fpermatics are commonly 
 two in number, fometimes more,; they are 
 very fmall, and go out anteriorly from the 
 aorta defeendens inferior, near each other, a- 
 bout an inch below the renales, between the 
 two meienteric£, or between the renales and me- 
 fentericre inferiores. They fend off fmall 
 branches to the common membrane of the kid- 
 neys, named adipofse •, and afterwards they run 
 down upon the pfoasmufcles, on the forefide of 
 the ureters, between the two lamintE of the peri- 
 tonaeum. They give feveral confiderablebranch- 
 -esto the peritoneum, chiefly to thofe parts of it 
 which are next the mefentery, and they comf= 
 municate both with the raefenterice and adi- 
 pofe. They likewife fend fmall arteries to the 
 .ureters. Afterwards, they pafs in men through 
 the tendinous openings of the rings of the abdo- 
 minal mufcles in the vagina of the peritoneum, 
 (termed procefTus vaginalis) and are diftributed 
 toLhetefticlesand epididymes, where they corn- 
 
 municate 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 225 
 
 ffiUnicate with a branch of the iliaca externa. 
 In women they do not go out of the abdo- 
 luen, but are diftributed to the ovaria and 
 uterus, and communicate with branches of the 
 hypogaftrica, at the jagged extremities of the 
 tubs Fallopianse. 
 
 Q. Which are the lumbar arteries ? 
 
 A. The arterise lumbares, or lumbar arteries, 
 go out porteriorly from the inferior defcending 
 aorta, in five or fix pairs, or more, much in 
 the fame manner with the intercoftals. The 
 fuperior fend fmall branches to the neighbour- 
 ing parts of the diaphragm and intercoftal 
 mufcles. They are diftributed on each fide to 
 the pfoas mufcle, quadrati lumborum, and to 
 the oblique and tranfverfe mufcles of the ab- 
 domen j and by perforating the oblique muf- 
 cles, they become external hypogaftric arte- 
 ries. They go likewife to the vertebral muf- 
 cles and bodies of the vertebra ; and enter 
 the fpinal canal through the lateral notches, 
 forming rings much in the fame manner with 
 the intercoftals ; and they likewife give fmall 
 twigs to the nerves. 
 
 Q. Which are the arteri^ facrse ? 
 
 A. The arterise facrse are generally two, 
 three, or four in number, and fometimes but 
 one, They go out commonly from the back 
 part of the inferior defcending aorta at the bi- 
 furcation, but fometimes from the lumbares, 
 and fometimes from the iliacse. Thefe arteries 
 are ramified on the os facrum, and neighbour- 
 ing parts of the peritonaeum, inteftinum rec- 
 
 cum. 
 
226 anatomical 
 
 turn, fat, &c. They likewife fend fmall ar- 
 teries to the nerves which go through the holes 
 of the 03 faerum, and they penetrate the in- 
 ner fubftance of that bone. 
 
 CL Which are the arteris iliacse ? 
 
 A. The arterite iliacte are thofe two large la- 
 teral branches arifing at the bifurcation, where 
 the aorta defcendens inferior ends at the laft 
 vertebra of the loins, and fometimes higher. 
 They run obliquely toward the anterior and 
 lowerpartof theofia ilium, fending offa few very 
 fmall arteries to the os facrum, neighbouring 
 mufcles, &c. likewife fmall arteries to the 
 peritonaeum, coats of the veins, fat and ure- 
 ters, behind which the iliac trunks pafs about 
 three fingers breadth from their origin, each 
 iliac trunk is divided into two fecondary arte- 
 ries, one external, the other internal ; the 
 former has no particular name, but the latter 
 is termed hypogallrica. 
 
 <L How is the external iliac diftributed ? 
 
 A. The external iliac on each fide runs 
 down on the iliac mufcle to the ligamentum 
 Fallopii, under which it goes out of the abdo- 
 men, and as it palTes under this ligament, it 
 detaches two confiderable branches one inter- 
 nal the other external. The internal branch is 
 named epigaftrica, and goes out anteriorly 
 from the external iliac 5 from thenee it runs 
 obliquely upward on the tendon of the tranf- 
 vefe mufcles, and to the pofterior and inner part 
 of the redus mufcle, fending ramifications 
 
 to 
 
 5 
 
DIALOGUES. 127 
 
 to the tendons of the neighbouring mufcles, 
 &c. and afterwards cummunicating with the 
 mammaria interna and intercotlalis inferior. 
 It fometimes gives out a branch accompanied 
 by a nerve to the triceps mufcles, &c. through 
 the foramen ovale. And another branch which 
 runs down to the tefticles along with the fper- 
 matic artery, and there communicates with it. 
 The outfide branch of the external iliac di- 
 vides in two at the internal labium of the os 
 ilium, where it divides into two, and is rami- 
 fied on the oblique and tranfverfe mufcles of 
 the abdomen, communicating with the arteria 
 lumbares. Befides thefe, a fmall twig goes off 
 internally to the vagina of the fperinatic rope, 
 and fometimes another from the outfide to the 
 os ilium. 
 
 Q. How is the hypogaflric or internal 
 iliac artery diftributed ? 
 
 A. The hypogaflric or internal iliaO, having 
 run about an inch and a half inward and back- 
 ward, bends by degrees, and ends in the umbi- 
 lical artery, which ought to be looked upon 
 as a true continuation of the trunk of the hy- 
 pogaflric. 
 
 How is the arteria umbilicalis diflri- 
 buted ? 
 
 A. The umbilical artery (as above) afcends 
 on the fide of the bladder, and being ramifi- 
 ed on that vifcus, and the neighbouring parts 
 of the peritonaeum, &c. it contradls, and in 
 adults is quite clofed up above the middle of 
 the bladder ; it likewife gives branches to the 
 Q 2 uterus 
 
228 ANATOMICAL 
 
 uterus, and to the neighbouring parts in 
 both fexes. Afterwards it afcends in form of 
 a ligament to the umbilicus, its name being 
 taken from its ufe in the foetus. 
 
 Which is the arteria iliaca minor ? 
 
 A. The iliaca minor arifes from the convex 
 fide of the curvature of the hypogaftrica, and 
 is the moft pofterior branch : it pafles between 
 the two lumbar nerves, and divides into two; one 
 branch goes to the canal of the os facrum, the 
 other to the iliac mufcle, and infide of the os ili- 
 um, giving twigs as it pafles to the pfoas mufcle, 
 Q:. Which is the arteria glutsea ? 
 
 A. The glutsea arifes alfo from the convex 
 fide of the curvature of the hypogaftric, is 
 commonly very confiderable, and fometimes the 
 largeft of all the hypogaftric branches : this 
 artery goes out of the pelvis in company with 
 the fciatic nerve, through the upper part of 
 the great finus of the os innominatum, and is 
 diftributed to the gluteus raaximus and me- 
 dius. In it paflage it gives branches to the os 
 facrum, os coccygis, mufculus pyramidalis, 
 mufcles of the anus, and to the neighbouring 
 parts of the inteftinum redlum, (forming a 
 particular hsemorrhoidalis interna) and to the 
 bladder and parts near it, and a pretty long 
 branch runs down with the fciatic nerve. 
 
 Which is the arteria fciatica ? 
 
 A. The arteria fciatica arifes near the glu- 
 tsea, and gives branches to the mufculus pyra- 
 midalis, quadragemini, os facrum, fciatic 
 nerve, os ilium, os ifehium, mufeuli gluta;i, 
 
 and 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 229 
 
 and a branch runs under the quadratus to the 
 articulation of the os femoris. 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria pudica ? 
 
 A. The pudica arifes alfo from the convex 
 fide of the curvature of the hypogaftric ; and 
 the firft principal branch called commonly pu- 
 dica interna, gives out two branches, the firft 
 goes through the great finus of the os ilium 
 with the glutaea and fciatica, and then divides 
 into two, one branch goes behind the fpine of 
 the ifchium all the way to the origin of the 
 corpus cavernofum penis. 
 
 There it divides into feveral arteries ; one 
 goes to the fphindor ani, named hremorrhoi? 
 dalis externa j the reft are diftributed to the 
 neighbouring integuments, to the bulb of the 
 urethra, and to the corpus cavernofum penis. 
 The fecond principal branch, commonly called 
 pudica externa, runs between the bladder and 
 inteftinum redtum, and in men is diftributed 
 to the veficulm feminales, neck of the bladder, 
 proftatse, and neighbouring part of the rec- 
 tum; it then runs under the os pubis on the 
 fide of a eonfiderable vein ; and along the pe- 
 nis between this vein and a nerve, being dif- 
 tributed in its paflage to the corpus caverno- 
 fum. Sometimes the pudica externa goes off 
 feparately from the hypogaftrica, efpecially in 
 women, being diftributed to the uterus, (where 
 it communicates with the fpermatic artery) and 
 to the neighbouring parts of the vagina, &c. 
 
 Which is the arteria obturatrix ? 
 
 0^3 A. The 
 
230 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The arteria obturatrix perforates the 
 obturator mufcles, from whence its name ; 
 it goes out of the pelvis at the upper part of 
 the ligament of the foramen ovale, having 
 iirfl: fent a fmall branch to the inguinal glands 
 and integuments. In its pafTage it fupplies 
 the pedineus and triceps mufcles, communi- 
 cates with the fciatica, which goes to the arti- 
 culation of the os femoris, and gives fmall 
 arteries to the holes in the neck of that bone. 
 What are the veins of the abdomen I 
 
 A. The veins of the abdomen are numer- 
 ous, and all proceed from the vena cava (the 
 vena portae excepted) and chiefly from the 
 vena cava inferior, which trunk, having run 
 down about a quarter of an inch from the 
 right auricle of the heart, within the pericar-; 
 dium (as I have already obferved) pierces that 
 membrane, and the tendinous portion of the 
 diaphragm, which adheres very clofely to each 
 other •, at this place it gives off the vens di- 
 aphragmaticre or phrenicte. In defcribing the 
 veins, I flrall begin by the great trunks, and 
 end by the ramifications in the method I have 
 before obferved. The veins of the abdomen 
 are, vense diaphragmaticte or phrenicae, hepa- 
 ticae, cyfticae gemell^, pylorica, gaftrica dex- 
 tra, corona,ria ventriculi, duodenafis vel intef- 
 tinalis, mefaraica, epiploica dextra, ctecalis, 
 haemorrhoidalis interna, fplenica, pancreaticae, 
 g^rica finiftra, gaftro-epiploica and epiploica 
 flniftra, vafa brevia ; venae renales, capfulares 
 ?t ad.ipofae, fpermatic^ lumbares, bilurcatio 
 
 ex 
 
dialogues. 
 
 231 
 
 CK vena cava, vena facra, venae iliac®, vena 
 iliaca externa, epigaftrica, hypogaftrica vel 
 iliaca interna, obturatrix, ven® hsmorrhoida- 
 les extern®. 
 
 Which are the ven® diaphragmatic® vel 
 phrenic® ? 
 
 A. The ven® diaphragmatic®, or phre- 
 nic® arife from the vena cava inferior, 
 where they pierce the midriff, are diftributed 
 to the diaphragm, and partly to the pericar- 
 dium ; and fometimes they fend branches to 
 the capful® renales, much in the fame manner 
 as the arteri® phrenic®. 
 
 Which are the vene® hepatic® ? 
 
 A. The vena port® is a large vein, the 
 trunk is fituated chiefly between the eminen- 
 ces on the lower or concave fide of the liver- 
 It may be confidered as made up of two large 
 veins joined almoft endways by their trunks, 
 from eaeh of which the branches go to the 
 right and left; but firft of all the trunk fends 
 off the ven® cyftic® gemell®, gaflrica dextra, 
 pylorica, ventriculi coronaria, duodenalis ok 
 inteftinalis. The firft portion of this trunk 
 known by, the name of vena port® I have already 
 fpoken of. The other portion is the hepatic®. 
 
 Q. Which are the ven® cyftic® gemell® ? 
 
 A. The cyftic® gemell® run along the vefi- 
 cula fellis from its neck to the bottom ; they 
 arife from the right fide of the great trunk 
 near its beginning. 
 
 Which is the vena pylorica ? 
 
 A. The pylorica arifes from the great trunk, 
 almoft oppofite to the origin of the cyftic® ; 
 
 Q 4 but 
 
2J2 ANATOMICAL 
 
 but fometimes it is only a branch of the right 
 gaftrica : it fupplies the ftomach and omen- 
 tum, and communicates with the gaftrica, co- 
 ronaria ventriculi, &c. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena coronaria ventri- 
 culi ? 
 
 A. The coronaria ventriculi, fo called be- 
 caufe it furrounds more or lefs the upper ori- 
 fice of the ftomach •, and in it paflage forms 
 numerous areolse on the Tides of the ftomach, 
 it communicates with the pylorica and the 
 veins of the great arch. 
 
 Which is the vena duodenalis ? 
 
 A. The duodenalis vel inteftinalis, goes out 
 from the great trunk near the cyfticas gemel- 
 1^. It is diftributed chiefly to the inteftinum 
 duodenum, but fends fome branches to the 
 pancreas. 
 
 Which is the vena mefaraica ? 
 
 A. The mefaraica arifes from the trunk of the 
 portae rear the pancreas, and turns to the right 
 hand ; it accompanies the fuperior mefenteric 
 artery and mefocolon which belong to the fmall 
 inteftines, the ctecum, and right portion of 
 the colon. One branch of the mefaraica runs 
 diredtly to the middle of the colon, where it is 
 arched to the right and left j another branch 
 divides in two, and fupplies the head of the 
 pancreas and the neighbouring parts, and is 
 arched on the right portion and upper part of 
 the colon. See vena epiploica. 
 
 Which is the vena epiploica dextra ? 
 
 A, The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 233 
 
 A. The trunk of the mefaraic fends out 
 fometimes a particular branch to the omentum 
 called epiploica dextra ; but the mefaraiac al- 
 moft immediately before it afcends over the 
 mefenteric artery, fend two large branches to 
 the jejunum and part of the ilium, which form 
 arches and areolte on thofe inteftines, like 
 thofe of the artery, and fends out branches al- 
 moft in the fame manner. 
 
 Q: Which is the vena cscalis ? 
 
 A. This branch is the mefaraic vein called 
 by Riolan ctecalis, arifes a little below the 
 origin of the fecond branch from the convex 
 fide, and fupplies the cscum, appendicula 
 vermiformis, and beginning or the colon. 
 
 Which is the vena hremorrhoidalis in- 
 terna r 
 
 A. The hsmorrhoidalis interna arifes from 
 the beginning of the mefaraica, fometimes from 
 the fplenica, and fometimes between both at 
 the bifurcation ; and is thus named from the 
 hasmorrhoidal tumors found often at its extre- 
 mity next the anus. It goes to the duodenum, 
 colon, and on the redlum, all the way to the 
 anus; and in its courfe fupplies the mefoco- 
 lon, and forms arches which fend out numer- 
 ous fmall ramifications round thele inteftines. 
 It feems likewife to communicate, by fome 
 capillary twigs, with the left fpermatic vein. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena fplenica ? 
 
 A. The fplenic vein is one of the great 
 branches of the port®, and turns to the left 
 hand, where the meferaiac does to the right ; 
 
 it 
 
234 ANATOMICAL 
 
 it runs tranfverfely from right to left, juH’ 
 tinder the duodenum, and along the lower tide 
 of the pancreas, and in its courfe gives off the 
 vena pancreaticm, gaflrica finiftra, or gaftro* 
 epiploica finiftfa and epiplocia finiftra. It ter- 
 minates afterwards by a winding courfe, being 
 divided into feveral branches that go to the 
 fpleen, one of v/hich produces the fmall veins 
 called by the ancients vafa brevia ; and at 
 laft the vena fplenica reaches the fifllire of the 
 fpleen, which it enters, and fupplies almoft 
 in the fame manner as the fplenic artery. 
 
 Q, Which are the venre pancreaticte ? 
 
 A. The vente pancreaticaj are feveral fmall 
 branches fent by the fplenica to the pancreas j 
 but there are other fmall pancreatic veins, 
 which do not arife from the fplenica, which I 
 have already fpoken of. 
 
 Which is the gaftrica finiftra, or gaftro- 
 eplploica finiftra? 
 
 A, This is alfo a branch of the fplenic 
 vain arifing at the left extremity of the pan- 
 creas, from whence it runs to the great extre- 
 mity of the ftomach, to which it gives feveral 
 branches, and communicates with the gaftrica 
 dextra, and coronaria ventriculi : at a fmall 
 diftance from its origin this gaftric vein fends 
 cut a branch v;hich is diftributed to the omen- 
 tum, from, whence the name of gaftro-epi- 
 ploica ? 
 
 Q, Which is the vena gaftro-epiploica, and 
 eniploica finiftra ? 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 235 
 
 A. The vena eplploica finiftra Is alfo a 
 branch of the fplenic, and arifes at the fmall 
 extremity of the pancreas, and is ramified on 
 the omentum all the way to the colon, where 
 it communicates with the hxmorrhoidalis in- 
 terna. 
 
 Q_. Which are the vafa brevia ? 
 
 A. From the poflerlor of the branches of 
 the fplenic vein, the veins are fent off to the 
 great extremity of the ftomach, formerly 
 known by the name of vafa brevia; which 
 communicate with the coronaria ventricuii, 
 and gaftrica finiftra. 
 
 Which are the venm renales ? 
 
 A. The vena cava inferior having got as 
 low as the arterite renales, gives off the veins 
 of the fame, name, (termed formerly yens 
 emulgentes) and which are the largeff of all 
 the veins that go from the cava inferior, from 
 the liver to the bifurcation. They accompany 
 the renal arteries, and are ramified in the fub- 
 ftanee of the kidneys. 
 
 Which are the venm capful ares ? 
 
 A. Tho venae capfulares et adipofae, arife 
 from the vens renales ; the former goes up- 
 wards to the glandulse renales, the latter down- 
 wards to the fatty coveiing of the kidneys. 
 
 Which are the venm fpermaticse ? 
 
 A. The right vena fpermatica comes from 
 the trunk of the cava inferior, a little below 
 the vente renales. The left comes common- 
 ly, though not always, from the left renalis ; 
 both veins accompany the fpermatic arteries. 
 
 In 
 
2s6 anatomical 
 
 In their paffage fmall branches are fent off to 
 the peritonsutn and melentery, and fome- 
 times a branch to the iliac mufcle and mem- 
 bra:) a adipofa oi the kidneys. 
 
 Q. Which are the vente lumbares ? 
 
 A. The ventE lumbares arife pofteriorly from 
 the vena cava inferior moft commonly in pairs, 
 in the fame manner as the arteriss lumbares, 
 but their origin often vary. They all com- 
 municate with one another, and fometimes 
 with the intercoftals. They fupply the fub- 
 flance of the bodies of the vertebrre, mufcles 
 of the abdomen, quadratus lumborum, pfoas, 
 iliacus, &c. they fend branches alfo back- 
 wards to the neighbouring vertebral ntufclcs, 
 and to the canal of the fpine, and communi- 
 cate with the venal linufes in the fame man- 
 ner as the intercoftals. 
 
 Q, Where is the bifurcation of the vena 
 cava ficuated ? 
 
 A. The vente cava inferior, having reach- 
 ed as low as the laH: vertebra of the loins, and 
 near the bifurcation of the aorta, runs in be- 
 hind the iliac artery, and is there divided into 
 two fubakern trunks, called the right and left 
 iliac veins, which lie on the infide of the iliac 
 arteries which form the bifurcation of the 
 vena cava. 
 
 Which is the vena facra ? 
 
 A. The vena facra goes out from the bifur- 
 cation of the vena cava, and often from the ori- 
 gin of the left iliaca, and accompanies thear- 
 Eeria facra to the os factum, to the nerves which 
 
 lie 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 237 
 
 iie there, and to the membranes which cover 
 both Tides of that bone. 
 
 VsHiich are the vens iliacre 
 
 A. The iliac veins r rife fronn the bifurcation 
 of the cava, as before mentioned, each original 
 iliac vein is divided on the Tide of the os fa- 
 crum, much in the fame manner as the ar- 
 teries, into two large trunks or fecondary iliac 
 veins. This fecond bifurcation is about a 
 finger’s breadth below that of the iliac arteries. 
 One of thefe trunks is named vena iliaca ex- 
 terna, or anterior, the other interna, or pofte- 
 rior. The external vein is likewife named 
 fimply iliaca, and the interal, hypogaftrica. 
 Thele veins follow nearly the courfe and di- 
 flribution of the iliac arteries, only the hy- 
 pogaftric does not fend off the vena umbili- 
 calis. Near this fecond bifurcation, a parti- 
 cular branch goes out, to the mufcu'us pfoas, 
 iliacus, andquadratus lumborum, and a branch 
 of it to the tranfverfe apophyfis of the loins. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena iliaca externa ? 
 
 A. The iliaca externa, a little before it 
 leaves the abdomen, near the ligamentum Fal- 
 lopii, lying on the pfoas and iliac mufcles, 
 gives off the fame branches as the external 
 iliac artery, and follows the fame courfe. See 
 vena epigaftrica, 
 
 Qc VVhich is the vena epigaffrica ? 
 
 A. The epigaftrica arifes from the infide of 
 the iliaca externa, before it leaves the abdo- 
 men, and is ramified on the neighbouring 
 conglobate glands and abdominal nmfcles, 
 3 com- 
 
^3^ ANATOMICAL 
 
 communicating with the ramifications of the 
 mammaria which accompanies the epigaftric 
 artery. From the inficJe of this vein a branch 
 is fotnetimcs cietacheci to the mufculus obtura- 
 tor internus, where it joins another branch 
 named vena obturatrix. 
 
 CL Which is the vena hypogaftrica ? 
 
 A. The vena hypogaftrica, or internal iliac 
 Vein, runs behind the artery of the fame name, 
 making the fame kind of arch, from which 
 branches go out to the cavity of the os fa~ 
 crum, through the firft and fecond great hole 
 of the os facrum to the neighbouring mufcles. 
 A large branch runs behind the great fciatic 
 finus to the mufculi glutmi pyramidalis and 
 gemclli. Another branch reaching the fora- 
 men ovale of the os inominatum, perforates 
 the obturator mufcles, from whence it is call- 
 ed vena obturatrix. 
 
 Q. How is the vena obturatrix diftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena obturatrix is difiributed to the 
 mufculus peftintEUS, triceps, and neighbour- 
 ing parts, communicating with the cruralis. 
 One branch of the obturatrix, before it perfo- 
 rates the mufcles, runs towards the fciatic fi- 
 lms to the iliac mufcle os ilium and part of 
 the obturator internus, another branch is di- 
 ilributed to the ureters, bladder, and internal 
 parts of generation in both fexes. It com- 
 municates with the fpermaric veins, and is 
 more confiderable in women than in men. 
 Laflly, the hypogaftric vein runs backward, 
 and as it goes out of the pelv.'s it is ramified 
 
 both 
 
dialogues, Z3P 
 
 both upward and downward * it fends a large 
 branch upward to the lower part of the os 
 facrum, and two more -downward, which go- 
 ing out of the pelvis are diftributed to the 
 buttocks, anus, part of the tnulculus pe£li- 
 neus, and to the external parts of generation, 
 nearly in the fame manner with the arterj 
 which accompanies them. 
 
 Which are the vens temorrhoidaks 
 extern® ? 
 
 A. The veins that go to the anus are 
 termed h®morrhoida!es extern®, and they 
 that go to the parts of generation, p.udic® iis- 
 tem®. The external h®morrhoidales com^ 
 municate with the internal veins of the fame 
 name. 
 
 How are the nerves of the abdomea 
 diftributed ? 
 
 A. The five pair of lumbar nerves allb 
 •communicate, and give poflerior branches 5 
 the firft pair fends fevera! branches to die ab- 
 dominal mufcles, pfoas, and iliacus, while o- 
 thers go from it to the teguments and molcles 
 on the fuperior and anterior part of the thigh, 
 and the main trunk of it is lofi in the cruraL 
 The fecond pair pafies through the pfoas muf- 
 cle, and is diftributed much as the fornso'. 
 The third is loft in the mufculus pediineus. 
 Branches proceeding from thefe three 
 make up one trunk, which fupplies the ante- 
 rior part of the pelvis, and going through die 
 foramen magnum oflis ifehii, is fpent on the 
 triceps mufcle. This nerve is commoa^ 
 
 known 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 24t5 
 
 known by the nanie of obturator, or pofteriof 
 crural nerve. By the union of branches, from 
 the firft, fecond, third, and fourth lumbar 
 nerves, the anterior crural nerve is formed. 
 The remainder of the fourth and fifth lumbar 
 nerves join with the firft, fecond, and third, 
 that proceed from the os factum (which are 
 five or fix pair). Thel'e two laft of the lum- 
 bar and three firft of the facrum, when unit- 
 ed, conftitute the largeft nerv-e in the body, lb 
 well known by the name of the fciatic or ifchi- 
 atic nerve. The other nerves that come out of 
 the os facrum, are fent to the organs of ge- 
 neration and adjacent parts. 
 
 Q. What glands are there In the abdomen ? 
 
 A. In the abdomen there are a very confi- 
 derable number of glands ; the largeft of them 
 is the pancreas, alter tliis, in fize come the 
 glandultc renales *, then the mefaraics ; and 
 the inteftinals (of Brunner andPeyer) in the in- 
 teftines •, all which 1 have already fpoken of; 
 the glands of the ftomach are lb fmall as not 
 eafily to be found. Near the receptaculum 
 cliyli, and above the os facrum, and the divifions 
 of the iliac veflels, are many glands of various- 
 fizes and figures, called lumbares, facrte, 
 iliacas, &c. and they have numerous lympha- 
 tics entering into them, and difcharging their 
 contents into the receptaculum chyii. The 
 lumbar glands have been fometimes found 
 fwelled to the bignefs of a man’s fift. In the 
 concave part of the liver, about the ingrefs 
 of the vena ports; and the neck of the gall 
 
 bladder. 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 241 
 
 bladder, as alfo about the fpleen, near the in- 
 grefs of the veffels, there are frequently found 
 conglobate glands, of about the bignefs of a 
 kidney bean ; thefe are called by authors, he- 
 patic glands, cyftic glands, or have other 
 names derived from the adjacent parts ; and 
 they feem to ferve the lymphatic veffels. A- 
 bout the left orifice of the ftomach, there 
 fometimes alfo is found, according toVercel- 
 lonius, a gland which he fays is equal to a kid- 
 ney-bean in fize ; he alfo fays that it has dudls 
 opening into the cavity of the ftomach ; in the 
 gall-bladder there are fometimes found a num- 
 ber of fmall glands of a yellow colour, not un- 
 like the ceruminofe glands in the auditory 
 paffage. The bladder and the ureters have 
 alfo fometimes a number of fmall glands, but 
 they are very indeterminate in number and 
 fize, and are not always indeed found in the 
 ■fame place, efpecially about the ureters. Thofe 
 about the bladder are ufually fituated towards 
 the neck of it, and are fometimes tolerably con- 
 fpicuous. The glands in the parts of gene- 
 ration of both fexes I lhall deferibe hereafter 
 with thofe parts. 
 
 DIALOGUE 
 
242 ANATOMICAL 
 
 DIALOGUE VI. 
 
 Of the Arm, and its Parts. 
 
 Q. T "i| f I"! at are the parts of the arm ? 
 
 'y y A. The arm comprehends the 
 whole limb or member from the top of the 
 llioulder to the finger’s ends ; to which you 
 may add the clavicle and fcapula, with the muf- 
 cles thereto belonging. The arm includes the 
 whole member, but the fore-arm is from the 
 elbow to the wrift only, the upper part of 
 the arm, which joins with the fcapula or fhouL 
 der- blade and clavicle, is termed humerus, 
 which extends to the bend of the arm, the 
 backfide of which is called the elbov/ or ole- 
 cranon, and the forefide or flexure, ancon ; 
 from thence toward the hand is called the fore- 
 arm or cubitus •, the end of which towards 
 the hand is the wrifl or carpus j between the 
 carpus and the fingers is the metacarpus, to 
 which is articulated, pollex, the thumb; index, 
 the forefinger ; digitus medius, the middle fin- 
 ger ; digitus arinularis, the ring finger ; and di- 
 gitus minimus, the little finger. 
 
 Q. What are the bones of the arm ^ 
 
 A. 'I'he bones of the arm, including the 
 fcapula, clavicle, hand and fingers, are thirty^ 
 two, (befides the fefamoidal bones, whofe num- 
 ber is uncertain,) viz. fcapula, clavicula, hu- 
 merus, ulna, radius, each one ; carpus, eight ; 
 
 metacarpus 
 
D I A I, O G U E S. 
 
 243 
 
 metacarpus, four 5 phalanges of the fingers 
 and thumb, fifteen ; as may be feen at one view 
 in the t; bie of ofteology. 
 
 Q. Which is the clavicula ? 
 
 A. T he clavicula is fituated tranfverfely on 
 each fide, between the fcapula and fternum, 
 its figure is fomewhac like that of the letter S, 
 and it is of a fpongy and brittle fubfiance. 
 One end is connedled to the fternum with a 
 loofe cartilage, and the other to the proceflus 
 acromion of the fcapula. The ufes of the 
 clavicles are, to keep the fcapuire at a fuflici- 
 ent diftance from the break:, by v,'hich means 
 the fhouklers are hindered from coming near 
 together, as they do in thofe quadrupeds which 
 ufe their four- limbs only to walk on, and not 
 as men do their hands ; to facilitate feveral 
 of the motions of the arm •, to ferve for the 
 place of origin for feveral mufcles ; and to 
 defend the great fubclavian vcfTels which run 
 under them. 
 
 O. Which is the fcapula? 
 
 A. The fcapula, or fhoulder-blade, is a 
 triangular bone, fituated on the back and out^ 
 fide of the ribs, and commonly extended from 
 the fecond to the feventh. It is fixed to the 
 fternum by the clavicula, to the ribs and fpine 
 by the mufcles of thofe parts j its outfide is a 
 little convex, and its infide fomewhat concave, 
 to fit it to the outer furface of the ribs on 
 which it moves, and partly to give room for 
 the lubfcapiilaris mufcle. The fcapula has 
 three procefies, the firfl runs all along the 
 R % middle 
 
244 ANATOMICAL 
 
 middle of their outfide, and is called their 
 fpine •, that end of the fpine which receives 
 the extremity of the clavicula is called the pro- 
 cefius acromion. The fecond procefs is a lit- 
 tle lower than the acromion ; it is fhort and 
 fharp like a crow’s bill, whence it is called co- 
 racoides *, thefe two proceffes are tied to each 
 ocher by a ftrong flat ligament, which ferves 
 to keep the head of the humerus in the cavity 
 of the third procefs, and prevents its being 
 difiocated upwards. It has a round firms tipt 
 about its brim with a cartilage, which recedves 
 the head of the humerus *, at the fore-part of 
 this edge, clofe to the coracoid procefs, is a 
 femicircu'ar nitch for the paflage of blood 
 veffels, which nitch is joined at the top with 
 a ligament, and fometimes with a bone. The 
 ufe of the fcapula is to receive the extremities 
 of the clavicula and humerus, for the eafier 
 motion of the arm, and to give rife to the 
 rnufcles which move the arm. 
 
 Q. Which is the os humeri? 
 
 A. The os humeri is the large bone of the 
 arm, fituated between the (lioulder and the 
 cubit, articulated at one end with the fcapula, 
 and at the other with the ulna and radius. Its 
 upper end or head, where it is joined to the 
 fcapula, is fomewhat flat, and much larger 
 than the focket which receives it. At the up- 
 per part are two proceffes for the infertions of 
 the rnufcles of the arms ; between thefe pro- 
 ceffes is a long channel or groove, in which 
 lies a tendon of the biceps cubiti. At the 
 4 lower 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 245 
 
 lower end are two con fide rable procelTes, both 
 formed to give origins to mufcles of the 
 wrift and fingers ; between thefe proceflTes is 
 the joint. 1 hac part to which the upper end 
 of the radius is fixed, is fitted not only for 
 the motion of the elbov/, but alfo for the 
 rotatory motion of the radius ; the reft of 
 this joint is made up of portions of uneqal, 
 but concentric circles, like the flianks of qua- 
 drupeds ; which inequality prevents the ulna 
 from difiocating fideways, which fo fmall a 
 joint with fo much motion would be very fub- 
 je6l to. Of a like ufe is the little finus on 
 the forepart of the humerus, and the large 
 one behind •, the firft of which receives a pro- 
 cefs of the ulna when the arm is bent, and the 
 other the olecranon, when the arni is extend- 
 ed. The 03 humeri has evidently the moft 
 free and esttenfive motion of any bone in the 
 human-body. 
 
 Q. Which is the ulna ? 
 
 A. The ulna is one of the bones of the fore 
 arm or cubit •, reaching from the elbow to the 
 wrift ; it is big at its upper extremity, and 
 grows gradually fmaller towards its lower end. 
 This bone is longer than the radius, and has 
 a motion of flexion and extenfion : at its up- 
 per extremity it articulates with the os hu- 
 meri and the criftaof the radius, and its lower 
 extremity articulates with the carpus, as alfo 
 v/ith the radius by means of a cnfta. At 
 the upper end it has one large procefs or apo- 
 phyfis called olecranon, and a fmall procefs 
 R 3 on 
 
24^ Anatomical 
 
 on the fore part, and on one fide between therd 
 is alfo a fmjll cavity, which receives the up- 
 per end of the radius for its rotatory motion j 
 and down the fide of this bone, next the ra^ 
 dius, is a fnarpe edge, from w'hich the liga- 
 ment arifes which connedts thefe bones toge- 
 ther. At the lower end is a procefs called fty- 
 liformis, and a round head, which is received 
 into the radius for the rotatory motion of the 
 cub't. 
 
 Cb Which is the radius ? 
 
 A. The radius is the exterior bone of the 
 tubitus dr fore-arm, accompanying the ulna 
 from the elbow to the wrift. Jn its upper 
 extremity there is a glenoide cavity for its 
 articulation with the humerus, which chiefly 
 fits it for its rotatory motion, being alfo re- 
 ceived into the ulna ; for the ftrength of the 
 elbow-joint receives but little advantage from 
 the union of thefe two bones. A little belowthis 
 head is a large tubercle, into which the biceps 
 mufcle is inferted, which by the advantage of 
 this infertion turns the cubit fupihe, as well as 
 bends it. At the lower end, which is thicker, is 
 a focket to receive the carpus, and at the fide 
 next the ulria a fmall one to receive that bone, 
 and a thin edge, into which the tranfverfe li- 
 gament, which arifes from the ulna is infert- 
 ed : this ligament ties thefe bones convenient- 
 ly and firmly together ; for the ulna being 
 chiefly articulated to the os humeri, and the 
 radius to the carpus, a weight at the hand, 
 
 without 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 247 
 
 ■^vithout this ligament, would be liable to pull 
 thefe bones afunder. 
 
 CL What is the carpus ? 
 
 A. The carpus or wrift, confuds of eight 
 fmall, unequal, and irregular bones, divided 
 into two rows, each row confids of four bones; 
 in the firft, are the os fcaphoides or navlcu- 
 lare, lunare, cuneiforme, and orbiculare ; in 
 the fecond are the os trapezium, trapezoides, 
 magnum and unciforme. They have ai! ob- 
 fcure motions one with another, and with thofe 
 of the fecond is more confiderable, and they 
 are moved by the fame mufcles which move 
 the carpus on the radius. 
 
 CL What is the metacarpus ? 
 
 A. The metacarpus is that part of the hand 
 between the wrill and the fingers ; the inner 
 part is called the palm, and the other the back 
 of the hand. I'he metacarpus confifts of four 
 bones, which anfwer to the four fingers, 
 whereof that which fuftains the fore finger is 
 the biggeft and longed, but has the leall mo- 
 tion, and that of the little finger the mod. 
 They are all round and long, a little convex 
 towards the back of the hand, and concave 
 and plain towards the palm. They are hol- 
 low in the middle, and full of marrow ; they 
 touch one another only at their extremitie.s, 
 having fpaces in the middle in which lie the 
 mufculi interoffei. In the upper end of thefe 
 bones there is a finus which receives the bones 
 of the wrift; the other ends have round heads, 
 R 4 which 
 
24 ? ANATOMICAL 
 
 which are received into the finus of the firfl 
 bones of the fingers. 
 
 How are the fingers diftinguilhed and 
 compofed ? 
 
 A. The fingers are four in number oh 
 each hand, exciufive of the thumb, viz. i. 
 index, the fore-finger ^ 2. medius, the mid- 
 dle finger; 3. annularis, the ring-finger; 4. 
 minimus vel auricularis, the little finger. In 
 the thumb and fingers are three bones, which 
 make three phalanges, the upper of which 
 (next the metacarpus) are much larger than 
 the lov/er, next the extremities. Thefe bones, 
 on the infide, are fiat and a little hollow or 
 concave, which is neceflary to make room for 
 the flexors of the fingers, and to render their 
 fhape proper for grafping any thing. The 
 thumb is fhorter and itronger than any of the 
 fingers, becaufe in its adlions it is to refifl them 
 all. The firfl; phalanx, in the part where they 
 are articulated with the bones of the metacar- 
 pus at their heads, have a glenoide cavity, by 
 means of which articulation, they have a free 
 motion every way. In the other extremity 
 there are two heads with two cavities joined to 
 the fecond phalanx^ where the motions of 
 flexion and extenfion are all that are poffible ; 
 and the fame is the cafe between the fecond 
 phaknx and the third. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the arm ? 
 
 A. The cartilages of the arm, are thofe of 
 the bones of the fhoulder, os humeri, fore-arm, 
 and hand. 
 
 Q. What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 249 
 
 What are the cartilages of the bones 
 of the (houlder ? 
 
 A. The glenoide cavity of the fcapula, which 
 receives the fuperior head of the os humeri, 
 is covered with a cartilage, which is a little 
 raifed above the edge of the bone, it is of a 
 pliable (lippery fubftance, yet fometJiing dif- 
 ferent from that of a cartilage, refeinbling in 
 fome meafure the border of the acetabuiutn 
 coxendix. The acromion has alfo a fmail car- 
 tilaginous furface ■, and the external extremity 
 of the clavicle is crulled over with a cartilage, 
 which is a little convex, and covers its whole 
 triangular furface ; befides which it lias ano- 
 ther moveable common cartilage already I'pok- 
 en of. The fmail cartilaginous furface of the 
 humeral extremity of the clavicle, anfwering 
 to that of the acromion, is, like that of the 
 acromion, a little convex. Between thefe two 
 cartilages of the clavicle and acromion, there 
 is in fome fubjefts a t‘.in inter-articular carti- 
 lage, very fmooth on both Tides. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the os hu- 
 meri ? 
 
 A. The cartilage by which the hemifphere 
 of the head of the os humeri is covered, is 
 gradually thicker towards the middle than to- 
 ward the edges. The groove in the os humeri 
 is covered by a cruft, which is partly ligamen- 
 tary and partly tendinous rather than carti- 
 laginous. The lovver head of the os humeri 
 is covered by a common cartilage, and its fof- 
 
 fulae 
 
250 ANATOMICAL 
 
 fula; near the head with a thin cartilaginous ot" 
 ligamentary varnifh. 
 
 What are the cartilages of the fore^ 
 
 arm ? 
 
 A, The two figmoide cavities in the upper 
 extremity of the ulna are covered by a carti- 
 lage common to both. The iov;er head of the 
 ulna is crufted over by a cartilage •, the head 
 of the radius is covered in the fame mannen 
 All the concave fide of the bafis of the radius 
 is cartilaginous, and often divided by a fmall 
 cartilaginous prominent line. At the bafis of 
 the radius there is likewife a particular additi- 
 onal cartilage, or triangular produdion longer 
 than it is broad, wery thin, and rather fiat than 
 concave on both its fmooth Tides. 1 his car- 
 tilage may be termed the inter-articular carti- 
 lage of the joint of the wrift. It is tied to the 
 radius by very fhort ligaments, and fiiding on 
 the fmall head of the uina, 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the hand ? 
 
 A. All the bones of the carpus, metacarpus, 
 and fingers, are crulted over with cartilages 
 at their ends for their mutual articulations, 
 which miay be termed cartilaginous furfaces, 
 in which the imprefiions and notches where the 
 mucilaginous glands are lodged are very per- 
 ceptible. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the arm ? 
 
 A. The ligam.ents of the arm are thofe of 
 the bones of the fhoulder, os humeri, fore- 
 arm, and hand. 
 
 2 
 
 What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 25! 
 
 Qj_ What are the ligaments of the lliou!- 
 der ? 
 
 A. The articulation of the acromion with 
 the extremity of the clavicle, is ftrengthened 
 quite round by feveral fmall ilrong ligaments, 
 which go from one bone to the other. Thefe 
 ligaments lie very near each other, and are 
 withal fo tightly braced over the joint as to 
 hide it altogether, and they appear more like 
 a cartilaginous covering than a ligamenrary 
 texture. The internal furface of thefe liga-' 
 ments is lined with the capfula of the joint. 
 When the fmall inter^articular cartilage is 
 found, its whole circumference is connected to 
 thefe ligaments. I he articulation of the cla- 
 vicle with the fternum is fuftained by feveral 
 ligaments fixed by one end round the pedforal 
 extremity ot the clavicle, and by the ether to 
 the fternum, as before obferved. There is a 
 long, narrow, ftrong ligament, W'hich goes 
 from one clavicle to the other, behind the fur- 
 ca of the fternum, and may be called the in- 
 ter-clavicular ligament. The neck of the fca- 
 pula, at a fmall diftance from the edge of the 
 glenoide cavity, gives infertion to the capfu- 
 lar ligament or mucilaginous bag, and to the 
 articular ligaments of the joint of the fcapula 
 and os humeri. Befidesthe articular ligaments 
 of the fcapula, there are three ligamentary 
 cords fixed to the tuberofity of the coracoide 
 apophyfis, two are inferred by the other end 
 in the extremity of the clavicle, and the third 
 under the acromion. A thin broad ligament 
 
 alfo 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 452 
 
 alfo reaches between the crifta of the fpine of 
 the fcapula and the edge of its inferior coila. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the os hu- 
 meri ? 
 
 A. The capfuiar or mucilaginous licament 
 loofcly furrounds the whole articulation of the 
 fcapula, with the head of the os humeri ; from 
 its inferticn round the edge of the glenoide ca- 
 vity, already mentioned, it is continued over 
 the hemilphere of the head of the os humeri, 
 and fixed near its edges towards the mufcular 
 fui faces of tlie great and ftpall tuberofities or 
 proceffes. Afterwards it runs down gradual- 
 ly on the neck of the bone below the lowelt 
 part of the cartilaginous hemifphere, and is 
 clofely fixed in tlie bone, except in the groove 
 or channel already mentioned, in which lies 
 the tendon of the biceps cubiti. The true li- 
 gament of this joint feems to be made up of 
 two forts of ligaments clofely united together, 
 viz. a capfuiar ligament which furrounds the 
 whole articulation ; and fevtral true ligaments 
 which run over, and clofely adhere to the 
 former at different dillances. On the body of 
 the os humeri there are two long, flat, thin, 
 If long and narrow ligaments, fixed by one edge 
 along the two lower thirds of the bone reach- 
 ing to both condyles. The loveer extremity 
 ct the os humeri is joined to the b nesofthe 
 fore-arm, by tv/o taiciculi of ligamentary fi- 
 bres, one fixed to the inner condyle, the other 
 to the external. The capfuiar ligament is 
 fixed to the condyles, and thefe cover them 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 253 
 
 and afterwards it is fixed round both fides of 
 this lower extremity above the foflulte, which 
 fofiulEe are only (lightly varnifhed over with a 
 cartilaginous fubfiance. 
 
 What are the ligaments of the fore- 
 arm ? 
 
 A. Some of the ligaments of the bones of 
 the fore-arm are common to them with the os 
 humeri, fome common to them with the bones 
 of the hand, and fome are proper. The two 
 proper are the interofleous ligament of the fore- 
 arm, and one which may be termed the coro- 
 nary ligament of the radius. To thefe may 
 be added the annular ligaments, which only 
 ferve for the paffage of tendons j and other li- 
 gamentary expanlions, which may be called 
 mufcular ligaments, and fhall refer a defcrip- 
 tion of them till I come to fpeak of the muf- 
 cles. ' The interofieous ligament of the fore- 
 arm is very like that of the leg •, it ties the ul- 
 na and radius clofely together, and ferves for 
 the infertion of feveral mufcles. In it are holes 
 for the paffage of the blood-veffels. The 
 capfular ligament of the joint of the elbow 
 runs down from its infertion in the os humeri 
 (already mentioned) and is fixed in the olecra- 
 non, round the edge of the great figmoide 
 cavity ; it likewife runs over the head of the 
 radius, and is fixed to the coronary ligament 
 quite round. Thus it completely furrounds 
 the articulation of thefe three bones, and ferves 
 to contain the mucilaginous liquor furn fhed 
 by the glands and fatty fubrtance, both which 
 
 arc 
 
254 ANATOMICAL 
 
 are found in the greatefl.' quantities near the ex- 
 tremity of the ulna. The true common liga- 
 ments by which the os humeri is connedfed to 
 the bones of the fore-arm, called lateral liga- 
 ments, are the two fafciculi, which after being 
 inferted in the condyles of the os humeri are 
 expanded like a goofe’s foot. Of the liga- 
 ments by which the ulna and radius are con- 
 nedted to thofe of the hand, one is like a 
 roundifh cord, fixed in the ftyloide apophyfis 
 of the ulna, and in the os cuneiforme and 
 bones of the carpus. Ail thefe ligaments fur- 
 round and cover the capfular ligament lb clofe- 
 ly that they can hardly be diftinguifhed from 
 it. The capfula is likewife in part covered by 
 a portion of a great oblique ligament, which 
 is fixed by a very broad infertion in the large 
 extremity of the radius, and paffing obliquely 
 is inferted into the os orbiculare. It is called 
 the external tranfverfe ligament of the carpus i 
 and may likewife be named the great oblique 
 ligament of the wrift. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the hand? 
 
 A. d he ligaments of the carpus are very 
 numerous. Some of them tie each bone to 
 one or two neighbouring bones in the fame 
 rank, but are fo very Ihort as to allow thefe 
 bones only a fmall degree of motion. Some 
 of them tie the bones of one row to thofe of 
 the other, but they are not fo Ihort as the 
 former, and therefore they allow thefe bones a 
 more manifeft morion, as we fee in bending 
 the wilfi:. L aftly, there are other ligaments 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 255 
 
 of the carpus, by which the three fird bones 
 of the firft rov/ are conne6led to the bones ot 
 the fore-arm ; and to thefe may be added the 
 ligaments by which the bones of the fecond 
 row are joined to thofe of the metacarpus and 
 firft phalanx of the thumb. The principal li- 
 gaments belonging to the articulation of the 
 carpus with the bones of the fore -arm, I have 
 already mentioned, except their infertion in 
 the carpus, which is thus : the flyloide liga- 
 ment of the radius is fixed to the os fcaphoicles 
 vel naviculare •, and the flyloide ligament of 
 the ulna is fixed fird in the os cuneiforme, and 
 then in the os unciforme, from whence it is a 
 little dretched over the fourth bone of the me- 
 tacarpus. The ligaments which lie between 
 the two former, go from the radius and ulna 
 to the three fird carpal bones, and the mucila-^ 
 ginous capfula, by which thefe ligaments are 
 lined are allb fixed to thefe bones. There is 
 likewife a conliderable ligament, called the in- 
 ner tranfvcrfe ligament, formerly called an an- 
 nular ligament. 
 
 The bones of the metacarpus, befides the 
 fijort ligaments by which they are tied to the 
 fecond row of the bones of the carpus, have 
 feveial others, by which both their bafes and 
 heads are connedled together The bafes of 
 the third and fourth bones are not fo clofely 
 tied as the red, and therefore they have a very 
 fenfible motion, which, however, is greater in 
 the fourth than in the third. The heads of 
 thefe bones are firmly tied to each other by 
 
 a drong 
 
256 ANATOMICAL 
 
 a flrong tranfveiTc; ligament, fituated in the 
 palm of the hand, through which the tendons 
 of the flexor mulcles of the fingers have a free 
 paffage. The firtf phalanx of the thumb and 
 fingers is fixed by fliort ligaments that pafs ob- 
 liquely over the articulation with the metacar- 
 pal bones. The fecond phalanx of the thumb 
 is joined to the firfl: by ligaments of the fame 
 kind. The other phalanges are joined by 
 lateral ligaments almolt in the fame manner 
 as the bones of the fore-arm to the os hume- 
 ri. The two firft phalanges of each finger 
 have very ftrong ligamentary vagins inferted 
 in the touch ridges on their flat fides. Thefe 
 vaginae are lined with a mucilaginous mem- 
 brane, which runs like a tube from one pha- 
 lanx to the other, over the arfculation. 
 
 What are the mufcles of the arm ? 
 
 A. The mufcles of the arm and its parts 
 include thofe of the clavicle, fcapula, and 
 bteaff, which belong thereto, tho’ fituated on 
 the fuperior part of the trunk j for this reafon 
 1 omitted their defeription in deferibing thofe 
 of the thorax. They are as follow, viz. fub- 
 clavius, trapezius, rhomboides, elevator fca- 
 pulm, ferratus major et minor anticus, pe6lo- 
 ralis, delcoida, fuprafpinatus, infrafpinatus, 
 teres minor et major, latifllmus dorfi, fub- 
 Icapularis, coraco-brachialis, biceps cubiti flex- 
 or, brachlicus internus, fupinator radii longus 
 et brevis ; triceps extenfor cubiti, anconasus, 
 pahnaris longus, et brevis ; flexor carpi radi- 
 aliset ulnar is, extenfores carpi radiales, extenfor 
 
 ulnari$9 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 257 
 
 ulnarlsj pronatorquadratiis, et teres, perforatus, 
 perforans, lumbricales, extenfordiiitorum com- 
 munis, minimi digiti,.extenfor indicis, abdudtor 
 primi digiti interoffmi, minimi digiti offis, .me- 
 tacarpi minimi digiti, extenior primi I’ecundi 
 et tertii internodii pollicis, flexor primi et 
 fecundi oflis pollicis, flexor tercii internodii 
 pollicis, abdudior pollicis. 
 
 Which is the mulculus fubclavius ? 
 
 A. The mufcLilus fubclavius is a flriali ob- 
 long mufcle lying between the clavicle and 
 firft rib ; it arifes from the fu.perior part of 
 the firfl: rib, and is inferted into almolt all the 
 middle portion of tire under fide of the clavi- 
 cula. Its ufe is to draw the clavicula toward 
 the fternum, that it may not be fevered in 
 the motions of the fcapula, 
 
 Q. Which is the trapezius ? 
 
 A. The trapezius, vel cucullaris, is a mufcle 
 of the fcapula, which arii'esfrom theos occipitisj, 
 and from alineaalbavel ligamentum colli, frum 
 thefpinal procefs of the lalt vertebra of the neck, 
 and the ten uppermoft of the back, and from a 
 linea alba between all thefe proceflTes it is iniert- 
 ed into one third of the clavicle next the fcapula, 
 almoft all the back part of the fpine of the fcapu- 
 la, and as much of the proceflus acromion as lies 
 between the fpine of the fcapula and the clavi- 
 cle. This mufcle draws the fcapula diredtly 
 backward. 
 
 Q. Which is the rhomboides ? 
 
 A. The rhomboides is a thin, broad, and 
 obliquely fquare, fiefhy mufcle, fituated be- 
 S tween 
 
258 ANATOMICAL 
 
 tween the bafis of the fcapula and the fpina 
 dorfi. It arifeth from the fpinal procefs of the 
 two inferior vertebrse of the neck, and the 
 four fuperiorof the back-, and is inferted into 
 the whole bafis of the fcapula, which it draws 
 up and backward. 
 
 Q. Which is the elevator fcapulte ? 
 
 A. The elevator fcapulse is a long and pret- 
 ty thick mufcle, about two fingers breadth, it 
 arifes from the tranfverfe apophyfes of the four 
 brft vertebra of the neck, and running a lit- 
 tle obliquely, is inferred into the upper angle 
 of the fcapula for its elevation. 
 
 Q. Which is the fcrratus major anticus ? 
 
 A. The ferratus major anticus is a broad, 
 flefhy, and pretty thick mufcle, fituated on the 
 lateral part of the thorax, between the ribs and 
 the fcapula, by which it is covered. It arifes by 
 dentated origins (refembling a faw, from whence 
 the name of ferratus) from the anterior part of 
 the eight fuperior ribs, and is inferted into the 
 bafis of the fcapula, which it draws forward and 
 upward. This mufcle is an elevator of the 
 ribs. 
 
 Q. Which is the ferratus minor anticus ? 
 
 A. The ferratus minor anticus, vel pedto ra- 
 ils minor, arifes from the third, fourth, and 
 fifth ribs, continues its courfe under the pedlo- 
 ralis major, and is inferred into the proceffus 
 coracoides fcapulse, which it pulls forward and 
 downward. This is alfo an elevator of the 
 ribs. 
 
 Ml 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 259 
 
 All the rnufcles inferted into the balls of 
 the fcapula are alfo inferted into one another. 
 
 What is the mufculus pedtoralis ? 
 
 A. The pedloralis, (by fome called peftora- 
 lis major) poiTeffes almoft the whole breall, 
 being a large, thick, flefhy mufcie, covering 
 the fore part of the breaft, from the llernum, 
 where it is very broad, to the axilla,- where it 
 contradls in its pallage to the arm. it arifes 
 from near two thirds of the clavicnla, next 
 the fternum, and all the length of the os pec- 
 toris, and from the cartilages of the ribs ; and 
 is inferted into the os humeri about four fin 
 gers breadth below its head, between the bi- 
 ceps and the infertion of the deltoides. The 
 ufe of it is to draw the arm forward. 
 
 A fmall portion of the lower part of this 
 mufcie is often confounded with the obliquus 
 defcendens abdominis; in fome bodies neither 
 the upper part nor its tendon can be eafily fe- 
 paratcd from the deltoides ; and in orhers, even 
 that part of it that arifes from the clavicula is 
 a diftincf portion, 
 
 W^hich is the deltoides 
 A, The deltoides is a very thick, triangular 
 mufcie, covering the upper part of the arm, 
 and forming what is called the ftump of the 
 fhou'der. It is one of the elevators of the arm. 
 It arifes from the clavicula, acromion, and 
 fpine of the fcapuia, and is inferted near the 
 middle of the os humeri, which- bone it lifts 
 diredliy upward. 
 
 S 2 
 
 4 
 
 Q. W'hich 
 
2 (So ANATOMICAL 
 
 Q. Which is the fupra fpinatus ? 
 
 A. The I'upra fpinatus, vel fupe'rfcapularis 
 fupei ior, arifes from the dorfum fcapulse, above 
 the fpine, and pafTes between the acromion and 
 neck of the fcapula, and under the ligament 
 between the acromion and proceffus coracoides. 
 It is inferted into the upper part of the os hu- 
 meri, near its groove, or bony channel. It helps 
 to lift the arm upwards, until it becomes pa- 
 rallel with the fpina IcapuItE. 
 
 1 he fupra fpinatus deltoides and coraco- 
 brachialis, affift in all the motions of the hu- 
 merus, except depreffion ; it being necefiary 
 that the arm fnould be raifed and fuftained, in 
 order to move it to any fide. 
 
 Q. Which is the infra fpinatus ? 
 
 A. The infra fpinatus, vel fupcrfcapularis 
 inferior, arifes from the dorfum fcapulse be- 
 low the fpine, and is inferted, wrapping over 
 part of it, at the fide of the head of the os 
 hufneri •, it turns the arm fupine and backward. 
 Which is the teres minor ? 
 
 The teres minor is an abdudlor mufcle, 
 as well as the infra fpinatus, below which it 
 has its origin from the inferior cofta of the 
 fcapula, and is inferred together with the infra 
 fpinatus, which it afnfts in turning the arm 
 fupine, but pulls it more downwards. 
 
 Q. Wliich is the teres major? 
 
 A. The teres major is a deprelTor mufcle, 
 which has its origin at the lower angle of the 
 fcapula, and is ini'erted at the under part of the 
 os humeri about three fingers breadth from the 
 head. This mufcle draws the os humeri to- 
 ward 
 
DIALOGUES. 261 
 
 \vard the lower angle of the fcapula, and turns 
 the arm prone and backward. 
 
 Which is the latifhmus dorfi ? 
 
 A. The latiflimus dorfi is a very broad muf- 
 cle, covering almoft the whole back ; it has a 
 thin broad tendinous beginning, which ariTcs 
 from the fpinal procefifes of the ilium, os fa- 
 crum, vertebra of the loins, and from the 
 feven inferior vertebrae of the thorax. It iS 
 inferred into the os humeri with the teres m.a- 
 jor, by a ftrong and broad tendon, with which 
 it pulls the arm downward and backward. 
 
 Which is the fubfcapularis ? 
 
 A. The fubfcapularis is a mufcle of the 
 fame breadth and length with the fcapula, fil- 
 ling up the hollow or under fide of it (whence 
 its name) from which it arifes, and is inferred 
 into the neck of the os humeri, wrapping fome- 
 what over it. This mufcle pulls the arm to 
 the fide and prone. 
 
 Q. Which is the coraco-hrachialis ? 
 
 A. The coraco-brachialis arifes from the 
 proceflus coracoides fcapulae, and pafTing over 
 the articulation, is infertedinto the middle and 
 internal part of the humerus ; this, with the 
 deltoides and fuprafpinatus, lifts the arm up-= 
 wards, and turns it fomewhat outward. 
 
 Q. Which is the biceps cubiti flexor ? 
 
 A. The biceps cubiti flexor arifes with two 
 heads, that the fibres of this mufcle fhould 
 not comprefs one another. One head arifes with 
 a long, round tendon, from the upper edge of 
 ?he acetabulum fcapulae, running under the 
 S 3 ligranens 
 
26 z anatomical 
 
 ligament of the articulation, in a channel of 
 groove on the head of the'lhoulder-bone, (be- 
 fore-mentioned,) wherein it is inclofed by a 
 proper ligament, afterwards it becomes fleflay,. 
 and joins the other head, which arifes from the 
 proctfTus coracoides fcapulse, in common with 
 the cor<,cc-brachialis mufcle, and is inferted 
 vdth the firil head into the tubercle, at the 
 upper head of the radius. Sometimes this 
 mufcle has a third head, which arifes from the 
 middle of the os humeri. This mufcle lifts 
 up the humerus, bends the cubit, and has as 
 great a fhare as any one mufcle in turning the 
 cubit fupine ; the humerus being fixed by. 
 other mufeies, the whole force of this mufcle 
 will be exerted upon the cubit, or the cubit 
 being fixed by an extenfor, the whole force of 
 it will be fpent in raifing the arm, and there- 
 fore ought to be always reckoned among thofe 
 that raife a weight at arm’s length. 
 
 The tendinous expanfion of this mufcle, in 
 the flexure of the cubits, is fometimes prick- 
 ed in bleeding f'by injudicious operators,) which 
 generally occafions a moft violent pain and in- 
 flammation, and has been attended wich fatal 
 confequences. The greatmifehief arifing from 
 pricking this tendinous fafeia, feems owing to 
 its lyingTo much upon the ftretch, which may 
 be wliolly avoided by bending the elbow and 
 turning the cubit. 
 
 CX V\ hich is the brachiaeus internus ? 
 
 A. The brachiteus internus lies partly under 
 the biceps, and arifes from the internal part 
 
 and- 
 
dialogues. 263 
 
 and below the middle of the os humeri, near 
 the infertion of the dekoides, and coraco-bra- 
 chialis mufcles j it is inferred in the tubercle 
 of the ulna, a little below its upper head. This 
 mufcle helps alfo to bend the arm. 
 
 Which is the fupinator radii longus ? 
 
 A. The fupinator radii longus has its ori- 
 gin from the exterior part of the humerus, 
 and is inferred into the upper fide of the ra- 
 dius near the carpus. This mufcle, fome fay, 
 is not a fupinator, but a bender of the cubit. 
 
 Which is the fupinator radii brevis ? 
 
 A. The fupinator radii brevis, arifes from 
 the lower part of the external condyle of the 
 os humeri, and from the upper part of the 
 ulna, and is inferred near the tubercle of the 
 radius. This mufcle ferves alfo to turn the 
 palm of the hand upward, and to bend the 
 cubit. 
 
 Which is the triceps extenfor cubiti vel 
 brachimus externus ? 
 
 A. The triceps extenfor cubiti is divided 
 into three heads. The firft arifes from the in- 
 ferior cofta of the fcapula near the acetabu- 
 lum j the fecond, from the outer and back 
 part of the os humeri; the third, lower and 
 more internal ; and are inferred into the pro- 
 cefiTus olecranon of the ulna. The firft of 
 thefe heads draws the arm backward. 
 
 Which is the anconseus ? 
 
 A. The anconsus arifes from the back part 
 of the extremities of the humerus, paffes over 
 the elbow, and is inferred into the upper part 
 S 4 ©f 
 
264 ANATOMICAL 
 
 of the ulna. This mufcle is alfo an extenfor 
 of the cubit. 
 
 CX Which is the palmaris longus ? 
 
 A. The pa'maris iongus arifes from the in- 
 ner condyle of the os humeri ; it foon after 
 becomes a tendon, joins the ligamentum tranf- 
 verfale carpi,, and is expanded in the palm of 
 the hand This mufcle is often wanting, but 
 the expanfion in the hand never ; yet being 
 connected to the ligament of the carpus, it 
 mull: bend the carpus, and cannot conftri($l 
 the palm of the hand. 
 
 Q. W hich is the palmaris brevis ? 
 
 A. The palmaris brevis, or caro quadrata, 
 is in form of a fmall mafs of flefh, very dif- 
 ferent in fize in diiTerent bodies. It arifes ob- 
 J'curely from the ligamentum tranfverfale car- 
 pi, and Teems to be inferred into the eighth 
 bone of the carpus, and the metacarpal bone 
 of the little finger. This helps to conftridl 
 the palm of the hand. 
 
 Which is the flexor carpi radialis ? 
 
 A. The flexor carpi radialis arifes from the 
 inner extuberance of the os humeri, and foon 
 becoming a flrong tendon, pafles through a 
 channel of the fifth bone of the carpus, and 
 is inlerted into the metacarpal bone of the fore 
 finger. This not only bends the carpus upon 
 the radius, but alfo the bones of the fecond 
 order upon thofe of the firft. 
 
 Q. Which is the flexor carpi ulnaris ? 
 
 A. The flexor carpi ulnaris ardfes from the 
 fame tubercle of the humerus as the former, 
 
 and 
 
DIALOGUES. 2(^5 
 
 and a fafcia betwixt this mufcle and the tenfor 
 ulnaris, contiguous to the ulna, and is inferted 
 by a fhort tendon into the fourth bone of the 
 carpus. 
 
 Which are the extenfores carpi radiales ? 
 
 A. The firft of the extenfores carpi radiales^ 
 arifes from the os humeri immediately below 
 the fupinator radii longus, and is inferred into 
 the metacarpal bone of the middle finger. The 
 firfl; of thefe mufcles is a bender of the cubir^ 
 as well as anextenfor of the carpus. 
 
 Which is the extenfor ulnaris ? 
 
 A. The extenfor ulnaris arifes from the 
 fame extuberance with the former, and half 
 the ulna below the anconrens mufcle ; then^ 
 becoming a tendon, it runs in a fmall finus at 
 the bottom of the ulna, and is inferted into 
 the metacarpal bone of the little finger. The 
 extenfors of the carpus being inferted into the 
 metacarpus, at once perform the motion be- 
 tween the bones of the carpus, and that be- 
 tween the carpus and radius. The flexor and 
 tenfor ulnaris adling together turn the hand 
 downward ; the tenfor and flexor radialis up- 
 ward. 
 
 Q. Which is the pronator quadratus ? 
 
 A. The pronator quadratus vel tianfverfus, 
 lies tranfverfely on the infide of the lower ex- 
 tremity of the fore-arm. It arifes from the 
 lower part of the ulna near the carpus, and 
 pafllng under the flexors of the fingers, is in- 
 ferred into the lower extremity of the radius. 
 
 (iX Which is the pronator teres ? 
 
 A. The 
 
265 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The pronator teres, vel obliquus, is fi- 
 tuated in the upper part of the ulna, oppohte 
 to the fupinator brevis. It arifes from the in- 
 ternal condyle of the os humeri, and upper 
 and fore part of the ulna, and is inferted into 
 the radius below the fupinator brevis. 
 
 Which is the perforatus, &c ? 
 
 A. The perforatus, or flexor fecund! inter- 
 nodii digitorum, called alfo fublimis, arifes 
 from the inner tubercle of the os humeri, and 
 from the upper part of the ulna, and the mid- 
 dle of the radius ; then becoming four ftrong 
 tendons, it paffes under the ligamentum tranf- 
 verfale carpi, and is inferted into the begin- 
 nina of the fecond bone of each finder. 
 
 ^ O 
 
 Q. Vv'hich is the perrorans ? 
 
 A. The perforans, or flexor tertii internodii 
 digitorum, arifes from half the ulna, and a 
 great part of the ligament between the ulna 
 and radius, then becoming four tendons, paf- 
 fes under the ligamentum tranfverfale carpi, 
 and through the tendons of the former muf- 
 cle to their infertion into the third bene of each 
 finger. The tendons' of both thefe mufcles 
 are tied dov/n to the fingers by a ftrong liga- 
 ment. 
 
 Which are the lumbricales ? 
 
 A. The lumbricales, or fiexores piirnl in- 
 ternodii digitorum, arife from the tendons of 
 the iail mendoned mufcle, and are inferted la- 
 terally toward the thumb into the beginning 
 of the firft bone of each finger. 
 
 Q- V/hich 
 
DIALOGUES. 267 
 
 Which is the extenfor digitorum com- 
 munis ? f-r 
 
 A. The extenfor digitorum communis, a- 
 rifes from the external protuberance of the hu- 
 merus, and at the wriil it pafles under a li- 
 gament, and divides into four tendons, which 
 are afterwards inferred into the beginning of 
 the fecond bone of each finger. Thefe tendons 
 communicate upon the firfl; joint, which keeps 
 them from Aiding off the joints of the fingers, 
 being a little conneCled to the firfl; bones. 
 
 Which is the extenfor minimi digiti ? 
 
 A. The extenfor minimi digiti vel aurlcula- 
 ris, is a portion of the laft mufcle, paAing un- 
 der the ligament in a diftindl channel. 
 
 Q: Which is the extenfor indicis ? 
 
 A. The extenfor indicis' comes from the 
 middle and external part of the ulna, and 
 paffing under the ligaments of the carpus, is. 
 inferred with the extenfor communis into the 
 fore finger This mufcle extends the fore- 
 finger fingly. 
 
 Which are the abdudtor primi digiti in- 
 teroffei, and abdudlor minimi digiti ? 
 
 A. The abdudtor primi digiti interoATei, 
 and abdudtor minimi digiti, are eight muf- 
 cles, one for each fide of each finger, i he ab- 
 dudtor primi digiti arifes from the firft bone 
 of the thumb, and the fide of the metacarpal 
 bone of the fore -finger. The interofiei are 
 three pair, fitly divided into external and in- 
 ternal •, the external arife from the metacar- 
 pal bones, whofe fpaces they fill up next the 
 
 back 
 
268 ANATOMICAL 
 
 back of the hand *, the internal arife from the 
 lame bones in the infide of the hand. 
 
 Q. Which are the abductor minimi digit! ? 
 
 A. The abdudtor minimi digiti arifes from 
 the tranfverfe ligament, and fourth bone of 
 the carpus ; thefe mufcles are inferred, two 
 into the firfl joint of each finger, and then 
 palling obliquely over the tops of the fingers, 
 are inferred into their lafi: bones ; they bend 
 the firft joint, and extend the two lall, as in 
 holding a pin, and in playing upon fome mu- 
 fical inflrument. The abductors of the fore 
 and little fingers, with the fecond and fifth 
 interoflti rnut'cles afting, the fingers are di“ 
 varicated, and the other four afting biingthem' 
 together ; thefe mufcles which divaricate the 
 fingers, being extenders of the fecond and 
 third joints, we never can divaricate them with- 
 out extending them a little. 
 
 Which is the abduflor oflis metacarpi 
 minimi digiti ? 
 
 A. The abduftor olTis metacarpi minimi 
 digiti arifes from the eighth bone and tranfverfe 
 ligament of the carpus, and is inferred into 
 rhe metacarpal bone of the little finger, which 
 it [ tills tow'ard the thumb, to confirift the palm 
 of the hand. 
 
 Cb Which is the extenfor primi internodii 
 poilicis r 
 
 A. The extenfor primi internodii poilicis 
 arifes, from the ulna, below the anconeus muf- 
 cle and the ligament betv/een the ulna and 
 radius* then becoming two, three, or foul- 
 
 tendons. 
 
2^9 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 tendons, is inferted into the fifth bone ofi the 
 carpus, and firft of the thumb. The firfi; of 
 thefe infeitions can only afiift the bending of 
 the wrifi; upward, and in turning the arm lu- 
 pine. 
 
 Q. Which is the extenfor fecundi, &c ? 
 
 A. The extenfor fecundis internodii poilic Is 
 arifes immediately below the former, from the 
 radius and tranfverfc ligament, and is imerted 
 into the fecond and third bone of the thum.b. 
 Which is the extenfor tertii internodii 
 poUicis ? 
 
 A. The extenfor tertii internodii pcliicis a- 
 rlfes immediately below the laft deferibed. from 
 the ulna and ligament, and pafies over the ra- 
 dius nearer the ulna, to be inferted into the 
 third bone of the thumb. i his extends the 
 thumb more towards the ulna than the former 
 mufcle, and is very much a fupinator. 
 
 Q- Which is the flexor primi et fecundi 
 ofias pollicis ? 
 
 A. 1 he flexor primi et fecundi offis podicis 
 arifes from the filth bone and tranfverfe liga- 
 ment ol the carpus, and from the beginnings 
 of the two firft metacarpal bones, and is in- 
 ferted into the whole length of the firft bone 
 of the thumb, and tendinous into the begin- 
 ning of the fecond ; the fefamoid bones of the 
 thumb in fuch bodies as have them, lie in this 
 tendon, where it pafies over the joint. 
 
 Q. Which is the flexor tertii internodii 
 polUds ? 
 
 A. The 
 
2/0 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The flexor tertii internodii pollicis arifes 
 large from almoft all the upper part of the ra- 
 dius, and becominga round tendon, pafles un- 
 der the ligamentum tranfverfale carpi to be in- 
 ferted into the third bone of the thumb. This 
 mufcle fingly afting draws the thumb towards 
 the metacarpal bone of the little finger •, but 
 the laPc mentioned mufcle adling with it, tuiTrS 
 it toward the fore finger. 
 
 Q. Which is the adduftor pollicis ? 
 
 A. The addudlor pollicis arifes from the car- 
 pus, and almoft the whole length of the meta- 
 carpal bone of the nr'ddle finger, and is infer- 
 ted into the beginning of the fecond bone of 
 the thumb. T his mulcle naturally enough di- 
 vides ’ into twOj and might belter be called a 
 flexor than an adduclor. 
 
 CX Which is the abduclor pollicis ? 
 
 A. The abdudcor pollicis arifes from the 
 fifth bone and ligamentum tranlverfale of the 
 carpus, and is inferred laterally into the be- 
 ginning of the fecond bone of the thumb to 
 draw it towards the radius. 
 
 I'he rnufcles which bend the thumb are much 
 lefs than thofe which bend the fingers, never- 
 thelefs, the thumb is able to rcfift ail the fin- 
 gers merely from the advantages that arife 
 from the thicknefs and fnortnefs of the bones 
 cf the thumb, compared with thofe of the fin- 
 gers *, but then the quicknefs of motion in the 
 fineers will exceed that of rhe thumb, as much 
 as the fingers exceed the thumb in length, and 
 their mulcles thofe of the thumb in largenefs. 
 
 Q. VvTiat 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 271 
 
 Q. What are the arteries of the arm ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the arm proceed all from 
 the fubclavian : the var.ous branches it gives off 
 before it leaves the thorax have been already 
 mentioned. From the arteria thoracica a branch 
 in particular runs down between the dekoides 
 and pedtoralis, together with the vena cephalica, 
 to which it adheres very clofely, as if there 
 were an anakomofis between them. Another 
 branch fometimes runs between the mufculus 
 brachiteus, and anconsus internus, which com- 
 municates with a branch of the radial artery. 
 The fuclavian artery having left the thorax 
 immediately above the firil: rib, in the inter- 
 flice left between the portions of the fcalenus 
 mufcle, gives oif the arteries above mentioned, 
 and the external fcapulary, and then receives 
 the name of axillaris, (becaufe it paffes under 
 the axilla) from whence proceed the arteria hu- 
 meralis, brachia'iis, cubitalis, and radialis. 
 
 Which are the arterim fcapulares ? 
 
 A, The external fcapulary artery pafies thro’ 
 the notch in the fuperior cofta of the fcapula, 
 to the mufculus fuprafpi.natusarjd infrafpinatus, 
 teres major et minor, and to the articulation 
 of the fcapula with the os humeri. The inter- 
 nal fcapularis arifes from the axillary artery 
 near the axilla, and runs backward, to be dif- 
 tiibuted to the fubfcapulsris, giving branches 
 and ramifications to the ferratus majorj axillary 
 glands, teres major, infrafpinatus, and upper 
 portion of the anconeu 
 
?,72 ANATOMICAL 
 
 Which is the arteria humeralis ? 
 
 A. The arteria humeralis arifes from the 
 lower and fore fide of the axillaris, and runs 
 backward between the head of the os humeri 
 and teres major, furrounding the articulation 
 lill it reaches the poderior part of the deltoides, 
 to v;hich it is diftributed ; in its courfe it fup- 
 plies the fuperior portions of the anconei, the 
 capfular ligament of the joint of the flioulder, 
 and the os humeri itfeif, through feveral holes 
 mmediately below the great tuberofity of the 
 lead of that bone, communicating with the 
 fcapular artery. Oppofite to the origin of the 
 humeralis the axillaris fends off a fmall branch 
 in a contrary diredlion between the head of the 
 os humeri and the upper part of the biceps and 
 coraco-brachialis, which goes to the vagina and 
 channel of the biceps, and to the periofteum, 
 and afterwards joins the humeralis. 
 
 O. Which is the arteria brachialis ? 
 
 A. The axillary artery having given off the 
 humeralisand its branches, as I have mentioned, 
 paffes immediately behind, the tendon of the 
 peftoralis, where it changesits name to brachia- 
 lis, 'which runs down on the infide of the arm 
 Over the mufculus coraco-brachialis, and tri- 
 ceps extenfor cubiti, and along the inner edge 
 of the biceps behind the vena bafilica, giving 
 fmall branches on both fiJes to the neighbour- 
 ing mufcles, to the periofleum, and to the 
 bone. Between the axilla and middle of the 
 arm, it is covered only by flfin and fat •, but 
 afterwards it is hid under the biceps, and runs 
 
 5 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 273 
 
 obliquely forward as it defcends •, but it does 
 not reach the middle of the fold of the arm. 
 In its paflage to this place it fends o(f many 
 branches to the infrafpinatus, teres major and 
 minor, fubfcapularis, latiflimus dorfi, ferratus 
 major, and other neighbouring mufcles, to the 
 common integuments, and even to the nerves. 
 Below the fold of the arm it divides into two 
 principal branches, which I fhall mention by 
 and by, one called cubitalis, the other radialis. 
 From the upper and inner part the brachialis 
 it fends offa particular branch, which runs ob- 
 liquely downward and backward over the anco- 
 nteus, and then turns forward again near theejc- 
 ternal condyle, where it communicates with a 
 branch of the radialis. 
 
 Immediately below the infertion of the teres 
 major it gives off another branch, which runs 
 round the os humeri, and defcends obliquely 
 forward between the mufculus brachi^us and 
 triceps extenfor cubiti, to both which it is dif- 
 tributed in its paffage. About the breadth of 
 a finger below the fecond branch, the brachial 
 artery fends off a third branch toward the inter- 
 nal condyle as the fecond is to the external con- 
 dyle, both which communicate with the arte- 
 ries of the cubit. Near the middle of the arm 
 the brachialis fends olf a branch between the 
 brachieus and the triceps to the periofteum 
 which penetrates the bone. About an inch 
 lower it gives off a branch, which fends ra- 
 mifications to the triceps, and runs over the in- 
 ner condyle. Below the middle of the arm ac- 
 T ocher 
 
274 ANATOMICAL 
 
 other branch runs behind the inner condyle in 
 company with a confiderable nerve. A little 
 lower another branch is ibmetimes detached on 
 the forefide of the inner condyle 5 all thefe 
 three branches communicate with branches of 
 the cubital artery, and are termed collateral arte- 
 ries. T he common trunk of the brachial artery 
 having reached the fold of the arm, runs toge- 
 ther with a vein and a nerve, immediately un- 
 der the aponeurofis of the biceps, and paflfes 
 under the vena mediana, detaching branches on 
 each fide to the neighbouring niufcles. 
 
 About an inch beyond the fold of the arm, 
 the brachial artery divides into two principal 
 branches. The inner or pofterior named cubi- 
 talis •, and the outer or anterior named radialis, 
 as has been already faid. From this bifurcation 
 the brachial artery fends branches on each fide 
 to the fupinaior and pronator mufcles, teres, fac 
 and flcin. 
 
 (L Flow Is the arteria cubitalis diftributed ? 
 
 A. The cubical artery, proceeding from the 
 brachialis, as I have before obferved, finks in 
 between the ulna and the upper parts of the 
 pronator teres, perforacus, palrnaris longus, 
 and flexor carpi radialis : then leaving the bone, 
 it runs down between the perforatus and pair 
 rnaris longus, all the way to the carpus and 
 great traniverfe ligament. In this courfe it 
 winds and turns feveral ways, and fends out fe- 
 veral branches ; very often there is a branch 
 of communication between the brachial and 
 cubital arteries. This communicant branch is 
 
 fomu- 
 
DIALOGUES, 2^ 
 
 fometimes very large, and liable to be pricked 
 by carelefs or injudicious blood-letters in 
 bleeding in the bafilic vein, immediately under 
 which this branch generally lies. When the 
 operation for an aneurifm is made upon the 
 communicant branch, it mull be tied on both 
 fides of the orifice, becaufe the blood is liable 
 to flow freely into it either way. 
 
 The firft branch of the cubital is a fmall ar» 
 tery which runs to the inner condyle, then 
 turns up, and comm.unicates with the colla- 
 teral arteries before mentioned. Another fmali 
 branch almofl furrounds the articulation. Ths 
 cubical artery running then between the heads 
 of the ulna and radius, and having reached 
 the interoflfeous ligament, fends off two prin- 
 . cipal branches which may be called interoffeous 
 arteries of the fore arm, one internal, the 
 other external. The external pierces the 
 ligament about three fingers breadth belovv 
 the articulation, from which runs ud a branch, 
 to the external condyle of the os humeri 
 utider the extenfor uinaris and anconmus, to 
 which it is diftributed, as alfo to the fupinator 
 brevis, communicating with the collateral arte- 
 ries on the fame fide Afterwards this external 
 interoffeous runs down on the outfide of tlie 
 ligament, and is diftributed to the extenfor ui- 
 naris, extenfor digitorum communis, and to 
 the extenfores pollicis indicis,and minimi digiti ^ 
 communicating with branches of the internal 
 interoffeous. At the lower extremity of the 
 ulna it unites with a brauch of the internal in- 
 T 2 tefof*- 
 
 V'.i : 
 
2;6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 terofleous, and is difliibuted, together with Itj 
 on the back of the hand, communicating with 
 the ■'adialis and a branch of the cubitalis. 
 
 Ey thele communications this artery forms a 
 fort of irregular arch, from whence branches 
 are detached to the external intcrolfeous muf- 
 cles, and to the external lateral parts of the 
 fingers. I'he internal interoiTtous artery runs 
 down very clofe to the ligament, which it per- 
 forates between the pronator teres, and prona- 
 tor quadrams, and goes to the back of the hand, 
 where it communicates with the external inter- 
 ofTeous radialis, and the interna] branch of 
 the cubitalis. From the origin of the two ar- 
 lerire interollse the cubitalis runs down be- 
 tween the perforaius, perforans, and flexor 
 carpi ulnaris, along the ulna, fending branch- 
 es to the neighbouring parts. Afterwards 
 the cubital artery pafles over the internal tranf- 
 verfe ligament of the carpus by the fide of the 
 ospifcifoime vel oibiculare, and having fur- 
 niflted the flein, palmaiis brevis, and meta- 
 carpus, it flips under the aponeurofis palmaris, 
 giving off a branch to the abduclor minimi di- 
 git!, and another towards the thumb between 
 the tendons of the flexors of the fingers and the 
 bafes of the metacarpal bones. A branch ruas 
 alfo betv/een the third and fourth bones of the 
 metacarpus to the back of the hand, where it 
 communicates with the external interofleous 
 artery. Afterwards, having fupplied the in- 
 terofleous mufcles, it communicates with the 
 radialis, and they both form an arterial arch 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 277 
 
 in the hollow of the hand in the following man- 
 ner : about two fingers breadth beyond the in- 
 ternal annular ligament of the carpus, the cu- 
 bitalis forms an arch, the convex fide of which 
 is turned to the fingers, and commonly fends 
 off three or four branches ; the firff, to the in- 
 ner and back part of the little finger; a!id the 
 other three run in the interftices of the four 
 metacarpal bones, near the heads of which, 
 each of them is divided into two branches, 
 which run on each fide the fingers internally, 
 and at the ends of the fingers thefe digital arteries 
 communicate and unite with each other. From, 
 the concave fide of this arch towards the fecond 
 phalanx of the thumb, a branch goes to the 
 internal lateral part thereof, and then ends 
 near the head of the firft metacarpal bone, by a 
 communication with the radialis ; having firft 
 given a branch to the foreficle of the index, and 
 another to the fide of the thumb ; thefe com- 
 municate as the other digital arteries. This 
 arch fends likewife fmall twigs to the interoffe- 
 ous mufclcs, lumbricales, palmaris, and other ' 
 neighbouring parts; and laftly to the integu- 
 ments, 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria radialis ? 
 
 A. The radial artery proceeds from the bra- 
 chialis, as before obfervtd, and begins by de- 
 taching a fmall branch upward toward the fold 
 ot the arin, which alfo turns backward round 
 the external condyle, communicating with the 
 neighbouring branches of the brachial arterv. 
 The radial artery runs down on the infide of 
 3 the 
 
278 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the radius, between the fupinator longus, pro« 
 nator teres, and the integuments, giving branch- 
 es to thefe mufdes, and like wife to the per- 
 foratus, ptrforans, and fupinator brevis. From 
 thence it runs in a winding courle toward the 
 extremity of the radius, fupplying the flexor 
 cf the thumb and pronator quadratus. Ha- 
 ving reached the extremity of the radius, it runs 
 nearer the fltin, efpecially tov/ard the anterior 
 edge of the hone, being the artery v/hich we 
 tiiere feel when we examine the pulfe. At the 
 end of the radius it "ives off a branch to the 
 
 O 
 
 abdudlor pollicis, which detaches one to the 
 whole internal fide of the thumb j afterwards 
 it runs between the firfl; phalanx and tendons 
 of the thumb, to the interface between it and 
 the firff metacarpal bone, where it turns to- 
 ward the hdlow of the hand, and fends off a 
 branch to the external fide of the thumb. O- 
 ther branches of the radialis run tranfverfely 
 outward betv/een the firu: two bones of the 
 metacarpus and the two tendons of the exten- 
 fores carpi radiales T they communicate with 
 the cubitalis, and together furnifli the exter- 
 nal interoffeous mufcles and integuments of the, 
 back of the hand. Laftly, the radialis terminates 
 in its paffage over the femi interoffeous mufcle 
 oftheindex, near the bafisofthe firfl; metacarpal 
 bone, and run's under the tendons of the flexor 
 rnufclcs of the fingers, v;here it is joined to the 
 arch of the cubitalis. It fends off another 
 branch along the fore part of the firfl; bone of 
 t'he metacarpus to the back of the index, where 
 
 3 
 
dialogues. 
 
 2 ”9 
 
 it Is loft in the integuments ; it gives dfo a 
 branch to the internal fide of the index, and at 
 the end of the finger joins an oppofite branch, 
 which comes from the arch ol the cnbicalis. 
 Another fmaii branch croiTes the internal inter- 
 offeous mufcles, and communicates with the 
 sreac arch. Where the arch of the cubitaiis 
 ends at the middle finger, the radialis runs 
 along the inner part of the firft metacarpal 
 bone, at the head of which it terminates by 
 Xwo branches •, one runs along the inner fide of 
 the index, and the other palies between the 
 flexor tendons of this finger and the metacar- 
 pal bone, and having communicated with the 
 cubital branch of the miiddle finger, it advan- 
 ces on the pofterior lateral part of the index to 
 the end of the finger, where it unites again witU, 
 the firft branch. 
 
 Q. What are the veins of the arm ? 
 
 A. The veins of the arm, &c. likewi'e pro- 
 ceed from the fubclavian, and the various 
 branches are diftinguilhed by the names of the 
 parts they are beftowed on, in the fame man- 
 ner as the arteries already mentioned, viz. vena 
 axillaris, cephalica, baulica. 
 
 Which is the vena axillaris ? 
 
 A. The fubclavian vein, having fent off the 
 branches already defcribed, goes out of the 
 thorax, and pafies before the anterior portion 
 of the mufculus fcalenus, and between the 
 firft rib and the clavicle to the axilla. Through 
 this coiirfe it takes the name of vena axilla- 
 ris, and gives off feveral btanch^s, the chief 
 T 4 of 
 
28 o anatomical 
 
 of which are the venas mufculares, thoracics 
 and vena cephalica, which is fometimes dou- 
 ble. The fil ft veins which it fends off are the 
 mufculares, diftributed to the middle portion 
 of the mufculus trapezius, to the angularis, 
 infrafpinatus and fubidapularis : a lictle before 
 the axillaris reaches the axilla, it fends out 
 the vente thoracicse, one fuperior called alfo 
 mammaria externa, and the other inferior. 
 It likewile fends branches to the mufculus fub- 
 fcapularis, teres major, teres minor, fupra- 
 I'pinatus, latiffimus dorfi, ferratus major, pec- 
 toralis, and to the glands of the axilla. 
 
 Which is the vena cephalica ? 
 
 A. The axillaris, having reached the fide of 
 the head of the os humeri, produces a very 
 confiderable branch named vena cephalica, 
 and afterwards runs along the arm by the name 
 of vena bafilica-, however, the bafilica fome- 
 times appears to be rather a branch than a 
 continuation of the axillary trunk ; in which 
 cafe the cephalica and bafilica might be look- 
 ed upon as two principal branches of the axil- 
 laris. The cephalic vein, which is a branch 
 of the axillaris, at a fmall diftance from its 
 origin, joins the Imall cephalica from the 
 fubclavia or jugularis externa ; having till 
 then run near the lurface of the body be- 
 tween the deltoides and pe(5loralis. The great 
 cephalica runs down between the tendons of 
 the lafl; mentioned mufcles and along the ex- 
 ternal edge of the biceps, to the neighbour- 
 ing m.ufcles, fat and flcin communicating with 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 281 
 
 the bafilica: a little below the external condyle 
 of the os humeri, it fends off a branch back- 
 ward. Near the fold of the arm it divides 
 into two principal branches, one long, the o- 
 ther fhort. The long branch is named radi- 
 alis externa, and the fnoit one may be called 
 mediana cephalica, to diftinguifh it from ano- 
 ther mediana, which is a fnorc branch of the 
 bafilica, and therefore ou2;ht to be called vena 
 mediana bafilica. The external radial vein 
 runs along the radius between the nuifcles and 
 integuments, and gives off branches to both 
 fides, communicating and forming areols 
 much like the faphena. 
 
 The mediana cephalica runs down toward 
 the middle of the fold of the arm, under 
 the integuments, and over the tendon of the 
 biceps, where it joins the mediana bafilica 
 before mentioned. Thefe two medians unite 
 in an angle, the apex of which is turned 
 downward. From this angle a confiderable 
 branch goes down the fore- arm, uniting on 
 one fide with the vena cephalica, and com- 
 municating on the other with the bafilica, by 
 feveral irregular areols* 
 
 The name of mediana is given to this large 
 branch as well as to the two fhort ones, by the 
 union of which it is formed ; this large branch 
 is the true mediana, and that name only fuf- 
 iiciently diftinguifhes it, as the others are alfo 
 termed cephalica and bafilica. From this 
 union of the two lateral medians, a branch 
 goes down the' infide of the fore-arm called 
 
 vena 
 
282 ANATOMICAL 
 
 vena' cubid profunda. The mcdiana cepha- 
 lica fometimes fends down a long branch, 
 called radiahs interna, alnioft parallel to the 
 externa •, afterwards, having reached the ex- 
 tremity of the radius, it is diftributed by a 
 num;rous areolae almoft in the lame couiTe 
 v/ith the radial artery ; it gives ofl’ a branch 
 •which runs fuperficially between the thumb 
 and metacarpus by the name of cephalica pol- 
 licis. The areolae furnidr the interoffeous muf- 
 cles and integuments, and communicate with 
 a fmall branch from the bafilica called by the 
 ancients falvatella. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena bafilica ? 
 
 A. The bafilic vein proceeds from the fub- 
 clavian, as before mentioned, and has fome- 
 times a double origin by a branch of coni's 
 munication with the trunk of the axillaris. 
 Firft of all it fends off, under the head of the 
 os humeri, a pretty large branch,, which paffes 
 almofi; tranfvcrfely round the neck of that 
 bone, and running upon the fcapula it is rami- 
 fied in the deltoides j this branch may be named 
 fub-humeralis, or articularis, as the artery-, it 
 fends do'vvn two principal branches, one on 
 the infide of the bone, to which and the pe^ 
 riofteum it gives fmall veins ; the other turns 
 forward, toward the middle of the arm be- 
 tween the bone and the biceps. Below the 
 neck of the os humeri, near the hollow of 
 the axilla, and behind the tendon of the pec- 
 coralis, the bafilica fends out a confiderable 
 branch down the fide of the , brachial artery, 
 
 f -which 
 
dialog u e s. 
 
 2S3 
 
 which fupplies the neighbouring mufcles on 
 both fides. Immediately aftervyards the bafi- 
 iica detaches two or three fmal! veins, very'- 
 clofeiy joined to the brachial artery, and di- 
 vides at tile fold of the arm like the artery, 
 having the fame dividons along the whole 
 fore arm afterwards, the bafilica continues its 
 coLirfe along the infide of the os humeria 
 between the mufcles and integuments which 
 it fupplies. Having reached the inner con- 
 dyle, and fenc off obliquely in the fold of the 
 arm, the mediana bafilica, it runs along the 
 ulna between the integuments and mufcleSj 
 a little toward the outfide by the name of cu- 
 bitalis externa, and another branch, w'hich the 
 mediana bafilica fends down the infide of the 
 fore-arnr near the ulna, may be named cubi- 
 talis interna. The bafilica' having reached the 
 extremity of the ulna, fends feveral branches 
 to the back-fide of the carpus, one of which 
 named falvatella, goes to the fide of the little 
 finger next the ring-finger, having firfi: com- 
 municated with the cephalica, by means of the 
 venal areols confpicuous on the back of the 
 hand. In the other fingers the vein follows 
 nearly the fame courfe with the artery. 
 
 What are the nerves of the arm ? 
 
 A. The nerves of the arm, &c. come ori- 
 ginally irom the medulla fpinalis, and proceed 
 immediately from the cervical nerves. The 
 confiderable branches into which the nerves of 
 the arm are divided are fix, which Mr. Monro 
 names as follows. 
 
 " ' I. Cu- 
 
284 ANATOMICAL 
 
 1. Cutaneus, runs down the forepart of the 
 arm, and fervcs the teguments as far as the 
 palm of the hand and fingers. 
 
 2. Mufculo-cutaneus, paffes through the 
 mufculus coraco brachialis, and after fupply- 
 ing the biceps and brachisus internus, is fpent 
 on the teguments of the back of the cubitus 
 and hand. 
 
 3. Mufcularis, runs down the forepart of 
 the arm to be lofl in the mulculi flexores car- 
 pi, digitorum, &c. 
 
 4. Ulnaris, which fupplies the extenfores 
 cubiii, and teguments of the elbow, then paf- 
 fing through the finuofity at the back of the 
 external condyle of the humerus, runs along 
 the ulna, where it gives twigs to the tegu- 
 ments, and neighbouring mufcles ; at length 
 it is loft in the back of the hand, mufculi in- 
 terofTei, and lumbricales, in the little finger, 
 and fide of the ring finger next to this. The 
 courfe of this nerve is fufficiently felt when 
 we lean on our elbow, by the fenfibility and 
 pricking pain in the parts to which it is dif- 
 tributed. 
 
 5. Radialis, goes down the forepart of the 
 arm, near the radius, bellowing branches in 
 its progrefs On the circumjacent mufcles, and 
 fplitting at the ligamentum annulare carpi, it 
 is fent to the thumb, fore-finger, middle- 
 finger, and half of the ring-finger, and to the 
 back of the hand. 
 
 6. Articularif, runs almoft round the top 
 of the os humeri, and fervcs the mufcyli ex- 
 
 ten- 
 
DIALOGUES. £8^ 
 
 tenfores cubiti, retradlores, and elevatores 
 humeri. By a ftrong and continued prtfTure 
 on thefe nerves, by crutches, or any fuch 
 hard fubftance, a palfy and atrophy of tlje 
 arm may be occafioned. 
 
 Qi What are the glands of the arm ? 
 
 A. The axillary glands are fituated under 
 the arm-pits, enveloped in fat, and lie clofe 
 by the axillary veCels about the fcapula, and 
 the flexure of the elbow*, there are alfo found 
 here and there fome fmall glands ; as alfo in 
 fume places between and among the muf- 
 cles. Subcutaneous glands, which fome men- 
 tion, have no exitlence. 
 
 DIALOGUE VIL 
 
 Of the Leg, and its Parts, 
 
 ^ 7 H A T are the parts of the leg ? 
 
 VV A, Under the general denomina- 
 tion of the leg and its parts, I (hall defcribe 
 all the lower extremities, and divide them as 
 in the table of ofteology and in the flceleton, 
 into the thigh, leg, and foot. The crus ex- 
 tends from the nates or buttocks to the ends 
 of the toes *, and is divided into femur 
 the thigh, from the ifchium or hip to the 
 knee. The fold between the bellv and thigh 
 is termed inguen, the groin ; the top or fore- 
 part 
 
anatomical 
 
 part of the knee is termed patella, or rotuk, 
 the pan of the knee ; the hinder part poples, 
 the ham. From the knee to the inftep, is 
 properly called the tibia or leg, the forepart 
 of which is crea, the fhinftne hinder part 
 fura, the calf-,- the outer protuberance at the 
 lower end is termed malleolus externus, the 
 outer ancle *, on the oppofite fide is malleolus 
 internus, or inner ancle. I'he foot is fub- 
 divided into three parts, viz. the tarfus, me- 
 tatarfus, and toes ; behind is calcaneus the 
 heel, before is tarius the inftep ; from thence 
 to the toes is the metatarfus ; the top of the 
 foot is termed dorfum pedis ; the under part 
 or foie planta pedis ; and tire toes digit! pedis, 
 Q. What are the bones' of the leg? 
 
 A. As under this denomination i compre- 
 hend all the lower limb, as before obferved, 
 the bones are, the os femoris, patella, tibia, 
 fibula, tarfus, metatarfus and digiii pedis. 
 
 Which is the os femoris ? 
 
 A. The os femoris is the thigh bone, and 
 the longeft and ftrongeft bone of the whole 
 human frame. In its upper extremity is to 
 he obferved a very large round head, and in this 
 head a cavity is deftined for the ligamentunl 
 fotundum, by means of which it is fixed in 
 the acetabulum or focket of the os innomina- 
 turn, and its luxation upwards prevented. 
 There are two proceffes or apophyfes near the 
 head, called tlie greater and lefi^r trochanters, 
 which are evidently formed for the infertion 
 of muftlcs', The p.eck of this hone lies 
 
 between! 
 
D I L O G U E S. 2S7 
 
 between the trochanters and the head, to which, 
 is alExed a. robuO: annular ligament, which 
 contains the head and neck of the bone, as is 
 were in a cafe. The neck is not flrait but ob- 
 lique, nearly horizontal, and turning fome- 
 tvhat outward, fo formed for keeping the 
 thighs afunder, by w’hich means we tread the 
 firmer ; the fpongy cavernous firutfuire of 
 this extremity of the bone, renders it lefs li- 
 able to fractures in this part : the apertures for 
 the ing-refs of feveral vefiels are aifo obferv- 
 
 c> 
 
 able, as is the large finus between the great 
 trochanter and the neck, into which mufcIeG 
 are inferred. The middle of the thigh bone, 
 for the conveniency of the m.ufcles, is a little 
 convex forwards, and fomewhat concave back- 
 w^ards, v/hich w'ould make it fubjedl to break 
 backwards, if there was not a (Irong- ridge on 
 the backfide (termed linea afpera) rrhich ftreng- 
 thens it fufficiently, and ferves alfo for advan- 
 tageous infertions for feveral mufcles. The 
 great cavity of this bone is alfo remarkable 
 for containing the marrow. At the lower end 
 of this bone are two large heads, with a ca- 
 vity between them, for the articulation with' 
 the tibia ; alfo a pofterior cavity which gives 
 paffage for the large veflels to defeend fecurely 
 cO the leg. There is befides an interior cavity 
 for the placing of the patella : and laftiy, two 
 condyles, or tubercles, placed near the heads, 
 for the origin of the mufcles which move the 
 foot. The ftrength and firmnefs of this bone 
 are furprizingly great', hence the ufe of the 
 
 thigh- 
 
2S8 anatomical 
 
 thigh bone is to fupport and fuftain the weight 
 of the whole body ; and its moveable articula- 
 tion at the head gives way to the eafy motion 
 of the body, while the feet are unmoved. 
 
 Q. Which is the patella ? 
 
 A. The patella is a bone which covers the 
 fore part of the joint of the knee, called alfo 
 rotula, and vulgarly the knee-pan or pan-bone 
 of the knee. It is a convex on the outfide, 
 and on the infide unequal, having an eminence 
 and two deprcffions. Its fubflance is fponge- 
 ous, and confequently it is brittle. It is con- 
 nedled by tendons and ligaments to the tibia 
 and os femoris, which is the ligament by which 
 it is connected to the thigh, and has a mo- 
 tion of afcent and defcent in the flexion of 
 the tibia. Its ufe is to fecure the extenfors 
 of the tibia, left pafling over the joint, they 
 might be too much expofed to external in- 
 juries. 
 
 The part fituated from the knee to the 
 ancle is properly called the leg, and confifts 
 of two bones befidcs the patella above-men- 
 tioned, viz. the tibia and the fibula. 
 
 Which is the tibia ? 
 
 A. The tibia is the bigger bone of the 
 leg, (fo called from its refemblance to an old 
 mufical pipe or flute) fituated, at its anterior 
 internal part, and continued in near a ftrait 
 line, from the thigh-bone to the inner ancle i 
 it is hard and firm with a cavity in its mid- 
 dle *, it is almoft triangular its fore and fliarp 
 edge is called the fkin. This bone is large at 
 
DIALOGUES. 2S9 
 
 irs upper end, and has two finufes or fockets, 
 which receive the two protuberances, or lower 
 heads of the thigh-bone-, and the produdion 
 or procefs, which is between the finufes of thfe 
 tibia, is received in the finus, or cavity, which 
 divides the two protuberances of the femur 
 before-mentioned, and to this rough procefs 
 of the tibia the crofs ligaments of this joint 
 are conneded. One fide of the upper end 
 has a fmall procefs, which is received into a 
 fmall finus of the fibula, and on the fore part, 
 a little below the patella, is another procefs, 
 into which the ligament, or tendon of the pa- 
 tella, is infected, and the tendons of the exten- 
 fors of the leg. Its lower extremity, which is 
 much fmaller than its upper, has a remark- 
 able procefs, which forms the inner ancle, 
 and fccures this bone from difiocating out- 
 wards : it has alfo a pretty large finus, which 
 receives the convex head of the allragalus, and 
 the protuberance is received into the finus, 
 in the convex head of the fame bone. It 
 has another (hallow finus in the fide of its low- 
 er end, which receives the fibula. The up- 
 per end of this bone is triangular, as before 
 obferved, and even concave on the fide next 
 the mufcles, to make room for them but 
 lower, as the mufcles grow lefs and tendinous, 
 the bone grows rounder. 
 
 Which is the fibula.^ 
 
 A. The fibula is the outer and fmaller 
 bone of the leg, called alfo perone. ft lies 
 pn tlte outfide of the tibia, and its upper end 
 U does 
 
290 ANATOMICAL 
 
 does not reach to the knee, but is only joined 
 to the external fide of the tibia, receiving the 
 fmall lateral procefs of the upper end of that 
 bone into a fmall finus, which the fibula has in 
 -its inner fide. The lower end of this bone is 
 received into the fmall finus of the tibia, and 
 then it extends into a large procefs, which 
 forms the outward ancle, embracing the ex- 
 ternal fide of the aftragalus. Thus the infe- 
 rior procefiTes of the tibia and fibula concur 
 in the articulation of the tarfus, which ferves 
 to ftrengthen the ancle joint, and render a lux- 
 ation Ids eafy. The tibia and fibula do not 
 touch one another but at their ends •, the fpace 
 which they leave in the middle is filled up by 
 a ftrong membranous ligament, and fome 
 mufcles, which extend the feet and toes. The 
 fibula has no particular motion of its own, 
 but wholly follows that of the tibia; and it 
 feems doubtful, whether or not this bone con- 
 tributes to the fupport of the body : its great 
 ufe is for the origin of the mufcles, and even 
 its fliape is fuited to theirs. 
 
 The bones of the feet are thofe of the tar- 
 fus, metatarfus, and toes. 
 
 Which is the tarfus, and of what bones 
 does it confifi; ? 
 
 A. The tarfus is the fpace between the 
 bones of the leg and the metatarfus, confift- 
 ing of feven bones, viz. the aftragalus or 
 talus •, calcaneum or cs calcis ; os naviculare ; 
 os cuboides vel cubiforme and the three ofia 
 '^hefirfiof thefe bones, which 
 
 'is 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 291 
 
 is the allragalus, fupports the tibia, and, is 
 fupported by the os calcis, which being pro- 
 jeded backwards, makes a long lever for the 
 mufcles to a6l with, tint extend the ancle 
 and raife the body upon the toes. Thefe two 
 bones have a confiderable motion between 
 themfelves, and the aftragalus alfo with the os 
 naviculare, and all the rett an obfcure motion 
 one with another, and with the bones of the 
 metatarfus ; the greated; part of thefe motions 
 being towards the great toe, where is the 
 greateft ftrefs of adlion. Thefe bones thus 
 giving way are lefs liable to be broke, and as 
 a fpring under the leg, make the motions of 
 the body, in walking, more eafy and grace- 
 ful, and the bones which are fupported by 
 them lefs fubject to be fradtured in violent 
 adtions. 
 
 Which is the metatarfus, and of how 
 many bones is it compofed ? 
 
 A. The metatarfus is the fpace between the 
 tarfus and toes, confiding of five bones, arti- 
 culated to the tarfus at one end, and to the 
 toes at the other •, the metatarfal bone which 
 fupports the great toe is much the largefi, 
 the greatefi; firefs in walking falling upon chat 
 part •, under the end of this lie the two fefa- 
 moid bones, which are of the fame ufe as the 
 patella. 
 
 Q. What are the digit! pedis, and how are 
 they compofed ? 
 
 A. I'he digiti pedis is a term given by a- 
 natomifts to the toes. Each of the toes, ex- 
 U 2 cepe 
 
292 ANATOMICAL 
 
 cept the great one, confifts of three phalan- 
 ges •, the great toe has but two, and the two 
 lall of the little toe frequently grow together. 
 I'he toes are lefs than the fingers, and have 
 much lefs free motion, 
 
 CX What are the cartilages of the leg ? 
 
 A. The cartilages of the lower extremity 
 are thofe of the os femoris, patella, tibia, fi- 
 bula, and bones of the foot. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the os fe- 
 moris ? 
 
 A. No part of the os femoris is covered 
 with a cartilage, except the uniform convexity 
 of the head, and the articular portion of the 
 lower extremity : the trochanters in adults 
 have no true cartilage. 
 
 Q. What cartilage has the patella ? 
 
 A. The patella has a pretty thick cartilage 
 on its pofterioror articular fide. 
 
 What are the cartilages of the tibia ? 
 
 A. The tibia has four or five proper carti- 
 lages and two additional ones •, the former are 
 thofe of the two fuperior furfaces of the head 
 of the tibia, that which covers the final! fur- 
 face on the lower part of the external con- 
 dyle ; alfo that which covers the lower furface 
 of the bafis of the tibia, continued over the 
 outfide of the inner ancle : and there arc 
 Irkewife fuperficial cartilaginous incruftations 
 on the back part of both ancles for the paf- 
 fage of tendons. 1 he additional cartilages of 
 the tibia are two in number, called femi-lunar 
 or inter-articular, in the fhape of a C. they lie 
 
 on 
 
dialogues. 
 
 293 
 
 on the two upper furfaces of the head of the 
 tibia. 
 
 Q. What cartilages has the fibula ? 
 
 A. Two-, one lying on the upper extremi- 
 ty of that bone, the other covers the infide of 
 the inferior extremity, or of the outer ancle. 
 
 Q. What are the cartilages of the bones of 
 the foot i 
 
 A. The aftragalus is covered by three car- 
 tilages j the firft of thefe is for the articulation 
 of this bone with the tibia and fibula -, the fe- 
 cond for the os calcis ; and the third for the 
 os fcaphoides vel naviculare. The os calcis 
 has four cartilages, of which three are fupe- 
 rior, one large, and two fmall, for its triple 
 articulation with the afiragalus ; the fourth is 
 anterior, for the os cuboides. The os navi- 
 cularc has two cartilages, one pofterior for its 
 articulation with the aftragalus -, and one an- 
 terior, divided into three parts for the -three 
 offa cuneiformia. The os cuboides has two 
 remarkable cartilages, one pofterior for its 
 articulation with the os calcis, and one anterior 
 for its articulation with the two I aft metacarpal 
 bones : it has likewife a cartilage on the in- 
 fide for the os cuneiforme, which is next to it, 
 and one on the lower fide. The three cfla 
 cuneiformia have each of them a pofterior 
 cartilage for their articulations with the os n:- 
 viculare and one anterior, for the three firft: 
 metacarpal bones j they have likewile fmall car- 
 tilaginous furfaces on their fides, for their arti- 
 culations with each other -, and befides, the firft 
 and third bones arejoined thereby to the lateral 
 U 3 parts 
 
294 ANATOMICAL 
 
 parts of the bafisof the fccond metatarfal bone, 
 and the third to the os cuboides. The bafes 
 and heads of the metatarfal, bunes-are covered 
 .with cartilages. The phalanges have cartilages 
 in the fame manner at tiieir bafes and heads, 
 except at the heads or extremities of the laft. 
 We fhould beware of confounding the re- 
 mains of tendons, ligaments, and aponeuro- 
 fes with true cartilages, as for inftance, at the 
 pofterior part of the os calcis, Sic. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the leg? 
 
 A. The ligaments of the lov/er extremity 
 are thofe of the os femoris, patella, tibia, 
 fibula, and bones of tlie foot. 
 
 What are the ligaments of the os femoris ? 
 
 A- i he os femoris is connedled by its up- 
 per extremity to the os innorninatum, and by 
 the lower to the bones of the leg, by means of fe- 
 veral ligaments. The ligaments of the upper 
 extremity are two in number-, one furrounds 
 the whole articulation, with the cotyloide ca- 
 vity, or acetabulum, and one is contained in, 
 the articulation. To thefe we may, though 
 very improperly, add a third, which is of the 
 nature of a capfular ligament. The firfl is 
 termed the orbicular ligament of the head of 
 the os femoris, and is the moft confiderable, 
 largeft, and ffrongeft of all the articular liga- 
 ments of the human body ; it is fixed quite 
 round the border of the acetabulum, or coty- 
 loide cavity, as before obferved ; and from 
 thence largely furrounds the M'hole head and 
 fuperior portion of the neck of the os femo- 
 ris, in the lov/er part of which neck it is clofe- 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 2S5 
 
 ly inferted. The other ligament of the head 
 of the os femoris, which lies in the joint, I 
 call internal, and inter-articular. It refem- 
 bles a flat cord, broad at one end, and nar- 
 row at the other; by its narrow end, it is in- 
 ferred at the two angles of the notch of the 
 cotyloide cavity, and by the other in the os 
 femoris, thefe being a fort of depreflion in the 
 head of the bone for the paflTage of the liga- 
 ment. The ligaments of the lower extremity 
 of the os femoris, by which this bone is con- 
 neded with thole of the leg, are fix in num- 
 ber, viz. one pofterior, two lateral, two mid- 
 dle or crucial, and one capfular. The crucial 
 ligaments lie within the joint, and are fixed 
 by one end to the back part of the notch or 
 opening, which parts the two condyles ; they 
 are furrounded by the capfular ligament, but 
 all the refl: lie on the outfide thereof, being 
 clofely joined to it. The two lateral ligaments 
 are fixed one to each tuberofity of the con- 
 dyles. The pofterior ligament is fixed a little 
 above the convexity of the external condyle, 
 from whence it defcends obliquely behind the 
 great notch and internal condyle. The cap- 
 fular ligament glued, as' it were, to the three 
 former, is fixed quite round the inferior ex- 
 tremity of the os femoris, juft above the car- 
 tilage, and the pofterior part of the great 
 notch ; and from the cartilage and notch, 
 through the fmail fpace upward, already men- 
 tioned, it covers the bone ; and afterwards is 
 inverted downward, to form the capfula for 
 U 4 the 
 
a$)6 anatomical 
 
 the mucilaginous liquor of the joint. What 
 remains to be defcribed of all thcfe ligaments, 
 1 fhall refer to the defcription of thofe of the 
 
 leg. 
 
 What are the ligaments of the patella f 
 A. The patella is faffened to the tubeiofity 
 or fpine of the tibia by a broad and very 
 Ilrong ligament, which runs down direflly 
 from the apex of the patella ; it ha? likewile 
 fmall lateral ligaments, fixed in the lower part 
 of its edge on each fide, which are inferred 
 anteriorly, and a little laterally in the edge of 
 the head of the tibia. The capfular ligament 
 of the joint of the knee, of which I defcribed 
 one part in fpeakingof the lower extremity of 
 the os femoris, is fixed round the edge of the 
 head of the tibia, and in the edge of the pa- 
 tella, fo that the patella itfelf forms a portion 
 of the mucilaginous capfiila of the joint of 
 the knee. The crucial ligaments and thofe of 
 the femilunar cartilages, are included within 
 this capfula ; but the lateral and pofterior li- 
 gaments, and thofe of the patella, lie without 
 It, being clcfely joined to its outer furface ; 
 this capfula is likewife joined to a confider- 
 ab!e portion of the circumference of the femi- 
 lunar cartilages ; and it not only contains and 
 furrounds the ligaments already named, but 
 likewife furnifiies them with a very fine vagi- 
 na. There is likewife a very thin ligament 
 fixed by one end to the lower part of the 
 cartilaginous fide of the patella, and by the 
 other to the anterior part of the great notch, 
 
 between 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 297 
 
 between the condyles of the os femoris, the 
 vife of which feems to be to hinder the ar- 
 ticular fat from being comprefled in the mo- 
 tions of the knee. 
 
 Q. What are the ligaments of the tibia ? 
 
 A. 1 have already obferved, that the tihia 
 is conneded with the os femoris by feveral li- 
 gaments, two lateral, one poderior, two mid- 
 dle, and one capful. ir ; and I have {hewn in 
 what manner thev are fixed in the lower ex- 
 tremity of the os femoris and patella. Their 
 infertion in the bones of the leg are as fol- 
 lows. The innermoft of the two lateral liga- 
 ments is fixed pretty low down, on the inner 
 fide of the luperior part of the tibia. The ex- 
 ternal lateral ligament is fixed in the upper ex- 
 tremity of both tibia and fibula ; both are 
 joined to the edge of the femiiunar cartilages ; 
 and lie a little behind the middle of the arti- 
 culation. The pofterior ligament is fixed by 
 feveral expanfions in the pofterior part of the 
 head of the tibia. One of the crucial liga- 
 ments is fixed by one end to the internal fu- 
 perficial impreflion in the notch of tli£ os fe- 
 moris, and, by the other, to the notch in the 
 head behind the cartilaginous tubercle, which 
 lies between the two luperior furfaces. The 
 other crucial ligament is fixed by one end to 
 the external impreilion in the notch of the os 
 femoris, and, by the other, between the an- 
 terior portion of the furfaces juft mentioned. 
 There are feveral other fmall ligaments, but 
 ,thefe are the principal ones. 
 
 Q. What 
 
298 ANA T O M I C A L 
 
 Q. Whai: are the ligaments of the fibula ? 
 
 A. The fibulais joined to the tibia by nine 
 ligaments, four at each end, and one in the 
 middle, called the interoffrous ligament. The 
 ligaments at the upper extremity of the fibula 
 are fiiort, very ftrong, more or lefs oblique 
 and com pound •, two of them are anterior, 
 two poilerior, and they lie on each other ; the 
 fupei ior ligaments furrounding the articulation 
 more clofely than the inferior. They are all 
 glued to the cajjfular ligament, which runs in 
 oetwecn them and the articulation, and they 
 are inferted round the edges of the cartilagi- 
 nous furfaces in each bone. The ligaments of 
 the lower extremity of the fibula are difpofed 
 much after the fam.e manner, that is, two be- 
 fore, and two behind which run down on the 
 lower end of the fibula forming the outer an- 
 cle. The middle fpace between the tibia and 
 iibula is filled by a fjrt of capfular ligament, 
 'which lines each fide of tlie bones, down to 
 the external ancle, with the inferior edge of 
 the bafis of the tibia. The middle or inrer- 
 offeous ligament of the two bones of the leg, 
 fo called becaufe it fills up all the fpace left 
 between them, being ftrctched from one to 
 the other, it is perforated both above and 
 below, and fometimes in feyeral places be- 
 iides, for the palihge of the blood veflels and 
 nerves. It is not a ligament defigned to tie 
 thefe bones together, but rather a ligarnentary 
 feptum for the infertion of mufcles, in winch 
 u-Vpc6l it fupplies the place of bones ; and 
 
 fetms 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 299 
 
 feems partly to be a continuation of the periof- 
 teum of the tibia and fibula. At the lower 
 part of each ancle there are commonly three 
 ftrong ligaments for the connexion of the 
 bones of the tarfus with thefe of the leg, one 
 that runs forwards, one backwards, and one 
 more or lefs direcfbly downward. The other 
 ligamentary expanfions and annular ligamients 
 of this parr, as they do not belong to the bones, 
 will be mentioned in their proper place. 
 
 Or What are the ligaments of the foot ? 
 
 A. The foot being made up of many bones, 
 muft, befides thofe ligaments by which it is 
 tied to the bones of the leg, have feveral others 
 to connedt not only the three parts of which it 
 is compofed, but alfo the particular bones be- 
 longing to each part, I have already men- 
 tioned the infertion of three ligaments in 
 each ancle for the articulation of the ancles 
 with the foot. The ligaments of the inner 
 ancle are all fixed in the in fide of the aftraga- 
 lus. The anterior and middle ligaments of 
 the outer ancle are fixed in the outfide of the 
 aftragalus ; the pofierior is chiefly fixed in the 
 outfide of the os calcis. Ail thefe ligaments 
 lie on the outfide of the capfula, which fur- 
 rounds the articulation of the aftragalus with 
 the bones of the leg. The ligaments by which 
 the bones of the tarfus are connedled with each 
 other, are fnort, fiat, of different breadths, 
 and run from one bone to another in various 
 directions. The capfular ligaments of thefe 
 bones go very little further than the edges of 
 
 the 
 
300 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the articulations of one bone with another*, 
 they adhere very clofely to the true ligaments, 
 and are covered and tied by them. I he os 
 cuboides and the three ofTa cuneiformia, are 
 alfo connedled to the metatarfal bones, by fe- 
 veral particular ligaments. The bones of the 
 metatarfus are connected together by their ba- 
 fts and heads. The firll phalanges of the toes 
 are tied to the heads of the metatarfal bones, 
 by a fort of orbicular ligament, fet round ihe 
 edges of the cartilaginous portions of the head, 
 and thofe of the bafes of tlie phalanges. The 
 fecond and third phalanges of all the toes, 
 being articulated by ginglymi, have lateral li- 
 gaments, which go between the fides of the 
 bafes to the fides of the heads. The capfular 
 ligaments of all thefe articulations are difpof- 
 ed like thofe of the tarfus already fpoken of. 
 See the mufcles of the foot. 
 
 Q. What are the mucilaginous glands of 
 the leg ? 
 
 A. The mucilaginous glands of the lower 
 extremity lie in the fmall fpaces, depreffions, 
 and fuperhcial notches near the edges of the 
 cartilages of each joint ; they are covered by 
 the capfular ligaments, and more or lefs mix- 
 ed vvith a fatty fubftance. The glands of the 
 knee, which lie near the edges ot the patella, 
 are the moft confiderable, being difpofed of in 
 form of fringes, and fupporred by a great 
 cjuantity of fatty matter, which makes in ibine 
 meafure one mafs with them, and is contain- 
 ed within the capl’ular ligaments. 1 here are 
 
 other 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 SO-i 
 
 0 !her mucilaginous glands, both above and 
 below the edges of the iemilunar cartilages ; 
 and likewife in the ham, Ibme whereof ferve 
 for the joint, the reft for the crucial liga- 
 ments. Thefe laft lie in folds formed by the 
 internal membrane of the capfular ligament, 
 which give particular coverings to the crucial 
 ligaments. The mucilaginous glands of the 
 foot anfwer in number and figure to the de- 
 preffions between the cartilaginous edges and 
 ligaments. 
 
 Q. What are the mufcles of the leg ? 
 
 A. The mufcles of the lower extremities 
 are the pfoas magnus, iliacus internus, pe6li- 
 n$us, triceps fernoris, glutseus maximus, glu- 
 treus medius, glutsus minimus, pyriformis, 
 quadratus fernoris, obturator internus et ex- 
 ternus, fafcia lata, gracilis, fartorius, femi- 
 tendinofus, femimembranofus, biceps tibiae, 
 popliteous, reftus tibije, vaftus excernus et in- 
 ternus, cruraeus, gafterocnemius, plantaris, 
 folaeus, tibialis amicus, ec pofticus, peroneus 
 longus et brevis, extenfor pollicis pedis longus 
 et brevis, flexor pollicis pedis longus et brevis, 
 abductor pollicis pedis, do tranlverfalis, ex- 
 tenfor digitorum pedis longus et brevis, flexor 
 digitorum pedis brevis vel perforatus, flexor 
 digitorum pedis longus vel perforans lumbri- 
 cales pedis, abdu6lor minimi digiti pedis, ab- 
 dudlor fecundus minimi digici pedis et inte- 
 roflei pedis. 
 
 0. Which is the pfoas magnus ? 
 
 A. The 
 
302 
 
 ANATOMICAL 
 
 A. The pfoas magnus is a long thick muf- 
 cle, fituated in the abdomen, on the lumbar 
 region, adhering to the vertebra of the loins, 
 from the pofterior part of the os ilium to the 
 anterior part of the thigh. It arifes laterally 
 from the bodies and tranfverfe procelTes of the 
 four fuperior vertebrse of the loins, and the 
 laft of the back, and is inferted with the fol- 
 lowing mufcle into the lefTer trochanter. This 
 is one of the flexor mufcles of the thigh, and 
 when the pfoas parvus is wanting, this is 
 larger. 
 
 Q. Which is the iliacus internus ? 
 
 A. The iliacus internus arifes from the in- 
 ternal concave part of the os ilium, and from 
 its lower edge •, it is inferted with the pfoas 
 magnus, and employed in the fame aftion. 
 Thefe move the thigh forv/ard in walking. 
 
 Which is the pedlinmus ? 
 
 A. The pedinsus is a fmall, flat and pret- 
 ty long mufcie, lituated obliquely between 
 the os pubis and the upper part of the os fe- 
 moris. It arifes from the os pubis or pedinis, 
 near the joining of that bone with its fellow, 
 and is inferted into the linea af[aera of the 
 thigh-bone, four fingers breadth below the 
 lefler trochanter. I'his bends the thigh and 
 turns the toes outward. 
 
 Whiclr is the triceps femoris ? 
 
 A. The triceps femoris is the addudor muf- ' 
 cle of the thigh, having three heads and as 
 many inlertions ; two aril’e under the pedineus, 
 and a third from the os pubis and ifchiiim ; 
 
 and 
 
DIALOGUE S. 
 
 303 
 
 and are inferred into the whole linea afpera 
 and the inner apophyiis ot the os femoris. 
 This alfo bends the thigh and turns the toes 
 cutvvard. 
 
 Qa Which is the glutaeus maximus? 
 
 A. The gluttEus maximus arifes irom the 
 os coccygis, the fpine of the facrum and ad- 
 joining parts •, and is inlerted by a ftrong ten- 
 don into the uppei' part of the linea afpera of 
 the os femoris, four fingers breadth below the 
 great trochanter. This extends the thigh, 
 and both thefe together being contracled, oc- 
 cttfionally aflill the levatores ani in fupporting 
 the anus. 
 
 Which is the glutteus medius ? 
 
 A. The glutseus medius arifeth under the 
 former from the fpine of the ilium, and is in- 
 ferred into the fuperior and external parts of 
 the great trochanter of the os lemotis. This 
 extends the thigh outVv'ard. 
 
 Ch Which is the glutteus minimus ? 
 
 A. The glutsus minimus arifes from the 
 ilium under the former, and is inferred into 
 the fuperior and anterior part of the great 
 trochanter, and neck of the thigh-bone, to ex- 
 tend the thigh. Thefe three mulcies form the 
 buttocks. 
 
 Q_ Which is the pyriformis ? 
 
 A. The pyriiormis, vel iliacus externus, 
 arifes from the infide of the lower pare of the 
 os facrum, an-:! from thence it runs tranfverfely 
 towards the joint of the hip, and is inferted 
 into the upper part of the finus, at the root of 
 2 the 
 
304 ANATOMICAL 
 
 the great trochanter. — This affifts ibmewhatin 
 extending the thigh, but itiore in turning it 
 outward. 
 
 Q. Which is the quadratus femoris ? 
 
 A. The quadratus femoris is fituated tranf- 
 verfely between the tuberofity of the ifchium, 
 and the great trochanter. It anies from the 
 obtufe procefs of the ifchium, and is inferred 
 into the upper part of the linea afpera of the os 
 femoris, between the two trochanters. This 
 draws the thigh inward, and direfts the toes 
 outward. 
 
 Q. Which is the obturator internus ? 
 
 A. The obturator internus, vel marfupialis, 
 arifes from the internal circumference of the 
 hole that is between the ifchium and the os pu- 
 bis, and is inlerted into the finus of the great 
 trochanter. This turns the thigh outward. 
 
 Q. Which is the obturator externus ? 
 
 A. 1 he obturator externus arifes oppofite to 
 the former, from the external circumference of 
 the fame hole *, and is alfo inferred into the 
 finus of the great trochanter. This alfo turns 
 the thigh outward. 
 
 Thefe four laft-mentioned mufcles a6ling 
 with the extenfors, prevent their turning the 
 toes inward, and in ftepping forwards are con- 
 tinually adling to turn t.he toes outward. 
 
 Cb Which is the fafeia lata ? 
 
 A. The fafeia lata vel abdudfor fafcialis fe- 
 moris, called alfo mu'culus mernbranofus, arifes 
 from the fore part of the fpine of the ilium. 
 Soon after its origin it becomes entirely mem- 
 branous, 
 
dialogues, 305 
 
 branous, and clofely furrounds the mufcles of 
 the thigh ; after which it is inferted in the up- 
 per part of the tibia, near the head of the fibu- 
 la, and from thence fends out an aponeurofis, 
 almoft over the whole external mufcles of the 
 tibia, as thofe of the thigh bone. About the 
 middle of the leg it grows loofe, and is fo con- 
 tinued to the top of the foot, being connedled 
 there, and at the lower part of the leg, to the 
 annular ligaments which rie down the tendons. 
 When this mufcle adts, the leg and thigh are 
 drawn outwards ; it alfo helps to extend the 
 joint of the knee, and to elevate borh the thigh 
 and leg. 
 
 All thefe mufcles I have now mentioned 
 ferve to move the os femoris on the pelvis* 
 Which is the gracilis ? 
 
 A. The gracilis arifes from the os pubis, 
 clofe tothe penis, and defeending by the infide of 
 the thigh, is inferted into the infide of the tibia, 
 near the lartorius, four or five fingers breadth 
 below the joint of the knee. This mufcle 
 draws the leg and thigh inwards, and helps to 
 bend the knee. 
 
 Which is the fartorius ? 
 
 A. The fartorius is both an abdudlor and 
 elevator, ferving to move the legs upwards and 
 forwards, and to crofs each other as taylors fit 
 with them, whence the name ; it arifes from the 
 ilium, and defeending obliquely is inferted into 
 the upper and inner part of the tibia, four or 
 five fingers breadth below the point of the 
 knee. This is the longeft mufcle in the hu- 
 IP an body, X Q. Which 
 
So6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 Which is the femi-tendinofus ? 
 
 A. 'i'he lemi-tendinofus vd femi-nervofns 
 arifes from the irchium, and is inferted into the 
 upper part of the tibia, near the gracilis and 
 fartorius. It helps to bend the leg and extend 
 tne thigh. 
 
 Which is the femimembranoftis ? 
 
 A. The femimembranolus is a long thiri' 
 muicle, partly tendinous, whence its name, 
 fnuated on the backfide of the thigh, a little 
 towards the infide, being one of the five flexors 
 of the tibia. It arifes from the ifchium a little 
 above the feminervofus, and is inferted into the 
 upper part of the tibia, but nearer the joint 
 than the former mufcle for the fame ufe, Be- 
 fore it is inferred, it fends off Ibmetimes an apo- 
 neurofis like that of the biceps. The femiten- 
 dinofus and femimembranofus make the inter- 
 nal ham firing. 
 
 Which is the biceps tibiae? 
 
 A. The biceps tibite, vel femoris, is a mufi 
 cle v/ith two heads, the fuperior from the 
 ifchium, the other from the linea afpera of the 
 os femoris; both which join together, and are 
 inferted by one tendon into the fuperior and 
 external part of the fibula, to bend the leg, and 
 the firfl head alfo extends the thigh. The ten<- 
 don of this mufcle forms the external ham 
 firing, when the knee is bent ; befides the of- 
 fice commonly alfigned to this mufcle, in bend- 
 ing the tibia together with the fartorius and 
 niembranofus, it is likewife employed in 
 turning the leg, together vtitli the foot and 
 
 toes 
 
toes outwards, when we fit down with the 
 knees bended- 
 
 Which is the popfiteus ? 
 
 A. The popliteus is a fmall mufcle obliquely 
 pyramidal, fituated under the ham, from whence 
 its name, k arifes from the outer apophyfis of 
 the os femoris, and thence running obliquely 
 inward, is inferred into the backfide of the head 
 of the tibia. It aflifts the ficxors, and draws the 
 tibia towards the outer apophyfis of the thigh 
 bone. 
 
 Q. Which is the redlus tibiae ? 
 
 A. The redtus tibi^, vel cruris, arifes from 
 the upper part of the acetabulum of the os ino- 
 minatum, and from the proceflus inominatus 
 of the ilium, and is inferred together with the 
 three following mufcles into the patella. It 
 bends the thigh and extends the tibia. 
 
 \Vhich is the vaftus externus ? 
 
 A. The vaftus externus is a very large flefhy 
 mufcle, almoft as long as the os femoris, lying 
 on the outfide of the thigh. It arifes from the 
 fore part of the great trochanter, and fuperior 
 part of the linea afpera of the os femoris, and 
 is inferred into the upper and external part of 
 the patella. This mufcle extends the tibia. 
 Which is the vaftus internus ? 
 
 A. The vaftus internus is very like the for- 
 mer, and fituated in the fame manner, on the 
 infide of the os femoris. it arifes from the 
 linea afpera, and is inferred into the patella, to 
 extend the tibia •, and the fibres of this mufcle 
 being oblique, it keens the patella in its place. 
 
 2 Q. Which 
 
3o8 anatomical 
 
 Which is the cruraeiis ? 
 
 A. The crurseus arifes from the fore part of 
 the thigh bone between the two trochanters, 
 and lying clofe upon the bone, it joins its ten- 
 don with the three former mufcles, which are 
 inferred into the patella •, the patella being tied 
 down by a flrong ligament to the tibia. 
 
 Thefe three laft mufcles extend the tibia 
 only, and might very properly be called exten- 
 for tibi$ triceps. 
 
 Thefe ten mufcles not only move the leg 
 upon the thigh, but alfo the thigh upon the leg, 
 the popliteus excepted. 
 
 Q. Which is the gafterocnemius ? 
 
 A. The gafterocnemius is a pretty thick, 
 broad and oblong mufde, which forms a great 
 part of the calf of the leg. It arifes from the 
 pofterior part of the os femoris, which foon be- 
 coming large bellies, unite, and then form a 
 flat tendon, which joins the follov/ing mufcles 
 to be inferred into the os calcis. Its ufe is to 
 ex'tend the tarfus and bend the knee. 
 
 Which is the plantaris ? 
 
 A. The plantaris arifes from the external 
 condyle of the os femoris, under the outer be- 
 ginning of the gafterocnemius in the ham, and 
 foon form.ing a fmall tendon is fo continued 
 betwixt the foregoing and fubfequent mufcles, 
 and is inferred with them. It bends the knee 
 and extends the tarfus. 
 
 Q. \Vhich is the folmus ? 
 
 A. The folseus vel gafterocnemius internns, 
 arifes frota the upper part of the tibia, and one 
 
 third 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 309 
 
 third of the fibula below the popllteus, and is 
 inferted with the two foregoing mulcles by a 
 flrong tendon into the upper and back part of 
 the os calcis. This mulcle only extends the 
 tarfus, 
 
 Q, Which is the tibialis anticus ? 
 
 A. The tibialis anticus is fituated on the 
 fore fide of the leg, and is one of the flexor 
 mufcles ; it arifes from the tibia, and is inferr- 
 ed laterally into the internal os cuneiforme and 
 the internal metatarfal bone. This bends and 
 turns the tarfus inward. 
 
 Q. Which is the tibialis pofticus ? 
 
 A. The tibialis pofticus, or ab’dudor mufcle 
 of the foot, arifes in the upper part of the tibia 
 between that bone and the fibula, and going 
 between the bones through a perforation in 
 the intcrofleous ligament, it paffes under the 
 inner ancle, and is inferteJ into the os navicu- 
 lare. It extends and turns inward the tarfus. 
 
 Which is the peroneus longus 
 
 A. The peroneus longus arifes from the ex- 
 fernal and fuperior part of the fibula, and its 
 tendon pairing under the. outer ancle and the 
 mufcles fituated on the bottom of the foot, is 
 inferted into the beginning of the metatarfal 
 bone of the great toe, and the os cuneiforme 
 next that bone. This turns the tarfus out- 
 ward, and direfts the force of the other exten- 
 fors of the tarfus toward the ball of the great 
 toe. 
 
 Which is the peroneus breads ? 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 A. The 
 
310 A N AT O M I C A L 
 
 A. The peroneus brevis arifes from the mid- 
 dle of the fibula, under a part of the former, 
 pafles under the outerancle, and is inferred into 
 the os metataiTi of the little toe. Its ufe is to 
 extend the tarfus and turn it outward. 
 
 Thele two hft mufcles, riding over the lower 
 end of the fibula, are often the caufe of a fprairi 
 in the outward ancle, when they are vehement- 
 ly exerted to fave a fall. Thefe feven mufcles 
 (which Window divides into nine) ferve to 
 move the tarfus and foot on the leg. 
 
 Which is the extenfor pollicis pedis 
 longus ? 
 
 A. The extenfor pollicis pedis longus arifes 
 from the upper and fore part of the fibula, and 
 the interofieous ligaments, and is inferted into 
 the lall bone of the great toe. This alfo bends 
 the tarfus with a much longer lever -than it 
 extends the toe. 
 
 Ch Which is the extenfor pollicis pedis 
 brevis ? 
 
 A. The extenfor pollicis pedis brevis, arifes 
 from the fore part of the os calcis, and foon be- 
 coming a long fender tendon, it pafles oblique- 
 ly over the upper part of the foot, and is in- 
 ferted into the fame place with the former. 
 
 Q. Which is tl>e flexor pollicis pedis longus ? 
 
 A. The flexor pollicis pedis longus, is an 
 antagonifl: to the extenfor longus, arifing op- 
 pofite to it from the back part of the fibula, 
 and its tendon pafllng under the inner ancle, is 
 inferted into the lafl; bone of the great toe. 
 This extends the tarfus, as well as bends the 
 toe. Cb Which 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 31 ^ 
 
 GU Which is th'e-flexor pollicis pedis brevis ? 
 
 A. The flexor pollicis pedis brevis arifcs from 
 the two leffer ofia cuneiformia the os cuboides 
 ^nd os calcis. This mufcle is inferred into the 
 ofla fefamoidea, which are tied by a ligament 
 to the firfl bone of the great toe, reckoning 
 only two bones to the great toe. Thefe muf- 
 cles bend the great toe. 
 
 Q. Which is the abdudtor pollicis pedis ? 
 
 A, The abdudor pollicis pedis arifes from 
 ■the 03 calcis and os naviculare, and paffing by 
 the os cuneiforme majus, and the external fe- 
 famoid bone of the great toe, it is inferted into 
 the firfl bone of the great toe. This mufcle is 
 lefs an abdudor than a flexor ; it aifo very 
 much helps to conflrid the foot length ways. 
 
 Which is the abdudor pollicis pedis 
 tranlverfalis ? 
 
 A. The abdudor pollicis pedis tranfverfalis 
 arifes from the lower end of the metatarfal bone 
 of the toe next the leafl, and is inferted into the 
 internal fefamoid bone. This truly is an ab- 
 dudor of the great toe, and helps to keep the 
 conflridor of the bottom of the foot. 
 
 Which is the excenfor digitorum pedis 
 longus ? 
 
 A. The extenfor digitorum pedis longus 
 arifes from the upper part of the tibia, and froiri 
 the fibula and interolfeous ligaments, then di- 
 viding into five tendons : four of them are 
 inferted into the fecond bone of each lelfer toe, 
 and the filth into the beginning of the metatar- 
 fal bone of the leafl toe. The four firft tendons 
 X 4 only 
 
312 anatomical 
 
 only of this mufcle extend the toes, but the 
 whole five bend the tarfus. 
 
 Q. Which is the extenfor digitorum brevis? 
 
 A. The extenfor digitorum brevis arifes, to- 
 gether with the extenfor pollicis brevis, from 
 the os calcis, and dividing into three fm.all ten- 
 dons, is inferred into the fecond joint of the 
 three toes next the great one. 
 
 The long extenfors of the toes ferve not 
 only to extend them, but alfo contribute to the 
 bending of the ancle; but the (hort extenfors 
 arifing below the ancle, extend the toes only. 
 
 Q. Which is the flexor digitorum pedis bre- 
 vis, vel perforatus pedis ? 
 
 A. The flexor digitorum pedis brevis, vel 
 perforatus pedis, is the flexor of the fecond pha- 
 lanx, and is the inmofl: of all the common muf- 
 cles of the toes. It arifes from the under and 
 back part of the os calcis, thence paffing to- 
 v/ards the four leffer toes, divided into four 
 tendons, v;hich are inferred into the beginning 
 of the fecond bone or phalanx of each of the 
 leffer toes. Thefe tendons are divided or per- 
 forated to let through the tendons of the fol- 
 lowing mufcles. 
 
 (T Which is the flexor digitorum pedis 
 longus, vel perforans ? 
 
 A. The flexor digitorum pedis longus, vel per- 
 forans, isthe flexorof the third phalanx. It arifes 
 from the back part of thetibia, above the infert ion 
 of the popliteus, and part of the fibula ; thence 
 defeending under the os calcis to the bottom 
 of the foot, it there becomes tendinous, often 
 
 croffes. 
 
dialogues. 
 
 353 
 
 CTofies, and in mod bodies communicates with 
 the flexor longus pollicis pedis •, then it divides 
 into four tendons, which pafs through thofe of 
 the flexor brevis, and are inferred into the third 
 bone of the four lefiTer toes. This mufcle alfo 
 extends the tarfus. 
 
 The fecond beginning of this mufcle arifes 
 from the os calcis, and joins the tendons where 
 they divide. This portion only bends the toes. 
 
 Q. Which is the lumb'ricales pedis r 
 
 A. The lumbricales pedis are the flexors of 
 the firfl; phalanx, and arife from the tendons 
 of the perforans ; they are inferred into the firfl; 
 bone of each of the leifertoes, which they bend^ 
 
 Q. Which is the abdudtor minimi digits 
 pedis ? 
 
 A. The abduflor minimi digit! pedis arifes 
 by the perforatus from the os caicis, and being 
 part of it inferted into the metatarfal bone of 
 the leafl toe, it receives another beginning 
 from the os cuboides, and is inferted into the 
 firfl: bone of the leaf!; toe, which it bends and 
 pulls outward, and very much helps to con- 
 ftridl the bottom of the foot. 
 
 Q Which is the abdudtcr fecundus minimi 
 digiti pedis ^ 
 
 A, The abduclor fecundus minimi digiti 
 pedis, arifes under the former mufde from the 
 metatarfal bone, and is inferred into the little 
 toe. 
 
 What are the interofiei pedis ? 
 
 A. The interofiei pedis are feven mufcles 
 like thofe of the hands, arifing like them from 
 
 the 
 
A N A T O M I C A L 
 
 SH 
 
 the metatarfal bones, and are inferted into the 
 laRr joints of the four kiHr toes being in their 
 progrefs attached to the tendons, which extend 
 the fecond joints of the toes, they will extend 
 .both thefe joints, Thefe mufclcs may be fitly 
 rdivided into externa! and internal ; the internal 
 alfo bend the firi’c joints, as do all the interolTei 
 in the hand ; but here the outer ones extend 
 the firft joints. The mufcles that move the 
 fingers and ielTer toes Tideways, are alike in 
 Eumber, though this motion of the toes is in a 
 manner loft from the ufe of flroes. The muf- 
 .-cles thaf: bend or extend the laft joints of the 
 toes, will alfo move the fecond and firft, and 
 thofe that move the fecond will alfo move the 
 firft, as they do in the fingers. 
 
 Q, What are the arteries of the leg ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the thigh, leg, and foot, 
 are, the arteria, cruralis, pudica externa, pop* 
 litea, tibialis, anterior et pofterior, vel furalis, 
 plantaris externa et interna, and peronsa, 
 
 Q. Which is the arteria cruralis ? 
 
 A. The iliac artery (which fee) gOes out of 
 the abdomen, -between the ligamentum Fallopii 
 and tendon of the pfoas, at the union of the os 
 ilium and os pubis, and there it takes the name 
 of arteria cruralis. It fends off, firft of all, 
 three fmall branches •, one of which, called pu- 
 •dica externa, goes over the crura! vein to the 
 dim and ligament of the penis, and to the in- 
 guinal glands, communicating with the pudica 
 interna, 'i he fecond branch goes to the muT- 
 ciilus pedlineus : and the third, to the upper 
 part of the lartorius. All thefe branches fur- 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 3^5 
 
 nifli likewife the neighbouring anterior integu- 
 ments. Afterwards the crural artery runs clowii 
 on the head of the os femoris, and gets on the 
 infide of the crural vein, about three fingers 
 breadth from where it goes out of the abdo- 
 men. In this progrefs it is covered only by the 
 Ikin and fat, and lies on the pedtineus and tri- 
 ceps femoris. In changing its fituadon, it 
 fends out the three following confiderable 
 branches: the external branch runs on the up- 
 per fide of the thigh to the crureus vaflus ex- 
 ternus, reclus tibis, fafcia lata, and glutsus 
 medius. The middle brancli runs down ori 
 the infide of the thigh, between the heads of 
 the triceps, to which rnufcle it is diftributed, a 
 ramification of which perforates the triceps, and 
 is diftributed to the glutseus maximus, femi- 
 tendinofus, femimembranofus, biceps, and to 
 the neighbouring integuments. The internal 
 branch runs backward on the quadrigemini, 
 towards the great trochanter •, and having fent 
 a branch into the joint of the os femoris, it 
 then runs downward, and is ramified on all the 
 mufcles that lie on the backfide of that bone, 
 one of which enters the bone itfelf on one fide 
 of the I'nea afpera. — The arteria cruralis hav- 
 ing detached all thefe branches, runs down be- 
 tween the fartorius, vaftus internus, and tri- 
 ceps, giving branches to all the parts near ic. 
 It is covered by the lanorius all the way t > the 
 lower part of the thigh, where it is ii;flccled 
 backward over the triceps a little above the 
 internal condyle of the os femoris. Afterward 
 
 continuint^ 
 
2i6 anatomical 
 
 continuing its comi'e through the hollow of 
 tiie ham, it is called poplitea. 
 
 How is the arceria poplitea diftributed ? 
 
 A. The arteria poplitea, while in the ham, 
 is covered only by the integument, fending off 
 branches toward each fide, fome to the joint of 
 rlie knee, one of which, at leaft, paffes between 
 the crucial ligaments. As it runs down it fends 
 branches to the gaftrocnemii and popliteus *, 
 and at the backfide of the head of the tibia, 
 fends off’ a branch to each fide. Before the 
 poplitea ends, it fends a fmall artery down on 
 the backfide of the interoffeous ligament, very 
 near the tibia, into which it enters by a parti- 
 cular hole a little above the middle portion of 
 the bone. As the poplitea ends, it divides into 
 two principal branches, one of which runs be- 
 tween the heads of the tibia and fibula, pafflng_ 
 from behind forwards on the interoffeous liga- 
 ment, where it takes the name of tibialis ante- 
 rior. The fecond branch divides into two 
 others, the interna! and largeft called tibialis 
 pofterior the other named peronsea pofferior. 
 
 Q,Ho vv is the arteria tibialis anterior dif- 
 tributed ? 
 
 •A. The arteria tibialis anterior, having pafied 
 between the heads of the tibia and fibula, lends 
 i'mall branches upward and laterally After- 
 v/ards this tibial artery runs down on the fore 
 fide of the interoffeous ligament, tov/ard the 
 outiide of the tibia, betv,?ccn the mufcultis ti- 
 bialis anticus and extenfor poliicis, for about 
 two-thirds of the length of the tibia, when it 
 
 paffes 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 317 
 
 paflcs on the forefide, under the common an- 
 nular ligament, and excenlor pollicis pedis, to 
 the articulation of the foot ; which giving off 
 feveral branches to the right and left, and com- 
 municating with the tibialis pofterior and pe- 
 rontea pofterior, fo that thefe two are in a man- 
 ner furrounded by arteries. At the joint of 
 the foot it fends out branches, which run be- 
 tween the aftragalus and os calcis, being dif- 
 tributed to the articulation and to the bones of 
 the tarfus : the communications are here very 
 numerous on all fides. Having paffed the fold 
 of the foot, it fends off other branches on both 
 fides, which communicating with others, make 
 a kind of circle round the tarfus. Afterwards 
 the tibialis anterior advances on the convex 
 fide of the foot, as far as the interftice between 
 the firft and fecond metatarfal bones •, between 
 the heads of which, a large branch of it per- 
 forates the fuperior interoffeous mufcles, and 
 forms an arch on the fide of the foot. It like- 
 wife fends two or three confiderable branches 
 over the other metatarfal bones. Laftly, this 
 artery terminates by two principal branches, 
 one of which goes to the thenar, and infide of 
 the great toe *, the other is fpent upon the out- 
 fide of the great toe, and the middle of the fe- 
 cond toe. 
 
 Q. How is the tibialis pofterior, vel furalis, 
 diftributed ? 
 
 A, The tibialis pofterior, vel furalis, pro- 
 ceeding from the poplitea, as before obfervcd, 
 runs down between the foltei, tibialis pofticus, 
 4 flexor 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 flexor tiigitorum communis and flexor pollicisi 
 giving branches to thefe mulcles, to the tibia, 
 and to the marrow of that bone, through a 
 particular canal in its pofterior and upper part. 
 Afterwards it runs behind the inner ancle, 
 communicating with the tibialis anterior, then 
 pafll's to the idle of the foot, and divides into 
 two branches, one large or external, and the 
 other fmall or internal, called plantaris exter- 
 na,- et plantaris interna, 
 
 The great branch, or plantaris externa, pafles 
 on the concave fide of the os calcis, obliquely 
 under the foie of the foot, to the bafis of the 
 fifth metatarial bone, and from thence runs in 
 a kind of arch toward the great toe ; the con- 
 vex fide Of this arch fupplies both fldes of the 
 lad three toes, and the outfide of the fecond 
 toe, fornting fmall communicating arches at the 
 end, and fometimes at the middle of each toe, 
 as in the liand. The concave fide of the arch 
 furniflies the neighbouring parts. 
 
 1 he fmall branch, or arteria plantaris inter- 
 na, having reached beyond the middle of the 
 foie of the foot, is divided into tvvo •, one goes 
 to the great toe, the other to the firPe phalanges 
 of the other toes, c jmmunicating with the ra- 
 mifiCutions from the arch already mentioned. 
 Q: How is the perons’a diftributed ? 
 
 A. The arteria peronasa, proceeding from 
 the popiitea as before mentioned, runs d^wn 
 ■tjii the backfide of the fibula, between the fo- 
 iaeus and flexor pollicis, to which, and to the 
 ire ghboLiring parts, it gives branches in iespaf- 
 
 fage 
 
|3 f A L O G U E S. 
 
 319 
 
 fage all the way down to the os calcis, where 
 it forms an arch with the tibialis poilerior, be- 
 tween the adragalus and the tendo achillis j’ 
 from thence it runs outward, and a iiede above 
 the outer ancle communicates with the tibialis 
 anterior by an arch, which fends feveral rami- 
 fications to the neighbouring parrs. 
 
 !n the -delcription of the arteries throughout 
 this work, I have faid nothing of the cutaneous 
 anafiomofes, which areexceedingly beautiful in 
 the fetus ; nor of the frequent and confiderable' 
 communications of fmall arteries upon the pe- 
 riofteiim, which form a delicate kind of net- 
 work. 
 
 Q. What are the veins of the leg ? 
 
 A, The veins of the thigh, leg, and foot,' 
 are the vena cruralis, faphena, iciatica, faphe- 
 na minor, poplitea, tibialis anterior etpoReriorg 
 vel furalis, piantares, and peronea. 
 
 Ch Which is the crural vein ? 
 
 A, The vena cruralis goes out under the 
 ligainentum Fallopii, on the infide of the crural 
 artery, and immediately gives fmall branches 
 to the inguinal glands, rnufculus pecSbineus, 
 and parts of generation, which laft are termed 
 pudics externae. About an inch belotv where 
 it leaves the abdomen, it produces a large 
 branch, which runs down anteriorh/ betweerv 
 the inteKuments and ch.e fartoiius aimofi; all 
 
 O 
 
 the way to the infide of the thigh, and from 
 the condy'es of the os femoris, it runs between 
 the integuments and inner angle of the tibia to 
 the fore part of the inner arcle^ and is difei- 
 5 bv.tcd' 
 
320 ANATOMICAL 
 
 buted to the foot under the name of vena fa- 
 phena, or faphena major. After giving out 
 the faphena, the cruralis finks in between the 
 rnufcles, and is diftributed to all the inner or 
 deep parts of the lower extremity, accompany- 
 ing the crural artery to the very extremity of 
 the foot, being all along more confiderable than 
 the artery. 
 
 How is the vena faphena, or faphena 
 major, diftributed ? 
 
 A. The faphena major, arifing from the 
 cruralis, as before-mentioned, in its pafifage 
 /rom the inguen to the foot, is covered only by 
 the fkin and fat ^ and after fupplying the in- 
 ferior inguinal glands and integuments, it runs 
 down on the thigh as low as the middle of the 
 fartorius,. vdiere it fends off feveral branches ; 
 and a little below the ham it runs in among 
 the mufcles fituated there, and communicates 
 with another branch, which may be termed 
 faphena minor Afterwards the trunk of the 
 great faphena runs down on the infide of the 
 tibia, lying alvi/ays near the flcin ; and at the 
 upper part of that bone, it fends branches for- 
 Vj'ard, optward, and backward. The anterior 
 branches go to the integuments on the upper 
 part of the leg-, the pofterior, to thofe which 
 cover the gafterocnemii, and the external 
 branches alfo to the fat and integuments. 
 About the middle of the tibia, it gives out a 
 branch anteriorly, which runs along the integu- 
 ments of the tibia all the way to the outer an- 
 cle : and as the faphena runs down on the in- 
 
 fide 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 321 
 
 fide of the tibia, it fends off branches to the 
 neighbouring parts, and to the periofteum of 
 the bone. At the lower part of the tibia, the 
 faphena fends out a confiderable branch ob* 
 f quely forward over the joint of the tarfus, 
 toward the outer ancle, fending off feveral 
 branches. Laftly, the extremity of this trunk 
 pafles on the forefide of the inner ancle, and 
 runs under the fkin along the interftiee, be- 
 tween the firft tv/o metatarfal bones toward the 
 great toe, where the vein terminates ; but be- 
 fore it terminates at the great toe, it forms a 
 kind of arch over the metatarfus, which com- 
 municates by feveral branches with the arch 
 on the joint of the tarfus, and fends others to 
 the toes. 
 
 Q. Which is the vena fciatica 
 
 A. The fciatic vein ariles from the crural, 
 about the upper extremity of the mufculus 
 vaftus internus, and runs down on the fide of 
 the crural trunk, covering the crural artery, 
 aJmoft as low as the ham, where it is again 
 united to the trunk by an anafiomofis. It has 
 the name of fciatica from the fciatic nerve which 
 it accompanies. 
 
 Which is the vena faphena minor, and 
 how diftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena faphena minor, vel externa, arifes 
 on the outfide of the anaftomofis of the fciatic 
 with thecrural before mentioned, and runs back- 
 ward between the biceps and neighbouring muf- 
 cles, and fo down the backfide of the leg, very 
 near the fkin, all the way to the outer ancle. In 
 Y its 
 
322 ANATOMICAL 
 
 its courfe downward it fends off a branch about 
 the rr.iddle of the backfide of the thigh ■, and 
 immediately above and below the ham, this 
 vein fends out other branches, which all com- 
 municate with the faphena major. About the 
 beginning of the tendon achillis the little fa- 
 phena runs outward in the integuments, toward 
 the outer ancles, where it terminates in cutane- 
 ous ramifications fent to every fide. 
 
 CX Which is the vena poplitea ? 
 
 A. Ihe crural vein, a little above the ham, 
 takes the name of poplitea, and as it runs down 
 between the two condyles, it gives branches to 
 the flexor mufcles of the leg, and is ramified 
 like the artery : afterwards it lofes its name, 
 being divided into three confiderable branches, 
 called tibialis anterior, tibialis pofterior, and 
 peronaea j of which the tibialis pofterior is moft 
 frequently a continuation of the trunk, and 
 the other tv/o like branches. 
 
 Q. How is the tibialis anterior diftributed ? 
 
 A. The tibialis anterior, having fent fome 
 fmall branches to the mufcles behind the heads 
 of the two bones of the leg, perforates the in- 
 teroffeous ligament, and runs between the ki- 
 perior pcftions of the mufculus tibialis anticus, 
 and extenfordigitorum pedis, fending off fmall 
 fuperheial branches to the head of the tibia and 
 fibula, and to the joint of the knee, which com- 
 municate with the lateral branches of the po- 
 plitea •, afterwards it divides into two or three 
 branches, which, with the anterior tibial artery, 
 furrounds it by fmall communicating circles. 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 3 ’-3 
 
 Thefe branches, having reached the lower ex- 
 tremity of the leg, unite in one, which are af- 
 terwards ramified in the foot. 
 
 How is the vena tibialis pofierior, vel 
 furalis, diftributed ? 
 
 A. The pofterior tibial vein fends off a 
 branch from its origin toward the infide, to the 
 galterocnemii and folteus mufcles, named fura- 
 lis. Afterward the pofterior tibialis runs down 
 between the folteus and tibialis pofticus, giving 
 branches to each of them. It is divided in the 
 fame manner as the tibialis anterior, and ac- 
 companies the artery as low as the outer ancle, 
 furnilhing the mufculus tibialis pofticus, and 
 the long fiexors of the toes. Lalfly, it paffes 
 on the infide of the os calcis, under the foie of 
 the foot, where it forms the vena plantares, 
 fending ramifications to the toes nearly in the 
 fame manner as the arterite plantares. 
 
 How is the vena perontea diftributed ? 
 
 A. The vena perontea is likewife double, 
 and fometimes triple, and proceeds from the 
 poplitea, as before obferved : it runs down on 
 the infide of the fibula, in the fame manner as 
 the arteria perontea, which it likewife fur- 
 rounds, by communicating branches, after the 
 manner of the tibiales. It runs down as low 
 as the outer ancle, fending ramifications to the 
 mufeuli peron^i, and long fiexors of the toes. 
 
 Q. What are the nerees of the leg ? 
 
 A. The principal nerves are the crural and 
 fciatic. The anterior crural nerve is formed 
 by the union of branches, from the firft, ft- 
 Y 2 cond. 
 
324 ANATOMICAL' 
 
 cond, third, and fourth lumbar nerves, which 
 running along the mufculus plbas, efcapes with 
 the large blood veflels out of the abdi>men, and 
 is diflributed to the mufcles and teguments 
 on the fore part of the thigh ; one branch of 
 this crural nerve accompanies the vena faphena 
 as far as the ancle. The fituation of the kid- 
 ney upon, and the courfe of the ureter over 
 thefe nerves, is the rcafon that in a nephritis 
 the trunk of the body cannot be raifed ereft 
 without great pain, that the thigh lofes its 
 fenfibility, and that it is drawn forwards. The 
 remainder of the fourth and the fifth lumbar 
 nerves join with the firft, fecond, and third that 
 proceed from the os facrum ; thefe five, when 
 united, conftitnte the largeft nerve of the bo- 
 dy, fo well known by the name of fciatic, or 
 ifchiatic nerve, which feems to be bigger in 
 proportion than the nerves of any other part. 
 When this nerve is obftrudled, we fee how un- 
 able we are to fupport ourfelves, or to walk. 
 
 The fciatic nerve then goes out at the large 
 hollow, behind the great tubercle of the os 
 ifchium, and pafiing over the quadrigemini 
 mufdes, runs down the pofterior parr of the 
 tlfigh, giving off every where as it goes nerves 
 to the teguments and mufcles of the thigh and 
 leg. At the ham it fplits into two, the fnialler 
 mounting over the fibula, and ferving the pe- 
 ronffii, flexores pedis, and extenfores digi- 
 torum, is continued to the toes ; the larger 
 trunk finks under the gafterocnemii, and then 
 divides •, one is fpenton the mufcles of the back 
 3 of 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 325 
 
 of the leg and teguments, while the other is 
 continued by the inner ancle to the foot, and 
 then fubdivides •, one branch is diftributed af- 
 ter the fame manner as the ulnaris, and the 
 other as the radialis in the hand. 
 
 Q. What are the glands of the leg ? 
 
 A. The principal are the inguinal glands, 
 fituated in each fide in the groin, near the cru- 
 ral vefTels, and are in various difeafes apt to 
 grow tumid and inflamed. Abfceflfes are often 
 formed in them ; but their life in the body is 
 not eafily underftood. 
 
 About the flexure of the knee and foot, there 
 are alfo found here and there fome fmall glands ; 
 as alfo in fomc places between and among the 
 mufclesj but thefe are here omitted, for the 
 reafon 1 have before mentioned. 
 
 DIALOGUE VIIL 
 
 Of the Parts of Generation in both Sexes. 
 
 HAT are the parts of generation in 
 
 A. The parts of generation in men, are the 
 teftes, veflculs feminales, proftats, and penis ; 
 to which may be added the urethra, common 
 to both men and women. 
 
 Q_ What are the teftes ? 
 
 Y 3 
 
 A. The 
 
ANATOMICAL 
 
 St6 
 
 A. The teftes, or tefticles, feparate the feed 
 from the blood, and are two oval bodies feated 
 in the fcrotum, which is the external coat or 
 covering, made op of the epidermis and cutis, 
 and immediately under the latter is a thick cel- 
 lular texture clofely adhering to it. The loofe 
 membrane immediately underneath the fcrotum 
 is called dartos, which invelopes each tefticle 
 fingly, and forms a feptum or partition between 
 the two : it is alfo wholly cellular, without 
 rnufcular fibres, and without fat. Under the 
 dartos is the cremafber mufcle, (fee page 189,) 
 one to each tefticle : it is probably owing to 
 the adlion of this mufcle, that the fcrotum is 
 gathered up into ruga;: by cold , as neither the 
 fcrotum nor dartos ate furnifned with rnufcular 
 fibres, as before obfeived. Under this mufcle 
 is the nrft of the proper integuments, or coats, 
 calhd proceiTus vaginalis, tunica vaginalis, and 
 elythroides *, vrhich is formed by the dilatation of 
 the produdlions of the external membranes of 
 the peritonseum through the abdominal rings ; 
 this coat is contii ueci iroin the peritonaeum to 
 the tefticU, vrhich it embraces looiely, the 
 ■whole body of the tefticle adhering to one end 
 of the epididymis hereafter mentioned : it en- 
 clofes. the l]jermatic veins and arteries, termed 
 vafa preparantia ; and likewife thofe veffels 
 ■w'hich convty the femcn from the tefticles to 
 the veficulm feminales, called vafa deferentia; 
 but it ii divided by a feptum, or an adhefion 
 immediately above the tefticle, fo that no li- 
 quor can pafs out of that part of this mem- 
 brane 
 
DIALOGUES. 327 
 
 brane (which enclofes the fpermatic veffels) 
 into that which enclofes the teflicie. Large 
 quantities of water (which is termed the hy- 
 drops teftis) are fometimes found in either or 
 both of thefe cavities, which difeafe is eafily 
 remedied by a pundlure with a lancet, but 
 rarely cured without opening the cavity where 
 the water is contained, as in finuous ulcers : 
 the true hernia aquofa is from the abdomen, 
 which either extends the peritoneum into the 
 fcrotum, or breaks it, and then form.s a new 
 membrane, which thickens as it extends, as in 
 the aneurifmal and atheromatous tumors. The 
 dropfy in this cyft, for fuch it properly is, rare- 
 ly admits of aiore than a palliative cure, by 
 pundure or tapping, like the dropfy of the 
 abdomen, and this with fome difficulty, be- 
 caufe the omentum ufually, and fometimes the 
 gut, defcends with it. The other proper and 
 laft coat, which immediately enclofes the tef- 
 ticles, is called albuginea, from its white co- 
 lour *, it is ftrong and thick, very fmooth and 
 equal : and the branches of the vafa preparan- 
 tia are finely weaved upon it. The fubftance, 
 or kernelly part of the tefticles, is of a white 
 colour, and of a pretty firm texture, univer- 
 fally allowed to be a continuation of the eva- 
 nefcent branches of the fpermatic artery, rolled 
 up together. It is dividetl into more than 
 twenty portions or clufters, feparated from one 
 another by as many partitions, which are pro- 
 dudions of the albuginea ; each cinder be- 
 tween two partitions terminates in one dud, 
 Y 4 which 
 
318 ANATOMICAL 
 
 vvliich duds (above twenty in number) meet- 
 ing together, form a kind of net-work adher- 
 ing to the albuginea: from this net-work arife 
 ten or twelve other diftind duds, which unit- 
 ing, conkitute the head or beginning of the 
 epididymis •, and quickly by their conflex form 
 one larger dud ; this fingle dud makes a 
 roundifh hard body on the upper and pofterior 
 part of the tekicle, called epididymis, as it were 
 an additional tefticle ; and at length terminates 
 in the vas deferens, from whence it is evident 
 the epididymi are the beginning of the vafa de- 
 ferentia, which are excretory duds to carry 
 the elaborated feed into the veficulas feminales. 
 They pafs from the epididymi of the tefticles, 
 together with the blood vefiels, through the 
 abdominal rings, all enveloped in one common 
 Iheath (the tunica vaginalis; called the fperma- 
 tic cord or rope. When they have entered the 
 abdomen, they feparate from the fpermatic 
 vefiels, and pafs diredly through the pelvis, 
 clofe to the bladder, to the veficulm feminales. 
 d he fpermatic veins and arteries are termed 
 vafa preparantia, as belore obferved : the fper- 
 matic artery (one on each fide) arifes from the 
 aorta defeendens inferior, as mentioned in the 
 defeription of that artery : it is the fmalleft ar- 
 tery in the whole body for the length it runs: 
 the fpermatic veins accompany the arteries 
 through the abdominal rings to the teftis : and 
 as there is no red blood found in the fubftance 
 of the teflis within the albuginea, moft cer- 
 tainly fccretion begins immediately upon the 
 
 entry 
 
dialogues. 
 
 $29 
 
 entry of the arterial twigs into that fubftance : 
 thefe arteries, unlike all others, arife fmall, and 
 dilate in their progrefs, that the velocity of the 
 blood may be fufficiently abated for the fecre- 
 tion of fo vifeid a fluid as the feed. The right 
 tefticle returns its vein into the cava, and liie 
 left into the emuUenc vein on the fame flde as 
 before mentioned •, both becau'e it is the rea- 
 dieft courfe, and becaufe this fpermatic vein 
 may not be obliged to crofs the aorta, whofe 
 pulle would be lubjedt to ftop the blood, which 
 returns from the teflticles very flowly, by rea- 
 fon of the narrov/ orifices of the fpermatic ar- 
 teries, and the largenefs of the veins. The 
 teflicles have many lymphmdudls, which dif- 
 charge themfelves into the inguinal glands* 
 Their nerves come from the intercoftal, and 
 twenty- firfl: of the fpine. The fpermatic ar- 
 teries carry the blood from the aorta to tl e 
 teflicles, which feparate that pait of it which 
 is fit for feed. The veins carry back to the 
 cava what blood remains after the fecretion of 
 the feed. The feed is farther purified in the 
 epididymes, and in coition is carried by the 
 vafa deferentia into the urethra. 
 
 What are the veficulm feminales ? 
 
 A. The veficuls feminales are two mem- 
 branous bags or receptacles, one on each flde, 
 Ctuated at the lower and poftcrior part of the 
 neck of the bladder, into which the femen is 
 received from the vas deferens, and there de- 
 pofited and accumulated, till it is thrown ouc 
 by the urethra in the venereal aft. They are 
 
 each 
 
"530 ANATOMICAL 
 
 each of them one uninterrupted cavity, fhut at 
 one end, and fending out a du6l at the other, 
 into which du6t the vas deferens opens. The 
 external membrane is made up of mufcular 
 fibres, which in time of coition contrad and 
 prefs the veficulae, ejeding the feed through 
 the proftate glands into the urethra. 
 
 The feed paffes in time of coition from the 
 vafa deferentia, as well as from thefe recepta- 
 cles ; for when the duds into the urethra are 
 diftended, that is the dired courfe from the vafa 
 deferentia, as well as from the vefculte feminales. 
 
 Q. What are the prolfatte ? 
 
 A. The proftatse are two glands, or rather 
 one, about the fize of a walnut. Thefe glands 
 lie between the veficulae feminales and penis., 
 imder the ofia pubis, almoft within the pelvis, 
 furrounding and clolely embracing the begin- 
 ning of the urethra, 'i hey feparate a limpid 
 glutinous humour, which is carried into the 
 urethra by feveral duds, which enter near thole 
 of the profiatte. I'his liquor is thrown into 
 the urethra in the ad of generation, along w ith 
 the femen, and is mixed with it, to make it 
 How more eafily. If . the venereal infedion 
 reaches the proftate glands, it will fometimes 
 make large abfeefies, v/hich are apt to form fi- 
 nufes, and even make a pafiage into the blad- 
 der. It is often cured by opening the finufes, 
 and confuming the difeafed parts by efeharo- 
 rics : but a much better and eafier way is to 
 cut outail the fiftulousand difeafed parts aconce. 
 What is the penis ? 
 
 A. The 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 3U 
 
 A. The fhape, fituatlon, and ufe of the pe- 
 nis are fo well known, as to need no defcrip- 
 tion. The fnbftance of the penis is compofed 
 of two fpongious bodies, called corpora caver- 
 nofa, part of the urethra, the glans or nut at 
 its extremity, and its integuments. I'he two 
 corpora cavernofa, vel fpongiofa, (which dur- 
 ing eredtion make the chief bulk of the 
 penis) arife from the os pubis, on each fide, 
 and are continued to the root of the glans ; 
 they arife diftindt, but are foon after united, 
 divided only by a feptum its whole length ; it 
 is ftrongly connedled to the os pubis by a fmall 
 ligament, which arifes from its back. They 
 take their name from being porous likefponge, 
 and capable of being enlarged by the blood 
 penetrating their fubftance, which forms a fort 
 of loofe net-work internally, upon which the 
 branches of the blood veileis are curiouHy 
 fpread. When the blood is flopped in the 
 great' veins of the penis, that v.?hich comes by 
 the arteries runs through feveral fmall boles in 
 the fide of their capillary branches into the ca- 
 vities of the net" work, bp which means the cor- 
 pora- cavernofa become difiended, and the pe- 
 nis eredted. 
 
 The. glands of the penis, though in appear- 
 ance a pare of its body, is in reality a conti- 
 nuation of the fpongy fubflance of the urethra, 
 refledled over its extremity, and expanded in 
 the form we fee. It is covered over with a 
 thih epidermis, under which there are nume- 
 rous nervous papillce, which render it extreme- 
 ly 
 
332 ANATOMICAL 
 
 ly fenfible. The integuments of the penis are 
 firft the cuticula and cutis, which being 
 folded back, and adhering round the root of 
 the glans, form the praepucium or tore-fKin j 
 the fmall ligament, by which the prmputium 
 is tied to the other fide of the glans, is called 
 frmnum: the ule of the prmput urn is to keep 
 the glans foft and moift, that it may have the 
 more exquifite fenfe. Under t!ie common inte- 
 gument above mentioned the penis hath a 
 proper coat covering all its body, from the 
 glans exclufive backwards : it is of a tough 
 tendinous texture. On the upper fide of the 
 penis are two arteries, and one vein called vena 
 ipfius penis. The arteries are derived from 
 the hypogaftrics, and the vein runs alfo back 
 to the iliac veins. It has two nerves from the 
 os facrum, and feveral lymphatics, which empty 
 themfelves into the inguinal glands. 
 
 What is the urethra ? 
 
 A. The urethra is a canal which runs along 
 the under- fide of the corpora cavernofa, through 
 which both the urine and feed pafs v it begins 
 at the neck of the bladder, and runs in a fur- 
 row between the two corpora fpongiofa penis 
 to the extremity of the glans. Its whole length, 
 without the ercftion of the penis, is about 
 twelve or thirteen inches : its thicknefs about 
 that of a goofe quill. It confilts of two thick 
 ftrong membranes, with a fpongy texture be- 
 tween them ; its beginning at the neck of the 
 bladder, is furrounded and covered by .'he 
 proftats, as hath been faid j at its emerfion 
 
 from 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 333 
 
 from which gland it becomes thicker and wider 
 for the length of an inch, which thick part is 
 called its bulb, from the refemblance it bears 
 to a bulbous root. Its . inner membrane is 
 pierced with many holes here and there, thro’ 
 which, from a glandular apparatus in the 
 fpongy fubftance of the urethra, a mucilagi- 
 nous liquor is furnifhed, ferving to defend it 
 againft the acrimony of the urine. Befides 
 thefe orihccs, which fome call lacunte, Cowper, 
 in a particular treatife, hath defcribed and beau- 
 tifully delineated three glands, two near the 
 bulb of the urethra, one on each fide, about 
 the bignefs of a pea, and a third, lefs than the 
 other two, at the bending of the urethra, under 
 the os pubis. The firft two are often found ; 
 but fometimes wanting or very fmall : the 
 third is but feldom met with by the befi; ana- 
 romifts. Where they exilf, they probably 
 ferve for the fame ufe as the other lacuns. 
 Women, though their urethra is fhorcer and 
 wider, are not without the fame kind of la- 
 cunae, ferving for the fame ufe, and liable to 
 the fame infedtion I thall prefently mention. 
 All thefe glands have excretory dudls into the 
 urethra, and from them are fecreted all the mat- 
 ter which flows from the urethra in a gonor- 
 rhaea, whether venereal or not. In the vene- 
 real infection, the urethra and the glands are 
 firft inflamed by the contagious matter, that 
 caufes a heat of urine, which abates as foon as 
 the glands begin to difeharge freely ; but if by 
 chance this ddeafe continues till any part of the 
 
 urethra 
 
33+ ANATOMICAL 
 
 urethra i‘i ulcerated, the ulcer never heals with- 
 out a cicatrix, which conftri6ls the urethra, and 
 occafions what is vulgarly called a caruncle. 
 
 Q. What are the parts of generation proper 
 to women ? 
 
 A. The parts of generation proper to wo- 
 men are generally divided into external and 
 internal. The external parts of generation in 
 women are the mons veneris, which is that 
 riling of fat covered with hair, above the vulva 
 or rima magna, upon the os pubis ■, the great 
 doubling of the lldn on each fide the rima is 
 called labia pudendi, which is only the fidn 
 fwelled by the fat underneath. Thefe lips be- 
 ing a little feparated, there appear the nymphte, 
 one on each fide the rima. In the angle which 
 the nymphse form in the great chink next the 
 os pubis, is the extremity of the clitoris, ftrait 
 under which appears the meatus urinarius, or 
 orifice of the urethra. On the oppofite fide 
 next the anus are the glanduls myrtiforrnes, 
 fituated in the fofia magna, or interior cavity 
 of the pudendum muliebre*, and in this angle 
 of the chink, there is a ligament called the 
 fork, which is torn in the firft birth, 
 
 Q. What are the nymphs ? 
 
 A. The nyrnjrhs are two membranous parts, 
 fituated interiorly on each fide the rima •, thefe 
 two final 1 bodies are red, and fomewhat refem- 
 ble the membranes, or watdes under- a cock’s 
 throat ; they are fometimes fmaller, fomecimes 
 larger, and arc continuous to the praeputium of 
 the clitoris. The nymphs are fpongious in 
 2 * their 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 335 
 
 their infernal fubftance, and full of blood vef- 
 fels, and therefore cheyfwellin coition •, they 
 receive vefiels and nerves as the clitoris. The 
 nymphas are full of nervous papills-, whence 
 their quick fenfe : they have alfo fmall glands 
 that fecrete a fatty matter. Their ufe feems 
 to be to increafe the pleafure in coition to di- 
 rehl the courfe of the urine •, and to defend the 
 internal parts from external injuries. They are 
 bigger in married women than in maids. The 
 nymphse are fometimes fo large, as not only to 
 hang without the labia pudendi, but alfo to 
 prove very troublefome, fo as to require extir- 
 pation. Though this operation is rarely found 
 neceflary in our parts of the world, but is fre- 
 quently prablifed in the Eaft,; being properly 
 the circumcifion of women. 
 
 What is the clitoris ? 
 
 A. The clitoris, (which fome call mentula 
 muliebris) is fituated in the fore part of the 
 vulva, at the angle which the nymphte form 
 with each other. It is generally about the 
 bignefs of the uvula, and its fliape much refem- 
 bles the fliape of that part, yet it is fometimes 
 found as large as the penis : but even in this 
 cafe it has no urethra •, for though it has a glars 
 like the penis, it is not perforared. The pre- 
 puce, covering tl:e glans of the clitoris, is 
 formed of the cutis of the pudendum, and fur- 
 nifhed with nervous papHire; hence u is of cx- 
 quifite fenfibility to the touch. 1 he clitoris, 
 in its common natural date, lies entirely buried 
 under the fltin or prepuce ; no pait of it ap- 
 pearing 
 
33^ ANATOMICAL 
 
 pearing but its extremity covered with the 
 prteputium. The fubftance of the clitoris is 
 compofed of two fpongious bodies, fuch as 
 thole of the penis; they arife diftinfUy from 
 the lower part of the os pubis, and foon after 
 unite and form the body of the clitoris and its 
 glans, which is of exquifite fenfe, as already 
 mentioned. Before thefe fpongious bodies 
 unite, they are called crura, as thofe of the 
 penis : the two mufcles which are faid to ere6b 
 the clitoris in coition, in the fame manner as 
 the mufcles of the penis eredt that part, are 
 already fpoken of. I'he glans of the clitoris 
 is ufually covered with a foetid matter, like 
 that of the glans of the penis. It is alfo con- 
 nedfed to the os pubis, by a ligament, in the 
 fame manner as the penis is in men. The cli- 
 toris receives veins and arteries from the hs- 
 rnorrhoidal veffels and the pudenda ; and nerves 
 from the intercoftals, which are fikewil'e dif- 
 tributed through all the parts of the vulva. 
 The Life of the clitoris is to produce a titillation 
 in coition, and it is faid to be the chief feat of 
 pleafure to women in that adt, as the glans is 
 in men. 
 
 What are the internal parts of generation 
 in women ? 
 
 A. TIlc internal parts of generation in wo- 
 men are the vagina, uterus or womb, ovaries, 
 and Fallopian tubes. A little lower than the 
 clitoris, between it and the vagina, or rather juft 
 within the vagina, is the orifice of the urethra, 
 termed meatus urinarius. The urethra in wo- 
 men 
 
dialogues. 
 
 337 
 
 men is the fame as in men, only fhorter, wider, and 
 more ftraic •, it is naturally as big as a goofe-quill. 
 
 Q. What is the vagina ? 
 
 A. The vagina, or neck of the womb, is a 
 large canal which reaches from the external 
 orifice, or os pudendi, to the internal mouth of 
 the uterus. It is ufually about five or fix fin- 
 gers breadth long in maids, and one and a half 
 broad ; but it varies in different fubjedts, and 
 in married women who have borne children *, 
 its length and bignefs cannot be determined, 
 becaufe it lengthens in the time a woman is 
 with child, and it dilates in the time of birth. 
 The texture of the vagina is membranous, be- 
 ing compofed of two membranes, of which the 
 inner, which lines its cavity, is nervous, and 
 full of wrinkles and fulci, eipeclally in its fore 
 part. It has three or four imall glands on that 
 fide next the redtum, which pour into it a vif- 
 cous humour in time of copulation. The ru- 
 gae or wrinkles of this m.embrane, are for the 
 fridlion of the balanus or glans penis, to increafe 
 the pleafure in coition, both to the man and 
 woman ; and to render the part capable of the 
 neceffary dilatation in parturition. Thefe rugs 
 are largeft in maids ; in married women they 
 are much fainter, and feem as if worn down ; 
 and in women who have borne children, they 
 are aimoft entirely obliterated. The external 
 membrane of the vagina is made of mufcular 
 fibres, which, as occafion requires, dilate and 
 contradf, become long or Ihort, for adjufling 
 its cavity to the length and bignefs of the p^nis. 
 
 Z The 
 
3^8 ANATOMICAL 
 
 The lower part, or orifice of the vagina, is con- 
 traded with a rphinder that it may grafp the 
 penis clofely : (See rniifcul. fphinder, a- 
 ginae) and to the abundance of nervous p- ■ s 
 in the inner membrane, is owing itsqir,k. i n- 
 fation. The ofcular orifices of the ei^fcietory 
 duds of the glands, fituated under the rugse 
 of the vagina before mentioned, are called la- 
 cunae : thefe glands are the feat of a gonorrhoea 
 in women, as the glands in the urethra are in 
 the male. The vagina receives veins and ar- 
 teries from the hypogaftric and hemorrhoidal 
 vefiels. It has nerves from the os facrum. ' 
 Near the beginning of the vagina, imnte- 
 diately behind the orifice of the meatus urina- 
 rius, is fituated a valve, called Hymen, (from 
 the god of marriage, in the heathen mytholo- 
 gy) which commonly paffes among us fora 
 tell of virginity. The following is Mr. Chefel- 
 den’s defcription of it : the hymen is a valve 
 conftantly found in the vagina of children, 
 which, looking towards the orifice of the va- 
 gina, dofes it, but as children grow up, and 
 the fphinder vaginae grows ftrong enough to 
 contrad and dole the orifice of the vagina, this 
 valve becoming ufelefs ceafes to encreafe, and 
 is there knov/n by the name of glandulae or 
 carunculm myrtiformes. There have been a 
 few inftances in which the edges of this grow- 
 ino- together, it continued unperforate, until it 
 has been neceflary to make an incifion to let 
 out the menfes. 
 
 What is the uterus ? 
 
 A. Tlie 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 O Q 
 
 o :) 5? 
 
 A. The uterus or womb, is feated at the 
 end of the vagina, and lies alfo between the 
 bladder and redlum. The os pubis is a fence 
 to it before, the os facrum behind, and the 
 ilium on each fide, thefe forming as it were a 
 bafon for it, termed the pelvis ; but becaufe it 
 inuft fwell whilft women are with child, there 
 is a greater fpace between thefe bones than in 
 men ; and for this reafon it is, that women are 
 bigger in the haunches than men. The figure 
 of the uterus is like a pear, from its internal 
 orifice to its bottom •, in women not with childj 
 the length of the uterus is about three inches ; 
 its breadth in the upper part two, and in the 
 lower part one inch ; its thicknefs is about an 
 inch and a half; in maids, indeed, the uterus 
 is much fmaller than this, (the cavity being 
 about the fize of a fmall almond :) but in wo- 
 men with child it is larger, according to the 
 time of geftation. It prelfes the bowels, and 
 reaches to the navel towards the time of deli- 
 very ; whilft at other times it does not rife above 
 the os facrum. The upper and broader part 
 of the uterus is called the fundus ; and the lower 
 part, into which the vagina opejis, is termed 
 the cervix : its orifice into the vagina is called 
 ©s uteri, and by fome os tincae, from the re- 
 femblance it bears to a tench’s mouth ; it may 
 be alfo compared to the mouth of a young pup- 
 py dog, and the glans penis. This internal 
 mouth of the womb is very fmall in virgins, 
 but in women who have had children, or who 
 are w'ith child, it is larger ; and in the laft it is 
 Z 2 always 
 
340 A N A T O M I C A L 
 
 always clofed up wich a glutinous humour. 
 In the time of delivery, it in a wonderful man- 
 ner expands iifelf, fo as to give paflage to the 
 child. The fubftance of the womb is vafcu- 
 lar, being compoled of a various plexus of 
 flefhy nbres, with a great numcer of velTelS' 
 between : in women not with child it is coni- 
 paft and firm ^ in thofe with child it is fpongy 
 and nnuous, and is capable of wonderful dila- 
 tation, without any diminution of its thicknefs. 
 Its bottom, or fundus, grows thick as it di- 
 lates, fo that in the lafl: months of geftation it 
 is at leaft an inch thick, where the placenta 
 adheres, becaufe its roots run into the fubftance 
 of the womb. The uterus is covered exter- 
 nally with a membrane from the peritonaeum, 
 and internally its cavity is lined with a porous 
 and nervous membrane; but in women with 
 child, this inner membrane almoft entirely dif- 
 appears. The blood veffels of the uterus are 
 tortuous, and make a vaft number of anafto- 
 mofes with one another : they open by a num- 
 ber of little mouths into the uterus and vagina, 
 and are the fourcesof the menftrual difcharge. 
 The arteries and veins of the uterus are branches 
 of the hypogaftric and fpermatic veflels, v/hofe 
 large ramifications inofculate with each other, 
 as alfo the branches on one fide of the womb 
 with thofe of the other. The veins are greatly 
 larger than the arteries, efpecially in women 
 with child. 
 
 About the age of puberty, when the blood 
 which ufcd to be fpent in the increafe of the 
 
 body 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 34 ^ 
 
 body, being accumulated, diftends the veffels, 
 it breaks forth once a month at thoie of the 
 uterus; becaufe of aii the veins of the body, 
 which fland perpendicular to the horizon, thefe 
 only are without valves. This evacuation is 
 called menftrua, menfes, and catamenia ; and 
 vulgarly flowers, courfes, &c. 
 
 The nerves of the womb come from the in- 
 tercoft.als, and from thofe which come from the 
 os facrum. There are alfo feveral lymphatics 
 upon itsoutfide, which unite by little and little 
 into greater branches, and difcharge themfeives 
 into the refervatory of the chyle. The uterus 
 is tied by two round ligaments ; and by what 
 is called the ligamenta lata, being like two 
 broad ligaments, though it is only a produdtion 
 or continuation of the peritoneum, from the 
 fides of the womb : the ovaria are faflened to one 
 edge of the ligamenta lata, and the tube Fallo- 
 piane run along the other; thefe produdtions, 
 or continuations of the peritoneum, are com- 
 monly compared to the wings ol a bat, and 
 are therefore called vefpertilionis ale. The 
 two round ligaments, or ligamenta rotunda, 
 arife from the Tides of the uterus, and pafs 
 through the oblique and tranfverfe mufcles of 
 the abdomen to the groin, in the fame manner 
 as the feminal vefiels do in men. This way 
 the gut pafTes in a hernia inteflinalis in women. 
 (See mulcles of the abdomen.) Thefe liga- 
 ments are partly continued or joined to the 
 mufculus falcia lata, on the upper part of the 
 inflde of the thigh ; and from thence comes the 
 Z 3 pain 
 
342 ANATOMICAL 
 
 pain that women big with child fee] in this 
 place. The fubftance of thefe ligaments is 
 bard, but covered with a great number of 
 blood- veffels ; they are pretty big at the bot- 
 tom of the womb, but they grow fmaller and 
 flatter as they approach the os pubis. 
 
 What are the ovaria ? 
 
 A. The ovaria, termed by the ancients teftes 
 muliebres, are two bodies of a depreflfed oval 
 figure, fituated one on each fide the fundus 
 uteri •, they are commonly about half the fize 
 of men’s tefiides, but differ according to the 
 age and temperament of the fubjebl. They are 
 white, fmooth, and larged in perfons in tlae 
 vigour of their age, and in women who are 
 mod mature; in fuch fubjtfls they are found of 
 two drachms weight, and furnifhed with a 
 number of prominent veficles. In old people 
 they fcarce weigh half a drachm, and are dry, 
 corrugated, and deformed with cicatrices. The 
 ovaria are furrounded by a drong white mem- 
 brane from the peritonteum, and are ol mem- 
 branous fubdance, fibrous, reticulated, and full 
 of veflels varioufly interwoven ; they contain 
 from ten to twenty, or more, pellucid eggs, 
 which are fuppofed to contain the fird rudi- 
 ments of the foetus ; the larged of them is not 
 io big as a pea. I here are two arteries, and 
 two veins, which pa^s to and from the ovaries, 
 or tedes, in the i'ame manner that they do to 
 and from the tefticles in men ; but make more 
 vdndings, and the arteries dilate more fuddenly, 
 in proportion as they ate (horter. Thefe ar- 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 3U 
 
 teries and veins detach branches into the uterus 
 and Fallopian tubes, and not only rr'-ake com- 
 munications betwixt the artery and vein on 
 one fide, and thofe of the other, but alfo with 
 the proper veflels of the uterus, which are de- 
 tached from the internal iliac arteries and veins, 
 Befides the fpermatic veffels, the ovaria have 
 nerves from the intercoftals and lymphatics, 
 which difcharge themfelves into the common 
 recepracle. The ovaria are connedled to the 
 fundus uteri, by means of the ligamenta ro- 
 tunda to the Fallopian tubes, and the fides of 
 the pelvis, by the ligamenta lata, or vefperti- 
 lionis alas; and to many other parts by means 
 of the fpermatic veffels. 
 
 What are the tubs Fallopianas? 
 
 A. The Fallopian tubes are two canals of a 
 tortuous figure, but approaching to a conic 
 form, are joined to the fundus uteri one on 
 each fide ; one end of the tube is connehted to 
 the uterus, and opens into its cavity ; its ori- 
 fice is final], being about the fize of a large 
 hog’s bridle. The other end is much larger, 
 and is fimbriated, or fringed round the edges, 
 therefore called morfus diaboli ; it is free, and 
 fluctuates about the abdomen, and when there 
 is occafion, this extremity applies itfelf to the 
 ovary, embracing it with ihde nuifcular feg- 
 ments or fringes. Though the extremities of 
 thefe tubes are fmall, the middle, or wideit: 
 part is about the fize of one’s little finger. 
 Their length is about fix, feven, or eight rin- 
 gers breadth, diflerent in different fubjedls ; 
 
 Z 4 they 
 
« 
 
 344 ANATOMICAL 
 
 they are connefced to the ovaria by the alae 
 vefijertilionis. Their fubftance is membranous 
 arici cavernous : they are compofed of a dou- 
 ble membrane-, the exterior one leems to be 
 continuous with the periton-Enm, and the in- 
 terior, with the interior membrane of the ute- 
 rus. 4 hey are wrinkled on the inner furface, 
 and are in^bued with a lubricous humour but 
 they arc not cellular in the human body, as in 
 other animals^ They are turnilhed with a great 
 number of velTls having the fame veins, arte- 
 ries, nerves, and lymphatics, as the ovaria : and 
 have a cavernous fubflance between their mem- 
 branes, by means of which they are rendered 
 rigid in applying their mouths to the ovaria ; 
 they are alio moidcned on their inner fur- 
 face by thefe vefiels. Their ufe in generation 
 is very great-, they become ered: in the time of 
 coition, from the influx of the blood and fpirits, 
 and at that time, by a natural motion, they 
 apply their loofe fringed extremity, to the ova- 
 ries, which aie iurrounded and embraced by 
 them. In this ftate they convey to them the 
 prolific matter of the male femen injeded into 
 the v/omb -, and alter one of the ovula is im- 
 pregnated, they receive and convey it to the 
 womb. The Fallopian lubes unperforated, upon 
 the foregoing hypoth^fis, mull caufe oarren- 
 nefs, and feed lodged in thefe tubes may have 
 the fatne effed \ which probably is often the 
 cafe of common whores, and women that ufe 
 coition too frequently ; and perhaps the fat in 
 the membrane, that conneds the ovaria to the 
 
 tubes. 
 
' dialogues. 
 
 345 
 
 tubes, may, in very fat women, fo keep thefe 
 tubes from the ovaria as to interrupt impreg- 
 nation ; befides thefe cafes, too much or too 
 little of the menfes may deftroy or interrupt 
 conception but the latter cafe, efpecially-in 
 young women, is very rare. From fuch caufes 
 as thefe, and act from imbecility, it is moft 
 probable that ba.rennefs ofcener proceeds from 
 women than men ; and though women do noc 
 propagate to fo great an age as men, it feems 
 not to be owing to an incapacity of being im- 
 pregnated, but from their menles ceafing, and 
 thoie veffels being cloied, wh.ch fhould nouriCh 
 the foetus aiter the impregnation, as if on pur- 
 pofe to prevent the propagation of a feeble and 
 infirtu fpecies. From this confideraiion, it is 
 reafonabie to fuppofe, that the perfedlion of 
 the foetus, notwithfianding it is firft formed in 
 the male feed, depends more upon the fema’e 
 than the male, orelfethat nature would, for 
 the fake of the ipecies, have been careful to 
 hinder men as well as women from propagat- 
 ing in a declining age. 
 
 I'he feed of ail animals, and part’cularly of 
 mankind, is a whitifh fluid fecreted from the 
 blood in the teftcs as above; in which I,ewen- 
 hoeck, by the help of microfcopes, difcover- 
 ed an infinite number of animals like tad- 
 poles, which he and others luppofe to be men 
 in miniature, and that one of thefe being en- 
 tered into an egg in one of the ovaria, con- 
 ception is performed. 
 
 dialogue 
 
34 ^ ANATOMICAL 
 
 DIALOGUE IX. 
 
 Of the Embryo, and the Foetus in Utero. 
 
 \HI is the embryo ? 
 
 V V A. The embryo, is a name given 
 
 to what a woman has conceived with, from 
 the time of conception, till the parts are per- 
 feOtly formed. From conception, until the 
 egg hath been fome five or fix days in the ute- 
 rus, it is almoft impolTible to defcribe the 
 changes it undergoes, upon the account of its 
 minutenefs, and for want of obfervations j 
 after that time we may fpeak of the matter 
 with more certainty. I he egg is then a round 
 pellucid globule, of only one membrane, con- 
 taining the embryo, which hath a very large 
 head, a fmall body, and no legs or arms, 
 fwimming in a large quantity of a pellucid li- 
 quor ; it hath then a large flat umbilicus, by 
 which it adheres to the obtufe extremity of the 
 egg. The proper membrane of the egg, called 
 amnion, by degrees fends off all around its fur- 
 face frnall flocculent veffels whereby it grows 
 to thofe veffels of the utterus from whence the 
 menfes were wont to flow before pregnancy : 
 by degrees ihefe flocculent vefiels, round the 
 greateft and inferior part of the egg, ceafe to 
 grov/, degenerating into a fecond membrane, 
 called chorion ; while thofe veffels at the up- 
 per and blunt end, keep increafing in their 
 oiameters, and at length form the placenta to 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 347 
 
 be defcribed hereafter. In the firft two months, 
 or at the end of that time, there appears not 
 any thing bony, the feveral parts or members 
 not being diftinftly formed till the third 
 month. The head is firh: perfedfed ; the tho- 
 rax or breaft next ■, then the abdomen ; and 
 lafl: of all the extremities. 
 
 Q. When does the embryo take the name 
 of foetus in utero ? 
 
 A. When all the parts are diftindlly form- 
 ed. The fcetus is involved in the fame coats 
 as the embryo, viz. the chorion externally, and 
 the amnion internally, which immediately in- 
 clofed the foetus, 1 hey contain a quantity of 
 liquor, which is a proper medium for fo ten- 
 der a being as the fcetus to reft in, and partly 
 fecures it from external injuries, as the aque- 
 ous humour does the cryftaliine in the eye; 
 and when the membranes burft in the time of 
 birth, this humour lubricates the vagina, to 
 render the birth iels difficult. 
 
 O. How is the fetus in utero nouiiflied ? 
 
 A, This is a matter of much coritroverfy, 
 but the moft reafonable opinion is, that the 
 fetus is nouriihed both by the mouth, and by 
 the umbilical veftels. 
 
 Q. What is the placenta ? 
 
 A. I'he placenta is a foft, roundifia mafs, 
 found in the uterus of p''egnant vmmen, which 
 from its rdernblance to a cike, derives its 
 name •, and being alio like the li\er, was call- 
 et! by the ancients hepar uterinum, or womb- 
 liver. The number of piaccmte in human 
 
 lubjedlSj 
 
343 ANATOMICAL 
 
 fub]e6ts, anfweri? to that of the foetufes ; and 
 as thefe are ufually Tingle, the placenta is ufu- 
 ally fo too : but when there are two or more 
 foetufes, there are always as many placenire ; 
 yet in this cafe they often colrere together, fo 
 as to feem but one ; but their vefiels rarely 
 communicate from one to the ocher. The 
 placenta is ufually about fn,: inches in diame- 
 ter, and one inch thick in the middle, grow- 
 ing a little thinner towards the circumference ; 
 it is furrounded wirh a fmcoth mjembrane 
 from the chorion and amnion, and its concave 
 part is turned towards the foetus ; it has 
 no particular part of the uterus to adhere to, 
 but is ufually fixed to the fundus uteri. Dodor 
 Thomas Simfon, of Sr. Andrew’s, however, 
 thinks that it has no place in the ovarium, nor 
 in the uterus till once the ovum becomes 
 contiguous to the fundus, and then every con- 
 tiguous part becomes really a placenta. The 
 placenta is compofed of the extreme branches 
 of the umbilical vein and arteries, which are 
 for the compoOtion of this part divided into 
 an infinite number oi exceeding fmall branches 
 to join a like number of the menftrual vefiels 
 of the uterus, which vefiels of the uterus 
 aie made numerous, rather than large, that the 
 feparation of the placenta from them may not 
 be attended with a flux of blood fata! to the 
 JBcthcr •, for the fides of little vt-fiTcls foon col- 
 lapfe and clofe, and they are mioreeaffiy flop- 
 ped, being compreficd by the uterus itfcif 
 as it fiiiinks, which it begins to do from the 
 4 time 
 
D I A L O G U E S. 
 
 349 
 
 time of the birth ; but when the placenta is 
 feparated before the delivery, whether untime- 
 ly or not, thefe veffels bleed until the uterus 
 is difcharged of the ffEtus. The arteries and 
 veins of the uterus, by which the menfkual 
 purgations are made, are joined to the umbi- 
 lical arteries and veins in the placenta, the ar- 
 teries of the uterus to the veins in the placen- 
 ta, and the veins in the uterus to the arteries 
 of the placenta : by thefe veffels a large quan- 
 tity of blood is continually flowing from the 
 mother to the foetus and back again. 
 
 Qe What is the navd-ftring ? 
 
 •A, The navel-ftring, or umbilical blood- 
 veffels, termed iuniculus umbilicalis, paffes 
 out at the navel of the foetus to the placenta. 
 It is commonly about two foot long, that the 
 foetus may have room to move without tearing 
 the placenta from the uterus, which being done 
 too foon, from whatever caufe, occafions a 
 mifcarriage. This umbilical cord is compofed 
 of a fpongy fubflance enclofing the blood-vef- 
 fels, viz. two arteries and one vein, twifting a- 
 bout each other, particularly the arteries about 
 the vein. The arteries arife from the internal 
 iliacs of the child, and running up on each, 
 fide of the bladder, perforate the belly where 
 the umbilical vein entered. With the arteries 
 and vein above-mentioned, there alfo pafies a 
 veffel called urachus, which arifes from the top 
 of the bladder. The umbilical veffels, witn 
 ^ the urachus, being fhrunk up after the birth, 
 lofe much of their appearance, efpecially near 
 
 the 
 
550 A N A 7' O M I C A L 
 
 the navel, where they are Ibrnetimes not to 
 be d'ftinguinied. The umbilical vein goes 
 from the navel diredly to the liver, and there 
 enters the great crunk of the vena portse; it 
 has its origin from Imall venous tubuii, arifing 
 from the chorion, where the evanefcent twigs 
 of the arteries are loft •, and at length form- 
 ing one large trunk, enters the umbilicus of 
 the embryo, goes to the liver as before obferv- 
 ed, and opens into the finus of the vena pop- 
 tarum. Near this entrance there goes out the 
 dudfus venolus to the great trunk of the cava, 
 which carries part of the blood that is brought 
 by the umbilical vein tliat way into the cava, 
 while the reft circulates with the blood in the 
 porta j the whole of it not palling through the 
 dudtus venofus, as is generally believed, but 
 a great part of it into branches of the porta, 
 in the liver ■, otherwife there need be no corh- 
 municatioii between the umbilical vein and the 
 porta. After the birth, when the umbilical 
 vein is flopped, it becomes a ligament, and 
 the dudlus venofus foon ftirinks and almoft 
 difappears, having no longer any blood flow- 
 ing through it. The blood which flows from 
 the mother to the feetus by the umbilical vein 
 is returned, all but a fmall quantity, which is 
 referved for nutrition by the two umbilical ar- 
 teries. 
 
 How does the blood circulate from the 
 mother to the fostus and from the foetus to the 
 mother ? 
 
 A, The 
 
DIALOGUES. 35i 
 
 A. The manner in which the blood flows 
 from the mother to the fetus, and from the 
 fetus to the mother, is as follows, viz. the 
 uterine arteries in the mother bring arterial 
 blood to the organ of the placenta in the egg; 
 which being taken up by the beginning of the 
 veins of the placenta, is tranfmitted to the fe- 
 tus, through the umbilical vein, into the vena 
 portarum ; and from thence into the cava and 
 heart, and the two umbilical arteries in the 
 fetus being continued from the aorta, carry 
 their blood to the placenta ; which blood, at 
 the adhefion of the placenta to the uterus, is 
 taken up by the beginning of the uterine veins, 
 and tranfmitted to the cava and heart of the 
 mother •, what was arterial in the one becom- 
 ing venous in the other interchangeably ; but 
 the fetus hath fome peculiarities in its own 
 proper circulation befides. 
 
 What is the magnitude and weight of 
 the embryo and fetus in utero ? 
 
 A. When the ovum defcends into the ute- 
 rus, it is fuppofed to be about the fize of a 
 poppy feed, and in the third month augment- 
 ed to the bignefs of a goofe egg. Ten days 
 after conception, the child (according to fome 
 authors) weighs half a grain ; at thirty days 
 is increaled to the weight of twenty-two grains-, 
 at three months, weighs betwixt two and three 
 ounces ; and at nine months, from ten to 
 twelve, and fometimes fixteen pounds : by 
 which calculation it would appear, that the 
 progrefs of the fetus is quickeft in the begin- 
 ning 
 
352 A N A T O M I C A L 
 
 ning of the growth ; for, from its tenth to 
 the thirtieth day (according to this fuppofi- 
 tion) it encrcafes to three and forty times its 
 weight. But all thefe calculations ate uncer- 
 tain. 
 
 How is the uterus diftended ? 
 
 A. As the foetus, &c. gtow in bulk, the ute- 
 rus is diftended, but reiains the fame, or nearly 
 the fame abfolute thicknds ; the blood-veflels, 
 which in its natural contraded fate lay folded 
 and rolled together like threads in a clue, being 
 ftraitened out, now receive blood more freely 
 than before, and become of greater diameters. 
 So that what the uterus lofcs of thicknefs by 
 diftenfion, in its membranous or cellular parts, 
 it gains by the enlargement of its veffels. As 
 it is gradually more and more diftended, its 
 lundus rifes more and more out of the pelvis 
 up into the abdomen towards the colon and, 
 ftomach, and being ftretched in every dimen- 
 fion, creates the bulk we fee in pregnancy. 
 
 What is the natural fituation of the foe- 
 tus in utero ? 
 
 A. I'he natural fituation of the fcetus in 
 utero for the laft months of geftation (for 
 before that time it is uncertain and various) is, 
 as it were fitting with its head and neck bene 
 downwards and forwards ; its knees drawing 
 up to its cheeks ; its heels lying back toward 
 its hips •, and its hands hanging down, and as 
 embracing its knees. Bur there is a great 
 variety of poftures of the fcetus, both before 
 
dialogues. 
 
 5o:> 
 
 and at the time of delivery, as is Ihewn In 
 rnidwifeiy. 
 
 Q. What are the differences, between a 
 foetus in utero and an adult ? 
 
 A. The more effential differences between, 
 the human foetus ripe for birth, and an adulc 
 appear to be as follows. In the abdomen, the 
 umbilical vein and arteries of the navel, and 
 the canalis venofus in the liver, are in the foe- 
 tus open and pervious *, in adults they are con^ 
 traded and fohd. The liver is very large, the 
 ftomach is filled with a glutinous fluid, and. 
 the larger inteftines, and often the ilium aUb^ 
 with the feces called meconium. The renes 
 fuccenturiati are larger in the foetus than in 
 adults. The kidneys themfelves are noc 
 fmooth and even on the furface, as in adults, 
 but unequal, and in fome meafyre refenible 
 thofe of a calf. The urinary bladder is of a 
 longer fliape, and extends almofl; to the navel. 
 The hymen in a female foetus is very plain 
 and obvious. In the thorax befides a peculiar 
 fluid, found as well in this cavity as in the ab- 
 domen, the gland thymus is larger than it is in 
 adults. The lungs, as they have never yet been 
 inflated by breathing, are collapfed, and of a 
 blackifh colour •, and if thrown into water they 
 fink in it contrary to what is the cafe in adults, 
 or thofe that have breathed. In the heart, 
 the foramen ovale between the left and right 
 auricle, and the canalis arteriofus, between the 
 pulmonary artery and the aorta, are open, to 
 ferve for .a peculiar circulation in the foetus, 
 A a whicii 
 
354 ANATOMICAL 
 
 which has not yet breathed ; and there is iri 
 the inferior trunk of the vena cava, near the 
 heart, a remarkable valve, called by Chefel- 
 den, valvula nobilis. In the head, befides its 
 great fize in proportion to the body, we are to 
 obferve, that the olTa cranii are in feveral 
 places diftant from one another, efpecially at 
 the fontanella j and that the futures are want- 
 ing. The brain alfo is fofter than in adults. 
 The teeth are imperfedt, and not rooted in the 
 gums •, they lie hid or buried under the gums, 
 to appear at a more advanced period. The 
 meatus auditorius is not yet perfedt in the 
 foetus, and is entirely clofed up by a pe- 
 culiar membrane, which is continuous with 
 the epidermis, and naturally difappears after 
 delivery. The bones of the whole body, ex- 
 cepting a very few, are either foft or abfolute- 
 ]y imperfedl : fome of them are merely cartila- 
 ginous, and the articulations are not at that 
 time perfedled. 
 
 dialogue X. 
 
 Of the Eye. 
 
 Q,\%7 HAT are the parts of the eye not 
 VV defer i bed ? 
 
 A. The bony focket, mufcles, cartilages 
 ^nd ligaments of the external parts of the 
 
 eye 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 355 
 
 eye are already fpoken of in Dialogue the firft. 
 The internal parts not yet mentioned are the 
 glandulae febacete, caruncula lachrymalis, 
 glandulas lachrymalis, pundla lachrymalia, 
 orbit; the coats or tunics, viz. tunica albu- 
 ginea, adnata, or conjundtiva ; tunica fclero- 
 tica; tunica cornea ; tunica choroides ; tunica 
 uvea, (which contains the iris and papilla) to 
 which may be added the retina. The liu- 
 mours of the eye, viz. the aqueous, vitreous, 
 and cryftalline, to which may be added the 
 extreme thin and fine vafcular membrane call- 
 ed tunica arachnoides, and the veflels and 
 nerves of the eye. 
 
 Q. What are the glandule febace^ ? 
 
 A. The glandulae febace^ are fituated in the 
 interior furlace of the eye-lids : they ferve for 
 the fecretion of an oleaginous fluid, which is 
 of great ufe in preventing the attrition of the 
 eye-lids, from their continual motion. 
 
 Q. What is the caruncula lachrymalis ? 
 
 A. The caruncula lachrymalis is a little e- 
 minence fituated in the larger angle or can- 
 thus major of the eye, ferving to diredl the 
 tears to the pundta lachrymalia, and, accord- 
 ing to lome anatomifts, they help to keep them 
 open when the eyes are (hut. 
 
 What is the glandula lachrymalis 
 
 A. The glandula lachrymalis is feated in 
 the upper and outer part of the orbits, with 
 its excretory dudls under the upper eye-lid. 
 This gland feparates the matter of the tears, 
 which, by the continual motion of this lid, 
 A a 2 furnifhes 
 
CO 
 
 56 ANATOMICAL 
 
 furniflies at all times water enougfi to wafia 
 dirt, and to keep the external lurface of the 
 eye moift, without which the cornea would dry 
 and wrinkle by the continual adtion of the ex- 
 ternal air. As the tears fall off the cornea, 
 they are ftopped by the edge of the under eye- 
 lid, along which they run till they fall into the 
 pundla lachrymalia. 
 
 Q. What are the pun6la lachrymalia ? 
 
 A. The pundla lachrymalia are two fmall 
 holes in the inner corner or great canthus of 
 the eye, one in each eye-lid •, they are fituated 
 at the extremities of the tarfi or cartilages, and 
 kad to a fmall membranous bag or lachrymal 
 fac, which is feated in this corner upon the 
 os lachry malc; from the bottom of which there 
 goes a fmall pipe or nafal canal, which pierces 
 this bone in the nofe opening under the upper 
 lamina of the os fpongiofum. It moiftens the 
 inner membrane of the noftrils, by the fuper- 
 fliious humour of the lachrymal gland. Some- 
 times the acrimony of this humour caufes 
 fneezing, which we may hinder by preffing 
 the angle of the eye, and fo ftop its running. 
 Between thefe two pundla there is a caruncle 
 (as above-mentioned) that ferves to keep the 
 holes open when the eyes are ftuit. 
 
 CX VVhat is the orbit of the. eye ? 
 
 A. The orbit of the eye is that cavity in 
 which the eye is contained, and is in all the 
 vacant places filled with loofe fat, which is 
 a proper medium for the eye to reft in, and 
 krves as a focket for its motion^ The proper 
 
 5 " f' - - 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 357 
 
 parts of the eye, which form its globe, eye- 
 ball, or bulb, are its coats or tunics, the hu- 
 mours, and the vefiTels. 
 
 Q. What is the tunica albuginea ? 
 
 A. The tunica albuginea, adnata, or con- 
 jundivaisthefirft membrane or coat of the eye- 
 ball ; it is a fmooth membrane which covers fo 
 much of the eye, as is called the white, and 
 being refiedled all round, lines tlie two eye lids. 
 Being thus returned from the eye to the infide 
 of the eyedids, it effeftually hinders any ex- 
 traneous bodies from getting behind the eye in- 
 to the orbit, and fmooths the parts it covers, 
 which makes the friftion lefs between the eye 
 and the eye-lids. It is full of fmall veins and 
 arteries, which appear big in an ophthalmia or 
 inflammation of the eyes. 
 
 Q. V/hat is the tunica fclerotlca ? 
 
 A, The tunica fclerotica is a thick hard 
 and fmooth coat, extended from the cornea to 
 the optic nerve it is opake behind, but tranf- 
 parent before, where it makes the third coat 
 called cornea. Both together make one firm 
 cafe of a proper form for the ufe of the other 
 coats and humours. 
 
 Qc What is the cornea ? 
 
 A. The cornea, fo called from its fubllance 
 refernbling the horn of a lanthorn, is convex, 
 tranfparent, and compofed of various laminm, 
 which are nourifhed by many blood-veffcls, fo 
 fine as not even to hinder the fmallcft rays of 
 light from entering the eye. The cornea is 
 fituated in the fore-part of the eye, furrounded 
 by the fclerotica and albuginea 5 it has a mofl: 
 A a 3 exquifice 
 
358 ANATOMICAL 
 
 exquifite fenfe, to the end that the tears, upon 
 the leaft pain, may be fqueezed out of the 
 lachrymal gland, to wafli olf any filth, which, 
 by flicking to the cornea, might render it opake 
 Of dim. 
 
 Q: What is the tunica choroides ? 
 
 A. The tunica choroides is the fourth coat 
 of the eye, and is fo named, on account of the 
 multitude of blood-veffels refembling the cho- 
 rion ; it lies immediately under the fclerotica, 
 and is much thinner than it, being a membrane 
 of little firmnefs. It is blackifh, or of a 
 dufky brown colour, more or lefs inclining to 
 red. This membrane, or coat, has a great 
 number of blood-veffels which come from the 
 fclerotiea. It is open, or has a hole before, 
 for the paffage of the rays of light, called pu- 
 pilla the part of this coat, which makes the 
 circumference of the hole, and lies upon the 
 fide of the cryllalline humour, is the uvea. 
 
 What is the uvea, you mention ? 
 
 A. The uvea is the fifth coat, and is only 
 a white circle round the back fide of the choroi- 
 des near the cornea, as has been faid. In this 
 coat we obferve, firfi; the iris, v/hich is a circu- 
 lar varioudy coloured parr, being the anterior 
 furface of the uvea, which furrounds the pu- 
 pil ; it is called the iris, becaufe in different 
 perlons it is of different colours j hence the de- 
 nomination of grey, blue, brown, hafel, black 
 eyes, &c. The iris is entirely vafcular, from 
 which arifes the variety of colours in the hu- 
 man 
 
 3 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 359 
 
 Fiaan eyes. Secondly, the pupil, or foramen,- 
 which is round in the human eye, nearly in the 
 middle of the iris, and is capable of dilatation 
 and contradlion. Through this aperture, the 
 rays of light pafs to the cryR'alline, in order to 
 be painted on the retina, and caufe vifion. 
 Thirdly, its pofterior fnrface, which is black, 
 and in which, when this blacknefs is cleared a- 
 way, there appears the fphindter of the pupil, 
 formed of circular fibres for contradlrion, the 
 ciliary fibres or proceffes, for the dilatation of 
 the pupil •, the ciliary ligament for the motion 
 of the vitreous and cryftalline humours ; the 
 arterial and venal circles, from the veffels, are 
 in a wonderful manner diflributed over the 
 uvea ; the choroides ; the ligamentum ciliare; 
 and the vitreous and cryflalline humours; 
 the dudlus nigri, lb called from their black co- 
 lour, placed between the procefies and the li- 
 gamentum ciliare; the fpace between the uvea 
 and the cornea, called the anterior camera of 
 the eye ; and that between the uvea and cry- 
 ilalline, called its pofterior camera, which is 
 either much fmaller, or entirely wanting. 
 
 What is the retina ? 
 
 A. The retina is a membrane which may be 
 called the fixth tunic or coat; it lies immedi- 
 ately under the tunica choroides, and is a very 
 delicate, tender, and as it were, mucous coat of 
 the eye, or more properly, it is only an expan- 
 fion of the optic nerve at the bottom of the 
 eye. It is the great organ of vifion, and 
 A a 4 called 
 
s6o anatomical: 
 
 called retina becaufe it fomewhat refembles a; 
 net : rays of light firiking upon this mem- 
 brane, the lenfation is conveyed by the optic 
 nerves to the common fenforium, the brain. 
 
 Q. What is the aqueous humour of the 
 eye ? 
 
 A. The aqueous humour lies in the fore- 
 part of the globe, immediately under the cor- 
 nea : this humour is thin and liquid, of a fpi-. 
 rituous nature, for it will not freeze in the 
 greatdl froft. This evinces the neceffity of a 
 continual fupply of this humour-, which is ma«- 
 nifeft it hath, becaufe if the cornea be pricked, 
 and this humour Iqueezed out, it will be again 
 reftored in ten or twelve hours : this aqueous 
 humour lying foremoft. Teems chiefly of ufe to 
 prevent the cryftalline from being eafily 
 bruifed by rubbing, or a blow-, and perhaps 
 it ferves for the cryftalline humour to move 
 forward in, while we view near objects, an4 
 backward for remoter obje6ls. 
 
 Ck What is the eryftalline humour ? 
 
 A. The cryftalline humour is the fecond, and 
 diftindly contained in a very fine coat or mem- 
 brane called aranea or arachnoides, and is fuf- 
 pended by means of the ciliary ligament, be- 
 tv/een the aqueous and vitreous humour, im- 
 mediately behind the pupil; in this place id 
 hangs free, and is moveable by means of the 
 ligament juft mentioned. It iscompofed of a 
 multitude of lamellae like the coats of an 
 onion; and therefore alfo pellucid and vafeu^ 
 
dialogues; 
 
 lar. There is alfo a fmall quantity of the a- 
 queous humour contained within or under its 
 coat. The cryftalline being a thick, compadt 
 humour, in form of a flattilh convex lens (i- 
 tuated in the middle of the eye, ferves to make 
 that refratflion of the rays of light neceflary to 
 make them meet in the retina, and form an 
 image thereon, whereby vifion may be per- 
 formed. 
 
 What is the vitreous humour ? 
 
 A. The vitreous or glaffy humour is the 
 third humour of the eye, fo called from its 
 refemblance to glafs in fufion, being like a 
 fine clear jelly in appearance •, it is thicker 
 than the aqueous, but thinner than the cryftal- 
 line ; and is in greater abundance than the 
 other two. It lies behind the cryftalline, and 
 fills up the greateft part of the eye : its fore- 
 fide is concave for the cryftalline humour to 
 lodge in, and its back fide being convex, the 
 tunica retina is fpread over it; it ferves as a 
 medium to keep the cryftalline humour and 
 the retina at a due diftance. 
 
 Q. What are the blood- vefiels and nerves 
 of the eye ? 
 
 A. The eye is furnlfhed in a moft wonder- 
 ful manner with nerves and blood-velfels in all 
 its parts. The blood veffds of the eye are 
 branches of the carotids and jugulars (which 
 fee) diftributed to all parts of the eye in an a- 
 mazing manner. The extreme minute ones 
 Oonvey only a fine and fubtile lymph tnither, 
 
 by 
 
362 ANATOMICAL 
 
 by which means the tunics and humours of the 
 eye are nourifbed •, the veins partly carry the 
 blood back to the hnufes of the dura mater, 
 and partly to the jugulars. The nerves of the 
 eye are very numerous-, befides, the optic 
 nerves (defcribed in pages 68, 97.) pierce the 
 globe of the eye from the fide oi the nofe, a 
 little on the infide of the optic axis or center -, 
 their external coat, which is a produclion of- 
 the dura mater, is continued to the fclerotis, as 
 their internal is from the pia mater to the 
 choroides: and themedullary fibres palTing" 
 through all, are expanded on the retina, upon 
 which the images of objedls are painted. The 
 centre of this expanfion is infenfible, and all; 
 rays which fail upon it are loft y confequently, 
 that point of the objedt from which the rays 
 come, is invifible to the eye y the reafon of 
 this proceeds, probably, from the blood-vef- 
 fels, which enter the g'obe of the eye with the 
 optic nerve, and cover this part of the retina. 
 But whatioever the caufe be, there is a mani- 
 feft advantage in the optic nerves being infcrt- 
 ed on the infide of the optic axis. For if they 
 bad pierced the eye in the axis, the middle 
 point of every objedt had been invifible, and 
 where all things conduce to make us fee beft, 
 there we had not feen at all. 
 
 DIALOGUE 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 3^3 
 
 DIALOGUE XL 
 
 Of the Ear. 
 
 Q. f"¥7HAT are the parts of the ear not 
 y yet defcribed ? 
 
 A. The bones, mufcles and cartilages of 
 the ear are already fpoken of in Dialogue the 
 fecond Its inner fubftance is cartilaginous, as 
 hath been faid, which preferves its form, with- 
 out being liable to break : its ufe is to colle<fl; 
 founds, and diredt them into the meatus audi- 
 torius, which is the paffage that leads to the 
 drum. Hence thofe who have loft their ears, 
 hear not lo acutely as others, and endeavour 
 to fupply that want by applying the palm of 
 their hand made hollow to their ears : hence 
 the ufefulnefs of hearing trumpets. The in- 
 ternal parts of the ear not yet defcribed are as 
 follows, viz. meatus auditorious, cerumen, 
 membrana tympani, tympanum, tuba eufta- 
 chiana, foramina veftibulum and labyrinth, 
 and veflels of the ear. 
 
 CL What is the meatus auditorius ? 
 
 A. The meatus auditorius is the paffage of 
 the ear which leads to and terminates in the 
 membrana tympani, or drum of the ear. It 
 is near an inch long, and about the fourth part 
 of an inch wide, and its paffage is not ftrait 
 but crooked, paffing firft upwards and then 
 
 down- 
 
3^4 ANATOMICAL 
 
 downwards, when it has a fmal! tendency up3 
 wards again, and the lower part of its ex,tre- 
 mky bends a little down to the obliquity of 
 the membiana tympani. The beginning of 
 this palTage is cartilaginous, being a continu- 
 ation of the concha contraftcd, the end of it 
 is bony, which makes the greateft part of the 
 tapper and back part of the meatus, as the 
 cartilage does of the lower and fore part. The 
 whole internal cavity of the meatus is lined 
 witli a membrane v^hich Teems to be a con- 
 tinuation of the ficin that covers the auricula, 
 and which grows thinner and thinner as it ap- 
 proaches the tympanum. 
 
 What is the cerumen ? 
 
 A. The cirumen or wax of the ear is fecret- 
 ed from a number of little glands on the back 
 fide of the membrane whofe excretory duffs 
 bring it into the meatus. This v/ax by its bit- 
 K;rnefs and vifcidity, together with the hairs in 
 the memibrane above-mentioned, hinders infe<5fs 
 from approaching the membrana tympani, 
 which it iikewife preferves againft the injuries 
 of the air. When this wax is acciuriulated in 
 too great quantity, it obftrudts the meatus, by 
 filling up the paiTage, and creates the moft 
 common kind of deafnefs •, the remedy of 
 which is picking the ears, or fyringing them. 
 Thofe great difchargcs of matter from the 
 meatus auditorius, which are commonly call- 
 ed impofthumes in the ear, Teem to be nothing 
 elfe than ulcerations or great fecretions from 
 thefe glands. 
 
 CX What 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 Q. What is the membrana tympani ? 
 
 A. The membrana tympani lies at the inner 
 extremity of the meatus •, it is extended upoa 
 a bony ridge or circle of the temporal bone. 
 This is an oval membrane; thin, dry, 
 and tranfparent : though it feems Wretched 
 pretty tight, yet it is not plain, but concave 
 outwardly toward the meatus, and inwardly 
 convex ; being pulled inward by the handle of 
 the malleus, which is tied to it. This mem- 
 brane does not entirely clofe the paflage, but 
 has on one fide a fmall aperture covered witb 
 a valve, letting the fmoke of tobacco taken 
 in at the mouth find a paffage through it out 
 at the ears. 
 
 Cb What is the tympanum? 
 
 A. The tympanum, or drum of the ear, is a 
 pretty large cavity, fituated behind the mem- 
 brana tympani ; it is about the fourth part of 
 an inch deep, as miuch wide, and about half 
 as high. In very young children it is always 
 found full cf mucus or a purulent matter, 
 which feems oeceiTary to prevent founds from 
 affc'dling them coo much, there being no pro- 
 vifion to fliut the ears, as there is for the eyes. 
 Chefelden gives an account of a gentleman 
 who had four children born deaf, on which he 
 was advifed to lay blifters upon the heads of 
 the next children he might hive, which he 
 did to three who were born afterwards, and 
 every one of them heard well, k feems not 
 unreafonable to fuppofethat too greataquan- 
 
3^6 ANATOMICAL 
 
 tit/ of this mucus upon the drum might be 
 the caufe of deafnefs in the four children, and 
 that the difcharge made by the blifters in the 
 latter cafe was the caufe of their efcaping the 
 fame misfortune. In this cavity are to be ob- 
 ferved the periofteum, which lines it, a very 
 thin membrane, and furniflied with a great 
 number of blood-velTels ; and the chorda tym- 
 pani being a little nerve compofed of a com- 
 bination of little branches of the fifth and fe- 
 venth pairs, this is extended in the manner of 
 a cord under the membrana tympani. In 
 this cavity alfo there are four fmall bones al- 
 ready defcribedinDialoguethefecond,of which 
 the firlt is the malleolus or hammer, fo called 
 becaufe of its fhape its manubrium or han- 
 dle, which is pretty long and frual! j it is faff- 
 ened to the membrane of the tympanum, as 
 hath been faid, and its head is articulated by 
 ginglymus with the body of the incus *, which 
 bone is articulated by arthrodia with the (tapes, 
 and the arbiculare lies between. The malleus 
 is moved inward by the mufculus obliquus in- 
 ternus, or trochliaris, or internus mallei ; it 
 extends the membrana tympani, that it may 
 be the more affedted by impulfe of founds when 
 they are too weak. This mufcle arifes from 
 the cartilaginous part of the Euftachian tube, 
 and pafling from thence in a proper groove, it 
 is refledted under a fmall procefs, and thence 
 paffes on perpendicular to the membrana tym- 
 pani, to be inferted into the handle of the 
 
 malleus, 
 
DIALOGUES. 2^7 
 
 malleus ; fometimes with a double tendon pa- 
 rallel to this mulcle lies another extenfor of the 
 membrana tympani, called obliquus cxternus 
 or cxternus mallei •, but this is not fo obviouf- 
 ly an extenfor as to be known to be fo v/ithouc 
 an experiment. The mufcle which relaxes the 
 membrana tympani is called externiisor laxator 
 tympani. The relaxation of the membrane is 
 made by this mufcle, without our knowledge, 
 when founds are too ftrong ; and as the pupil 
 of the eye is contraded when we have too 
 much light, and dilated when there is too little, 
 from what caufe foever, fo when founds are too 
 low, or the fenfe of hearing imptifed;, from 
 whatever caufe the extenfors of the tympa- 
 num ftretch it to make the impulfc of (ounds 
 mere effedual upon it, juh as in the cafe of 
 the common drum, and the cords of any mu- 
 fical inftrument. 
 
 What is the tubs Euftachianm ? 
 
 A. The Euftachian tube or iter ad palatum, 
 goes from the tympanum, (which cavity is 
 called alfo the barrel of the ear) •, the begin- 
 ning of this paffage is very narrow and bony, 
 the middle is cartilaginous, and its extremity, 
 which opens into the back- part of the noftrils, 
 juft above the uvula, is about the third part of 
 an inch wide, membranous, and dilated by 
 fome mufcular fibres •, they dilate the extremi- 
 ty of this paflage, either when we open our 
 mouth to hear more diftindly, or when it is 
 neceflary there fhould be a free communication 
 
 between 
 
^58 A N A T O M I C A t 
 
 between the external air, and that In the cavP 
 ty of the tympanum. This pafTage, therefore, 
 feems to be exactly of the lame ul'e with the 
 hole in the fide of the common drum, that is, 
 to let the air pafs in and out from the barrel of 
 the ear to make the membrane vibrate the bet- 
 ter, and perhaps in the ear, which is clofer 
 than a common drum, to let air in or out as it 
 alters in denfity, and if any fluid fhould be fe- 
 perated in the barrel of the ear, to give it a 
 paflTagecut- This paflage being obflrudled, 
 as it is fometimes, by a large polypus behind 
 the uvula, caufes great difficulty of hearing, 
 and fometimes when the meatus audicorius is 
 cbftrndced, a man opening his mouth wide, 
 will hear pretty v/e!l through this palTage, which 
 is often fo open, as that fyringing water through 
 the nofe, icfliall pafs through into the barrel 
 of the ear, and caufe deafnefs for fome time. 
 To the ftapes there is one mufcle called mufl 
 cuius ftapedius •, it ferves to pull the flapes 
 from off the feneftra ovalis, which otherwife it 
 covers. 
 
 Q. What is the foramina veflibulum and 
 labyrinth of the ear? 
 
 A. The foramina veflibulum are three holes 
 in the cavity of the tym.panurn leading to the 
 cavity called veflibulum ^ which forms the 
 middle part of the labyrinth, or innermoft ca- 
 vity of the ear, termed a labyrinth, from its 
 flnuoflties and windings. Thefirft of thefe 
 holes is called feneftra. ovalis j to which, as hath 
 
 been 
 
D I A Li O v^T ii, S. 3^9 
 
 been faid, the bafe of the flapes is fixed, and 
 completely flops it. The next hole is the fe- 
 □eflra rotunda, and the other leads into the 
 cavity of the maftoide procefs. After thefe 
 may be obferved three femicircular canals, 
 which open into the vellibulum by hve ori- 
 fices. 
 
 Q. What is the cochlea of the ear ? 
 
 A. The cochlea of the ear is placed oppo- 
 fice to the femi circular canals before-mention- 
 ed, and is in the manner of a fnail fliell, form- 
 ing two turns and a half in a fpiral form. In 
 this are to be remarked the nucleus and the 
 canal, which is divided into two, by a fpiral la- 
 mina: the upper of thefe opens into the vefli- 
 bulu-m and is called the fcala veftibuli, and the 
 lower terminates in the hollow of the tympa- 
 num through the feneflra rotunda, and is call- 
 ed the fcala tympani. 
 
 A very delicate and fine meiribrane carried 
 along through the cavities of the labyrinth, is 
 formed of an expanfion of the auditory nerve, 
 find is the primary part t)f the organ of hear- 
 ing, juft as the retina is formed of the expan- 
 fion of the optic nerve, and is the primary or- 
 gan of feeing. Next may be obferved the au- 
 ditory canal, which is diftinguifhed into the 
 common and proper*, the com,mon is large, 
 and has foraminula in it, pafiing into the laby- 
 rinth ; the upper one is narrow and large, ter- 
 minating partly in the cavity of the cranium, 
 and partly between the ftyloide and mafloids 
 proccjlcs. 
 
 B b Q. What 
 
370 ANATOMICAL 
 
 Q. What are the blood-velTels and nerves of 
 the ear ? 
 
 A. The arteries of the ear are from the ca- 
 rotids both external and internal j the veins 
 run partly to the jugulars, and partly to the 
 finufes of the dura mater ; the nervus audi- 
 torius enters by the hole in the internal procefs 
 of the os petrofum. It confifts of two bundles, 
 of which one is hard, the other foft. Five 
 branches of the portio mollis enter the veftibu- 
 lum, and form a delicate web, which fends flips 
 which run through the femicircular canals ; 
 the reft of the portio mollis enters the cochlea 
 at the center of its bafe, and turns with the 
 fpiral line, of which itprobably makes the mem- 
 branous part. The portio dura paffes through 
 its proper paffage, to be diftributed among the 
 external parts about the ear. 
 
 I'here have been inftances of the tympanum 
 being deftroyed by an ulcer, and the auditory 
 bones caff, without deflroying the hearing. 
 From which, and other like cafes, it ^ay be 
 concluded that the membrana tympani, though 
 ufeful in hearing is not the feat of that fenfe, 
 and if any difeafe in that membrane fhould ob- 
 llrudl; the paffage of founds, to the internal 
 parts of the ear, which are the feat of that fenfe, 
 an artificial palfage through that membrane 
 might recover hearing, as the removing the 
 cryllailine humour, when that obftruds the 
 light recovers fight. 
 
 In all complaints of deafnefs, the praditioner 
 ought carefully to examine theffate of the ear, 
 
 and 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 371 
 
 and learn v/hether the patient has or hath had 
 any abfcefs in the external meatus of the ear 
 atfedled, that might have eroded the membrane 
 of the tympanum and he fhould try whether 
 it is found or not. This is done by holding a 
 lighted candle to the alfedled ear, and if upon a 
 ftrong effort of exfpiration determined towards 
 the ears, by ftopping the mouth and noftrils, 
 the dame of the candle is fenlibly afled upon, 
 we may conclude the membrane of the tympa- 
 num to be broken, and the hearing by that ear 
 irrecoverably loft ; for the cold air gets direft- 
 ]y through the breach into the cavity of the 
 tympanum, and by chilling and drying the de- 
 licate perioftcum of the little bones, the mem- 
 branes of the cavity, and the fmall mufcles, 
 renders the parts unfit for performing their 
 fundlions. I f the wax is hardened or even ftony, 
 drop in fome oil of almonds over night, quick- 
 ened with a very fmall proportion of chemical 
 oil of anifeeds or amber*, and the next morning 
 injedl with fope fuds and a little tindlure of 
 myrrh or traumatic ballam, made milk-warm 
 or fomewhat warmer. Injedlions are to be 
 pufhed in gently, not to hurt the membrana 
 tympani. If there is an abfcefs in the external 
 meatus it ought to be healed as foon as pof- 
 fible, that the pus may not at length affed the 
 tympanum. 
 
 FINIS, 
 
N D E X. 
 
 A. 
 
 ' y^BDOMEN dikiihei Arteries of 2ip Bones pertaining 
 
 thereto 180 Cartilages of 183 Glands of 184, 240 Liga- 
 ments of 183 Mufclesofi86 Nervesof239 Regions of 177 
 Veins of 230 Vifcera of 195. 
 
 Abortion, a caufe of, 348, 
 
 AhJceJJes in Ano, ip2. 
 
 Acetabulum coxendix 182 Impofihumations in, ibid. 
 AdamtBoxtwtm 122. 
 
 Adhejion of the Lungs ijo. 
 
 Acromion. [See Proceffus Acromion] 244 
 Adifofe Membrane [See Membrana Adipofa] 5. 
 
 Adnata Oexili. fSee.Tunica AdnataJ 357. 
 
 After Birth. [See Placenta] 347. . 
 
 Air enters the Blood by the Lungs 150. 
 
 Albuginea Oculi. [See Tunica Albuginea] 357 Tcftes. [See 
 Telles] 32J. 
 
 Alee Verfpertilionis 343. 
 
 Almondi oi the [See Tonlils] io8. 
 
 Amnion of the Foetus 347. 
 
 Anajarca, Situation of, 6 Ob ervat' > -s o'", ibid. 
 
 Anatomy, what fo called, i Ufe of, ’.'d Should be well under” 
 flood by all Phyficians and Surgeons, ibid. 
 
 Anchylojis, how formed 16, 
 
 Ancle, Sprained, Caufe of, 310. 
 
 Animal Spirits, what fo called 35. 
 
 Animals that ufe no Exercife in Winter, how fubfifled 24. 
 Amaurojts, Caufe of, 99. 
 
 Aneurifm, Operation for, and its Succefs above the Cubit accounted 
 f*or 275. 
 
 Antra Maxills Superioris 6a Impollhumations in, Signs of and 
 Cure 63. 
 
 Antrum Highmorianum too. 
 
 y&rra, or great Artery 19 Afeendens, ibid. Defeendens 2o» 
 Afoneurofis of Mufcles 16. 
 
 Afsphyjis of Bones 8 Dentifotmis 107, 
 
 Appendicula Vermiformis 199. 
 
 Arjueedubi of Fallopius 103. 
 
 Aqueous Humour of the Eye 360, 
 
 Arachnoides, Tunica 89. 
 
 Arhujeuli Medullares 87. 
 
 Areola of the Breaft 174, 
 
 E b 3 Am. 
 
index, 
 
 including all the upper Limb 241 Arteries ef 271 Botles 
 of 241 Cartilages of 248 Glands of 285 Ligaments of 250 
 Mucilaginous Glands of 285 Mufcles of 2^6 Nerves of 183 
 Veins of 279 Why the Right has mors perfedl Motions than 
 the Left 134. 
 
 Arteries, what fo called 18 Found almoft empty in dead Bodies 
 23 Quantity of Blood in, ibid. In general ig. 
 
 of the Abdomen 219 Arm 271 Brain 91 Ears 93, 370 
 Eyes 94 Head 92 Leg 314 Neck 126 Nofe 93 Thorax 
 161 Tongue 93 Temples, ibid. Teeth, ibid. Paiotid Gland 
 ibid. 
 
 Artenes, why fuppofed to be fo minutely divided before they enter 
 the Brain 95. 
 
 Arteria Axillaris 271 Brachialis 272 Bronchialis 169 Bilaria 
 221 Capfularis 224 Carotides 93 Carotis Externa 93, 127 
 Interna 94, 117 Cervicalis 95 Catliaca 220 Coronaria: Cor- 
 dis 94 Ventriculi 220 Cruralis 314 Cubitalis 274 CyflicK 
 221 Diaphragmaticts 220 Duodenalis 221 Epiploiea 222 
 Gaflrica22i Glutata 228 Hatmorrhoidalis 123 Hepatica 
 220 Nunieralis 272 Hypogaftrica 227 Iliac® 226 Externa, 
 ibid. Interna 227 Minor 228 Intercollalis Inferior 164 Su- 
 perior 163 Intcflinalis 232 Lumbaiis 225 Magna vel Aorta 
 19 Mammaria Externa i 5 j Interna 153 Mediaftina ida 
 Mefcntciica inferior 223 Superior 222 Obturatrix 230 Oefo- 
 phageae 164 Pancreatica 222 Pericardia 94 Peronsa 318 
 Phrenic® 231 Plantaris Externa 318 Interna, ibid. Poplitea 
 316 Pudica interna 229 Externa, ibid.’ Pulmonaris 150 
 
 Pylorica 221 Radialis 277 Rcnalis 223 Sacra 225 Scapu- 
 larcs 271 Sciatica 228 Spermatica 224 Splenica 222 Sub- 
 clavia 161 Suralis 317 Thoracica 161, 155 Thymica idi 
 Tibialis Anterior 316 Poflerior, vel Suralis 317 Trachcalis 
 163 Vafa Brevia 222 Vertebralis 128 Umbilicalis 227, 
 
 Articidatwm, how moiftened 15. 
 
 Atytcer.oide Cartilage 122. 
 
 Afpna Atteria 157. 
 
 Atlas, Vertebr®, why fo called 1 14 DilTeient from the refl, ibid. 
 
 Auditory Nerves 103. 
 
 Auricles of the Heart 153, 
 
 Axillary Glands 285. 
 
 Axis Vertebr® 1 1 5. 
 
 B. 
 
 Bone, its Struflure and Advantages of 11,113 Crooked, 
 defetibed 13s Luxation of, how hindered, ibid, Little or n« 
 Motion in when diftoricd 136. 
 
 .Barrel of the Ear. [.See Tympanum] 353. 
 
 Sarrettnefs of Women, a Caulc of 344, 
 
 hfijilk Vein 31. 
 
 Bafosi 
 
i N D E Xo 
 
 Bafin, [See Pelvis] 179. 
 
 BUe, Duds of ao8 How conveyed 210 Qn,anti(y fecreted 21a, 
 
 Biliary VefTels 20^- 
 
 Btkhing in Obftilidions of the Menfes, Caufe of lc6. 
 
 Urinary, Size of 2 18 VefTels and Nerves of 219 Its in* 
 ner Coat, why exceeding fenfible 225. 
 
 Bkediag, Accidents in i6z In the Bafilic Vein, why great Care 
 required 375. 
 
 Shod, Quantity of, in the human Body 23 Why it flows per 
 Sakum, on an Artery being opened 25 How carried from, and 
 returned to the Heart 27. 
 
 VefTels, none in the Cuticle 3 Of the Marrow 10 Of a 
 Mufcle when cut or tied defiroys its Adion 18 Of the Brain, 
 why they have a Multiplicity of turnings and windings 8p. 
 
 Blows, where of bad confequence 54. 
 
 Body, its Parts how diftinguilhed 2 Parts of 7 How bent for- 
 wards 113. 
 
 Boils, Seat of 6. 
 
 Bones deferibed 8 Subflance of, how formed 11 Ufe of, ibid. 
 The exad Knowledge of thofe of the human Body, the Found- 
 ation of all Anatomy 12. 
 
 Bones, their Number in the human Body 12. 
 
 Bones of the Abdomen j8o Arm 242 E«r, internal, Eye, 
 Orbit of S3 Face 61 Head 52 Leg 296 Neck J14. Nofc 
 62 Pelvis 181 Thorax 133. 
 
 defer bed 84 Meninges of Sy We'ght of, ibid. Ventri- 
 cles of 85 Prominences of 86 Cove tings of 89 Arteries of 91 
 Glands of 92 Nerves of 36 Veins of, ibid. 
 
 Breafl Bone. [See Sternum] 136. 
 
 Breafls, Glandulous 174 Grow full at the Age of Puberty, ibid. 
 Decreafe when the Menfes ceafe 171; I.adiferous Duds of, ib. 
 Surrounded with Fat, ibid. Why they fwell in Time of Preg- 
 nancy 176 Blood Vcffels of 175 Nerves of, ibid. 
 
 Bronchia, or Ramifications of the Trachea 157, 
 
 Bronchial G\s.nis 172. 
 
 Butcher's Meat, how blowed 6, 
 
 e. 
 
 Caecum Tnteflinum 159. 
 
 Canals, Semicircular, of the Internal Ear 368^ 
 
 Canal of the Spine, how lined 87. 
 
 Atrabiliarire 217, 
 
 Capfular lAg^messts J5, 
 
 Carbuncles, Seat of 6, 
 
 the Wrift 247. Bones of, ibid. Cartilages of 250 Liga- 
 ments of 254 Mufcles of 264 Nerves of 283 Veins of 270 
 Arteries of 271. ' ^ 
 
 Cartilage, vthzi (o called rj Ufe of, ibid, Eroded, occafions aa 
 A-nchylofis, ibid, 
 
 ^ ^ 4 Cartilages 
 
INDEX, 
 
 CartUages fubjeft to Oflification 15 Of the Abdomen 1S3 Ar>» 
 248 Ears 70 Foot 392 Eye-lids 68 Hand 250 Head 66 
 iarynx 122 Leg 292 Neck 116 Nofe 74 Thorax 138 Ver- 
 tebra 135. 
 
 Annularis 122 Arytenoides, ibid. Cricoides, ibid. En- 
 fiformisi36 Epiglottis 122 Scuiiformis, ibid. Thyroides, ib. 
 Caruncles of the Urethra 333. 
 
 Carurtcula Lachrymalis 35s MyrtifOrmes 334. 
 
 Carotid Arteries, where they pafs thiough the Skull 54. 
 
 Catamenia- [See Menfes] 341. 
 
 Cautery, a£lual, Oil the Aiitihelix, its good effefts in the Tooth-ach 
 lot. 
 
 Cawl. [See Omentum] 205. 
 
 Cellular Subftance 5. 
 
 Cephalic Vein 34. 
 
 CerebtUum, what 86 Figure of, 87. Lobules of 16 Peduncles 
 of, Ibid. Subllance of, ibid. 
 
 Cerebrum, v.hat 8j Defcribed 86. 
 
 Cerebellum, Wounds of, mortal 54. 
 
 Cerumen of the Ear 364 How fecreted, ibid* 
 
 Cbefl. [See Thorax] 132. 
 
 Child, Dead-born, how to difeover 150. 
 
 Ckorian cf the Foetus 346. 
 
 Cboroides Oculi. [See Tunica] 358. 
 
 Chorda Tympaniof the Ear loi, 366. 
 
 Ch-yflallinc Humour of the Eye 360. 
 
 Ciliay Ligament and Cartilages 68. 
 
 Ci;crr/urk« between the Foetus and Mother 351 How performed^ 
 in a Limb after the Part has been amputated 23. 
 
 Circumtifionoi Women 335. 
 
 Cla-ficula. [See Os] 243. 
 
 Cla-viele. [See Collar-bone] ibid. 
 
 Clinoid, Procefies 55. 
 
 Clitoris, Glans-of 336 Prseputium of, ibids 
 Coa/r of the Eye. [See Tunica] 337, 
 
 Coektea of the Ear 369. 
 
 Coition 336. 
 
 Colon, Iiitellinum 200. 
 
 Collar Bone, [See ClaviculaJ 243. 
 
 Colour of the Eye. [See Iris] Of the Skin, to what owing 4* 
 Conception, manner of 344. 
 
 Colics, in Obflru£lions of the Menfes, the Caufe 106, 
 
 Conglobate. [See Glands] 43. 
 
 Conglomerate ( Ste Glands] ibid. 
 
 ConjunBinia GzexXx, [See Tunica] 3J7.- 
 Conjent of Parts 3 5 . 
 
 Conjiltuent Parts of the Body 7. 
 
 Coronary Artery of the Heart r-s6 Vein of the Heart, ibid, Ar-' 
 tery of the Stomach 210 Vein of the Stomach 23I1 
 Coracoides. [See Proceffus] 244. 
 
 Copulation. [See Coition] 3x9. ' • ’ ’ 
 
 Cjwwfn Proflitutes, [See Wliawes] 344, 
 
 Cornea 
 
X N D E 
 
 T7- 
 
 Cornea Oculi. [See Tunica! 357. 
 
 Corpora C&'fernofz. (See Penis] 331 Olivaria of the Mediilia 
 Oblongata 3S Pyramijalia of the Cerebelhun 39 Striata, £Ses 
 Cecebrum] 83. 
 
 Corpus Callol'um. [See Cerebrum] ibiJ. Reiicuiare, Colour of, 
 and why white in Puropeans and Slack hi Negroes 3 Aper- 
 tures of, ibid. Ufe of, ibid. 
 
 Cortical Part of the Brain 85. 
 
 Cofta, [See Ribs] 137. 
 
 Courfes. [See Menfes] 341, 
 
 Cowper's Glands 333-. 
 
 Cranium. [See Skull] ;6. 
 
 Crifta Galli Procefs of the Cranium 
 
 Crooketi Spine, the ill Confcqucnces of 1I3. 
 
 Crura Clitoridis 336 Pornicis of the Brain 83 . 
 
 Crura Meduilae Oblongat® 87, 
 
 Craj-ij/ Artery 314 Nerve 323 Vtin 319. 
 
 Cuhitus, Arteries of 274 Boncs of 245 Cartilages of ’49 Riog'. 
 ments of 252 Mufcles of zytS Nerves of 2S4 VeinsofaSo. 
 
 Cutaneous aiands 285. 
 
 Cuticle. [See Cuticula] 2. 
 
 CrrrrWa, or Scarf Skin i Colour of, ibid. Pores of, and niicro- 
 fcopical Obfervations on 3 Ules of, ibA. Why White in Eu- 
 ropeans and Black in Negroes, ibid. Is what is raifed by Blis- 
 ters and Scalds 2. 
 
 Cutis vera, or true Skin 3 Blood VelTcIs of 4 Foi-amina of, ibid. 
 Furrows of, ibid. Glands of, ibid. Pores of, ibid. PyrriuiiJal 
 Papilla of, ibid. Thicknefs and'Ufeof, ibid. 
 
 Cyme fpafm, Seat of 322. 
 
 D. 
 
 Darios of the Tellicles 325. 
 
 Dead Born Child, how to difeover i;n. 
 
 Deafnefs, Treatment of 371 Perhaps might he cured in -fbme 
 Cafes by perforating the Membrani T% mpani, ibid. Caufed 
 fometimes by a Polypus of the Nofe coniprtffing the Euhadiiair 
 Tube 368 Caufe and Cure of, avhen Bora fo 305. 
 
 Delirium, Caufe of 371. 
 
 Detrusor Urins T91. 
 
 Dentata. [See Bones of the Neck] 114, 
 
 Dentes. [See-Teeth] 64. 
 
 Diaftoh of the Heart 19 1. 
 
 Dtgeftlon, Qnantiiy of Fluids feparated for it at eva-y Meal 212, 
 Digital Arteries 277. 
 
 Dtgin, [Sec Fingers] 273 P.'dis. [See Toes] 316. 
 
 £>r/)/oe of the Cranium, [See Skull] 56. 
 
 Difeafes, Symptoms of, the Caufe, how known 36 Of the 
 370 Of the Joints, Caufe of 16. 
 
 Dijtcrtcd Back, [See crooked Spine] .jiy 
 
 D^- a 'Tams 
 
I N D E 
 
 Diftcrihns but feldom in the Loins 136. 
 
 Dropfy, M'^aier in, how formed 6 How evacuated, ibid. 
 
 D;Ti»?r of the Ear. [See Tympanum] j6j. , 
 
 Dry Food, why we can eat Icfs and digeft Icfs of it than of mold 
 109. 
 
 DuB Satival of Sten'o 107 Uicers and Wounds, of the Cure, ibid. 
 Arteriofus 553 Choledochus 210 Cyfticus, ibid. Hepa- 
 ticus, ibid. Nigri 3S9 Thoracicus 46 Venofus 35J. 
 
 Duodenum InttfHnum 197. 
 
 Z)ari2 Mater 90 Arteries of 9 1 G'ands of, ibid. Motion of gt 
 Nerves of, ibid. Proceircs of, ibid. Sinufes of, ibid. Ufc of 
 90 Veins of 9 >• 
 
 Dnaikcnmjs, how effedfed 95. 
 
 E. 
 
 Ear, Bones of 63 Canals of 36? Cartilages of 70 Cochlea of 
 369 Defcripn'on of 353 Foramina of 369 Glands Cerumi- 
 Eofe of 364 l.abyrinth of 369 Ligaments of 70 Mufcles of, 
 ibid. Nerves of 103 Vcdels of 93, 370 Veilibuldm of 369 
 Wa;t of 3 d 4 - 
 
 Eggs of Women. [See Ovafia] 34a, 
 
 Emplyfema, Caufe of 6. 
 
 Embry >, Magnitude of 391 Weight of, ibid. How formed 341S. 
 Encei-halon. (See Brain] 84,. _ 
 
 Pdar, why fometimes pained in the Tooth-acli foi Its Labyrintbj' 
 how fuppUed with Nerves 38. 
 
 Enfijotm Cartilage i 3d. 
 
 Epidermis, or Scarf Skin. [See Cuticula] a. 
 
 Spididimis of the Teflicles 328. 
 
 Ep'gafirium IVJ- 
 Eoigajtric Region 17 5 ' 
 
 Epiglottis SI /p Glands of 13T Mtifclcs of 124,- 
 Epipkyfts of Bones. [See Bones] 8. 
 
 Epiploon. [Sc Omentum] 209. 
 
 Epif rcphans. [SeeDentataJ 1 14. 
 
 Eziftae bian Tube 367. 
 
 Excretory Vefl’eis, what fo called 44, 209! 
 ixtermil Parts and Integuments 2. 
 
 Extremities. [See Limb] 23. , 4^ 
 
 Eye, Ball of, featedin Fat 35(5 Coats of. [See Tunica] 397 Dc- 
 feription of 394 Humours of 360 Mufclcs of (58 Parts of 
 363 Vcffcls and Nerves of 351. 
 
 F. 
 
 Face, Bones of 61 Nerves of, where they pafs 56 Why fomc- 
 times convnlfed in the Tooth- ach lOI. 
 
 Falx of the Dura Mater 96. 
 
 Folio- 
 
INDEX. 
 
 ^aPuOpian Tubes 343. 
 
 pal, what fo called 6 Ufe of 7 How confumed, ibid. AfTard* 
 Nouriflifnent when not received in the ufual way, ibid. 
 
 Femoris. fSeeOs]z86. 
 
 Feneftra Ovalis 56 , a68 Rotunda of the Ear, ibid. 
 
 Fibres, what lb called 49. 
 
 Fibula. [See Os] iSg. 
 
 Fistula in Ano 19a Seat of zoa Operation for, and Remarks 
 on, ibid. 
 
 ifin^erj. Arteries of ft7 5 Bones of ajg Cartilages of 2 eo Liga- 
 ments of 254 Mucilaginous Glands of, ibid. Mukies cifafcfi 
 Nerves of 2-83 Veins of 279. 
 
 Flanks. [See Ilia] 78. 
 
 Flowers. [SeeMenfes] 341. 
 
 Faras in XJtero, how formed 34-5 Circulation of i'S Blood 35 c 
 Magnitude of, ibid. Nutiition of 346 Siiuation of 352 Tirr.fi 
 of Birth 35 1 Weight of, ibid. DjfTtrence of from an Adult 
 353 - , 
 
 Fccf Arteries of 3 1 5 Bones of 392 Cartilages of, ibid. Glands 
 of 325 Mucilaginous Glands of 300 Ligaments of 299 Pduf- 
 clesofgio Nerves of 324 Veinsofji-o. 
 
 Foramen Ovale 153. 
 
 Foramina CtTiWi. [See Cerebrum] 85 Of the Skull Theif 
 UTe, ibid. Their Number internally 39 Veltitulum of the 
 Ear 358. 
 
 Fore Arm. [See Cubitus] 274. 
 
 Fore Skin. [See PrepeutiumJ 332. 
 
 Fork Ligameiit in the Folia Magna 334, 
 
 Fornix. [Sec Cerebrum] 8j. 
 
 Forehead, wliy dangerous to trepan 53. 
 
 Food required according to exercife 24 The drg'er it is, the mors 
 Saliva it requires in eating log Dry, uJay we can tit Lis ot ii 
 than of moift Food, ibid. 
 
 Foffa Magna. [See Vulva] 334. 
 
 Fluids exceed the Solids 23. 
 
 Funiculus Umbii’calts 349. 
 
 Fundus Uun. [See Uterus] 339, 
 
 G. 
 
 Call Bladder 309. 
 
 Ganglkn of Nerves, the Isrgefl of the Body loj. 
 
 Generation, Parts of, in both Sexes 325. 
 
 Genual harts of Men, ibid. Of Women 334. 
 
 Gaftric Glands 161. 
 
 Glands deferibed 42 Their UTe 43 Conglobate, defitlbcd, ibid,- 
 Conglomerate, defetibed, ibid. 
 
 Glands, Axillary 385 Bronchial 171 Cc-ivical J31 Oruminofo 
 Jio Cutaneous, are not to be found 285 Dorla], not alw^y* 
 to be found 172 Jugular 131 Inguinal 3 25 iaebrymai ,jq 
 
 Lacmnjr 
 
i N D E X. 
 
 14 'fttnai’ 333 Miliary 4 Mucilaginous 16 Mucofe iio Oc- 
 cipital 131 Parotid T 07 Pineal 92 Pituitary, ibid. Proftate 
 330 Renal 217 Salival, Secretion of, how performed accord- 
 ing to the Food 109 Weight of, ibid. Sebaceous 109 Sublin- 
 gual 108 Thymus, larged in new-born infants 173 Not to be 
 found in old People, ibid. Thyroide 132. 
 
 Glands of the Abdomen 240 Arm 285 Brain 92 Ears 364 
 Epiglottis 131 Eyes 109, 355 Head lofi Joints 16 Leg 285 
 Neck 131 Thorax 172 Larynx 123 OefOphagus 160 LTe- 
 thra 332 Pharynx 115. 
 
 Glands Mucilaginous, of the Joints 16 Of the Abdomen 240 
 Arm 285 Head 66 Leg 300 Neck 118 Thorax, ibid. 
 
 Glands of the human Body all put together do not weigh 4 Ounces 
 109. 
 
 Penis 331 Clitoris 335. 
 
 Ghrtis 122. 
 
 Gloie of the Eye, Mufcles of 69 Coats of. [See Tunica] 357. 
 
 Gontnrhsea, Symptoms of 333. 
 
 Gs'eat [See Guts] 199. 
 
 Groms, [See Inguina] 178. 
 
 Guts. [See Intedines] 199. 
 
 Cuftato-y Nerves yg. 
 
 Cutta Serena, Caal'e of 98, 
 
 H. 
 
 Hair, Defeription of so. 
 
 Hearing, Organ of. [See Far] lol. 
 
 Heads of Infants, vcdiy open when Born 59.’ 
 
 Head 50 Bones of 52 Cartilages ot 68 Ligaments of 66 Mn- 
 ciragirous Glands of, ibid. Mufcles of, ibid. Nctves ot gS 
 Arteries of 93 Glands of 106 Veins cl g 5 . 
 
 Head, Mufcles, that move it on the Trunk 82 And its Parts de- 
 feribed jo In many Pofhires of, how Suffocation is prevemed 
 55 Contents of 83 V ifeera of, ibid. Why fo foon moved , 
 by the fmpivlliou of Sounfs on our Ear 103. 
 
 Hepar Uterinum. I See Placenta] ? 47 - 
 
 Hert.'ta Aqnofa. [See Hydrops TeftisJ 327. 
 
 Heart 152 Auricles of 133 Cavities of, ibid. Nerves of 104 
 Pa’pi alien of J30 Valves of 15S Ventricles of 154 Veflels 
 of 156 Situation of isv- 
 
 Heat of Urine in a Conorrbcca, Caufc of 333. 
 
 Hem'-fple’es of the Brain 85. _ _ . 
 
 Ha’merrheides, binelicial to confumptive and fcorbutic Habits 2C2» 
 
 hircup, a Symptom of an inflamed I.iver 13:. 
 
 Hernia Aquofa, from whence 327. 
 
 Htbs. [See Foramina] 85. ^ c o 1 
 
 /Vn-'C' zrr, Artei ics of 27 2 Bone of 242 Cartilages of 24® Glands 
 of 283 Ligaments of 2 30 Mucilaginous Glands of 285 Muf- 
 cles of 256- NtrvesofaSs Veins of 27p. 
 
 Humerus, 
 
I NDEX. 
 
 SI}:meruf, ProcefFes of, not to be luxated upwards a.-l-s- Groove of, 
 in which lies the Tendon of the Biceps Mufcle 244 Kas greater 
 Motion than any Bone in the Body 245. 
 
 Humours of the Eye 360. 
 
 Back. {See crooked Spine] 118. 
 
 Hydrocele. [See Hydrops Teftis] 327. 
 
 Hydrops Teftes, Cure of, ibid. 
 
 Hymen 338. 
 
 Hypochondria 2, 17 7 ' 
 
 Hvpogafiric Re^<oa 2, ijS. 
 
 Jaundice, Remarks on tliofe who die of it 214. 
 
 Jaw, Parts of j I Upper SinuiTes of. [See Antra] 
 
 Jejunum Inteftinum jg8, 
 
 Ilia, or Flanks 178. 
 
 Ilium, IntefHnum 19?. 
 
 Jmpojtbumations, Seat of 6 In the Ear, rather Ulcerations 1S4, 
 
 Incus. [See Os] 65. 
 
 Infants, Still- born, how difeovered 150 Deformities, how fome- 
 times occafioned 138 Heads, why open when born 59 Rib? 
 often deprefled or broke by carelefs Kurfes 138, 
 
 Infundibulum 83. 
 
 InfanudUwtx, a Symptom of 13 r. 
 
 Inguina, or Groins 178. 
 
 Inguinal G\zndi 325. 
 
 InjeHioKs of the Ear fiiould be very gentle 371. 
 
 Intercojtal Nerve 100, loi, 104, 106. 
 
 Internal Ear. [See Ear] loi Jugular Vein the larged Vein that 
 goes to the Head 98 Carotid Artery fends no Branches to the 
 Neck 128. 
 
 In^ef inis 199 General Defeription of 2,0a. 
 
 /nfi/fwcs, Arteries of 203 Coats of 202 Glands of 203 Length 
 of, ibid. Nerves of 204 Valves of 202 Veins of 203 Ufe 
 of, ibid. 
 
 Jntejtinum Cscum 199 Colon 200 Duodenum 197 Jejunum 
 198 Ilium, ibid. ReGum 201, 
 
 Integuments, external 2, 
 
 Intoxieatitm , C^ufe of 95. 
 
 Liquor of 15 Difeafes of, the Caufe, ibid. Mucilaginous 
 Glands of, ibid. Of the Thigh, impofthurtiatcd 182. 
 
 IJchiatic Nerve, the larged in the Body 40. 
 
 Jfi^mt s of the Medulla Oblongata 87. 
 
 Jier ad Infundibulum 8(J. 
 
 Jugular Veins 96. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kidnys, Defeription of jiy VelTels of 188 Ufe of, ibid. 
 
 LaUa 
 
I N 
 
 D E X. 
 
 L, 
 
 Za 5 !a pG(lcr<Ii 354; 
 
 Labyrinth of thc.Kar 3(78. 
 
 Lachrymal Glands jic, 355. 
 
 La<Slea Vafa 44. 
 
 Laileal '^efie's, ibid'. 
 
 Lacanar Glands 333, 338. 
 
 Larytw, Defcriptiori of i2Z Cariilaj.’S of, ibid. Membrane of 
 323 Mnfcles of, ibid. Ventricles of, ibid. Glands of, ibid. 
 Lef: bide, whr-moft fubjetft to pleuritic Pains 153. 
 
 Ler, including ail the lewcr Limb 283 Arteries of 314 Bones 
 of 235 Cartilages of 292 Glands of 32 j Ligaments of 287, 
 394 Pducilaginous Glands of 300 Maii'cles of 301 Nerves of 
 3241 Veins of 279. 
 
 t’gameat, what fo called T5 Defeription of, ibid. Kinds of, ibid. 
 
 Senlibie of very acute Pains, ibid. Ule of i5. 
 
 Ligajnertt of the Abdomen 183 Arm, ike. 2jo Carpus 254 
 Clavicles 2S r Cubituszsa Ears 70 Eyelids 68 Femoris294 
 EibuJa 298 Fingers 254 Head 56 Humerus 232 Leg 287, 
 394 Metacarpus 25s Metatarfus 299 Neck 117 Nofe 73 
 Patella298 Pelvis 183 Ribs 139 Scapula25i Sternum 139 
 Tarfus 299. 
 
 Ligaments of the Thorax 139 Tibia 297 Toes 299 Vertebra? 
 
 SIT. • 
 
 Lig.smenta lata Uteri 141 Rotunda Uteri, ibid. 
 
 Ligamenium Ciliare 68 La;um, ibid. Sul'penrorium 208 Teres, 
 ibid, f'allopii 134. 
 
 Ziinh, Circulation of the Blood in, after a Part is amputated 13 
 Lower, its Parts 284 Upprr, its Fails 242. 
 
 L'wea Alba Colli 120. 
 
 Li/)s, Arteries of 93 Mufclesof 74 Nerves of 100 Veins of 96; 
 Liarer, Defcript.on of 207 Arteries of 208 Nerves of, ibid, 
 Veins of 209 Weight of'212 Excretory Duffs of 209, 
 
 Zoic5 of the Brain 85. 
 
 i-oids. Vertebra: of i8o Mufclcs of 192. 
 
 Longitudinal Sinus of the Dura Mater 52. 
 
 Region i?8. _ _ » 
 
 Lungs Achelions of common iji Defeription of 14a Vef- 
 fcls of I to Nerves of 104. 
 
 Lux.ithn of the Ntck, commonly called breaking tjie Neck 115. 
 
 Veins dcfci ih.-d 41. 
 
 v.hat fb called, ibid. Their Ufe 42 Of the TcfliT 
 
 cks 329. 
 
 M* 
 
 stLslUus of the internal Ear. [See Osj 
 
 Mant’rta. [See Ereatbj i74» . , 
 
 Mamnutr^ 
 
INDEX, 
 
 /lldmpffl’y Veflels 175, 
 
 Mammiilar'j Piocefs 53. 
 
 Man, why taller after lying fome Time horiz6iitalIy 1 1 7 Wliy 
 (horter after carrying a heavy Burden on the Head or Shoulders, 
 ibid. 
 
 AfirrOTit, what fo called 9 ItsUfe lo Blood VelTcls of 9 Nerves 
 of 10 Bloody 9 Spinal. [See Medulla Spinalis] 87. 
 
 Mcdulh. [See Marrow] 9. 
 
 Medulla Oblongata 87. 
 
 Medulla Spinalis, ibid. Arteries of 88 Integuments of, ibid. 
 Nerves of 39 SubClancr of 88 Thicknefs of, ibid. UieofSp 
 Veins of 88 Wounds of, mortal, ioid. 
 
 Mafticat'xn 76. 
 
 Maxillary Sinus Impoflhumations of, their Signs and Cure, 
 ibid. Arteries of 93 Nerves of 37. 
 
 Meatui Audilorius 363 Obflruftion of, the Cure 364 Urinarius 
 336. 
 
 Median Vein 31. 
 
 Mediastinum 147 Ufes of 148. 
 
 Meditulium. fSee Diploe] jS. 
 
 Megrim, Difrafe, Seat of roo. 
 
 Membrana Tympani, by fome called the Drum of the Ear 363 
 How to know if found 371. 
 
 Membrana Aii'pols. $■ DileafeS of, ibid. Subflance of, ibid. Ufe 
 of 6. 
 
 Membrane, what fo called 48 Defciiption of, ibid. Names of, 
 ibid. Ufe of 49. 
 
 Membranes in General 48 Abdomen. [See Peritonsum] rgj 
 Bones. [See Periofteum] ri, 238 Brain. [See Dura and Pia 
 Mater 89, 90 Ears, Labyrinth of 368 Eye. [See Tunica] 
 357 Larynx 122 Oefophagus 139 Nofe, ibid. Thorax. 
 [See Pleura] 148. 
 
 Meninges of the Brain 84. 
 
 Menjes, Defeription of, how produced, and why periodical 341 
 Obflruftions of, Symptoms and Caufes 106 When ihey com- 
 mence 341, 173 When they generally ceafe, ibid. 
 
 JHfura/4 Muliebris 333 
 
 Mer.firua. [See Menfes] 341. 
 
 Defeription of 206 Ufe of, ibid. 
 
 Mefocolon 207. 
 
 Metacarpus Arteries of 274 Bonesof23; Cartilages of 230 
 Ligaments of 254 Mucilaginous Glands of 23S Mufcles of 
 264 Nerves of 267 Veins of 279. 
 
 Melatarfus ZQI Arteries of 3 1 6 Bonesof2pi Cartilages of 293 
 Glandsof 325 Ligaments of 299 Mucilaginous Glands of 30s 
 Mufcles of 508 Nerves of 323 Veins of 320. 
 
 Miliary Glands 5. 
 
 Milk in Womens Breads, Caufe of 17^. 
 
 Mifcarriage. [See Abortion] 34S. 
 
 fUonj Veneris 334. 
 
 Morfus Diaboli 343. 
 
 S 
 
 Moilen, 
 
r N D E X.. 
 
 Jl fulinf:, Row (Jertroycd j8» 
 
 S/Luth, I'aitsof ^i. 
 
 iiudlag'irt'us Glands of the Joints i9s Of the Neck loS Tho- 
 i-sx, i'did. Abdomen 1 34 Arm 485 Of the Acetabulum Cos- 
 endteis 1 82 Leg 100. 
 
 iJfe/e/e, what /b called (6 VCtcSij AfJiqn of, ibid. Aponeu- 
 yoilsofiS .Ueferiptun of, ib'd. Oimetifions of, ibid. Fafcia 
 Tend.nofa of 17 Hgureofid Infertion of, ibid. Membrane 
 of 17 Motion of, ib d. Name of r<5 Origin, ibid. Penni- 
 form or Compound, ibid. Reflilineal or Simple, ibid. Sorts of 
 ibid. S'.ibftance of 17 Tendon of ifi Ufeofi; The longeft 
 >n the human Body 305 Tail of 17. 
 
 Mg/i-.A of the Alr.lomen fS6 Arm 256 Ear 70 Epiglottis 124 
 Eye 68 lAo. 3ro Fore-arm 256 Fingers 166 Glottis 122 
 IHand 2 56 H.ad<55 Larynx 122 Leg 301 Lips 74 I.oins 
 
 192 N0L73 NcckirS I’alate 7S Pharynx 135 Plicate 
 
 t'acsriip SbouKlrr 257 Thigli 3ot Thorax 140 Toes 310 
 Tongue Sr Which move it on the Trunk 82. 
 
 S-Lifci-!us bdiiiPor Oeuli 6g AbJuflor Digit! intcroflei 267 Di- 
 oiti Me acarpi Oli.s Minimi 267 Digiti Minimi 268 Primi, 
 ibid. Polli.is 270 P:dis3ix Pedis Digit! Minimi 323 Se- 
 cnn.Ins, ibid. Pedis Inieroirti, ibid. Tranfverfalis 3 1 1 Acce- 
 i^aror Grins rgo Addaflor Occuli 6g Anconsus 263 An- 
 frr-or Ami, u s 71 An.itragicus 72 Arytsnoideus 124 Bar 
 freglofliis 8r Biceps Cubiti Flexor 261 Tihis 306 Biventer 
 75 Biventer Cn vical s r 1 9 Brachisus extei nus 263 Int rnus 
 tSz BiTccina’-or 74 C, ratogloflus 81 Ceratothyroideus 123 
 ChoudroxloQ’iis 8t Ciliari 63 Cleidomaftoideus i 18 Coc- 
 cy'gti :8£ Complexus IJ9 Con flriftor Pharingei 125 Cora- 
 cobrachiaHs 7.61 Coracohym.bris So Complexns i 9 Com- 
 prclibr Niu-ium 73 Corrugator Supercilii 68 Cremaitcr Tcf- 
 tis 189 • Cricoarytffinoidcns la'eralis 124 Poflicus, ibid. Cri. 
 cothyroidcus 123 Crnrsus 30S Cucu'laris 257 Depreflbr 
 Arvgnli Oils 74. Als Nali, ibid. Labii Infermris, ibid. Oc- 
 orli 6g Deiioides 259 DLtnil'or Di ins 1 9 1 Diapbragma 244 
 Elevator Anguli Oiis 7} Als Nall 73 Auricuis 71 Ani 
 igr Coflanim 143 Labii inferioiis 74 Snperioris, ibid. 
 
 Mend -4 Occnli 69 Palpeb s 63 Scapuls 258 Ereifor 
 Clito.idis 191 Penis 189 Extenf r Auricniaris, vel Digiti Mi- 
 riirrri 267 Dtgiroium communis, ibid. Digiti primi internodii 
 ' Polltcis 268 Si'cnncli 269 Teriii, ibid. Pollicis pedis brevis 
 "20- Longiis, ibid. Digi'erum pedis brevis 3 12 Longus, ibid. 
 Tric’ps Cirbiti 263 Dorfi et Lnmborum 142 Ulnaris 265 
 C.v pi radia is, ibid. Fafcia Lata 304 Flexor Carpi radialis 
 C63 DInari.s, ibid. Digi oi om internodii primi 266 Seenndi, 
 Eiiid. Tertii, ibid. Fi xor primi et fernndi Odis Pol icis 269 
 Teriii internodii Pollicis 270 Pollicis pedis brevis 310 Longus, 
 ibid Digiiornm pedis brevis, ve! Peifoiatus 312 I.ongus, vel 
 EVvforans, ibid. Frontalis, f See OccipitoJ Galterocnemius 308 
 Cfaeiiis 505 Gel iogloffus 81 Genjobyoidens 89 Gloflbila-. 
 rd'iAmus79 Glut XU5 mat'd .mus 303 Medius, ibid. Minimus, 
 
 ib d. 
 
index:, 
 
 Jb:d. Hyothyroideus laj Infrafpinatus 260 Iliacus Internus 
 301 Intercoftales externi, interni 143 Interfpinales Ccrvids 
 
 120 Dorfi, Lnmborum 141 Intertranfverfales C^-rvicis ixo 
 Dorfi, Lumborani 192 Latiflimus Dorfi 261 Laxator Tym- 
 pani 72 Lingualis 81 Longidimus Dorfi 2<Si Longus Colli 
 
 121 Lumbricaks 266 Pedis 313 Mallei extern us 73 Incer- 
 nus,i,ibid. Maffeter78 Maftoideus 119 MuhifiJas Spina 141 
 Mylohyoideus 80 Nafalis Labii, Supetiir74 Occi pi to fron- 
 talis 67 Obliqmis extcrnus, Abdominis 187 Inferior Ocnli 70 
 Inferior Capitis S4 Internus Abdominis i iy Superior Occuli 
 70 Superior Capitis, ibid. Obturator exteinus 304 internus, 
 ibid. Oefophagus 159 Orbicularis Oris 191 Palpebrarum 6S 
 Palato pharingeus 1x6 Palmaris brevis 254 Longus, ibid. 
 PefHncus 302 Peftoralis 259 PerforansxCa Perforatus, ibid. 
 Peroncus brevis, Longus 309 Plantaris 308 Platyfina-myoides 
 75 Popliteus 307 Pronator quadra us 265 Teres x65 Pfoas 
 Magnus 302 Parvus 193 Pterygoideus externus 7 j Internus, 
 ibid. Pteryg 'pharingeus 125 Plerygoflaphylinus externns 79 
 Internus, ibid. Pyramidalis 187 Pyriformis 303 Qnadra'us 
 Fcmoris 304 Lumborum 193 Reflus Abdominis 187 Ca- 
 pitis internus Major 81, 120 Minor S3 Capitis Major Poili- 
 cus, ibid. Minor Pollicns, ibid. Retflus Capi.us Obliquus in- 
 ferior 83 Superior 84 Rettiis Lateral s 83 Tihxz 305 Rt- 
 traflor Auriculse 71 Rhomboidcs 257 Sacer 141 Sacro lum- 
 bal s, ibid. Sa torins 305 Scalenus 142 Semimembranofus 
 506 Semifpinalis Cervicis 121 Dorfi4oi Semitendinofus 306 
 Serratus inferior polticus 143 Superior 145 Major Anticus 
 558 Tvlinor, ibid. Sphinfter Ani 191 Oris [See Orbicula- 
 ris] 74 Vagins jpt VeficaUrinari® 190 Solans 308 Splc- 
 riius Capitis 120 Colli 121 Spinalcs Cervicis 121 Dorli 141 
 Sternohyoid.rus 80 SternomaPoideus 119 Sternothyroideus 
 123 Styloglolfus 81 Stylohyoideus 80 Stylopharingeus izj 
 Subciavius 257 Sublimis 266 Subfcapularis 261 Subfcapu- 
 laris fuptrior, ibid. Inferior, ibid. Supinator radii brevis 263 
 Longus, iliid. Snprafpinatus 260 Temporalis 73 TcnforTyni- 
 pani 73 Teres Major 260 Minor, ib. TliyroarytKnoideus 124 
 
 Thyroftapliylinus 79 Tib alis Anticns 309 Poilicin, ibid. 
 Trachelomafta deus txo Tragicus72 Trapezius ,257 Tranf- 
 Vtr^alis Abdominis 1S8 Cervicis I2i Dorfi 141 Penis 199 
 Tranfverfus 72 Triangularis Sterni 144 Triceps Extenfor 
 Cubiti 263 Femoiis 302 Vadus Ex-einus 307 Internus, ib, 
 Zygomaticus 74. 
 
 Myrtiformn, | Sec Caruncul*] 334. 
 
 N. 
 
 Naih, what 50. 
 l^'etes Cerebri 87. 
 
 iVlaw/ String. [See Funiculus] 349. 
 
 A'eci, .Arteries of iio Pones of 114 Cartilages of 116 Glands 
 ofl3t Ligaments of 1 17 Mucilaginous Glands of 1 1 8. 
 
 Afcl-, Mufdcsof ii8 NervfS of 130 Veins of 128 Luxations 
 Of, commonly called breaJdng the Neck 117, 
 
 C c 
 
 Ksyirith, 
 
I N D E X. 
 
 Ncphrith, a Symptom of 314- 
 
 M-rt/ej, Confcntof34 D.;fciiption of, ibid. DmGon of 36 Ex- 
 periments of, prove the Exiltencc of a nervous Fluid 35 Har- 
 mony and Sympa'hy of, ibid. Origin of 36 Whether vibrating 
 Cord.*; or tradnflory Tubes 35. 
 
 Ker-ves of the Brain gr ill Pair 36 2d Pair 37 3d Pair, ibid. 
 4th Pair, ibid, sth Pair, ibid. 6th Pair, ibid. 7th Pair 38 
 8th Pair, ibid, pth Pair, 39 loih Pair, ibid. 
 
 the Medulla Spinalis 39 lO Cervical, ibid. 2d Cervi- 
 cal, ibid. 3d Cervical, ibid. 4th Cervical, ibid. 5th Cervical, 
 ibid. 6th Cervical 40 7th Cervical, ibid. 12 Twelve Dorfal, 
 ibid, s Five Lumbar, ibid. 
 
 Nerves of the Abdomen 239 Arm 284 Leg 323 Neck 130 
 Thorax 171- , , .r. 
 
 Naves of the Bowels 204 Eye-ball 361 Stomach 196 Teeth 
 
 AVflw Auditory 38 Abducent 370 Crural 323 Guflatory 37 
 liue^collal38 Lingual 39 Maxillary 37 Motary, rbid. Oc- 
 cipital 39 Olfaflory 36 Opthalmic 37 Optic, ibid. Pathe- 
 tic ibid. Phrenic 130 Sacral 240 Sciatic 240, 372 Sympa- 
 thetic -8 Of the oblique and extenfor Mufcles of the Head, ib. 
 
 Akfr 93^ Arteries of 83, 94 Bones of 62^ Cartilages of 74 
 Glands of ito Ligaments of 74 Mucilaginous Glands of 66 
 Mufcles of 73 Nerves of 37 Veins of 128. 
 
 Sinufes of 6t. 
 
 NKtriiion of the forus in Utero, Manner of 347. 
 
 Nympha, Deferip ion of 334- 
 
 O- 
 
 Oeciputy Arteries of 93 . 
 
 Chji/u( Mufcles of the Eye 70. , , , j 4 4 
 
 Oeci itPi Bone, why hrongly made and defended 67. 
 
 0 ,; or Gullet . 59 Arteries of 160 Coals of 159 
 
 of 1%I Nerves of, ibid Subdance of 15? Veins ot 161 
 Pieices the Diaphragm tS 9 - 
 Cmentvm or Cawl 225* 
 
 -Cph.-NlmirNerve 100. 
 
 ('tti' Nerves, where iliev pafs c,u, uS. ■ • • r 
 
 Orh \s of the Eye Vefllls of, where they pafs 56 Arteries of 9 S 
 
 Oi'Afa-analus 291 Caicis, ibid. Canini Dentes 64 Clavicula; 
 - ,,3 CoccygiriSr, 193 Cofttex 37 Cribilorme 35 Cuboides 
 ; o Cuneirorme 247 Cuirdformia 290 Ltl.moidcs 55 Fe- 
 nimiszSd Fibu'a 289 Frontis Humeri 244 Hyoides 65 
 
 , T £ Incus 6 ; Innominata 182 Ilium, ibid. 
 
 ‘,7 Maxilla, inferior 64 Superior 62 Metacarpi 247 Me- 
 Uirrf. 2QX fiolares Dentes 64 Nafi 6x _ Naviculare 291 Oc- 
 cipicisS 4 OrbiculareAuricds 66 Carpi 247 
 
 • 1^,. Pa'clla2S8 Petrofa 54 Plana 62 Phalanges Di- 
 
 • Pubis >82 Radius 246 
 
 ■ inula 2-JS Sacrum *81 Scaphoides 24^ 
 
INDEX, 
 
 Sphenoldes jj Spongiofum Stapes 66 Ste 
 Temporum S3 TibiazSS Trapezium 247 Trapezoicits,.a.a , 
 Ulna 24s Unciforme 247 Ungues 62 Vertebra no Vo- 
 mer 63. 
 
 Ojjicula Audltus 85. 
 
 Ojjificatm, how performed 8. 
 
 Ofleology, Foundation of all Anatomy 14 Table of, ibid. 
 
 Ovaria of Women, Defcription of 342. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pam of the Thigh in Pregnancy, from whence 341, 
 
 Palate, Bones of 63 Mufcles of 78. 
 
 Palpitation of the Heart, a Symptom of 130. 
 
 Pojthomiuti Glands pr. 
 
 Pd«crei!i, Defcription of ZI3 Ufe of, ibid. Weight of, ibid. 
 
 Pancreatic Juice, Quantity fecreted 212. 
 
 Par Linguale 39 Vagum 38. 
 
 Parietal Bones the largeft in the Skull 53 What makes the Tree- 
 like Appearance on their Infide So. 
 
 Parotid Gland 107 Arteries of 93. 
 
 Parti of the Body 7. 
 
 Patella, or Knee-pan. £See Os] 288 Cartilages of 292 Liga- 
 ments of 296 Mucilaginous Glands of 300. 
 
 Pedts Hypocampi. [See Fornix] 85 . 
 
 Pelvis, Bones of 179. 
 
 PfHri, Defcription of 331 Corpora Cavernofa of, ibid. Ercflion 
 of, the Caufe, ibid. Glands of, ibid. Prspatium of ibid. 
 VelTels of, ibid. 
 
 P<«r'j of Women. [See Clitoris] 335. 
 
 Pericardium, Defcription of 151 Adhefion of, ibid. 
 
 Pe icranium, Defcription of 56. 
 
 Peritonaeum, Defcription of 193. 
 
 Perineeum 178. 
 
 Peritonaeum, Dropfy of, how to difcover 195. 
 
 Perfpiration infcnfible, Quantity of, fecreted in a Day 3. 
 
 Pharynx 159 Mufcle of 99 Glands of, ibid. 
 
 Phrenic Nerve 130. 
 
 Pituitary Gland. [See Gland] 92. 
 
 Periofieum, what fo called 11 Full of Blood VelTels and Nerves, 
 ibid. Conllitutes the firft P..udiments in the Bones of the Foetus 
 ibid. Ufe of, ibid. 
 
 Pia Mater, Defcription of 89 Arteries of, ibid, Ufe of, ibid. 
 Veins of, ibid. Almoft wholly compofed of Blood VeiTcls, and 
 from whence, ibid. 
 
 Piles, how bed extirpated 203. 
 
 Pleura, Defcription of 145 Ufes of 147. 
 
 Pleuritic Pains, from whent^ they proceed 153. 
 
 Plexus Choroides 86. 
 
 Pinguedo. [ See Fat] 6. 
 
 Polypus behind the Uvula occafions Deafnefs 358. 
 
 Pomum Adami 122. 
 
 Pores 
 
 C c 2 
 
I N 
 
 D E X, 
 
 Pirts of the Cuticle 3. 
 
 Poitio Mollis ct dura 103. 
 
 Biliarius zi I. 
 
 Pi-scejfus Acromion Ciliares;55 Coracoides 244 Dentatus 
 iij Vaginalis. [See TnnicaJ 326, 
 
 ProctJJ'es of the Vertebra in. 
 
 Proflatt Glands 330. 
 
 Proftatie, ibid. 
 
 ProMpJus An\zo% Ca^'es of, ibid. 
 
 Placenta., Deicription of 347 Separation of, occafuns a Mifcar* 
 riage 349. 
 
 Prcefuthnn 332. 
 
 Pubis 178. 
 
 Pudenda. [See Labial 3 34- 
 
 Pulmonary Artery zi Vein 27. ^ r r 
 
 Pulfe, the Artery we feel when we feel the Pulfe 278 Caufe of 14. 
 Pterygoid Procedes 55. 
 
 Punaa Lachrynial'a 6z, 356. 
 
 Pupil oi the Eye 358. 
 
 R. 
 
 Raynifrationsoiths Arteries and Veins branched like the Stamina 
 
 of the Leaves ot Biants 22. . ,-r . 
 
 Receptaculum Chyli 45 Will contain about one Ounce of Water 
 46. 
 
 RtRutn Intefllnum zoi. . 
 
 Recurrent Nerves cautiouny to be avoided in Bronchoiomy T04 _U 
 both cut, the Voice would not be enli ely loft, as fome affirm, ib. 
 Rir.al Glands 216. 
 
 Penes Succentui iati 2 i 7. 
 
 Pe^io Umbilicalis 2. 
 
 Kfr/CK/nraMucorum 3.^ 
 
 Occnli. [See 1 imici | 359 . 
 
 w’hy afTtcU-d in fncezing 500. . t- 
 
 Ribs the r VelLls and Neives pats in a burrow in the under Edge 
 of each Rih 137 Cartilaet-s of 1 58 Ligaments of 139 Ot 
 Int'a’ics, ofttn drpi'L'tlffl or broke by cdrclels Nuries 130. 
 
 Pima Magna. [Sec Vulva] 334. 
 
 Roiuia. [See Pat;;Jla] 288. 
 
 S. 
 
 'taliva how piomoted 80 Svervtion of how p.-rfortned 107 
 (Xnntity fecret.d always according to the Li ynefs of 1 he I ood . 
 
 d'ucIs of^Stuio !07 Ulcer and Wounds of, the Cure, ibid. 
 
 °oo ' Tliofc that are down in it romctlmcs fpit a Gallon 
 in twenty- four Hours, ibid. 
 
 r.hmicll.i '.'i-iri 31 
 1 ,7'n T ynipani pry 
 
 Vennmli, ibl.i. 
 
 .;prla\ Ribs of C 43 •'’'tus of 244 Spine of, fbid. 
 
 Schirrous 
 
INDEX, 
 
 Sclbreus Tonfils, Extirpation of loS. 
 
 SsMc Ligament 183 Nerve Z40, 314 The largeff in the Body, 
 ibid. 
 
 Sclerotica Oculi . [ See TunicaJ 3 5 j. 
 
 Scrobiculus Cordis 2. 
 
 Sraf/Skin. [See Cuticula] 2. 
 
 Scutiform Cartilage 122. 
 
 Sebaceous Glands 35 ^" 
 
 Seed, Secretion of 318 How palTedand cjefled in Time of Coitioc 
 329 Defcription of 34J. 
 
 Sella Turcica, vcl Equina 55.- 
 
 Mafculinum. [ See Seed] 343. 
 
 Sem/WVetids. [See Vafa Deferemia] 326. 
 
 5 e/i/w»i Lucidum Ccrebii 85. 
 
 Shoulder. [See Humerus] 242 Top Pain of, in Suppura ions of 
 the Liver, &c. how occafioned ijr. 
 
 S boulder -hiaAe. [See Scapula] 243. 
 
 Shoulder not to be diflocated upwards 244 The greateft Motion 
 of any Joint in the Body 245 Cartilages of 249 Ligaments of 
 
 2JI. 
 
 Sinus Frontalis 53. 
 
 Sinus Maxilla Supeiioiis 63. 
 
 5 /ni<r Cervicalis 130 Sphenoidalis 56 Vena Portae 208. 
 
 Singing, Remarks on 123, 
 
 Skin, from whence its Colour 3. 
 
 'Smelling, imtrtediate Inflrument of op. 
 
 Skull, Diploe of 5S Foramina of 59 Imperfeflion of, in new- 
 born Children 57 Lining of po Shapeof 57 Sutures of, ibid. 
 Tables of 56, 
 
 Soap Suds, a proper Injefllon for the Ear 372. 
 
 Spermatic Cord 328 Artery the fmallefl in the whole Body for its 
 Length, ibid. 
 
 Spii/e, Bones of 112 Crooked 1 14, 135 Joints of, why fo many, 
 113 Luxations of, ibid. 
 
 Spi’its. [See Animal Spirits] 35. 
 
 Spine Canal, how lined 38 L ned with a ligamentary Tube 117 
 Crooked, how formed 135. 
 
 Marrow 88 Its ufe, ibid. ProcefTus i ii. 
 
 Sy>/eeB, Defcription of 2 14 Weightof2J5 Ufeof, ibid. VefTels 
 of, ibid. Size of 214. 
 
 Sprain of the Ancle, a Caufe of 310. 
 
 Scene's Salival Duft 107. 
 
 Defcription of 195 Coats of igS Nerves of, ibid. Vef- 
 fels of, ibid. 
 
 Stomach, very large in Gluttons, ibid. Senfation of, why very 
 acute 104 Pain of, in Palpitations of the Heart, how occafioned 
 
 130. 
 
 Stomach Ach in Obflrudlions of the Menfts, the Caufe 106. 
 Sternum. [See Os Sternum] 135 The Uncertainty of Trepanning 
 it 147. 
 
 Squinting, involuntary, how occafioned 102. 
 
 Cc 3 
 
 Stra- 
 
I NT D 
 
 E X, 
 
 Slrabifmus- [See Squinting] ibid. 
 
 Scapes. [See Os Stapes] 66. 
 
 Styiiform Procefs 54. 
 
 Sublingsial G\znAs 108, 
 
 Suppuration, how perfoimed zj Of the Liver, and Symptoms of 
 
 1 ; I. 
 
 Still Born Infants, how to discover rjo. 
 
 Sty bide Procefs 125. 
 
 Sutures of the Skull 57 How formed, ibid. Why open in new- 
 born Infants 59 Ufe of 58 True 57 Spurious, ib d. 
 
 Sutura Coronalis 58 Lambdoidalis, ibid. Sagittalis, ibid. Squa- 
 mofa, ibid. Tranfverfalis, ibid. 
 
 Su'allcnuhtg, Aflion of, 122 Why we cannot when our Mouth is 
 open 77. 
 
 Swelling. [Sec White Swelling] 15. 
 
 Sweat, what 5. 
 
 Symjathy of Nerves, the Knowledge of, of great Ufe in Phyfic J 5 
 Of [he Parts from whence rod. 
 
 Sysnyothetic Nerves. [See Par Vagum] 38. 
 
 Syn'mia Liquor of the Joints 15. 
 
 Syjtile of the Heart 18. 
 
 T. 
 
 T, Me, Ofleology of 14. 
 
 'Tables of the Skull 56. 
 
 fvi, Arteiies of 290 Bones of, ibid. Cartilages of 68 Glands 
 of 294, 325 Ligaments of 68 Mucilaginous Glands of 300 
 Mufclcs of 308 Nerves of 323 Veins of 322. 
 
 Ta yi Cartilage of the Eye lids 68. 
 
 T,y lot's Muf'cle 305. 
 
 Tears, Matter of 355. 
 
 Teeth 64 Names of, ibid. Nerves of 65 Number of 64 \ellels 
 of, V here they pats, ibid. Of the upper Jaw, why their Foots 
 Iprc.'rd more than thofc of the under jaw 63 Nutrition of, ibid. 
 Senfatiuii of, ibid. Aiteries of 93. 
 
 Tendons, what fo called 18. 
 
 Tejtes Cerebri 86 Or Telticles 32-5. 
 
 '^J hat ami Neivorum Opticofum 86. 
 
 V/igi, Arteries of 314 Bone of 286 Cartilages of 292 Glands 
 ' 01 32.5 Ligaments of 294 Mixilaginous Glands of 300 Maif- 
 
 tles of 301 Ncivcs of 323 Veins of 320. 
 
 Thigh, Niimbnefs of, in a Nephritis-, the Caufe 324 Fain of in 
 i'repnancy, the Ca fc 3|t. 
 
 Tho acic X)uft 4^. 
 
 ‘2 to rax' t Arteiies of i6i Bones of 133 Cartilages of 138 
 
 Glands of 172 Ligaments of 139 Ivluc laginous Glands Of i 38 
 ?4u'cles of 14 t Ntrvtsofiyi Veins of 166 \ ifeera of 145. 
 
 Thu-n.b. [ eePorlex] 248. 
 
 eland T73 I arg -If in ncw-b&rn Infants, ibid. Not to be 
 U find in old People, ibid. 
 
 Thyroids Glands iji. 
 
 Tobacco] 
 
INDEX, 
 
 Tobacco, Smoaking of, promotes fpitting in thofe not accuflon-.cvi 
 to it leg. 
 
 Arteries of 3 ! (S Bones of igi Carti'ages of ibid. G’anc's 
 
 . of 300 Ligaments of 298 Mucilaginous <jland5 of 300 Mul- 
 clesofgio Nerves of 314 ■ Veins of 320. 
 
 Trachea Dcfcription of 157 Cartilaginous Rings of, ibid. Glands 
 of, ibid. Membrane of is8 Ufe of, ibid. 
 
 Tongue, Bones of 65 Mufcles of 81 Nerves of loj VefTcls of 
 93,98, 
 
 Tonfils Schiirous, Extirpation of 108. 
 
 Ttoth Ach, by the Sympathy of the Nerves, may afTeff the Eye and 
 Ear 37 A remarkable Cure of 102. 
 
 Trepan, or Trephine, not to be applied lo the Forehead 53. 
 
 True Skin. [See Skin] 3. 
 
 Tuba Euftachiana 367 Pafles from the Mouili to the Ear 368 
 Obtlruffion of, caufts Dtafnefs, ibid 
 
 Tabes Fallopiana 343 Euflachianse 367. 
 
 Tuberculmn Loweri iS3- 
 
 Tun:ca, Albuginea Occuli 337 Adnata Occuli, ibid, ChoroiJes 
 Occuli 338 Coujuniftiva Occuli 357 Curnea Occuli, ibid. Re- 
 tina Occuli 359 Sclerotica Occuli 337 Uvea Occuli 333. 
 
 Tunica Vaginalis 326. 
 
 Tun'd of the Eye 353. 
 
 Tympanuin, or Drum of the Ear 365 Not really the Organ of 
 Hearing 370 Dcllroyed, Inftar.ces of, wi hout lofs of Hearing, 
 ibid, rrlways full of Mucus in new-born Children 355 • Mem- 
 brane of, how to know when found 371. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vagina, Dcfcription of 337. 
 
 of Veins 27. Latf.al VcfTels 44 Lymphatic VefTels 41. 
 
 Vah]u’a Magna C.re.bri 86. 
 
 Vat, Brevia Arteria 233 Vena 239 Deft rentia 326 Lafiea45 
 
 , Prxparantia 326. 
 
 Vein, what fo called 23. 
 
 Veint, Quantity of Blood in 23 Defcribed 25 Their Ufe, ibid. 
 Double the Number of the Arteries 26 \Vhy fulleft when 
 warm, ibid. Subcutaneous, not in tv\o Perfons al.ke 22 Ac- 
 company the Arteries to return the Blood to the Heart 23 Flow 
 dilated 24 Valves of, ibid. 
 
 of the Abdomen 230 Arm 279 Brain 91 Ears 93 Eyes 
 361 Head 96 Leg 319 Iscck J28 Nofe 129 Thprax 166. 
 
 Bafnic 2 82 CephalicrSo JugulariaS MedianaSr Ver- 
 tebral 129. 
 
 Vena Cava 28 Afeendens 31 Defeendens 28 PoriK 33 Pul- 
 monaris 34 Adipofrezty Axillaris2-9 Azygos 166 Bafi- 
 lica 2^2 Bronchiales 164 Capfulares 233 Cepl.alica 280 
 Csecalis 233 Cororaiis Coidis 156 Ventiiculi 232 Cruralis 
 319 Cyflicffi Gemells 231 Diapbragmatlcae inferiores, ibid. 
 Superioics ifg Duodenalis 232 Epigafirica 2^7 Epiploica 
 dextra 232 81011113233 Gaflnca dextra 221 Epiploica 233 
 
 C c 4 Siaiflra 
 
INDEX 
 
 Siniftra 134 Hsmorrhoidales extern® 239 Interna 233 He« 
 patic®23t Hypogaftrica 238 lliacae 237 lliaca externa, ib. 
 Interna, ibid. Intercoflales 167 Jntcftinalis 232 Jugularis 
 externa 12S Anterior 97 Poflerior, ibid, Interna 129 Lum- 
 bares 236 Mammaria externa, ibid. inferra 169 Mediana 
 281 Mediaflin® 168 .Mefaraica 232 Obturatrix 238 Pan- 
 creatic® 124 Pericardi® 169 Peronea 323 Phrenic® 171 
 Piantaris 323 Pylorica23i Poplitca 322 Renales 235 Sa- 
 cra 236 Saphenayao Minor 321 Sciatica, ibid. Spermatic® 
 233 Splenica 233 Subclavi® 170 Suralis 323 Thoracic® 
 i66 Thymic® 169 Tibialis anterior 322 Pofterioryay Tia- 
 chealis 170 Vafa Brevia 235 Vertebralis 129. 
 
 Ventricles of the Heart, how filled and emptied 23 Of the Brain 85* 
 
 Ventriculus. [bee Stomach J 195. 
 
 Vertehree of the Loins iii Neck, ibid. Thorax 133. 
 
 /Artfira/ Arteries 129 Nerves 130 Veins 229. 
 
 VeficaYc\X\s. [See Gall Bladder] 209 Urinaria, [See Bladder] 2 
 
 Veficula Scminalcs 329. 
 
 Veftibulum of the Ear 368. 
 
 Virginity, I.ofs of, how to know, tho’ not infallible 176. 
 
 Vomiting in a Mcphiitis, the Caufe rod. 
 
 Vifeera of the Abdomen igj Head 83 Thorax 145. 
 
 Vitreous Hiimotir of the Eye 361. 
 
 Voice, loft, or greatly impaired by cutting the recurrent Nerves lo^t- 
 Harmony of J 2 3. 
 
 Vulva. [See Generation] 334. 
 
 ? 7 »ri; 7 /Vc/ Region 177 Cord. [ See Funiculus] 349. 
 
 Ulna. [See Os Ulna] 243. 
 
 Urachus. [Sec Artcria Umbiltcalis] 227. 
 
 Uterus, Dtfeription of 217 Large in Nephritic Patients and 
 Drunkards 218. 
 
 Urethra, Defeript'on of 332 Women’s ftiorler than Men’s 333 
 Caruncles of, ibid. Glands of, ibid. Ulcers of 334. 
 
 Urine, Stippreftion of, the Caufe 218. 
 
 Uterus, Defeription of 339 Cervix of, ibid. Diftenfion of, ibitj^ 
 Fundus of, ibid. Vtftcls of 340. 
 
 Uvea Oculi, [See Tunica] 357. 
 
 W. 
 
 White Swelling, Caufe and Cure of ly. 
 
 Whores that are common, why they do not conceive344. 
 
 Windpipe. [Sec Trachea] I 5 7, 
 
 Womb. [See Utcius 1 339. 
 
 Wemen, Circumcifion of 335 Genital Parts of 334 Fat, why 
 barren 345. 
 
 X. 
 
 Xiphoide Cartilage. [See Enfrform Cartilage] 135. 
 
EXPLANATION of tlie FIGURES 
 
 in the following TABLES, 
 
 TABLE L 
 
 3 Os Veriicis 
 
 4 Siitura Sqi;amo(a 
 
 5 Os Temporis 
 
 6 Proceflus Mammillaris 
 
 7 Os Mala 
 
 8 OlTa Nafi 
 
 9 Offa Maxillaris fuperiora 
 30 Os Maxilla: inferioris 
 
 n Vertebra Colli 
 la Vertebra Lumborutn 
 33 Os Sacrum 
 
 14 Sternum 
 
 15 Scapula 
 
 16 Coda Vera 
 
 17 Cofla Notha 
 38 Clavicula 
 
 19 Proceflus CoracoideuS 
 
 20 Os Humeri 
 
 21 Ulna 
 
 22 Radius 
 
 23 Os Ilium 
 
 24 Crifla OIlis IHi 
 
 25 Ifchium 
 
 26 Os Pubis 
 
 27 Foramen Magnuia 
 
 28 Os Femoris 
 
 29 Trochanter Major 
 
 30 Trochanter Minot 
 
 31 Patella 
 3s Tibia 
 
 33 Fibula 
 
 34 Talus 
 
 35 Os Calcaneum 
 
 36 OfTa Tarfi 
 
 TABLE 1 
 
 1 Os Parietalia 
 
 2 Sutura Sagittalis 
 
 3 Sutura Lambdoidalis 
 
 4 Os Occipitis 
 
 5 Sutura Squamofa 
 
 6 Maxilla Inferior 
 
 7 VertebrsE Colli 
 
 8 — Dotfi 
 
 9 — — Lumborum 
 
 10 Os Sacrum 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 S Frontis 
 ' Sutura Coronalis 
 
 X 
 
 s« Os 
 
TABLE II. 
 
 II Os Coccygis 
 + Coftae Vers, No. 7 
 • Cofts Nothae, Jfo. 5 
 ja Clavicula 
 13 Scapula 
 34 Spina Scapulas 
 
 15 Acromion 
 
 36 Os Humeri 
 
 37 Ulna 
 
 38 Radius 
 
 39 OlTa Carpi 
 
 20 OlFa Meiacarpi 
 
 21 OlTa Digitorum 
 
 22 Ilium 
 
 23 Ifchium 
 
 24 Os Femoris 
 
 25 Coll urn OlTis Femoris 
 
 26 Trochanter Major 
 
 27 Trochanter Minor 
 
 28 Condylus exterior OlTis Femoris 
 
 29 Condylus interior Ollis Femoris 
 
 30 Tibia 
 
 31 Fibula “ • 
 
 32 Os Calcaneum 
 
 33 Onk Tarfi 
 
 34 Offae Metatarfi 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 3 Frontales 
 
 2 Orbicularis Palpebrte 
 
 3 Zygomaticus Major 
 
 4 Nalalcs Labii fuperior 
 
 5 DcprclTor Labi inferior 
 
 6 UeprefTor anguli oris 
 
 7 Plalifma myoides 
 
 8 PedToralis 
 
 9 Latillimus dorfi 
 
 30 Senatus magnus 
 
 31 Externus obliquus abdominis 
 3 2 Rcfti abdominis 
 
 13 Pyramidales p j 
 
 14 Linea alba 
 
 35 Gracilis 
 
 16 Adduflor longus tricipitis femoris 
 37 Peftineus 
 
 18 Pfoas magnus 
 ig Iliacus imernus 
 
 20 Sartorius 
 
 21 Glutreus medius 
 
 22 Fafclalis 
 
 23 Vallus externus 
 
 . ; 'S 
 
 24 Reflui 
 
A 3 L E . ni. 
 
 ^4 Reflus femoris 
 S5 Vaftus internus 
 
 26 Pars bicipitis 
 
 27 Pars caftrocnemii ~ 
 
 28 Soleus 
 
 29 Pevoneus lorsgus 
 
 30 Extenfor longus dlgkofum pedis 
 
 31 Tibialis anticus 
 
 32 Dekoides 
 
 33 Triceps 
 
 34 Biceps 
 
 35 Brachisus externus 
 
 36 Supinator longus 
 
 37 Pronator rotimdi radii 
 
 38 Radialis internus 
 
 39 Palmaris longus 
 
 40 Sublimis 
 
 41 Ulnaris internus 
 
 42 Abdudlor longus pollic’s 
 
 43 Radialis externus longus 
 
 TABLE IV. 
 
 1 Temporalis 
 
 2 Maftoidxus 
 
 3 Trapezius 
 
 4 Dekoides 
 
 5 Brachlsus 
 
 6 Gemellus 
 
 7 Palmaris longus 
 
 8 Sublimis 
 
 9 Ulnaris internus 
 
 10 Radialis externus longior 
 
 11 Extenfor communis digitoriim 
 J2 Infra fpinatus * 
 
 13 Latillimus dorfi 
 
 14 Obliquus externus abdominis 
 
 15 Glutsus medms 
 
 16 Glutseus major 
 
 17 Gracilis 
 
 18 Adduflor magnus femorjs 
 
 19 Semtiendinofus 
 
 20 Biceps Cruris 
 
 21 Vaftus externus 
 
 22 Gaftrocnemius 
 
 23 Soleus 
 
 24 Tendo Achillis 
 
 table V. 
 
 1 Occipialis 
 
 2 Attollens auriculam 
 
 3 Orbiculares palpcbratum 
 
 4 Latillimus colli 
 
 S Maf. 
 
TABLE 
 
 5 MaftoidaBUS 
 
 6 Trapezius 
 t Dcltoides 
 S Biceps 
 
 9 Braehialis internus 
 JO Triceps 
 II Supinator longus 
 iz Radialis iniernus 
 jj Radialis externus Jon^ier 
 
 14 Radialis externus brevior 
 
 15 TJinaris externus 
 
 16 Abduflor pollicis longus manus 
 
 17 InfraTpinatus 
 iS Teres minor 
 
 19 Teres major 
 
 20 Latifilmus dorfi 
 
 21 Pefloralis 
 
 ES Serratus magnus 
 
 23 Obliqnus externus abdominis 
 
 24 Tenfor vagins femoris 
 
 25 Glutaus medius 
 
 26 Glutsus magnus 
 
 27 Semiteudinofus 
 s8 Biceps cruris 
 E9 Vaftus externus 
 
 30 Re£ius Cruris 
 
 31 Gaflrocnemius 
 
 32 Soleus 
 
 33 Tendo Achillis 
 
 34 Peroncus longus 
 
 35 Peroneus brevis 
 
 36 Extenfor longus digitorum pedis 
 
 37 Tibialis anticus 
 
 38 Ligamentum a patella ad tibiam pertinens 
 
 39 Vaftus Internus 
 
 40 Sartorius 
 
 42 Triceps parfqurE longus vocatur 
 
 43 Triceps pars quE brachialis externus vocatur 
 
 44 Brachialis internus 
 
 45 Biceps brachii 
 a 6 Pronator teres 
 
 47 Palinads longus 
 
 48 Sublimis 
 
 49 Ulnaiis internus 
 
 50 Ulnaris externus 
 
 table VI. FIGURE I. 
 
 1 The larynx 
 
 2 The internal jugular vein 
 
 3 The fuhclavian vein 
 
 4 The vena cava defeenders 
 
 5 The right auricle of the heart 
 
 6 T hs 
 
TABLE VI. FIGURE L 
 
 6 The light ventricle 
 
 7 Part of the left ventricle 
 
 8 The aorta afcendens 
 
 9 The artcria pulmonalls 
 
 1» The right lobe of the lungs, part of which is cut ofl to Qiew the 
 great blood vefTels 
 ji The left lobe of the lungs 
 
 12 The diaphragm 
 
 13 The liver 
 
 14 The ligamentum rotundum 
 
 1 5 The gall bladder 
 
 j 6 The ftomach preffed by the liver toward the left fide 
 
 17 The fmall guts 
 
 18 The fpieen 
 
 F I G U R T; II. 
 
 1 The right ventricle of a foetus diftended with wax 
 
 2 The right auricle 
 
 3 The left auricle 
 
 4 Branches of the pulmonary veins of the right lobe of the lungs 
 j The arteries of the left lobe of the lungs 
 
 6 The vena cava dcfcendens 
 
 7 The aorta afccndcns 
 
 8 The arteria pulmonalis 
 
 9 The duftus arteriofus 
 
 TABLE VII. F I G U P. E L 
 
 A. The upper orifice of the ftomach 
 
 B. The ftomach 
 
 C. Tlie pylorus 
 D D. Arteries 
 
 E F. Nerves which accompany the arteries 
 
 G. The duodenum 
 
 H. H. I. I. I. The fmall guts 
 
 K. The valve in the colon 
 
 L. The appendicle of the cacam 
 
 M. N. The colon 
 O. The rectum 
 
 P The conrtriftor of the anus 
 Q^CE The li'tcrs up of the anus 
 R. The anus. 
 
 figure IL 
 
 A. A kidney dlvefred of its external cost 
 
 B. A kidney in its natural Hate 
 
 C. The vena cava 
 
 D. The aorla 
 
 E. E. The renal glands with their vcflels, &c. 
 
 F F, The emulgent vefTels 
 
 G. G. The ureters 
 II. The urinary bladder 
 
 I. The neck of the bladder 
 
 K.L. The 
 
TABLE VII. FIGURE II. 
 
 K. L. The tefticles 
 
 M. The procefs of the peritoneum (in which the fpermatic vefTds 
 go) cut off 
 
 N. The cremaller mufcle cut off 
 p'^‘ J-The fpermatic veffels 
 
 Q. The Epididymis 
 
 R. R. The vafa deferrrntia 
 
 S. The corpus glandofum 
 
 T. T. The two bodies which compofe the penis, and appear when 
 the fliin 1. 1. is drawn afide 
 
 U. U. The prepuce 
 
 V. The glans penis 
 
 W. The extraordinary infertion of the fpermatic vein into the 
 emulgent 
 
 X. X. Vcficuls fem'nales 
 
 Y. Y. The infertion of the ureters 
 
 Z. The beginning of the urethra 
 
 r. r. Veins which run and unite on the back of the yard 
 
 s. s. Arteries wi'h nerves on each fide 
 V. Veins opened to Ihew their valves 
 
 FIGURE III. 
 
 A. A. A. A. The parenchymous fubftance of the pancreas laid 
 open 
 
 B. The pancreatic duft with its branches C. C. C, C. C. C. C. 
 
 D. The bile duff joining the pancreatic duff 
 
 E. The duodenum opened 
 
 F. The orifice of the bile and the pancreatic diifls 
 
 I 
 
 A. 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 7 
 ii 
 
 9 
 
 C. 
 
 D, 
 
 xo 
 1 1 
 II 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 JS 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 TABLE 
 
 Aorta 
 
 ValvulsE femiiunarcs 
 Arteria coronaria mag. 
 Ligamentum arterioluni 
 Arterix fubclavis 
 — carotides 
 
 — verttbrales 
 
 I tempo rales 
 
 oecipitahs 
 
 Con'orfiones carotides; 
 
 Glandula pitu taria 
 Atterix opthalinira: 
 
 Cmtorfiones vertcbrales 
 Ramificatimes att. r s 
 Arteri® mam marl* 
 
 cubitalcs ■ 
 
 Arteria aorta defeendens 
 
 bronchia'is 
 
 Arteri® intercoilalcs 
 Arteria coeliaca 
 Artctise' hxpaiic® 
 
 YIII. 
 
 ig Arteria 
 
T A B L E Vlir, 
 
 19 Arteria cyflica 
 
 20 — — — coronaria Inferiora ftomachi 
 
 21 pylorica 
 
 22 epiploica 
 
 23 corenaria fuperiora ftomachi 
 
 24 Arterice phrenic* 
 
 25 Arteria fplenica 
 
 26 — mefenterica fuperior 
 
 27 inferior 
 
 28 ArterisB emulgentes 
 
 29 vertebrales lumborum 
 
 30 fpermetics 
 
 3 1 Arteria facra 
 
 32 Arteri* iliac* 
 
 33 extern* 
 
 34 — intern* 
 
 3s umbilicales 
 
 2 6 epigaftric* 
 
 37 penis 
 
 38 crurales 
 
 TABLE iX. 
 
 1 The brain 
 
 2 The cerebellum 
 
 3 The corpus pyramidalis 
 
 4 The annular protuberance 
 
 5 Prcceftus mammillaris 
 
 6 Optic nerves 
 
 7 Motores oculorum 
 
 8 The fourth pair of nerves 
 
 9 The fifth pairTp reading into three branches 
 
 10 The fixth pair 
 
 1 1 The feventh pair 
 
 12 The eighth pair 
 
 13 The recurrent nerves joined with the eighth pair 
 
 14 The recurrent nerves after leaving the eighth-pair 
 75 The trunks of the eighth pair 
 
 16 Intercoftal nerves 
 
 17 Phrenic nerves 
 
 18 Branches of nerves going to the fpermatic veflels, tefticles, 
 uterus, See. 
 
 19 Branches of the gth pair 
 
 20 The fciatic and ctural nerves 
 
 21 The brachial nerves 
 
 + Communications between thedorfal and the intercoftal nerves 
 table X. 
 
 1 Sutura coronalis 
 
 2 fegittalis 
 
 3 lambdoidalis 
 
 4 fquamofa 
 
 5 Sutura 
 
Table x/ 
 
 5 Sutura tranfverfalis 
 
 6 Os frontis 
 
 7 — bregmatis 
 
 8 — occipitis 
 
 9 — temporis 
 
 10 ProcefTus niaflo'd^us 
 
 11 Meatiis aiiditorius 
 
 iz ProcsfTus flylifonnis 
 *3 jugalis 
 
 14 Os Tphnenoides 
 
 15 — mali 
 
 16 — nafi 
 
 17 — unguis 
 
 18 — plenum 
 
 19 Duflus ad nafum ' 
 
 20 Max lla fuperior 
 
 21 Foramen maxillae fuperlotls 
 
 22 Maxilla inferior 
 2} ProcefTus coronalis 
 
 24 ' ' ■ condyloides 
 
 25 Foramen 
 
 26 Dentes inciforii 
 
 27 canini 
 
 28 — — molares 
 
 29 Os triquetrum 
 
 30 Foramea 
 
 F I N X 5, 
 
T^.U. 
 
 f 
 
■ 
 
 . V 
 
 .11 
 
 
TAs. m. 
 
T^±B. . 
 
TAB. K 
 

 
 
 ■ ! 
 
 / 
 
VI 
 


 i 
 
 >: 3 '' 
 
 
TA£. I’ll. 
 

 
. TAB. IX. 
 
• 12 
 
 T.4B JC. 
 

 ; •rr. ' 
 
 -• VA 
 
 f 
 
 r-. 
 
 ifi'- 
 
 9 ' 
 
 
 ■i/' 
 
 ;-T'.- 
 
 
 
 -. ■ /ii